



Produced by Giovanni Fini, Andrew Sly, Al Haines and the
Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net









                             SHORT STORIES

                           FOR HIGH SCHOOLS

                                EDITED

                      WITH INTRODUCTION AND NOTES

                                  BY

                           ROSA M. R. MIKELS

              SHORTRIDGE HIGH SCHOOL, INDIANAPOLIS, IND.


                        CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS
                      NEW YORK   CHICAGO   BOSTON




                          COPYRIGHT, 1915, BY
                        CHARLES SCRIBNER’S SONS

[Illustration: LOGO]




CONTENTS


                                                                    PAGE

  PREFACE                                                            vii

  INTRODUCTION

  REQUIREMENTS OF THE SHORT STORY                                     xi

  HOW THIS BOOK MAY BE USED                                        xviii

  THE FIRST CHRISTMAS-TREE          Henry van <DW18>                     1

  A FRENCH TAR-BABY                 Joel Chandler Harris              27

  SONNY’S CHRISTENIN’               Ruth McEnery Stuart               35

  CHRISTMAS NIGHT WITH SATAN        John Fox, Jr.                     51

  A NEST-EGG                        James Whitcomb Riley              67

  WEE WILLIE WINKLE                 Rudyard Kipling                   79

  THE GOLD BUG                      Edgar Allan Poe                   95

  THE RANSOM OF RED CHIEF           O. Henry                         143

  THE FRESHMAN FULL-BACK            Ralph D. Paine                   159

  GALLEGHER                         Richard Harding Davis            181

  THE JUMPING FROG                  Mark Twain                       221

  THE LADY OR THE TIGER?            Frank R. Stockton                231

  THE OUTCASTS OF POKER FLAT        Francis Bret Harte               243

  THE REVOLT OF MOTHER              Mary E. Wilkins Freeman          259

  MARSE CHAN                        Thomas Nelson Page               283

  “POSSON JONE’”                    George W. Cable                  315

  OUR AROMATIC UNCLE                Henry Cuyler Bunner              341

  QUALITY                           John Galsworthy                  361

  THE TRIUMPH OF NIGHT              Edith Wharton                    373

  A MESSENGER                       Mary Raymond Shipman Andrews     407

  MARKHEIM                          Robert Louis Stevenson           431




PREFACE


WHY must we confine the reading of our children to the older literary
classics? This is the question asked by an ever-increasing number of
thoughtful teachers. They have no wish to displace or to discredit the
classics. On the contrary, they love and revere them. But they do wish
to give their pupils something additional, something that pulses with
present life, that is characteristic of to-day. The children, too,
wonder that, with the great literary outpouring going on about them,
they must always fill their cups from the cisterns of the past.

The short story is especially adapted to supplement our high-school
reading. It is of a piece with our varied, hurried, efficient American
life, wherein figure the business man’s lunch, the dictagraph, the
telegraph, the telephone, the automobile, and the railway “limited.”
It has achieved high art, yet conforms to the modern demand that our
literature—since it must be read with despatch, if read at all—be
compact and compelling. Moreover, the short story is with us in almost
overwhelming numbers, and is probably here to stay. Indeed, our boys
and girls are somewhat appalled at the quantity of material from which
they must select their reading, and welcome any instruction that
enables them to know the good from the bad. It is certain, therefore,
that, whatever else they may throw into the educational discard when
they leave the high school, they will keep and use anything they
may have learned about this form of literature which has become so
powerful a factor in our daily life.

This book does not attempt to select the greatest stories of the time.
What tribunal would dare make such a choice? Nor does it attempt to
trace the evolution of the short story or to point out natural types
and differences. These topics are better suited to college classes.
Its object is threefold: to supply interesting reading belonging to
the student’s own time, to help him to see that there is no divorce
between classic and modern literature, and, by offering him material
structurally good and typical of the qualities represented, to assist
him in discriminating between the artistic and the inartistic. The
stories have been carefully selected, because in the period of
adolescence “nothing read fails to leave its mark”;[1] they have also
been carefully arranged with a view to the needs of the adolescent boy
and girl. Stories of the type loved by primitive man, and therefore
easily approached and understood, have been placed first. Those which
appealed in periods of higher development follow, roughly in the
order of their increasing difficulty. It is hoped, moreover, that
this arrangement will help the student to understand and appreciate
the development of the story. He begins with the simple tale of
adventure and the simple story of character. As he advances he sees the
story develop in plot, in character analysis, and in setting, until
he ends with the psychological study of _Markheim_, remarkable for
its complexity of motives and its great spiritual problem. Both the
selection and the arrangement have been made with this further purpose
in view—“to keep the heart warm, reinforcing all its good motives,
preforming choices, universalizing sympathies.”[2]

It is a pleasure to acknowledge, in this connection, the suggestions
and the criticism of Mr. William N. Otto, Head of the Department of
English in Shortridge High School, Indianapolis; and the courtesies of
the publishers who have permitted the use of their material.




INTRODUCTION


I

REQUIREMENTS OF THE SHORT STORY

CRITICS have agreed that the short story must conform to certain
conditions. First of all, the writer must strive to make one and only
one impression. His time is too limited, his space is too confined, his
risk of dividing the attention of the reader is too great, to admit
of more than this one impression. He therefore selects some moment of
action or some phase of character or some particular scene, and focuses
attention upon that. Life not infrequently gives such brief, clear-cut
impressions. At the railway station we see two young people hurry to
a train as if fearful of being detained, and we get the impression
of romantic adventure. We pass on the street corner two men talking,
and from a chance sentence or two we form a strong impression of the
character of one or both. Sometimes we travel through a scene so
desolate and depressing or so lovely and uplifting that the effect is
never forgotten. Such glimpses of life and scene are as vivid as the
vignettes revealed by the searchlight, when its arm slowly explores a
mountain-side or the shore of a lake and brings objects for a brief
moment into high light. To secure this single strong impression, the
writer must decide which of the three essentials—plot character, or
setting—is to have first place.

As action appeals strongly to most people, and very adequately reveals
character, the short-story writer may decide to make plot pre-eminent.
He accordingly chooses his incidents carefully. Any that do not
really aid in developing the story must be cast aside, no matter how
interesting or attractive they may be in themselves. This does not
mean that an incident which is detached from the train of events may
not be used. But such an incident must have proper relations provided
for it. Thus the writer may wish to use incidents that belong to two
separate stories, because he knows that by relating them he can produce
a single effect. Shakespeare does this in _Macbeth_. Finding in the
lives of the historic Macbeth and the historic King Duff incidents
that he wished to use, he combined them. But he saw to it that they
had the right relation, that they fitted into the chain of cause and
effect. The reader will insist, as the writer knows, that the story be
logical, that incident 1 shall be the cause of incident 2, incident 2
of incident 3, and so on to the end. The triangle used by Freytag to
illustrate the plot of a play may make this clear.

[Illustration]

AC is the line of rising action along which the story climbs, incident
by incident, to the point C; C is the turning point, the crisis, or the
climax; CB is the line of falling action along which the story descends
incident by incident to its logical resolution. Nothing may be left
to luck or chance. In life the element of chance does sometimes seem
to figure, but in the story it has no place. If the ending is not the
logical outcome of events, the reader feels cheated. He does not want
the situation to be too obvious, for he likes the thrill of suspense.
But he wants the hints and foreshadowings to be sincere, so that he may
safely draw his conclusions from them. This does not condemn, however,
the “surprise” ending, so admirably used by O. Henry. The reader, in
this case, admits that the writer has “played fair” throughout, and
that the ending which has so surprised and tickled his fancy is as
logical as that he had forecast.

To aid in securing the element of suspense, the author often makes use
of what Carl H. Grabo, in his _The Art of the Short Story_, calls the
“negative” or “hostile” incident. Incidents, as he points out, are of
two kinds—positive and negative. The first openly help to untangle
the situation; the second seem to delay the straightening out of the
threads or even to make the tangle worse. He illustrates this by the
story of Cinderella. The appearance of the fairy and her use of the
magic wand are positive, or openly helpful incidents, in rescuing
Cinderella from her lonely and neglected state. But her forgetfulness
of the hour and her loss of the glass slipper are negative or hostile
incidents. Nevertheless, we see how these are really blessings in
disguise, since they cause the prince to seek and woo her.

The novelist may introduce many characters, because he has time and
space to care for them. Not so the short-story writer: he must employ
only one main character and a few supporting characters. However, when
the plot is the main thing, the characters need not be remarkable in
any way. Indeed, as Brander Matthews has said, the heroine may be “a
woman,” the hero “a man,” not any woman or any man in particular. Thus,
in _The Lady or the Tiger?_ the author leaves the princess without
definite traits of character, because his problem is not “what this
particular woman would do, but what a woman would do.” Sometimes, after
reading a story of thrilling plot, we find that we do not readily
recall the appearance or the names of the characters; we recall only
what happened to them. This is true of the women of James Fenimore
Cooper’s stories. They have no substantiality, but move like veiled
figures through the most exciting adventures.

Setting may or may not be an important factor in the story of incident.
What is meant by setting? It is an inclusive term. Time, place, local
conditions, and sometimes descriptions of nature and of people are
parts of it. When these are well cared for, we get an effect called
“atmosphere.” We know the effect the atmosphere has upon objects. Any
one who has observed distant mountains knows that, while they remain
practically unchanged, they never look the same on two successive
days. Sometimes they stand out hard and clear, sometimes they are soft
and alluring, sometimes they look unreal and almost melt into the
sky behind them. So the atmosphere of a story may envelop people and
events and produce a subtle effect upon the reader. Sometimes the plot
material is such as to require little setting. The incidents might have
happened anywhere. We hardly notice the absence of setting in our hurry
to see what happens. This is true of many of the stories we enjoyed
when we were children. For instance, in _The Three Bears_ the incidents
took place, of course, in the woods, but our imagination really
supplied the setting. Most stories, however, whatever their character,
use setting as carefully and as effectively as possible. Time and
place are often given with exactness. Thus Bret Harte says: “As Mr.
John Oakhurst, gambler, stepped into the main street of Poker Flat on
the morning of the twentythird of November, 1850, he was conscious
of a change in its moral atmosphere since the preceding night.” This
definite mention of time and place gives an air of reality to the
story. As to descriptions, the writer sifts them in, for he knows that
few will bother to read whole paragraphs of description. He often uses
local color, by which we mean the employment of epithets, phrases, and
other expressions that impart a “feeling” for the place. This use of
local color must not be confused with that intended to produce what
is called an “impressionistic” effect. In the latter case the writer
subordinates everything to this effect of scene. This use of local
color is discussed elsewhere.

Perhaps the writer wishes to make character the dominant element.
Then he subordinates plot and setting to this purpose and makes them
contribute to it. In selecting the character he wishes to reveal he
has wide choice. “Human nature is the same, wherever you find it,”
we are fond of saying. So he may choose a character that is quite
common, some one he knows; and, having made much of some one trait
and ignored or subordinated others, bring him before us at some
moment of decision or in some strange, perhaps hostile, environment.
Or the author may take some character quite out of the ordinary:
the village miser, the recluse, or a person with a peculiar mental
or moral twist. But, whatever his choice, it is not enough that the
character be actually drawn from real life. Indeed, such fidelity to
what literally exists may be a hinderance to the writer. The original
character may have done strange things and suffered strange things that
cannot be accounted for. But, in the story, inconsistencies must be
removed, and the conduct of the characters must be logical. Life seems
inconsistent to all of us at times, but it is probably less so than
it seems. People puzzle us by their apparent inconsistencies, when
to themselves their actions seem perfectly logical. But, as Mr. Grabo
points out, “In life we expect inconsistencies; in a story we depend
upon their elimination.” The law of cause and effect, which we found
so indispensable in the story of plot, we find of equal importance
in the story of character. There must be no sudden and unaccountable
changes in the behavior or sentiments of the people in the story. On
the contrary, there must be reason in all they say and do.

Another demand of the character story is that the characters be
lifelike. In the plot story, or in the impressionistic story, we may
accept the flat figures on the canvas; our interest is elsewhere. But
in the character story we must have real people whose motives and
conduct we discuss pro and con with as much interest as if we knew them
in the flesh. A character of this convincing type is Hamlet. About him
controversy has always raged. It is impossible to think of him as other
than a real man. Whenever the writer finds that the characters in his
story have caused the reader to wax eloquent over their conduct, he may
rest easy: he has made his people lifelike.

Setting in the character story is important, for it is in this that the
chief actor moves and has his being. His environment is continually
causing him to speak and act. The incidents selected, even though
some of them may seem trivial in themselves, must reveal depth after
depth in his soul. Whatever the means by which the author reveals
the character—whether by setting, conduct, analysis, dialogue, or
soliloquy—his task is a hard one. In _Markheim_ we have practically
all of these used, with the result that the character is unmistakable
and convincing.

Stories of scenes are neither so numerous nor so easy to produce
successfully as those of plot and character. But sometimes a place so
profoundly impresses a writer that its demands may not be disregarded.
Robert Louis Stevenson strongly felt the influence of certain places.
“Certain dank gardens cry aloud for murder; certain old houses demand
to be haunted; certain coasts are set apart for shipwreck. Other spots
seem to abide their destiny, suggestive and impenetrable.” Perhaps all
of us have seen some place of which we have exclaimed: “It is like a
story!” When, then, scene is to furnish the dominant interest, plot and
character become relatively insignificant and shadowy. “The pressure of
the atmosphere,” says Brander Matthews, holds our attention. _The Fall
of the House of Usher_, by Edgar Allan Poe, is a story of this kind. It
is the scene that affects us with dread and horror; we have no peace
until we see the house swallowed up by the tarn, and have fled out of
sight of the tarn itself. The plot is extremely slight, and the Lady
Madeline and her unhappy brother hardly more than shadows.

It must not be supposed from the foregoing explanation that the three
essentials of the short story are ever really divorced. They are
happily blended in many of our finest stories. Nevertheless, analysis
of any one of these will show that in the mind of the writer one
purpose was pre-eminent. On this point Robert Louis Stevenson thus
speaks: “There are, so far as I know, three ways and three only of
writing a story. You may take a plot and fit characters to it, or you
may take a character and choose incidents and situations to develop
it, or, lastly, you may take a certain atmosphere and get actions and
persons to express and realize it.” When to this clear conception of
his limitations and privileges the author adds an imagination that
clearly visualizes events and the “verbal magic” by which good style is
secured, he produces the short story that is a masterpiece.


II

HOW THIS BOOK MAY BE USED

THIS book may be used in four ways. First, it may serve as an
appetizer. Even the casual reading of good literature has a tendency
to create a demand for more. Second, it may be made the basis for
discussion and comparison. By using these stories, the works of
recognized authors, as standards, the student may determine the value
of such stories as come into his home. Third, these selections may be
studied in a regular short-story course, such as many high schools
have, to illustrate the requirements and the types of this form of
narration. The chapter on “The Requirements of the Short Story” will
be found useful both in this connection and in the comparative study
of stories. Fourth, the student will better appreciate and understand
the short story if he attempts to tell or to write one. This does not
mean that we intend to train him for the literary market. Our object is
entirely different. No form of literature brings more real joy to the
child than the story. Not only does he like to hear stories; he likes
to tell them. And where the short-story course is rightly used, he
likes to write them. He finds that the pleasure of exercising creative
power more than offsets the drudgery inevitable in composition. A plan
that has been satisfactorily carried out in the classroom is here
briefly outlined.

The teacher reads with the class a story in which plot furnishes the
main interest. This type is chosen because it is more easily analyzed
by beginners. The class discusses this, applying the tests of the short
story given elsewhere in this book. Then a number of short stories of
different types are read and compared. Next, each member of the class
selects from some recent book or magazine a short story he enjoys.
This he outlines and reports to the class. If this report is not
satisfactory, the class insists that either the author or the reporter
be exonerated. The story is accordingly read to the class, or is read
and reported on by another member. The class is then usually able to
decide whether the story is faulty or the first report inadequate.

Next the class gives orally incidents that might or might not be
expanded into short stories. The students soon discover that some of
these require the lengthy treatment of a novel, that others are good
as simple incidents but nothing more, and that still others might
develop into satisfactory short stories. The class is now asked to
develop original plots. Since plots cannot be produced on demand, but
require time for the mind to act subconsciously, the class practises,
during the “period of incubation,” the writing of dialogue. For these
the teacher suggests a list of topics, although any student is free
to substitute one of his own. Among the topics that have been used
are: “Johnny goes with his mother to church for the first time,” “Mrs.
Hennessy is annoyed by the chickens of Mrs. Jones,” “Albert applies for
a summer job.” Sometimes the teacher relates an incident, and has the
class reproduce it in dialogue. By comparing their work with dialogue
by recognized writers the youthful authors soon learn how to punctuate
and paragraph conversation, and where to place necessary comment and
explanation. They also discover that dialogue must either reveal
character or advance the story; and that it must be in keeping with
the theme and maintain the tone used at the beginning. A commonplace
dialogue must not suddenly become romantic in tone, and dialect must
not lapse into ordinary English.

The original plots the class offers later may have been suggested in
many ways. Newspaper accounts, court reports, historical incidents,
family traditions—all may contribute. Sometimes the student proudly
declares of his plot, “I made it out of my own head.” These plots are
arranged in outline form to show how incident 1 developed incident 2,
that incident 3, and so on to the conclusion. The class points out
the weak places in these plots and offers helpful suggestions. This
co-operation often produces surprisingly good results. A solution that
the troubled originator of the plot never thought of may come almost
as an inspiration from the class. Criticism throughout is largely
constructive. After the student has developed several plots in outline,
he usually finds among them one that he wishes to use for his story.
This is worked out in some detail, submitted to the class, and later in
a revised form to the teacher. The story when complete is corrected and
sometimes rewritten.

Most of the class prefer to write stories of plot, but some insist upon
trying stories of character or of setting. These pupils are shown the
difficulties in their way, but are allowed to try their hand if they
insist. Sometimes the results are good; more often the writer, after
an honest effort, admits that he cannot handle his subject well and
substitutes a story of plot.

In any case the final draft is sure to leave much to be desired; but
even so, the gain has been great. The pupil writer has constantly been
measuring his work by standards of recognized excellence in form and
in creative power; as a result he has learned to appreciate the short
story from the art side. Moreover, he has had a large freedom in his
work that has relieved it of drudgery. And, best of all, he has been
doing original work with plastic material; and to work with plastic
material is always a source of joy, whether it be the mud that the
child makes into pies, the clay that the artist moulds into forms of
beauty, or the facts of life that the creative imagination of the
writer shapes into literature.




  THE FIRST CHRISTMAS TREE

  A STORY OF THE FOREST

  BY

  HENRY VAN <DW18>

This story is placed first because it is of the type that first
delighted man. It is the story of high adventure, of a struggle with
the forces of nature, barbarous men, and heathen gods. The hero is
“a hunter of demons, a subduer of the wilderness, a woodman of the
faith.” He seeks hardships and conquers them. The setting is the
illimitable forest in the remote past. The forest, like the sea, makes
an irresistible appeal to the imagination. Either may be the scene of
the marvellous and the thrilling. Quite unlike the earliest tales,
this story is enriched with description and exposition; nevertheless,
it has their simplicity and dignity. It reminds us of certain of the
great Biblical narratives, such as the contest between Elijah and the
prophets of Baal and the victory of Daniel over the jealous presidents
and princes of Darius. In “The First Christmas Tree,” as in many others
of these stories, a third person is the narrator. But the hero may
tell his own adventures. “I did this. I did that. Thus I felt at the
conclusion.” Instances are Defoe’s “Robinson Crusoe” and Stevenson’s
“Kidnapped.” But whether in the first or third person, the story holds
us by the magic of adventure.




THE FIRST CHRISTMAS TREE[3]


I

THE CALL OF THE WOODSMAN

The day before Christmas, in the year of our Lord 722.

Broad snow-meadows glistening white along the banks of the river
Moselle; pallid hill-sides blooming with mystic roses where the glow
of the setting sun still lingered upon them; an arch of clearest,
faintest azure bending overhead; in the centre of the aerial landscape
the massive walls of the cloister of Pfalzel, gray to the east, purple
to the west; silence over all,—a gentle, eager, conscious stillness,
diffused through the air like perfume, as if earth and sky were hushing
themselves to hear the voice of the river faintly murmuring down the
valley.

In the cloister, too, there was silence at the sunset hour. All day
long there had been a strange and joyful stir among the nuns. A breeze
of curiosity and excitement had swept along the corridors and through
every quiet cell.

The elder sisters,—the provost, the deaconess, the stewardess, the
portress with her huge bunch of keys jingling at her girdle,—had been
hurrying to and fro, busied with household cares. In the huge kitchen
there was a bustle of hospitable preparation. The little bandy-legged
dogs that kept the spits turning before the fires had been trotting
steadily for many an hour, until their tongues hung out for want of
breath. The big black pots swinging from the cranes had bubbled and
gurgled and shaken and sent out puffs of appetizing steam.

St. Martha was in her element. It was a field-day for her virtues.

The younger sisters, the pupils of the convent, had forsaken their
Latin books and their embroidery-frames, their manuscripts and their
miniatures, and fluttered through the halls in little flocks like
merry snow-birds, all in black and white, chattering and whispering
together. This was no day for tedious task-work, no day for grammar or
arithmetic, no day for picking out illuminated letters in red and gold
on stiff parchment, or patiently chasing intricate patterns over thick
cloth with the slow needle. It was a holiday. A famous visitor had come
to the convent.

It was Winfried of England, whose name in the Roman tongue was
Boniface, and whom men called the Apostle of Germany. A great preacher;
a wonderful scholar; he had written a Latin grammar himself,—think of
it,—and he could hardly sleep without a book under his pillow; but,
more than all, a great and daring traveller, a venturesome pilgrim, a
high-priest of romance.

He had left his home and his fair estate in Wessex; he would not stay
in the rich monastery of Nutescelle, even though they had chosen him
as the abbot; he had refused a bishopric at the court of King Karl.
Nothing would content him but to go out into the wild woods and preach
to the heathen.

Up and down through the forests of Hesse and Thuringia, and along
the borders of Saxony, he had wandered for years, with a handful of
companions, sleeping under the trees, crossing mountains and marshes,
now here, now there, never satisfied with ease and comfort, always in
love with hardship and danger.

What a man he was! Fair and slight, but straight as a spear and strong
as an oaken staff. His face was still young; the smooth skin was
bronzed by wind and sun. His gray eyes, clear and kind, flashed like
fire when he spoke of his adventures, and of the evil deeds of the
false priests with whom he contended.

What tales he had told that day! Not of miracles wrought by sacred
relics; not of courts and councils and splendid cathedrals; though he
knew much of these things, and had been at Rome and received the Pope’s
blessing. But to-day he had spoken of long journeyings by sea and land;
of perils by fire and flood; of wolves and bears and fierce snowstorms
and black nights in the lonely forest; of dark altars of heathen gods,
and weird, bloody sacrifices, and narrow escapes from murderous bands
of wandering savages.

The little novices had gathered around him, and their faces had grown
pale and their eyes bright as they listened with parted lips, entranced
in admiration, twining their arms about one another’s shoulders and
holding closely together, half in fear, half in delight. The older nuns
had turned from their tasks and paused, in passing by, to hear the
pilgrim’s story. Too well they knew the truth of what he spoke. Many a
one among them had seen the smoke rising from the ruins of her father’s
roof. Many a one had a brother far away in the wild country to whom
her heart went out night and day, wondering if he were still among the
living.

But now the excitements of that wonderful day were over; the hour of
the evening meal had come; the inmates of the cloister were assembled
in the refectory.

On the daïs sat the stately Abbess Addula, daughter of King Dagobert,
looking a princess indeed, in her violet tunic, with the hood and cuffs
of her long white robe trimmed with fur, and a snowy veil resting like
a crown on her snowy hair. At her right hand was the honored guest, and
at her left hand her grandson, the young Prince Gregor, a big, manly
boy, just returned from the high school.

The long, shadowy hall, with its dark-brown rafters and beams; the
double rows of nuns, with their pure veils and fair faces; the ruddy
glow of the slanting sunbeams striking upwards through the tops of the
windows and painting a pink glow high up on the walls,—it was all as
beautiful as a picture, and as silent. For this was the rule of the
cloister, that at the table all should sit in stillness for a little
while, and then one should read aloud, while the rest listened.

“It is the turn of my grandson to read to-day,” said the abbess to
Winfried; “we shall see how much he has learned in the school. Read,
Gregor; the place in the book is marked.”

The tall lad rose from his seat and turned the pages of the manuscript.
It was a copy of Jerome’s version of the Scriptures in Latin, and the
marked place was in the letter of St. Paul to the Ephesians,—the
passage where he describes the preparation of the Christian as the
arming of a warrior for glorious battle. The young voice rang out
clearly, rolling the sonorous words, without slip or stumbling, to the
end of the chapter.

Winfried listened smiling. “My son,” said he, as the reader paused,
“that was bravely read. Understandest thou what thou readest?”

“Surely, father,” answered the boy; “it was taught me by the masters at
Treves; and we have read this epistle clear through, from beginning to
end, so that I almost know it by heart.”

Then he began again to repeat the passage, turning away from the page
as if to show his skill.

But Winfried stopped him with a friendly lifting of the hand.

“Not so, my son; that was not my meaning. When we pray, we speak to
God; when we read, it is God who speaks to us. I ask whether thou hast
heard what He has said to thee, in thine own words, in the common
speech. Come, give us again the message of the warrior and his armor
and his battle, in the mother-tongue, so that all can understand it.”

The boy hesitated, blushed, stammered; then he came around to
Winfried’s seat, bringing the book. “Take the book, my father,” he
cried, “and read it for me. I cannot see the meaning plain, though I
love the sound of the words. Religion I know, and the doctrines of our
faith, and the life of priests and nuns in the cloister, for which my
grandmother designs me, though it likes me little. And fighting I know,
and the life of warriors and heroes, for I have read of it in Virgil
and the ancients, and heard a bit from the soldiers at Treves; and I
would fain taste more of it, for it likes me much. But how the two
lives fit together, or what need there is of armor for a clerk in holy
orders, I can never see. Tell me the meaning, for if there is a man in
all the world that knows it, I am sure it is none other than thou.”

So Winfried took the book and closed it, clasping the boy’s hand with
his own.

“Let us first dismiss the others to their vespers,” said he, “lest they
should be weary.”

A sign from the abbess; a chanted benediction; a murmuring of sweet
voices and a soft rustling of many feet over the rushes on the floor;
the gentle tide of noise flowed out through the doors and ebbed away
down the corridors; the three at the head of the table were left alone
in the darkening room.

Then Winfried began to translate the parable of the soldier into the
realities of life.

At every turn he knew how to flash a new light into the picture out
of his own experience. He spoke of the combat with self, and of the
wrestling with dark spirits in solitude. He spoke of the demons that
men had worshipped for centuries in the wilderness, and whose malice
they invoked against the stranger who ventured into the gloomy forest.
Gods, they called them, and told strange tales of their dwelling among
the impenetrable branches of the oldest trees and in the caverns of the
shaggy hills; of their riding on the wind-horses and hurling spears
of lightning against their foes. Gods they were not, but foul spirits
of the air, rulers of the darkness. Was there not glory and honor in
fighting with them, in daring their anger under the shield of faith, in
putting them to flight with the sword of truth? What better adventure
could a brave man ask than to go forth against them, and wrestle with
them, and conquer them?

“Look you, my friends,” said Winfried, “how sweet and peaceful is this
convent to-night, on the eve of the nativity of the Prince of Peace! It
is a garden full of flowers in the heart of winter; a nest among the
branches of a great tree shaken by the winds; a still haven on the edge
of a tempestuous sea. And this is what religion means for those who are
chosen and called to quietude and prayer and meditation.

“But out yonder in the wide forest, who knows what storms are raving
to-night in the hearts of men, though all the woods are still? who
knows what haunts of wrath and cruelty and fear are closed to-night
against the advent of the Prince of Peace? And shall I tell you what
religion means to those who are called and chosen to dare and to
fight, and to conquer the world for Christ? It means to launch out into
the deep. It means to go against the strongholds of the adversary. It
means to struggle to win an entrance for their Master everywhere. What
helmet is strong enough for this strife save the helmet of salvation?
What breastplate can guard a man against these fiery darts but the
breastplate of righteousness? What shoes can stand the wear of these
journeys but the preparation of the gospel of peace?”

“Shoes?” he cried again, and laughed as if a sudden thought had struck
him. He thrust out his foot, covered with a heavy cowhide boot, laced
high about his leg with thongs of skin.

“See here,—how a fighting man of the cross is shod! I have seen the
boots of the Bishop of Tours,—white kid, broidered with silk; a day in
the bogs would tear them to shreds. I have seen the sandals that the
monks use on the highroads,—yes, and worn them; ten pair of them have
I worn out and thrown away in a single journey. Now I shoe my feet with
the toughest hides, hard as iron; no rock can cut them, no branches can
tear them. Yet more than one pair of these have I outworn, and many
more shall I outwear ere my journeys are ended. And I think, if God
is gracious to me, that I shall die wearing them. Better so than in a
soft bed with silken coverings. The boots of a warrior, a hunter, a
woodsman,—these are my preparation of the gospel of peace.”

“Come, Gregor,” he said, laying his brown hand on the youth’s shoulder,
“come, wear the forester’s boots with me. This is the life to which we
are called. Be strong in the Lord, a hunter of the demons, a subduer of
the wilderness, a woodsman of the faith. Come!”

The boy’s eyes sparkled. He turned to his grandmother. She shook her
head vigorously.

“Nay, father,” she said, “draw not the lad away from my side with
these wild words. I need him to help me with my labors, to cheer my old
age.”

“Do you need him more than the Master does?” asked Winfried; “and will
you take the wood that is fit for a bow to make a distaff?”

“But I fear for the child. Thy life is too hard for him. He will perish
with hunger in the woods.”

“Once,” said Winfried, smiling, “we were camped by the bank of the
river Ohru. The table was spread for the morning meal, but my comrades
cried that it was empty; the provisions were exhausted; we must go
without breakfast, and perhaps starve before we could escape from
the wilderness. While they complained, a fish-hawk flew up from the
river with flapping wings, and let fall a great pike in the midst of
the camp. There was food enough and to spare. Never have I seen the
righteous forsaken, nor his seed begging bread.”

“But the fierce pagans of the forest,” cried the abbess,—“they may
pierce the boy with their arrows, or dash out his brains with their
axes. He is but a child, too young for the dangers of strife.”

“A child in years,” replied Winfried, “but a man in spirit. And if the
hero must fall early in the battle, he wears the brighter crown, not a
leaf withered, not a flower fallen.”

The aged princess trembled a little. She drew Gregor close to her side,
and laid her hand gently on his brown hair.

“I am not sure that he wants to leave me yet. Besides, there is no
horse in the stable to give him, now, and he cannot go as befits the
grandson of a king.”

Gregor looked straight into her eyes.

“Grandmother,” said he, “dear grandmother, if thou wilt not give me a
horse to ride with this man of God, I will go with him afoot.”


II

THE TRAIL THROUGH THE FOREST

Two years had passed, to a day, almost to an hour, since that Christmas
eve in the cloister of Pfalzel. A little company of pilgrims, less than
a score of men, were creeping slowly northward through the wide forest
that rolled over the hills of central Germany.

At the head of the band marched Winfried, clad in a tunic of fur, with
his long black robe girt high about his waist, so that it might not
hinder his stride. His hunter’s boots were crusted with snow. Drops of
ice sparkled like jewels along the thongs that bound his legs. There
was no other ornament to his dress except the bishop’s cross hanging on
his breast, and the broad silver clasp that fastened his cloak about
his neck. He carried a strong, tall staff in his hand, fashioned at the
top into the form of a cross.

Close beside him, keeping step like a familiar comrade, was the young
Prince Gregor. Long marches through the wilderness had stretched his
limbs and broadened his back, and made a man of him in stature as well
as in spirit. His jacket and cap were of wolf-skin, and on his shoulder
he carried an axe, with broad, shining blade. He was a mighty woodsman
now, and could make a spray of chips fly around him as he hewed his way
through the trunk of spruce-tree.

Behind these leaders followed a pair of teamsters, guiding a rude
sledge, loaded with food and the equipage of the camp, and drawn by two
big, shaggy horses, blowing thick clouds of steam from their frosty
nostrils. Tiny icicles hung from the hairs on their lips. Their flanks
were smoking. They sank above the fetlocks at every step in the soft
snow.

Last of all came the rear guard, armed with bows and javelins. It was
no child’s play, in those days, to cross Europe afoot.

The weird woodland, sombre and illimitable, covered hill and vale,
tableland and mountain-peak. There were wide moors where the wolves
hunted in packs as if the devil drove them, and tangled thickets where
the lynx and the boar made their lairs. Fierce bears lurked among the
rocky passes, and had not yet learned to fear the face of man. The
gloomy recesses of the forest gave shelter to inhabitants who were
still more cruel and dangerous than beasts of prey,—outlaws and sturdy
robbers and mad were-wolves and bands of wandering pillagers.

The pilgrim who would pass from the mouth of the Tiber to the mouth of
the Rhine must travel with a little army of retainers, or else trust in
God and keep his arrows loose in the quiver.

The travellers were surrounded by an ocean of trees, so vast, so
full of endless billows, that it seemed to be pressing on every side
to overwhelm them. Gnarled oaks, with branches twisted and knotted
as if in rage, rose in groves like tidal waves. Smooth forests of
beech-trees, round and gray, swept over the knolls and <DW72>s of land
in a mighty ground-swell. But most of all, the multitude of pines and
firs, innumerable and monotonous, with straight, stark trunks, and
branches woven together in an unbroken flood of darkest green, crowded
through the valleys and over the hills, rising on the highest ridges
into ragged crests, like the foaming edge of breakers.

Through this sea of shadows ran a narrow stream of shining
whiteness,—an ancient Roman road, covered with snow. It was as if some
great ship had ploughed through the green ocean long ago, and left
behind it a thick, smooth wake of foam. Along this open track the
travellers held their way,—heavily, for the drifts were deep; warily,
for the hard winter had driven many packs of wolves down from the moors.

The steps of the pilgrims were noiseless; but the sledges creaked over
the dry snow, and the panting of the horses throbbed through the still,
cold air. The pale-blue shadows on the western side of the road grew
longer. The sun, declining through its shallow arch, dropped behind the
tree-tops. Darkness followed swiftly, as if it had been a bird of prey
waiting for this sign to swoop down upon the world.

“Father,” said Gregor to the leader, “surely this day’s march is done.
It is time to rest, and eat, and sleep. If we press onward now, we
cannot see our steps; and will not that be against the word of the
psalmist David, who bids us not to put confidence in the legs of a man?”

Winfried laughed. “Nay, my son Gregor,” said he, “thou hast tripped,
even now, upon thy text. For David said only, ’I take no pleasure in
the legs of a man.’ And so say I, for I am not minded to spare thy legs
or mine, until we come farther on our way, and do what must be done
this night. Draw the belt tighter, my son, and hew me out this tree
that is fallen across the road, for our camp-ground is not here.”

The youth obeyed; two of the foresters sprang to help him; and while
the soft fir-wood yielded to the stroke of the axes, and the snow flew
from the bending branches, Winfried turned and spoke to his followers
in a cheerful voice, that refreshed them like wine.

“Courage, brothers, and forward yet a little! The moon will light us
presently, and the path is plain. Well know I that the journey is
weary; and my own heart wearies also for the home in England, where
those I love are keeping feast this Christmas eve. But we have work to
do before we feast to-night. For this is the Yuletide, and the heathen
people of the forest have gathered at the thunder-oak of Geismar to
worship their god, Thor. Strange things will be seen there, and deeds
which make the soul black. But we are sent to lighten their darkness;
and we will teach our kinsmen to keep a Christmas with us such as the
woodland has never known. Forward, then, and let us stiffen up our
feeble knees!”

A murmur of assent came from the men. Even the horses seemed to take
fresh heart. They flattened their backs to draw the heavy loads, and
blew the frost from their nostrils as they pushed ahead.

The night grew broader and less oppressive. A gate of brightness was
opened secretly somewhere in the sky; higher and higher swelled the
clear moon-flood, until it poured over the eastern wall of forest
into the road. A drove of wolves howled faintly in the distance, but
they were receding, and the sound soon died away. The stars sparkled
merrily through the stringent air; the small, round moon shone like
silver; little breaths of the dreaming wind wandered whispering across
the pointed fir-tops, as the pilgrims toiled bravely onward, following
their clue of light through a labyrinth of darkness.

After a while the road began to open out a little. There were spaces of
meadow-land, fringed with alders, behind which a boisterous river ran,
clashing through spears of ice.

Rude houses of hewn logs appeared in the openings, each one casting a
patch of inky blackness upon the snow. Then the travellers passed a
larger group of dwellings, all silent and unlighted; and beyond, they
saw a great house, with many out-buildings and enclosed courtyards,
from which the hounds bayed furiously, and a noise of stamping horses
came from the stalls. But there was no other sound of life. The fields
around lay bare to the moon. They saw no man, except that once, on a
path that skirted the farther edge of a meadow, three dark figures
passed by, running very swiftly.

Then the road plunged again into a dense thicket, traversed it, and
climbing to the left, emerged suddenly upon a glade, round and level
except at the northern side, where a swelling hillock was crowned with
a huge oak-tree. It towered above the heath, a giant with contorted
arms, beckoning to the host of lesser trees. “Here,” cried Winfried,
as his eyes flashed and his hand lifted his heavy staff, “here is the
thunder-oak; and here the cross of Christ shall break the hammer of the
false god Thor.”


III

THE SHADOW OF THE THUNDER-OAK

Withered leaves still clung to the branches of the oak: torn and
faded banners of the departed summer. The bright crimson of autumn
had long since disappeared, bleached away by the storms and the cold.
But to-night these tattered remnants of glory were red again: ancient
blood-stains against the dark-blue sky. For an immense fire had been
kindled in front of the tree. Tongues of ruddy flame, fountains of
ruby sparks, ascended through the spreading limbs and flung a fierce
illumination upward and around. The pale, pure moonlight that bathed
the surrounding forests was quenched and eclipsed here. Not a beam of
it sifted downward through the branches of the oak. It stood like a
pillar of cloud between the still light of heaven and the crackling,
flashing fire of earth.

But the fire itself was invisible to Winfried and his companions. A
great throng of people were gathered around it in a half-circle, their
backs to the open glade, their faces towards the oak. Seen against that
glowing background, it was but the silhouette of a crowd, vague, black,
formless, mysterious.

The travellers paused for a moment at the edge of the thicket, and took
counsel together.

“It is the assembly of the tribe,” said one of the foresters, “the
great night of the council. I heard of it three days ago, as we passed
through one of the villages. All who swear by the old gods have been
summoned. They will sacrifice a steed to the god of war, and drink
blood, and eat horse-flesh to make them strong. It will be at the peril
of our lives if we approach them. At least we must hide the cross, if
we would escape death.”

“Hide me no cross,” cried Winfried, lifting his staff, “for I have come
to show it, and to make these blind folk see its power. There is more
to be done here to-night than the slaying of a steed, and a greater
evil to be stayed than the shameful eating of meat sacrificed to idols.
I have seen it in a dream. Here the cross must stand and be our rede.”

At his command the sledge was left in the border of the wood, with
two of the men to guard it, and the rest of the company moved forward
across the open ground. They approached unnoticed, for all the
multitude were looking intently towards the fire at the foot of the oak.

Then Winfried’s voice rang out, “Hail, ye sons of the forest! A
stranger claims the warmth of your fire in the winter night.”

Swiftly, and as with a single motion, a thousand eyes were bent upon
the speaker. The semicircle opened silently in the middle; Winfried
entered with his followers; it closed again behind them.

Then, as they looked round the curving ranks, they saw that the hue of
the assemblage was not black, but white,—dazzling, radiant, solemn.
White, the robes of the women clustered together at the points of the
wide crescent; white, the glittering byrnies of the warriors standing
in close ranks; white, the fur mantles of the aged men who held
the central place in the circle; white, with the shimmer of silver
ornaments and the purity of lamb’s-wool, the raiment of a little group
of children who stood close by the fire; white, with awe and fear, the
faces of all who looked at them; and over all the flickering, dancing
radiance of the flames played and glimmered like a faint, vanishing
tinge of blood on snow.

The only figure untouched by the glow was the old priest, Hunrad, with
his long, spectral robe, flowing hair and beard, and dead-pale face,
who stood with his back to the fire and advanced slowly to meet the
strangers.

“Who are you? Whence come you, and what seek you here?” His voice was
heavy and toneless as a muffled bell.

“Your kinsman am I, of the German brotherhood,” answered Winfried, “and
from England, beyond the sea, have I come to bring you a greeting from
that land, and a message from the All-Father, whose servant I am.”

“Welcome, then,” said Hunrad, “welcome, kinsman, and be silent; for
what passes here is too high to wait, and must be done before the moon
crosses the middle heaven, unless, indeed, thou hast some sign or token
from the gods. Canst thou work miracles?”

The question came sharply, as if a sudden gleam of hope had flashed
through the tangle of the old priest’s mind. But Winfried’s voice sank
lower and a cloud of disappointment passed over his face as he replied:
“Nay, miracles have I never wrought, though I have heard of many; but
the All-Father has given no power to my hands save such as belongs to
common man.”

“Stand still, then, thou common man,” said Hunrad, scornfully, “and
behold what the gods have called us hither to do. This night is the
death-night of the sun-god, Baldur the Beautiful, beloved of gods
and men. This night is the hour of darkness and the power of winter,
of sacrifice and mighty fear. This night the great Thor, the god of
thunder and war, to whom this oak is sacred, is grieved for the death
of Baldur, and angry with this people because they have forsaken his
worship. Long is it since an offering has been laid upon his altar,
long since the roots of his holy tree have been fed with blood.
Therefore its leaves have withered before the time, and its boughs are
heavy with death. Therefore the Slavs and the Wends have beaten us in
battle. Therefore the harvests have failed, and the wolf-hordes have
ravaged the folds, and the strength has departed from the bow, and the
wood of the spear has broken, and the wild boar has slain the huntsman.
Therefore the plague has fallen on our dwellings, and the dead are more
than the living in all our villages. Answer me, ye people, are not
these things true?”

A hoarse sound of approval ran through the circle. A chant, in which
the voices of the men and women blended, like the shrill wind in the
pine-trees above the rumbling thunder of a waterfall, rose and fell in
rude cadences.

  “O Thor, the Thunderer,
  Mighty and merciless,
  Spare us from smiting!
  Heave not thy hammer,
  Angry, against us;
  Plague not thy people.
  Take from our treasure
  Richest of ransom.
  Silver we send thee,
  Jewels and javelins,
  Goodliest garments,
  All our possessions,
  Priceless, we proffer.
  Sheep will we slaughter,
  Steeds will we sacrifice;
  Bright blood shall bathe thee,
  O tree of Thunder,
  Life-floods shall lave thee,
  Strong wood of wonder.
  Mighty, have mercy,
  Smite us no more,
  Spare us and save us,
  Spare us, Thor! Thor!”

With two great shouts the song ended, and a stillness followed so
intense that the crackling of the fire was heard distinctly. The old
priest stood silent for a moment. His shaggy brows swept down over his
eyes like ashes quenching flame. Then he lifted his face and spoke.

“None of these things will please the god. More costly is the offering
that shall cleanse your sin, more precious the crimson dew that shall
send new life into this holy tree of blood. Thor claims your dearest
and your noblest gift.”

Hunrad moved nearer to the handful of children who stood watching the
red mines in the fire and the swarms of spark-serpents darting upward.
They had heeded none of the priest’s words, and did not notice now that
he approached them, so eager were they to see which fiery snake would
go highest among the oak branches. Foremost among them, and most intent
on the pretty game, was a boy like a sunbeam, slender and quick, with
blithe brown eyes and laughing lips. The priest’s hand was laid upon
his shoulder. The boy turned and looked up in his face.

“Here,” said the old man, with his voice vibrating as when a thick rope
is strained by a ship swinging from her moorings, “here is the chosen
one, the eldest son of the Chief, the darling of the people. Hearken,
Bernhard, wilt thou go to Valhalla, where the heroes dwell with the
gods, to bear a message to Thor?”

The boy answered, swift and clear:

“Yes, priest, I will go if my father bids me. Is it far away? Shall I
run quickly? Must I take my bow and arrows for the wolves?”

The boy’s father, the Chieftain Gundhar, standing among his bearded
warriors, drew his breath deep, and leaned so heavily on the handle of
his spear that the wood cracked. And his wife, Irma, bending forward
from the ranks of women, pushed the golden hair from her forehead with
one hand. The other dragged at the silver chain about her neck until
the rough links pierced her flesh, and the red drops fell unheeded on
the snow of her breast.

A sigh passed through the crowd, like the murmur of the forest before
the storm breaks. Yet no one spoke save Hunrad:

“Yes, my Prince, both bow and spear shalt thou have, for the way is
long, and thou art a brave huntsman. But in darkness thou must journey
for a little space, and with eyes blindfolded. Fearest thou?”

“Naught fear I,” said the boy, “neither darkness, nor the great bear,
nor the were-wolf. For I am Gundhar’s son, and the defender of my folk.”

Then the priest led the child in his raiment of lamb’s-wool to a broad
stone in front of the fire. He gave him his little bow tipped with
silver, and his spear with shining head of steel. He bound the child’s
eyes with a white cloth, and bade him kneel beside the stone with his
face to the east. Unconsciously the wide arc of spectators drew inward
toward the centre, as the ends of the bow draw together when the cord
is stretched. Winfried moved noiselessly until he stood close behind
the priest.

The old man stooped to lift a black hammer of stone from the
ground,—the sacred hammer of the god Thor. Summoning all the strength
of his withered arms, he swung it high in the air. It poised for an
instant above the child’s fair head—then turned to fall.

One keen cry shrilled out from where the women stood: “Me! take me! not
Bernhard!”

The flight of the mother towards her child was swift as the falcon’s
swoop. But swifter still was the hand of the deliverer.

Winfried’s heavy staff thrust mightily against the hammer’s handle as
it fell. Sideways it glanced from the old man’s grasp, and the black
stone, striking on the altar’s edge, split in twain. A shout of awe and
joy rolled along the living circle. The branches of the oak shivered.
The flames leaped higher. As the shout died away the people saw the
lady Irma, with her arms clasped round her child, and above them, on
the altar-stone, Winfried, his face shining like the face of an angel.


IV

THE FELLING OF THE TREE

A swift mountain-flood rolling down its channel; a huge rock tumbling
from the hill-side and falling in mid-stream; the baffled waters broken
and confused, pausing in their flow, dash high against the rock,
foaming and murmuring, with divided impulse, uncertain whether to turn
to the right or the left.

Even so Winfried’s bold deed fell into the midst of the thoughts and
passions of the council. They were at a standstill. Anger and wonder,
reverence and joy and confusion surged through the crowd. They knew not
which way to move: to resent the intrusion of the stranger as an insult
to their gods, or to welcome him as the rescuer of their darling prince.

The old priest crouched by the altar, silent. Conflicting counsels
troubled the air. Let the sacrifice go forward; the gods must be
appeased. Nay, the boy must not die; bring the chieftain’s best horse
and slay it in his stead; it will be enough; the holy tree loves the
blood of horses. Not so, there is a better counsel yet; seize the
stranger whom the gods have led hither as a victim and make his life
pay the forfeit of his daring.

The withered leaves on the oak rustled and whispered overhead. The fire
flared and sank again. The angry voices clashed against each other and
fell like opposing waves. Then the chieftain Gundhar struck the earth
with his spear and gave his decision.

“All have spoken, but none are agreed. There is no voice of the
council. Keep silence now, and let the stranger speak. His words shall
give us judgment, whether he is to live or to die.”

Winfried lifted himself high upon the altar, drew a roll of parchment
from his bosom, and began to read.

“A letter from the great Bishop of Rome, who sits on a golden throne,
to the people of the forest, Hessians and Thuringians, Franks and
Saxons. _In nomine Domini, sanctae et individuae trinitatis, amen!_”

A murmur of awe ran through the crowd. “It is the sacred tongue of the
Romans: the tongue that is heard and understood by the wise men of
every land. There is magic in it. Listen!”

Winfried went on to read the letter, translating it into the speech of
the people.

“‘We have sent unto you our Brother Boniface, and appointed him your
bishop, that he may teach you the only true faith, and baptize you, and
lead you back from the ways of error to the path of salvation. Hearken
to him in all things like a father. Bow your hearts to his teaching.
He comes not for earthly gain, but for the gain of your souls. Depart
from evil works. Worship not the false gods, for they are devils. Offer
no more bloody sacrifices, nor eat the flesh of horses, but do as our
Brother Boniface commands you. Build a house for him that he may dwell
among you, and a church where you may offer your prayers to the only
living God, the Almighty King of Heaven.’”

It was a splendid message: proud, strong, peaceful, loving. The dignity
of the words imposed mightily upon the hearts of the people. They were
quieted, as men who have listened to a lofty strain of music.

“Tell us, then,” said Gundhar, “what is the word that thou bringest
to us from the Almighty. What is thy counsel for the tribes of the
woodland on this night of sacrifice?”

“This is the word, and this is the counsel,” answered Winfried. “Not a
drop of blood shall fall to-night, save that which pity has drawn from
the breast of your princess, in love for her child. Not a life shall
be blotted out in the darkness to-night; but the great shadow of the
tree which hides you from the light of heaven shall be swept away. For
this is the birth-night of the white Christ, son of the All-Father, and
Saviour of mankind. Fairer is He than Baldur the Beautiful, greater
than Odin the Wise, kinder than Freya the Good. Since He has come to
earth the bloody sacrifices must cease. The dark Thor, on whom you
vainly call, is dead. Deep in the shades of Niffelheim he is lost
forever. His power in the world is broken. Will you serve a helpless
god? See, my brothers, you call this tree his oak. Does he dwell here?
Does he protect it?”

A troubled voice of assent rose from the throng. The people stirred
uneasily. Women covered their eyes. Hunrad lifted his head and muttered
hoarsely, “Thor! take vengeance! Thor!”

Winfried beckoned to Gregor. “Bring the axes, thine and one for me.
Now, young woodsman, show thy craft! The king-tree of the forest must
fall, and swiftly, or all is lost!”

The two men took their places facing each other, one on each side of
the oak. Their cloaks were flung aside, their heads bare. Carefully
they felt the ground with their feet, seeking a firm grip of the earth.
Firmly they grasped the axe-helves and swung the shining blades.

“Tree-god!” cried Winfried, “art thou angry? Thus we smite thee!”

“Tree-god!” answered Gregor, “art thou mighty? Thus we fight thee!”

Clang! clang! the alternate strokes beat time upon the hard, ringing
wood. The axe-heads glittered in their rhythmic flight, like fierce
eagles circling about their quarry.

The broad flakes of wood flew from the deepening gashes in the sides
of the oak. The huge trunk quivered. There was a shuddering in the
branches. Then the great wonder of Winfried’s life came to pass.

Out of the stillness of the winter night, a mighty rushing noise
sounded overhead.

Was it the ancient gods on their white battle-steeds, with their black
hounds of wrath and their arrows of lightning, sweeping through the air
to destroy their foes?

A strong, whirling wind passed over the tree-tops. It gripped the oak
by its branches and tore it from its roots. Backward it fell, like a
ruined tower, groaning and crashing as it split asunder in four great
pieces.

Winfried let his axe drop, and bowed his head for a moment in the
presence of almighty power.

Then he turned to the people, “Here is the timber,” he cried, “already
felled and split for your new building. On this spot shall rise a
chapel to the true God and his servant St. Peter.”

“And here,” said he, as his eyes fell on a young fir-tree, standing
straight and green, with its top pointing towards the stars, amid the
divided ruins of the fallen oak, “here is the living tree, with no
stain of blood upon it, that shall be the sign of your new worship. See
how it points to the sky. Let us call it the tree of the Christ-child.
Take it up and carry it to the chieftain’s hall. You shall go no more
into the shadows of the forest to keep your feasts with secret rites of
shame. You shall keep them at home, with laughter and song and rites of
love. The thunder-oak has fallen, and I think the day is coming when
there shall not be a home in all Germany where the children are not
gathered around the green fir-tree to rejoice in the birth-night of
Christ.”

So they took the little fir from its place, and carried it in joyous
procession to the edge of the glade, and laid it on the sledge. The
horses tossed their heads and drew their load bravely, as if the new
burden had made it lighter.

When they came to the house of Gundhar, he bade them throw open the
doors of the hall and set the tree in the midst of it. They kindled
lights among the branches until it seemed to be tangled full of
fire-flies. The children encircled it, wondering, and the sweet odor of
the balsam filled the house.

Then Winfried stood beside the chair of Gundhar, on the daïs at the
end of the hall, and told the story of Bethlehem; of the babe in the
manger, of the shepherds on the hills, of the host of angels and their
midnight song. All the people listened, charmed into stillness.

But the boy Bernhard, on Irma’s knee, folded by her soft arm, grew
restless as the story lengthened, and began to prattle softly at his
mother’s ear.

“Mother,” whispered the child, “why did you cry out so loud, when the
priest was going to send me to Valhalla?”

“Oh, hush, my child,” answered the mother, and pressed him closer to
her side.

“Mother,” whispered the boy again, laying his finger on the stains upon
her breast, “see, your dress is red! What are these stains? Did some
one hurt you?”

The mother closed his mouth with a kiss. “Dear, be still, and listen!”

The boy obeyed. His eyes were heavy with sleep. But he heard the last
words of Winfried as he spoke of the angelic messengers, flying over
the hills of Judea and singing as they flew. The child wondered and
dreamed and listened. Suddenly his face grew bright. He put his lips
close to Irma’s cheek again.

“Oh, mother!” he whispered very low, “do not speak. Do you hear them?
Those angels have come back again. They are singing now behind the
tree.”

And some say that it was true; but others say that it was only Gregor
and his companions at the lower end of the hall, chanting their
Christmas hymn:

  “‘All glory be to God on high,
  And to the earth be peace!
  Good-will, henceforth, from heaven to men
  Begin, and never cease.’”




  A FRENCH TAR-BABY

  BY

  JOEL CHANDLER HARRIS

The fable was one of the first tributaries to the stream of
story-telling. Primitive man with a kind of fine democracy claimed
kinship with the animals about him. So Hiawatha learned the language
and the secrets of birds and beasts,

  “Talked with them whene’er he met them,
  Called them Hiawatha’s Brothers.”

Out of this intimacy and understanding grew the fable, wherein animals
thought, acted, and talked in the terms of human life. This kind of
story is illustrated by the “Fables” of Æsop, the animal stories of
Ernest Thompson-Seton, the “Jungle Books” of Rudyard Kipling, and the
“Uncle Remus” stories of Joel Chandler Harris. The fable is a tale
rather than a true short-story.




A FRENCH TAR-BABY[4]


In the time when there were hobgoblins and fairies, Brother Goat and
Brother Rabbit lived in the same neighborhood, not far from each other.

Proud of his long beard and sharp horns, Brother Goat looked on Brother
Rabbit with disdain. He would hardly speak to Brother Rabbit when he
met him, and his greatest pleasure was to make his little neighbor the
victim of his tricks and practical jokes. For instance, he would say:

“Brother Rabbit, here is Mr. Fox,” and this would cause Brother Rabbit
to run away as hard as he could. Again he would say:

“Brother Rabbit, here is Mr. Wolf,” and poor Brother Rabbit would shake
and tremble with fear. Sometimes he would cry out:

“Brother Rabbit, here is Mr. Tiger,” and then Brother Rabbit would
shudder and think that his last hour had come.

Tired of this miserable existence, Brother Rabbit tried to think of
some means by which he could change his powerful and terrible neighbor
into a friend. After a time he thought he had discovered a way to make
Brother Goat his friend, and so he invited him to dinner.

Brother Goat was quick to accept the invitation. The dinner was a
fine affair, and there was an abundance of good eating. A great many
different dishes were served. Brother Goat licked his mouth and shook
his long beard with satisfaction. He had never before been present at
such a feast.

“Well, my friend,” exclaimed Brother Rabbit, when the dessert was
brought in, “how do you like your dinner?”

“I could certainly wish for nothing better,” replied Brother Goat,
rubbing the tips of his horns against the back of his chair; “but my
throat is very dry and a little water would hurt neither the dinner nor
me.”

“Gracious!” said Brother Rabbit, “I have neither wine-cellar nor water.
I am not in the habit of drinking while I am eating.”

“Neither have I any water, Brother Rabbit,” said Brother Goat. “But I
have an idea! If you will go with me over yonder by the big poplar, we
will dig a well.”

“No, Brother Goat,” said Brother Rabbit, who hoped to revenge
himself—“no, I do not care to dig a well. At daybreak I drink the dew
from the cups of the flowers, and in the heat of the day I milk the
cows and drink the cream.”

“Well and good,” said Brother Goat. “Alone I will dig the well, and
alone I will drink out of it.”

“Success to you, Brother Goat,” said Brother Rabbit.

“Thank you kindly, Brother Rabbit.”

Brother Goat then went to the foot of the big poplar and began to dig
his well. He dug with his forefeet and with his horns, and the well got
deeper and deeper. Soon the water began to bubble up and the well was
finished, and then Brother Goat made haste to quench his thirst. He was
in such a hurry that his beard got in the water, but he drank and drank
until he had his fill.

Brother Rabbit, who had followed him at a little distance, hid himself
behind a bush and laughed heartily. He said to himself: “What an
innocent creature you are!”

The next day, when Brother Goat, with his big beard and sharp horns,
returned to his well to get some water, he saw the tracks of Brother
Rabbit in the soft earth. This put him to thinking. He sat down, pulled
his beard, scratched his head, and tapped himself on the forehead.

“My friend,” he exclaimed after a while, “I will catch you yet.”

Then he ran and got his tools (for Brother Goat was something of a
carpenter in those days) and made a large doll out of laurel wood.
When the doll was finished, he spread tar on it here and there, on the
right and on the left, and up and down. He smeared it all over with the
sticky stuff, until it was as black as a Guinea <DW64>.

This finished, Brother Goat waited quietly until evening. At sunset he
placed the tarred doll near the well, and ran and hid himself behind
the trees and bushes. The moon had just risen, and the heavens twinkled
with millions of little star-torches.

Brother Rabbit, who was waiting in his house, believed that the time
had come for him to get some water, so he took his bucket and went to
Brother Goat’s well. On the way he was very much afraid that something
would catch him. He trembled when the wind shook the leaves of the
trees. He would go a little distance and then stop and listen; he hid
here behind a stone, and there behind a tuft of grass.

At last he arrived at the well, and there he saw the little <DW64>. He
stopped and looked at it with astonishment. Then he drew back a little
way, advanced again, drew back, advanced a little, and stopped once
more.

“What can that be?” he said to himself. He listened, with his long ears
pointed forward, but the trees could not talk, and the bushes were
dumb. He winked his eyes and lowered his head:

“Hey, friend! who are you?” he asked.

The tar-doll didn’t move. Brother Rabbit went up a little closer, and
asked again:

“Who are you?”

The tar-doll said nothing. Brother Rabbit breathed more at ease. Then
he went to the brink of the well, but when he looked in the water the
tar-doll seemed to look in too. He could see her reflection in the
water. This made Brother Rabbit so mad that he grew red in the face.

“See here!” he exclaimed, “if you look in this well I’ll give you a rap
on the nose!”

Brother Rabbit leaned over the brink of the well, and saw the tar-doll
smiling at him in the water. He raised his right hand and hit her—bam!
His hand stuck.

“What’s this?” exclaimed Brother Rabbit. “Turn me loose, imp of Satan!
If you do not, I will rap you on the eye with my other hand.”

Then he hit her—bim! The left hand stuck also. Then Brother Rabbit
raised his right foot, saying:

“Mark me well, little Congo! Do you see this foot? I will kick you in
the stomach if you do not turn me loose this instant.”

No sooner said than done. Brother Rabbit let fly his right foot—vip!
The foot stuck, and he raised the other.

“Do you see this foot?” he exclaimed. “If I hit you with it, you will
think a thunderbolt has struck you.”

Then he kicked her with the left foot, and it also stuck like the
other, and Brother Rabbit held fast his Guinea <DW64>.

“Watch out, now!” he cried. “I’ve already butted a great many people
with my head. If I butt you in your ugly face I’ll knock it into a
jelly. Turn me loose! Oho! you don’t answer?” Bap!

“Guinea girl!” exclaimed Brother Rabbit, “are you dead? Gracious
goodness! how my head does stick!”

When the sun rose, Brother Goat went to his well to find out something
about Brother Rabbit. The result was beyond his expectations.

“Hey, little rogue, big rogue!” exclaimed Brother Goat. “Hey, Brother
Rabbit! what are you doing there? I thought you drank the dew from the
cups of the flowers, or milk from the cows. Aha, Brother Rabbit! I will
punish you for stealing my water.”

“I am your friend,” said Brother Rabbit; “don’t kill me.”

“Thief, thief!” cried Brother Goat, and then he ran quickly into the
woods, gathered up a pile of dry limbs, and made a great fire. He took
Brother Rabbit from the tar-doll, and prepared to burn him alive. As he
was passing a thicket of brambles with Brother Rabbit on his shoulders,
Brother Goat met his daughter Bélédie, who was walking about in the
fields.

“Where are you going, papa, muffled up with such a burden? Come and
eat the fresh grass with me, and throw wicked Brother Rabbit in the
brambles.”

Cunning Brother Rabbit raised his long ears and pretended to be very
much frightened.

“Oh, no, Brother Goat!” he cried. “Don’t throw me in the brambles. They
will tear my flesh, put out my eyes, and pierce my heart. Oh, I pray
you, rather throw me in the fire.”

“Aha, little rogue, big rogue! Aha, Brother Rabbit!” exclaimed Brother
Goat, exultingly, “you don’t like the brambles? Well, then, go and
laugh in them,” and he threw Brother Rabbit in without a feeling of
pity.

Brother Rabbit fell in the brambles, leaped to his feet, and began to
laugh.

“Ha-ha-ha! Brother Goat, what a simpleton you are!—ha-ha-ha! A better
bed I never had! In these brambles I was born!”

Brother Goat was in despair, but he could not help himself. Brother
Rabbit was safe.

A long beard is not always a sign of intelligence.




SONNY’S CHRISTENIN’

BY

RUTH MCENERY STUART

This is the story of character, in the form of dramatic monologue.
There is only one speaker, but we know by his words that another is
present and can infer his part in the conversation. This story has the
additional values of humor and local color.




SONNY’S CHRISTENIN’[5]


Yas, sir, wife an’ me, we’ve turned ’Piscopals—all on account o’
Sonny. He seemed to prefer that religion, an’ of co’se we wouldn’t have
the family divided, so we’re a-goin’ to be ez good ’Piscopals ez we can.

I reckon it’ll come a little bit awkward at first. Seem like I never
will git so thet I can sass back in church ’thout feelin’ sort o’
impident—but I reckon I’ll chirp up an’ come to it, in time.

I never was much of a hand to sound the amens, even in our own
Methodist meetin’s.

Sir? How old is he? Oh, Sonny’s purty nigh six—but he showed a
pref’ence for the ’Piscopal Church long fo’ he could talk.

When he wasn’t no mo’ ’n three year old we commenced a-takin’ him
round to church wherever they held meetin’s,—’Piscopals, Methodists
or Presbyterians,—so’s he could see an’ hear for hisself. I ca’yed
him to a baptizin’ over to Chinquepin Crik, once-t, when he was three.
I thought I’d let him see it done an’ maybe it might make a good
impression; but no, sir! The Baptists didn’t suit him! Cried ever’
time one was douced, an’ I had to fetch him away. In our Methodist
meetin’s he seemed to git worked up an’ pervoked, some way. An’ the
Presbyterians, he didn’t take no stock in them at all. Ricollect, one
Sunday the preacher, he preached a mighty powerful disco’se on the
doctrine o’ lost infants not ’lected to salvation—an’ Sonny? Why, he
slep’ right thoo it.

The first any way lively interest he ever seemed to take in religious
services was at the ’Piscopals, Easter Sunday. When he seen the lilies
an’ the candles he thess clapped his little hands, an’ time the folks
commenced answerin’ back he was tickled all but to death, an’ started
answerin’ hisself—on’y, of co’se he’d answer sort o’ hit an’ miss.

I see then thet Sonny was a natu’al-born ‘Piscopal, an’ we might ez
well make up our minds to it—an’ I told _her_ so, too. They say some
is born so. But we thought we’d let him alone an’ let nature take its
co’se for a while—not pressin’ him one way or another. He never had
showed no disposition to be christened, an’ ever sence the doctor tried
to vaccinate him he seemed to git the notion that christenin’ an’
vaccination was mo’ or less the same thing; an’ sence that time, he’s
been mo’ opposed to it than ever.

Sir? Oh no, sir. He didn’t vaccinate him; he thess tried to do it;
but Sonny, he wouldn’t begin to allow it. We all tried to indoose
’im. I offered him everything on the farm ef he’d thess roll up his
little sleeve an’ let the doctor look at his arm—promised him thet he
wouldn’t tech a needle to it tell he said the word. But he wouldn’t. He
’lowed thet me an’ his mamma could git vaccinated ef we wanted to, but
he wouldn’t.

Then we showed him our marks where we had been vaccinated when we was
little, an’ told him how it had kep’ us clair o’ havin’ the smallpock
all our lives.

Well, sir, it didn’t make no diff’ence whether we’d been did befo’ or
not, he ’lowed thet he wanted to see us vaccinated ag’in.

An’ so, of co’se, thinkin’ it might encour’ge him, we thess had it did
over—tryin’ to coax him to consent after each one, an’ makin’ pertend
like we enjoyed it.

Then, nothin’ would do but the <DW65>, Dicey, had to be did, an’
then he ’lowed thet he wanted the cat did, an’ I tried to strike a
bargain with him thet if Kitty got vaccinated he would. But he wouldn’t
comp’omise. He thess let on thet Kit had to be did whe’r or no. So I
ast the doctor ef it would likely kill the cat, an’ he said he reckoned
not, though it might sicken her a little. So I told him to go ahead.
Well, sir, befo’ Sonny got thoo, he had had that cat an’ both dogs
vaccinated—but let it tech hisself he would not.

I was mighty sorry not to have it did, ’cause they was a <DW65> thet
had the smallpock down to Cedar Branch, fifteen mile away, an’ he
didn’t die, neither. He got well. An’ they say when they git well
they’re more fatal to a neighborhood ‘n when they die.

That was fo’ months ago now, but to this day ever’ time the wind blows
from sou’west I feel oneasy, an’ try to entice Sonny to play on the far
side o’ the house.

Well, sir, in about ten days after that we was the down-in-the-mouthest
crowd on that farm, man an’ beast, thet you ever see. Ever’ last one o’
them vaccinations took, sir, an’ took severe, from the cat up.

But I reckon we’re all safe-t guarded now. They ain’t nothin’ on the
place thet can fetch it to Sonny, an’ I trust, with care, he may never
be exposed.

But I set out to tell you about Sonny’s christenin’ an’ us turnin’
‘Piscopal. Ez I said, he never seemed to want baptism, though he had
heard us discuss all his life both it an’ vaccination ez the two
ordeels to be gone thoo with some time, an’ we’d speculate ez to
whether vaccination would take or not, an’ all sech ez that, an’ then,
ez I said, after he see what the vaccination was, why he was even
mo’ prejudyced agin’ baptism ‘n ever, an’ we ’lowed to let it run on
tell sech a time ez he’d decide what name he’d want to take an’ what
denomination he’d want to bestow it on him.

Wife, she’s got some ‘Piscopal relations thet she sort o’ looks up
to,—though she don’t own it,—but she was raised Methodist an’ I was
raised a true-blue Presbyterian. But when we professed after Sonny
come we went up together at Methodist meetin’. What we was after was
righteous livin’, an’ we didn’t keer much which denomination helped us
to it.

An’ so, feelin’ friendly all roun’ that-a-way, we thought we’d
leave Sonny to pick his church when he got ready, an’ then they
wouldn’t be nothin’ to undo or do over in case he went over to the
‘Piscopals, which has the name of revisin’ over any other church’s
performances—though sence we’ve turned ‘Piscopals we’ve found out that
ain’t so.

Of co’se the preachers, they used to talk to us about it once-t in a
while,—seemed to think it ought to be did,—’ceptin’, of co’se, the
Baptists.

Well, sir, it went along so till last week. Sonny ain’t but, ez I said,
thess not quite six year old, an’ they seemed to be time enough. But
last week he had been playin’ out o’ doors bare-feeted, thess same ez
he always does, an’ he tramped on a pine splinter some way. Of co’se,
pine, it’s the safe-t-est splinter a person can run into a foot, on
account of its carryin’ its own turpentine in with it to heal up
things; but any splinter thet dast to push itself up into a little pink
foot is a messenger of trouble, an’ we know it. An’ so, when we see
this one, we tried ever’ way to coax him to let us take it out, but he
wouldn’t, of co’se. He never will, an’ somehow the Lord seems to give
’em ambition to work their own way out mos’ gen’ally.

But, sir, this splinter didn’t seem to have no energy in it. It thess
lodged there, an’ his little foot it commenced to swell, an’ it swole
an’ swole tell his little toes stuck out so thet the little pig thet
went to market looked like ez ef it wasn’t on speakin’ terms with
the little pig thet stayed home, an’ wife an’ me we watched it, an’ I
reckon she prayed over it consider’ble, an’ I read a extry psalm at
night befo’ I went to bed, all on account o’ that little foot. An’
night befo’ las’ it was lookin’ mighty angry an’ swole, an’ he had
limped an’ “ouched!” consider’ble all day, an’ he was mighty fretful
bed-time. So, after he went to sleep, wife she come out on the po’ch
where I was settin’, and she says to me, says she, her face all drawed
up an’ workin’, says she: “Honey,” says she, “I reckon we better
sen’ for him an’ have it did.” Thess so, she said it. “Sen’ for who,
wife?” says I, “an’ have what did?” “Why, sen’ for him, the ‘Piscopal
preacher,” says she, “an’ have Sonny christened. Them little toes o’
hisn is ez red ez cherry tomatoes. They burnt my lips thess now like a
coal o’ fire an’—an’ lockjaw is goin’ roun’ tur’ble.

“Seems to me,” says she, “when he started to git sleepy, he didn’t gap
ez wide ez he gen’ly does—an’ I’m ’feered he’s a-gittin’ it now.” An’,
sir, with that, she thess gathered up her apron an’ mopped her face in
it an’ give way. An’ ez for me, I didn’t seem to have no mo’ backbone
down my spinal colume ‘n a feather bolster has, I was that weak.

I never ast her why she didn’t sen’ for our own preacher. I knowed then
ez well ez ef she’d ’a’ told me why she done it—all on account o’
Sonny bein’ so tickled over the ‘Piscopals’ meetin’s.

It was mos’ nine o’clock then, an’ a dark night, an’ rainin’, but I
never said a word—they wasn’t no room round the edges o’ the lump in
my throat for words to come out ef they’d ’a’ been one surgin’ up there
to say, which they wasn’t—but I thess went out an’ saddled my horse
an’ I rid into town. Stopped first at the doctor’s an’ sent him out,
though I knowed ’twouldn’t do no good; Sonny wouldn’t ’low him to tech
it; but I sent him out anyway, to look at it, an’, ef possible, console
wife a little. Then I rid on to the rector’s an’ ast him to come out
immejate an’ baptize Sonny. But nex’ day was his turn to preach down
at Sandy Crik, an’ he couldn’t come that night, but he promised to
come right after services nex’ mornin’—which he done—rid the whole
fo’teen mile from Sandy Crik here in the rain, too, which I think is a
evidence o’ Christianity, though no sech acts is put down in my book o’
“evidences” where they ought rightfully to be.

Well, sir, when I got home that night, I found wife a heap cheerfuler.
The doctor had give Sonny a big apple to eat an’ pernounced him free
from all symptoms o’ lockjaw. But when I come the little feller had
crawled ’back under the bed an’ lay there, eatin’ his apple, an’ they
couldn’t git him out. Soon ez the doctor had teched a poultice to his
foot he had woke up an’ put a stop to it, an’ then he had went off
by hisself where nothin’ couldn’t pester him, to enjoy his apple in
peace. An’ we never got him out tell he heered us tellin’ the doctor
good-night.

I tried ever’ way to git him out—even took up a coal o’ fire an’ poked
it under at him; but he thess laughed at that an’ helt his apple agin’
it an’ made it sizz. Well, sir, he seemed so tickled that I helt that
coal o’ fire for him tell he cooked a good big spot on one side o’ the
apple, an’ et it, an’ then, when I took it out, he called for another,
but I didn’t give it to him. I don’t see no use in over-indulgin’ a
child. An’ when he knowed the doctor was gone, he come out an’ finished
roastin’ his apple by the fire—thess what was left of it ’round the
co’e.

Well, sir, we was mightily comforted by the doctor’s visit, but nex’
mornin’ things looked purty gloomy ag’in. That little foot seemed
a heap worse, an’ he was sort o’ flushed an’ feverish, an’ wife she
thought she heard a owl hoot, an’ Rover made a mighty funny gurgly
sound in his th’oat like ez ef he had bad news to tell us, but didn’t
have the courage to speak it.

An’ then, on top o’ that, the <DW65> Dicey, she come in an’ ’lowed
she had dreamed that night about eatin’ spare-ribs, which everybody
knows to dream about fresh pork out o’ season, which this is July,
is considered a shore sign o’ death. Of co’se, wife an’ me, we don’t
b’lieve in no sech ez that, but ef you ever come to see yo’ little
feller’s toes stand out the way Sonny’s done day befo’ yesterday, why,
sir, you’ll be ready to b’lieve anything. It’s so much better now, you
can’t judge of its looks day befo’ yesterday. We never had even so much
ez considered it necessary thet little children should be christened
to have ’em saved, but when things got on the ticklish edge, like they
was then, why, we felt thet the safest side is the wise side, an’, of
co’se, we want Sonny to have the best of everything. So, we was mighty
thankful when we see the rector comin’. But, sir, when I went out to
open the gate for him, what on top o’ this round hemisp’ere do you
reckon Sonny done? Why, sir, he thess took one look at the gate an’
then he cut an’ run hard ez he could—limped acrost the yard thess like
a flash o’ zig-zag lightnin’—an’ ’fore anybody could stop him, he had
clumb to the tip top o’ the butter-bean arbor—clumb it thess like a
cat—an’ there he set, a-swingin’ his feet under him, an’ laughin’, the
rain thess a-streakin’ his hair all over his face.

That bean arbor is a favoryte place for him to escape to, ’cause it’s
too high to reach, an’ it ain’t strong enough to bear no grown-up
person’s weight.

Well, sir, the rector, he come in an’ opened his valise an’ ’rayed
hisself in his robes an’ opened his book, an’ while he was turnin’ the
leaves, he faced ’round an’ says he, lookin’ at me _di_rec’, says he:

“Let the child be brought forward for baptism,” says he, thess
that-a-way.

Well, sir, I looked at wife, an’ wife, she looked at me, an’ then we
both thess looked out at the butter-bean arbor.

I knowed then thet Sonny wasn’t never comin’ down while the rector
was there, an’ rector, he seemed sort o’ fretted for a minute when he
see how things was, an’ he did try to do a little settin’ fo’th of
opinions. He ’lowed, speakin’ in a mighty pompious manner, thet holy
things wasn’t to be trifled with, an’ thet he had come to baptize the
child accordin’ to the rites o’ the church.

Well, that sort o’ talk, it thess rubbed me the wrong way, an’ I up an’
told him thet that might be so, but thet the rites o’ the church didn’t
count for nothin’, on our farm, to the rights o’ the boy!

I reckon it was mighty disrespec’ful o’ me to face him that-a-way, an’
him adorned in all his robes, too, but I’m thess a plain up-an’-down
man an’ I hadn’t went for him to come an’ baptize Sonny to uphold the
granjer of no church. I was ready to do that when the time come, but
right now we was workin’ in Sonny’s interests, an’ I intended to have
it understood that way. An’ it was.

Rector, he’s a mighty good, kind-hearted man, git down to the man
inside the preacher, an’ when he see thess how things stood, why, he
come ’round friendly, an’ he went out on the po’ch an’ united with
us in tryin’ to help coax Sonny down. First started by promisin’ him
speritual benefits, but he soon see that wasn’t no go, and he tried
worldly persuasion; but no, sir, stid o’ him comin’ down, Sonny started
orderin’ the rest of us christened thess the way he done about the
vaccination. But, of co’se, we had been baptized befo’, an’ we nachelly
helt out agin’ that for some time. But d’rec’ly rector, he seemed to
have a sudden idee, an’ says he, facin’ ’round, church-like, to wife
an’ me, says he:

“Have you both been baptized accordin’ to the rites o’ the church?”

An’ me, thinkin’ of co’se he meant the ‘Piscopal Church, says: “No,
sir,” says I, thess so. And then we see that the way was open for us
to be did over ag’in ef we wanted to. So, sir, wife an’ me we was took
into the church, then an’ there. We wouldn’t ’a’’ yielded to him,
thoo an’ thoo, that-a-way ag’in ef his little foot hadn’t ’a’’ been
so swole, an’ he maybe takin’ his death o’ cold settin’ out in the
po’in’-down rain; but things bein’ as they was, we went thoo it with
all due respects.

Then he commenced callin’ for Dicey, an’ the dog, an’ the cat, to be
did, same ez he done befo’; but, of co’se, they’s some liberties thet
even a innocent child can’t take with the waters o’ baptism, an’ the
rector he got sort o’ wo’e-out and disgusted an’ ’lowed thet ’less’n we
could get the child ready for baptism he’d haf to go home.

Well, sir, I knowed we wouldn’t never git ’im down, an’ I had went for
the rector to baptize him, an’ I intended to have it did, ef possible.
So, says I, turnin’ ’round an’ facin’ him square, says I: “Rector,”
says I, “why not baptize him where he is? I mean it. The waters o’
Heaven are descendin’ upon him where he sets, an’ seems to me ef he’s
favo’bly situated for anything it is for baptism.” Well, parson, he
thess looked at me up an’ down for a minute, like ez ef he s’picioned
I was wanderin’ in my mind, but he didn’t faze me. I thess kep’ up my
argiment. Says I: “Parson,” says I, speakin’ thess ez ca’m ez I am
this minute—“Parson,” says I, “his little foot is mighty swole, an’
so’e, an’ that splinter—thess s’pose he was to take the lockjaw an’
die—don’t you reckon you might do it where he sets—from where you
stand?”

Wife, she was cryin’ by this time, an’ parson, he claired his th’oat
an’ coughed, an’ then he commenced walkin’ up an’ down, an’ treckly he
stopped, an’ says he, speakin’ mighty reverential an’ serious:

“Lookin’ at this case speritually, an’ as a minister o’ the Gospel,”
says he, “it seems to me thet the question ain’t so much a question of
_doin’_ ez it is a question of _withholdin’_. I don’t know,” says he,
“ez I’ve got a right to withhold the sacrament of baptism from a child
under these circumstances or to deny sech comfort to his parents ez
lies in my power to bestow.”

An’, sir, with that he stepped out to the end o’ the po’ch, opened
his book ag’in, an’ holdin’ up his right hand to’ards Sonny, settin’
on top o’ the bean-arbor in the rain, he commenced to read the
service o’ baptism, an’ we stood proxies—which is a sort o’ a dummy
substitutes—for whatever godfather an’ mother Sonny see fit to choose
in after life.

Parson, he looked half like ez ef he’d laugh once-t. When he had thess
opened his book and started to speak, a sudden streak o’ sunshine shot
out an’ the rain started to ease up, an’ it looked for a minute ez ef
he was goin’ to lose the baptismal waters. But d’rec’ly it come down
stiddy ag’in an’ he went thoo the programme entire.

An’ Sonny, he behaved mighty purty; set up perfec’ly ca’m an’ composed
thoo it all, an’ took everything in good part, though he didn’t
p’intedly know who was bein’ baptized, ’cause, of co’se, he couldn’t
hear the words with the rain in his ears.

He didn’t rightly sense the situation tell it come to the part where it
says: “Name this child,” and, of co’se, I called out to Sonny to name
hisself, which it had always been our intention to let him do.

“Name yo’self, right quick, like a good boy,” says I.

Of co’se Sonny had all his life heered me say thet I was Deuteronomy
Jones, Senior, an’ thet I hoped some day when he got christened he’d be
the junior. He knowed that by heart, an’ would agree to it or dispute
it, ’cordin’ to how the notion took him, and I sort o’ ca’culated thet
he’d out with it now. But no, sir! Not a word! He thess sot up on thet
bean-arbor an’ grinned.

An’ so, feelin’ put to it, with the services suspended over my head, I
spoke up, an’ I says: “Parson,” says I, “I reckon ef he was to speak
his little heart, he’d say Deuteronomy Jones, Junior.” An’ with thet
what does Sonny do but conterdic’ me flat! “No, not Junior! I want to
be named Deuteronomy Jones, Senior!” says he, thess so. An’ parson,
he looked to’ards me, an’ I bowed my head an’ he pronounced thess one
single name, “Deuteronomy,” an’ I see he wasn’t goin’ to say no more
an’ so I spoke up quick, an’ says I: “Parson,” says I, “he has spoke
his heart’s desire. He has named hisself after me entire—Deuteronomy
Jones, Senior.”

An’ so he was obligated to say it, an’ so it is writ in the family
record colume in the big Bible, though I spelt his Senior with a little
s, an’ writ him down ez the only son of the Senior with the big S,
which it seems to me fixes it about right for the time bein’.

Well, when the rector had got thoo an’ he had wropped up his robes an’
put ’em in his wallet, an’ had told us to prepare for conformation, he
pernounced a blessin’ upon us an’ went.

Then Sonny seein’ it was all over, why, _he come down_. He was wet ez
a drownded rat, but wife rubbed him off an’ give him some hot tea an’
he come a-snuggin’ up in my lap, thess ez sweet a child ez you ever
see in yo’ life, an’ I talked to him ez fatherly ez I could, told him
we was all ‘Piscopals now, an’ soon ez his little foot got well I was
goin’ to take him out to Sunday-school to tote a banner—all his little
‘Piscopal friends totes banners—an’ thet he could pick out some purty
candles for the altar, an’ he ’lowed immejate thet he’d buy pink ones.
Sonny always was death on pink—showed it from the time he could snatch
a pink rose—an’ wife she ain’t never dressed him in nothin’ else.
Ever’ pair o’ little breeches he’s got is either pink or pink-trimmed.

Well, I talked along to him till I worked ’round to shamin’ him a
little for havin’ to be christened settin’ up on top a bean-arbor, same
ez a crow-bird, which I told him the parson he wouldn’t ’a’’ done ef
he’d ’a’’ felt free to ’ve left it undone. ’Twasn’t to indulge him he
done it, but to bless him an’ to comfort our hearts. Well, after I had
reasoned with him severe that-a-way a while, he says, says he, thess ez
sweet an’ mild, says he, “Daddy, nex’ time y’all gits christened, I’ll
come down an’ be christened right—like a good boy.”

Th’ ain’t a sweeter child in’ardly ‘n what Sonny is, nowheres, git him
to feel right comf’table, and I know it, an’ that’s why I have patience
with his little out’ard ways.

“Yes, sir,” says he; “nex’ time I’ll be christened like a good boy.”

Then, of co’se, I explained to him thet it couldn’t never be did no
mo’, ’cause it had been did, an’ did ‘Piscopal, which is secure. An’
then what you reckon the little feller said?

Says he, “Yes, daddy, but _s’pos’in’ mine don’t take_. How ’bout that?”

An’ I didn’t try to explain no further. What was the use? Wife, she
had drawed a stool close-t up to my knee, an’ set there sortin’ out
the little yaller rings ez they’d dry out on his head, an’ when he
said that I thess looked at her an’ we both looked at him, an’ says I,
“Wife,” says I, “ef they’s anything in heavenly looks an’ behavior, I
b’lieve that christenin’ is started to take on him a’ready.”

An’ I b’lieve it had.

  CHRISTMAS NIGHT WITH SATAN
  BY
  JOHN FOX, JR.

 “All that is literature seeks to communicate power.”[6] Here the power
 communicated is that of sympathizing with God’s “lesser children.”
 The humanitarian story is a long step in advance of the fable. It
 recognizes the true relations of the animal world to man, and insists
 that it be dealt with righteously and sympathetically.




CHRISTMAS NIGHT WITH SATAN[7]


No night was this in Hades with solemn-eyed Dante, for Satan was only
a woolly little black dog, and surely no dog was ever more absurdly
misnamed. When Uncle Carey first heard that name, he asked gravely:

“Why, Dinnie, where in h——,” Uncle Carey gulped slightly, “did you
get him?” And Dinnie laughed merrily, for she saw the fun of the
question, and shook her black curls.

“He didn’t come f’um _that place_.”

Distinctly Satan had not come from that place. On the contrary,
he might by a miracle have dropped straight from some Happy
Hunting-Ground, for all the signs he gave of having touched pitch in
this or another sphere. Nothing human was ever born that was gentler,
merrier, more trusting or more lovable than Satan. That was why Uncle
Carey said again gravely that he could hardly tell Satan and his
little mistress apart. He rarely saw them apart, and as both had black
tangled hair and bright black eyes; as one awoke every morning with a
happy smile and the other with a jolly bark; as they played all day
like wind-shaken shadows and each won every heart at first sight—the
likeness was really rather curious. I have always believed that Satan
made the spirit of Dinnie’s house, orthodox and severe though it was,
almost kindly toward his great namesake. I know I have never been able,
since I knew little Satan, to think old Satan as bad as I once painted
him, though I am sure the little dog had many pretty tricks that the
“old boy” doubtless has never used in order to amuse his friends.

“Shut the door, Saty, please,” Dinnie would say, precisely as she would
say it to Uncle Billy, the butler, and straightway Satan would launch
himself at it—bang! He never would learn to close it softly, for Satan
liked that—bang!

If you kept tossing a coin or marble in the air, Satan would keep
catching it and putting it back in your hand for another throw, till
you got tired. Then he would drop it on a piece of rag carpet, snatch
the carpet with his teeth, throw the coin across the room, and rush for
it like mad, until he got tired. If you put a penny on his nose, he
would wait until you counted, one—two—_three_! Then he would toss it
up himself and catch it. Thus, perhaps, Satan grew to love Mammon right
well, but for another and better reason than that he liked simply to
throw it around—as shall now be made plain.

A rubber ball with a hole in it was his favorite plaything, and he
would take it in his mouth and rush around the house like a child,
squeezing it to make it whistle. When he got a new ball, he would hide
his old one away until the new one was the worse worn of the two, and
then he would bring out the old one again. If Dinnie gave him a nickel
or a dime, when they went down-town, Satan would rush into a store,
rear up on the counter where the rubber balls were kept, drop the coin,
and get a ball for himself. Thus, Satan learned finance. He began to
hoard his pennies, and one day Uncle Carey found a pile of seventeen
under a corner of the carpet. Usually he carried to Dinnie all coins
that he found in the street, but he showed one day that he was going
into the ball-business for himself. Uncle Carey had given Dinnie a
nickel for some candy, and, as usual, Satan trotted down the street
behind her. As usual, Satan stopped before the knick-knack shop.

“Tum on, Saty,” said Dinnie. Satan reared against the door as he always
did, and Dinnie said again:

“Tum on, Saty.” As usual, Satan dropped to his haunches, but what was
unusual, he failed to bark. Now Dinnie had got a new ball for Satan
only that morning, so Dinnie stamped her foot.

“I tell you to tum on, Saty.” Satan never moved. He looked at Dinnie as
much as to say:

“I have never disobeyed you before, little mistress, but this time
I have an excellent reason for what must seem to you very bad
manners——” and being a gentleman withal, Satan rose on his haunches
and begged.

“You’re des a pig, Saty,” said Dinnie, but with a sigh for the candy
that was not to be, Dinnie opened the door, and Satan, to her wonder,
rushed to the counter, put his forepaws on it, and dropped from his
mouth a dime. Satan had found that coin on the street. He didn’t bark
for change, nor beg for two balls, but he had got it in his woolly
little head, somehow, that in that store a coin meant a ball, though
never before nor afterward did he try to get a ball for a penny.

Satan slept in Uncle Carey’s room, for of all people, after Dinnie,
Satan loved Uncle Carey best. Every day at noon he would go to an
upstairs window and watch the cars come around the corner, until a very
tall, square-shouldered young man swung to the ground, and down Satan
would scamper—yelping—to meet him at the gate. If Uncle Carey, after
supper and when Dinnie was in bed, started out of the house, still in
his business clothes, Satan would leap out before him, knowing that he
too might be allowed to go; but if Uncle Carey had put on black clothes
that showed a big, dazzling shirt-front, and picked up his high hat,
Satan would sit perfectly still and look disconsolate; for as there
were no parties or theatres for Dinnie, so there were none for him. But
no matter how late it was when Uncle Carey came home, he always saw
Satan’s little black nose against the window-pane and heard his bark of
welcome.

After intelligence, Satan’s chief trait was lovableness—nobody
ever knew him to fight, to snap at anything, or to get angry; after
lovableness, it was politeness. If he wanted something to eat, if he
wanted Dinnie to go to bed, if he wanted to get out of the door, he
would beg—beg prettily on his haunches, his little red tongue out and
his funny little paws hanging loosely. Indeed, it was just because
Satan was so little less than human, I suppose, that old Satan began
to be afraid he might have a soul. So the wicked old namesake with the
Hoofs and Horns laid a trap for little Satan, and, as he is apt to do,
he began laying it early—long, indeed, before Christmas.

When Dinnie started to kindergarten that autumn, Satan found that there
was one place where he could never go. Like the lamb, he could not go
to school; so while Dinnie was away, Satan began to make friends. He
would bark, “Howdy-do?” to every dog that passed his gate. Many stopped
to rub noses with him through the fence—even Hugo the mastiff, and
nearly all, indeed, except one strange-looking dog that appeared every
morning at precisely nine o’clock and took his stand on the corner.
There he would lie patiently until a funeral came along, and then Satan
would see him take his place at the head of the procession; and thus he
would march out to the cemetery and back again. Nobody knew where he
came from nor where he went, and Uncle Carey called him the “funeral
dog” and said he was doubtless looking for his dead master. Satan even
made friends with a scrawny little yellow dog that followed an old
drunkard around—a dog that, when his master fell in the gutter, would
go and catch a policeman by the coat-tail, lead the officer to his
helpless master, and spend the night with him in jail.

By and by Satan began to slip out of the house at night, and Uncle
Billy said he reckoned Satan had “jined de club”; and late one night,
when he had not come in, Uncle Billy told Uncle Carey that it was
“powerful slippery and he reckoned they’d better send de kerridge after
him”—an innocent remark that made Uncle Carey send a boot after the
old butler, who fled chuckling down the stairs, and left Uncle Carey
chuckling in his room.

Satan had “jined de club”—the big club—and no dog was too lowly in
Satan’s eyes for admission; for no priest ever preached the brotherhood
of man better than Satan lived it—both with man and dog. And thus he
lived it that Christmas night—to his sorrow.

Christmas Eve had been gloomy—the gloomiest of Satan’s life. Uncle
Carey had gone to a neighboring town at noon. Satan had followed him
down to the station, and when the train started, Uncle Carey had
ordered him to go home. Satan took his time about going home, not
knowing it was Christmas Eve. He found strange things happening to dogs
that day. The truth was, that policemen were shooting all dogs found
that were without a collar and a license, and every now and then a bang
and a howl somewhere would stop Satan in his tracks. At a little yellow
house on the edge of town he saw half a dozen strange dogs in a kennel,
and every now and then a <DW64> would lead a new one up to the house
and deliver him to a big man at the door, who, in return, would drop
something into the <DW64>’s hand. While Satan waited, the old drunkard
came along with his little dog at his heels, paused before the door,
looked a moment at his faithful follower, and went slowly on. Satan
little knew the old drunkard’s temptation, for in that yellow house
kind-hearted people had offered fifteen cents for each dog brought to
them, without a license, that they might mercifully put it to death,
and fifteen cents was the precise price for a drink of good whiskey.
Just then there was another bang and another howl somewhere, and Satan
trotted home to meet a calamity. Dinnie was gone. Her mother had taken
her out in the country to Grandmother Dean’s to spend Christmas, as was
the family custom, and Mrs. Dean would not wait any longer for Satan;
so she told Uncle Billy to bring him out after supper.

“Ain’t you ’shamed o’ yo’self—suh—?” said the old butler, “keeping me
from ketchin’ Christmas gifts dis day?”

Uncle Billy was indignant, for the <DW64>s begin at four o’clock in
the afternoon of Christmas Eve to slip around corners and jump from
hiding-places to shout “Christmas Gif’—Christmas Gif’”; and the one
who shouts first gets a gift. No wonder it was gloomy for Satan—Uncle
Carey, Dinnie, and all gone, and not a soul but Uncle Billy in the
big house. Every few minutes he would trot on his little black legs
upstairs and downstairs, looking for his mistress. As dusk came on, he
would every now and then howl plaintively. After begging his supper,
and while Uncle Billy was hitching up a horse in the stable, Satan
went out in the yard and lay with his nose between the close panels of
the fence—quite heart-broken. When he saw his old friend, Hugo the
mastiff, trotting into the gas-light, he began to bark his delight
frantically. The big mastiff stopped and nosed his sympathy through
the fence for a moment and walked slowly on, Satan frisking and barking
along inside. At the gate Hugo stopped, and raising one huge paw,
playfully struck it. The gate flew open, and with a happy yelp Satan
leaped into the street. The noble mastiff hesitated as though this were
not quite regular. He did not belong to the club, and he didn’t know
that Satan had ever been away from home after dark in his life. For a
moment he seemed to wait for Dinnie to call him back as she always did,
but this time there was no sound, and Hugo walked majestically on, with
absurd little Satan running in a circle about him. On the way they met
the “funeral dog,” who glanced inquiringly at Satan, shied from the
mastiff, and trotted on. On the next block the old drunkard’s yellow
cur ran across the street, and after interchanging the compliments of
the season, ran back after his staggering master. As they approached
the railroad track a strange dog joined them, to whom Hugo paid no
attention. At the crossing another new acquaintance bounded toward
them. This one—a half-breed shepherd—was quite friendly, and he
received Satan’s advances with affable condescension. Then another came
and another, and little Satan’s head got quite confused. They were a
queer-looking lot of curs and half-breeds from the <DW64> settlement
at the edge of the woods, and though Satan had little experience, his
instincts told him that all was not as it should be, and had he been
human he would have wondered very much how they had escaped the carnage
that day. Uneasy, he looked around for Hugo; but Hugo had disappeared.
Once or twice Hugo had looked around for Satan, and Satan paying no
attention, the mastiff trotted on home in disgust. Just then a powerful
yellow cur sprang out of the darkness over the railroad track, and
Satan sprang to meet him, and so nearly had the life scared out of him
by the snarl and flashing fangs of the new-comer that he hardly had the
strength to shrink back behind his new friend, the half-breed shepherd.

A strange thing then happened. The other dogs became suddenly quiet,
and every eye was on the yellow cur. He sniffed the air once or twice,
gave two or three peculiar low growls, and all those dogs except Satan
lost the civilization of centuries and went back suddenly to the time
when they were wolves and were looking for a leader. The cur was Lobo
for that little pack, and after a short parley, he lifted his nose high
and started away without looking back, while the other dogs silently
trotted after him. With a mystified yelp, Satan ran after them. The
cur did not take the turnpike, but jumped the fence into a field,
making his way by the rear of houses, from which now and then another
dog would slink out and silently join the band. Every one of them
Satan nosed most friendlily, and to his great joy the funeral dog, on
the edge of town, leaped into their midst. Ten minutes later the cur
stopped in the midst of some woods, as though he would inspect his
followers. Plainly, he disapproved of Satan, and Satan kept out of his
way. Then he sprang into the turnpike and the band trotted down it,
under flying black clouds and shifting bands of brilliant moonlight.
Once, a buggy swept past them. A familiar odor struck Satan’s nose, and
he stopped for a moment to smell the horse’s tracks; and right he was,
too, for out at her grandmother’s Dinnie refused to be comforted, and
in that buggy was Uncle Billy going back to town after him.

Snow was falling. It was a great lark for Satan. Once or twice, as he
trotted along, he had to bark his joy aloud, and each time the big cur
gave him such a fierce growl that he feared thereafter to open his
jaws. But he was happy for all that, to be running out into the night
with such a lot of funny friends and not to know or care where he was
going. He got pretty tired presently, for over hill and down hill they
went, at that unceasing trot, trot, trot! Satan’s tongue began to hang
out. Once he stopped to rest, but the loneliness frightened him and
he ran on after them with his heart almost bursting. He was about to
lie right down and die, when the cur stopped, sniffed the air once or
twice, and with those same low growls, led the marauders through a rail
fence into the woods, and lay quietly down. How Satan loved that soft,
thick grass, all snowy that it was! It was almost as good as his own
bed at home. And there they lay—how long, Satan never knew, for he
went to sleep and dreamed that he was after a rat in the barn at home;
and he yelped in his sleep, which made the cur lift his big yellow
head and show his fangs. The moving of the half-breed shepherd and the
funeral dog waked him at last, and Satan got up. Half crouching, the
cur was leading the way toward the dark, still woods on top of the
hill, over which the Star of Bethlehem was lowly sinking, and under
which lay a flock of the gentle creatures that seemed to have been
almost sacred to the Lord of that Star. They were in sore need of a
watchful shepherd now. Satan was stiff and chilled, but he was rested
and had had his sleep, and he was just as ready for fun as he always
was. He didn’t understand that sneaking. Why they didn’t all jump and
race and bark as he wanted to, he couldn’t see; but he was too polite
to do otherwise than as they did, and so he sneaked after them; and one
would have thought he knew, as well as the rest, the hellish mission on
which they were bent.

Out of the woods they went, across a little branch, and there the big
cur lay flat again in the grass. A faint bleat came from the hill-side
beyond, where Satan could see another woods—and then another bleat,
and another. And the cur began to creep again, like a snake in the
grass; and the others crept too, and little Satan crept, though it
was all a sad mystery to him. Again the cur lay still, but only long
enough for Satan to see curious, fat, white shapes above him—and
then, with a blood-curdling growl, the big brute dashed forward. Oh,
there was fun in them after all! Satan barked joyfully. Those were
some new playmates—those fat, white, hairy things up there; and Satan
was amazed when, with frightened snorts, they fled in every direction.
But this was a new game, perhaps, of which he knew nothing, and as did
the rest, so did Satan. He picked out one of the white things and fled
barking after it. It was a little fellow that he was after, but little
as he was, Satan might never have caught up, had not the sheep got
tangled in some brush. Satan danced about him in mad glee, giving him a
playful nip at his wool and springing back to give him another nip, and
then away again. Plainly, he was not going to bite back, and when the
sheep struggled itself tired and sank down in a heap, Satan came close
and licked him, and as he was very warm and woolly, he lay down and
snuggled up against him for a while, listening to the turmoil that was
going on around him. And as he listened, he got frightened.

If this was a new game it was certainly a very peculiar one—the wild
rush, the bleats of terror, gasps of agony, and the fiendish growls of
attack and the sounds of ravenous gluttony. With every hair bristling,
Satan rose and sprang from the woods—and stopped with a fierce
tingling of the nerves that brought him horror and fascination. One of
the white shapes lay still before him. There was a great steaming red
splotch on the snow, and a strange odor in the air that made him dizzy;
but only for a moment. Another white shape rushed by. A tawny streak
followed, and then, in a patch of moonlight, Satan saw the yellow cur
with his teeth fastened in the throat of his moaning playmate. Like
lightning Satan sprang at the cur, who tossed him ten feet away and
went back to his awful work. Again Satan leaped, but just then a shout
rose behind him, and the cur leaped too as though a bolt of lightning
had crashed over him, and, no longer noticing Satan or sheep, began
to quiver with fright and slink away. Another shout rose from another
direction—another from another.

“Drive ’em into the barn-yard!” was the cry.

Now and then there was a fearful bang and a howl of death-agony, as
some dog tried to break through the encircling men, who yelled and
cursed as they closed in on the trembling brutes that slunk together
and crept on; for it is said, every sheep-killing dog knows his fate if
caught, and will make little effort to escape. With them went Satan,
through the barn-yard gate, where they huddled in a corner—a shamed
and terrified group. A tall overseer stood at the gate.

“Ten of ’em!” he said grimly.

He had been on the lookout for just such a tragedy, for there
had recently been a sheep-killing raid on several farms in that
neighborhood, and for several nights he had had a lantern hung out on
the edge of the woods to scare the dogs away; but a drunken farm-hand
had neglected his duty that Christmas Eve.

“Yassuh, an’ dey’s jus’ sebenteen dead sheep out dar,” said a <DW64>.

“Look at the little one,” said a tall boy who looked like the overseer;
and Satan knew that he spoke of him.

“Go back to the house, son,” said the overseer, “and tell your mother
to give you a Christmas present I got for you yesterday.” With a glad
whoop the boy dashed away, and in a moment dashed back with a brand-new
.32 Winchester in his hand.

The dark hour before dawn was just breaking on Christmas Day. It was
the hour when Satan usually rushed upstairs to see if his little
mistress was asleep. If he were only at home now, and if he only had
known how his little mistress was weeping for him amid her playthings
and his—two new balls and a brass-studded collar with a silver plate
on which was his name, Satan Dean; and if Dinnie could have seen him
now, her heart would have broken; for the tall boy raised his gun.
There was a jet of smoke, a sharp, clean crack, and the funeral dog
started on the right way at last toward his dead master. Another crack,
and the yellow cur leaped from the ground and fell kicking. Another
crack and another, and with each crack a dog tumbled, until little
Satan sat on his haunches amid the writhing pack, alone. His time was
now come. As the rifle was raised, he heard up at the big house the
cries of children; the popping of fire-crackers; tooting of horns and
whistles and loud shouts of “Christmas Gif’, Christmas Gif’!” His
little heart beat furiously. Perhaps he knew just what he was doing;
perhaps it was the accident of habit; most likely Satan simply wanted
to go home—but when that gun rose, Satan rose too, on his haunches,
his tongue out, his black eyes steady and his funny little paws hanging
loosely—and begged! The boy lowered the gun.

“Down, sir!” Satan dropped obediently, but when the gun was lifted
again, Satan rose again, and again he begged.

“Down, I tell you!” This time Satan would not down, but sat begging for
his life. The boy turned.

“Papa, I can’t shoot that dog.” Perhaps Satan had reached the stern old
overseer’s heart. Perhaps he remembered suddenly that it was Christmas.
At any rate, he said gruffly:

“Well, let him go.”

“Come here, sir!” Satan bounded toward the tall boy, frisking and
trustful and begged again.

“Go home, sir!”

Satan needed no second command. Without a sound he fled out the
barn-yard, and, as he swept under the front gate, a little girl ran out
of the front door of the big house and dashed down the steps, shrieking:

“Saty! Saty! Oh, Saty!” But Satan never heard. On he fled, across the
crisp fields, leaped the fence and struck the road, lickety-split! for
home, while Dinnie dropped sobbing in the snow.

“Hitch up a horse, quick,” said Uncle Carey, rushing after Dinnie and
taking her up in his arms. Ten minutes later, Uncle Carey and Dinnie,
both warmly bundled up, were after flying Satan. They never caught him
until they reached the hill on the outskirts of town, where was the
kennel of the kind-hearted people who were giving painless death to
Satan’s four-footed kind, and where they saw him stop and turn from the
road. There was divine providence in Satan’s flight for one little dog
that Christmas morning; for Uncle Carey saw the old drunkard staggering
down the road without his little companion, and a moment later, both he
and Dinnie saw Satan nosing a little yellow cur between the palings.
Uncle Carey knew the little cur, and while Dinnie was shrieking for
Satan, he was saying under his breath:

“Well, I swear!—I swear!—I swear!” And while the big man who came to
the door was putting Satan into Dinnie’s arms, he said sharply:

“Who brought that yellow dog here?” The man pointed to the old
drunkard’s figure turning a corner at the foot of the hill.

“I thought so; I thought so. He sold him to you for—for a drink of
whiskey.”

The man whistled.

“Bring him out. I’ll pay his license.”

So back went Satan and the little cur to Grandmother Dean’s—and Dinnie
cried when Uncle Carey told her why he was taking the little cur along.
With her own hands she put Satan’s old collar on the little brute, took
him to the kitchen, and fed him first of all. Then she went into the
breakfast-room.

“Uncle Billy,” she said severely, “didn’t I tell you not to let Saty
out?”

“Yes, Miss Dinnie,” said the old butler.

“Didn’t I tell you I was goin’ to whoop you if you let Saty out?”

“Yes, Miss Dinnie.”

Miss Dinnie pulled forth from her Christmas treasures a toy riding-whip
and the old <DW54>’s eyes began to roll in mock terror.

“I’m sorry, Uncle Billy, but I des got to whoop you a little.”

“Let Uncle Billy off, Dinnie,” said Uncle Carey, “this is Christmas.”

“All wite,” said Dinnie, and she turned to Satan.

In his shining new collar and innocent as a cherub, Satan sat on the
hearth begging for his breakfast.




  A NEST-EGG

  BY

  JAMES WHITCOMB RILEY

  This is the simple character sketch in which there is
  romance treated with a fine reserve. It employs the local
  color so characteristic of Mr. Riley’s poems of Indiana.




  A NEST-EGG[8]


  But a few miles from the city here, and on the sloping
  banks of the stream noted more for its plenitude of
  “chubs” and “shiners” than the gamier two- and
  four-pound bass for which, in season, so many credulous
  anglers flock and lie in wait, stands a country residence,
  so convenient to the stream, and so inviting in its pleasant
  exterior and comfortable surroundings—barn, dairy,
  and spring-house—that the weary, sunburnt, and disheartened
  fisherman, out from the dusty town for a
  day of recreation, is often wont to seek its hospitality.
  The house in style of architecture is something of a departure
  from the typical farmhouse, being designed
  and fashioned with no regard to symmetry or proportion,
  but rather, as is suggested, built to conform to the
  matter-of-fact and most sensible ideas of its owner, who,
  if it pleased him, would have small windows where large
  ones ought to be, and vice versa, whether they balanced
  properly to the eye or not. And chimneys—he would
  have as many as he wanted, and no two alike, in either
  height or size. And if he wanted the front of the house
  turned from all possible view, as though abashed at any
  chance of public scrutiny, why, that was his affair and
  not the public’s; and, with like perverseness, if he chose
  to thrust his kitchen under the public’s very nose, what
  should the generally fagged-out, half-famished representative
  of that dignified public do but reel in his dead
  minnow, shoulder his fishing-rod, clamber over the back
  fence of the old farmhouse and inquire within, or jog
  back to the city, inwardly anathematizing that very particular
  locality or the whole rural district in general.
  That is just the way that farmhouse looked to the writer
  of this sketch one week ago—so individual it seemed—so
  liberal, and yet so independent. It wasn’t even
  weather-boarded, but, instead, was covered smoothly with
  some cement, as though the plasterers had come while
  the folks were visiting, and so, unable to get at the
  interior, had just plastered the outside.

  I am more than glad that I was hungry enough, and
  weary enough, and wise enough to take the house at
  its first suggestion; for, putting away my fishing-tackle
  for the morning, at least, I went up the sloping bank,
  crossed the dusty road, and confidently clambered over
  the fence.

  Not even a growling dog to intimate that I was trespassing.
  All was open—gracious-looking—pastoral. The
  sward beneath my feet was velvet-like in elasticity, and
  the scarce visible path I followed through it led promptly
  to the open kitchen door. From within I heard a woman
  singing some old ballad in an undertone, while at the
  threshold a trim, white-spurred rooster stood poised on
  one foot, curving his glossy neck and cocking his wattled
  head as though to catch the meaning of the words.
  I paused. It was a scene I felt restrained from breaking
  in upon, nor would I, but for the sound of a strong
  male voice coming around the corner of the house:

  “Sir. Howdy!”

  Turning, I saw a rough-looking but kindly featured
  man of sixty-five, the evident owner of the place.

  I returned his salutation with some confusion and much
  deference. “I must really beg your pardon for this
  intrusion,” I began, “but I have been tiring myself
  out fishing, and your home here looked so pleasant—and
  I felt so thirsty—and——”

  “Want a drink, I reckon,” said the old man, turning
  abruptly toward the kitchen door, then pausing as
  suddenly, with a backward motion of his thumb—“jest
  foller the path here down to the little brick—that’s the
  spring—and you’ll find ’at you’ve come to the right place
  fer drinkin’-worter! Hold on a minute tel I git you a
  tumbler—there’re nothin’ down there but a tin.”

  “Then don’t trouble yourself any further,” I said,
  heartily, “for I’d rather drink from a tin cup than a
  goblet of pure gold.”

  “And so’d I,” said the old man, reflectively, turning
  mechanically, and following me down the path.
  “‘Druther drink out of a tin—er jest a fruit-can with
  the top knocked off—er—er—er a gourd,” he added
  in a zestful, reminiscent tone of voice, that so heightened
  my impatient thirst that I reached the spring-house
  fairly in a run.

  “Well-sir!” exclaimed my host, in evident delight,
  as I stood dipping my nose in the second cupful of the
  cool, revivifying liquid, and peering in a congratulatory
  kind of way at the blurred and rubicund reflection of my
  features in the bottom of the cup, “well-sir, blame-don!
  ef it don’t do a feller good to see you enjoyin’ of it that-a-way!
  But don’t you drink too much o’ the worter!—’cause
  there’re some sweet milk over there in one o’ them
  crocks, maybe; and ef you’ll jest, kindo’ keerful-like,
  lift off the led of that third one, say, over there to yer
  left, and dip you out a tinful er two o’ that, w’y, it’ll
  do you good to drink it, and it’ll do me good to see you
  at it——But hold up!—hold up!” he called, abruptly,
  as, nowise loath, I bent above the vessel designated.
  “Hold yer hosses fer a second! Here’s Marthy; let her
  git it fer ye.”

  If I was at first surprised and confused, meeting the
  master of the house, I was wholly startled and chagrined
  in my present position before its mistress. But as I
  arose, and stammered, in my confusion, some incoherent
  apology, I was again reassured and put at greater ease
  by the comprehensive and forgiving smile the woman
  gave me, as I yielded her my place, and, with lifted hat,
  awaited her further kindness.

  “I came just in time, sir,” she said, half laughingly,
  as with strong, bare arms she reached across the gurgling
  trough and replaced the lid that I had partially removed.—“I
  came just in time, I see, to prevent father
  from having you dip into the ’morning’s-milk,’ which, of
  course, has scarcely a veil of cream over the face of it
  as yet. But men, as you are doubtless willing to admit,”
  she went on jocularly, “don’t know about these things.
  You must pardon father, as much for his well-meaning
  ignorance of such matters, as for this cup of cream,
  which I am sure you will better relish.”

  She arose, still smiling, with her eyes turned frankly
  on my own. And I must be excused when I confess
  that as I bowed my thanks, taking the proffered cup
  and lifting it to my lips, I stared with an uncommon
  interest and pleasure at the donor’s face.

  She was a woman of certainly not less than forty years
  of age. But the figure, and the rounded grace and fulness
  of it, together with the features and the eyes, completed
  as fine a specimen of physical and mental health
  as ever it has been my fortune to meet; there was something
  so full of purpose and resolve—something so wholesome,
  too, about the character—something so womanly—I
  might almost say manly, and would, but for the petty
  prejudice maybe occasioned by the trivial fact of a
  locket having dropped from her bosom as she knelt; and
  that trinket still dangles in my memory even as it then
  dangled and dropped back to its concealment in her
  breast as she arose. But her face, by no means handsome
  in the common meaning, was marked with a breadth
  and strength of outline and expression that approached
  the heroic—a face that once seen is forever fixed in
  memory—a personage once met one must know more of.
  And so it was, that an hour later, as I strolled with the
  old man about his farm, looking, to all intents, with the
  profoundest interest at his Devonshires, Shorthorns, Jerseys,
  and the like, I lured from him something of an
  outline of his daughter’s history.

  “There’re no better girl ‘n Marthy!” he said, mechanically
  answering some ingenious allusion to her worth.
  “And yit,” he went on reflectively, stooping from his
  seat in the barn door and with his open jack-knife picking
  up a little chip with the point of the blade—“and
  yit—you wouldn’t believe it—but Marthy was the oldest
  o’ three daughters, and hed—I may say—hed more advantages
  o’ marryin’—and yit, as I was jest goin’ to say,
  she’s the very one ’at didn’t marry. Hed every advantage—Marthy
  did. W’y, we even hed her educated—her
  mother was a-livin’ then—and we was well enough
  fixed to afford the educatin’ of her, mother allus contended—and
  we was—besides, it was Marthy’s notion,
  too, and you know how women is thataway when they git
  their head set. So we sent Marthy down to Indianop’lus,
  and got her books and putt her in school there, and paid
  fer her keepin’ and ever’thing; and she jest—well, you
  may say, lived there stiddy fer better’n four year. O’
  course she’d git back ever’ once-an-a-while, but her visits
  was allus, some-way-another, onsatisfactory-like, ’cause,
  you see, Marthy was allus my favorite, and I’d allus
  laughed and told her ’at the other girls could git married
  if they wanted, but _she_ was goin’ to be the ‘nest-egg’
  of our family, and ’slong as I lived I wanted her at home
  with me. And she’d laugh and contend ’a’t she’d as lif
  be an old maid as not, and never expected to marry,
  ner didn’t want to. But she had me sceart onc’t,
  though! Come out from the city one time, durin’ the
  army, with a peart-lookin’ young feller in blue clothes
  and gilt straps on his shoulders. Young lieutenant he
  was—name o’ Morris. Was layin’ in camp there in the
  city somers. I disremember which camp it was now adzackly—but
  anyway, it ’peared like he had plenty o’
  time to go and come, fer from that time on he kep’
  on a-comin’—ever’ time Marthy ’ud come home, he’d
  come, too; and I got to noticin’ ’a’t Marthy come home
  a good ’eal more’n she used to afore Morris first brought
  her. And blame ef the thing didn’t git to worryin’ me!
  And onc’t I spoke to mother about it, and told her ef
  I thought the feller wanted to marry Marthy I’d jest
  stop his comin’ right then and there. But mother she
  sorto’ smiled and said somepin’ ’bout men a-never seein’
  through nothin’; and when I ast her what she meant,
  w’y, she ups and tells me ’a’t Morris didn’t keer nothin’
  fer Marthy, ner Marthy fer Morris, and then went on
  to tell me that Morris was kindo’ aidgin’ up to’rds Annie—she
  was next to Marthy, you know, in pint of years
  and experience, but ever’body allus said ’a’t Annie was
  the purtiest one o’ the whole three of ’em. And so when
  mother told me ’a’t the signs pinted to’rds Annie, w’y, of
  course, I hedn’t no particular objections to that, ’cause
  Morris was of good fambly enough it turned out, and,
  in fact, was as stirrin’ a young feller as ever I’d want
  fer a son-in-law, and so I hed nothin’ more to say—ner
  they wasn’t no occasion to say nothin’, ’cause right along
  about then I begin to notice ’a’t Marthy quit comin’
  home so much, and Morris kep’ a-comin’ more. Tel
  finally, one time he was out here all by hisself, ’long
  about dusk, come out here where I was feedin’, and ast
  me, all at onc’t, and in a straightfor’ard way, ef he
  couldn’t marry Annie; and, some-way-another, blame ef
  it didn’t make me as happy as him when I told him
  yes! You see that thing proved, pine-blank, ’a’t he
  wasn’t a-fishin’ round fer Marthy. Well-sir, as luck
  would hev it, Marthy got home about a half-hour later,
  and I’ll give you my word I was never so glad to see
  the girl in my life! It was foolish in me, I reckon, but
  when I see her drivin’ up the lane—it was purt’ nigh
  dark then, but I could see her through the open winder
  from where I was settin’ at the supper-table, and so I
  jest quietly excused myself, p’lite-like, as a feller will,
  you know, when they’s comp’ny round, and I slipped off
  and met her jest as she was about to git out to open
  the barn gate. ’Hold up, Marthy,’ says I; ’set right
  where you air; I’ll open the gate fer you, and I’ll do
  anything else fer you in the world ’a’t you want me
  to!’

  “‘W’y, what’s pleased _you_ so?’ she says, laughin’,
  as she druv through slow-like and a-ticklin’ my nose with
  the cracker of the buggy-whip.—’What’s pleased _you_?’

  “‘Guess,’ says I, jerkin’ the gate to, and turnin’ to
  lift her out.

  “‘The new peanner’s come?’ says she, eager-like.

  “‘Yer new peanner’s come,’ says I; ’but that’s not
  it.’

  “‘Strawberries fer supper?’ says she.

  “‘Strawberries fer supper,’ says I; ’but that ain’t
  it.’

  “Jest then Morris’s hoss whinnied in the barn, and
  she glanced up quick and smilin’ and says, ’Somebody
  come to see somebody?’

  “‘You’re a-gittin’ warm,’ says I.

  “‘Somebody come to see _me_?’ she says, anxious-like.

  “‘No,’ says I, ’a’nd I’m glad of it—fer this one ’a’t’s
  come wants to git married, and o’ course I wouldn’t
  harber in my house no young feller ’a’t was a-layin’ round
  fer a chance to steal away the “Nest-egg,’” says I,
  laughin’.

  “Marthy had riz up in the buggy by this time, but
  as I helt up my hands to her, she sorto’ drawed back
  a minute, and says, all serious-like and kindo’ whisperin’:

  “‘Is it _Annie_?’

  “I nodded. ’Yes,’ says I, ’a’nd what’s more, I’ve
  give my consent, and mother’s give hern—the thing’s
  all settled. Come, jump out and run in and be happy
  with the rest of us!’ and I helt out my hands ag’in, but
  she didn’t ’pear to take no heed. She was kindo’ pale,
  too, I thought, and swallered a time er two like as ef she
  couldn’t speak plain.

  “‘Who is the man?’ she ast.

  “‘Who—who’s the man?’ I says, a-gittin’ kindo’ out
  o’ patience with the girl.—’W’y, you know who it is,
  o’ course.—It’s Morris,’ says I. ’Come, jump down!
  Don’t you see I’m waitin’ fer ye?’

  “‘Then take me,’ she says; and blame-don! ef the girl
  didn’t keel right over in my arms as limber as a rag!
  Clean fainted away! Honest! Jest the excitement, I
  reckon, o’ breakin’ it to her so suddent-like—’cause she
  liked Annie, I’ve sometimes thought, better’n even she
  did her own mother. Didn’t go half so hard with
  her when her other sister married. Yes-sir!” said
  the old man, by way of sweeping conclusion, as he rose
  to his feet—“Marthy’s the on’y one of ’em ’a’t never
  married—both the others is gone—Morris went all
  through the army and got back safe and sound—’s livin’
  in Idyho, and doin’ fust-rate. Sends me a letter ever’
  now and then. Got three little chunks o’ grandchildren
  out there, and I’ never laid eyes on one of ’em. You
  see, I’m a-gittin’ to be quite a middle-aged man—in fact,
  a very middle-aged man, you might say. Sence mother
  died, which has be’n—lem-me-see—mother’s be’n dead
  somers in the neighborhood o’ ten year.—Sence mother
  died I’ve be’n a-gittin’ more and more o’ _Marthy’s_ notion—that
  is,—you couldn’t ever hire _me_ to marry
  nobody! and them has allus be’n and still is the ’Nest-egg’s’
  views! Listen! That’s her a-callin’ fer us now.
  You must sorto’ overlook the freedom, but I told Marthy
  you’d promised to take dinner with us to-day, and it
  ’ud never do to disappint her now. Come on.” And,
  ah! it would have made the soul of you either rapturously
  glad or madly envious to see how meekly I consented.

  I am always thinking that I never tasted coffee till
  that day; I am always thinking of the crisp and steaming
  rolls, ored over with the molten gold that hinted
  of the clover-fields, and the bees that had not yet permitted
  the honey of the bloom and the white blood of
  the stalk to be divorced; I am always thinking that the
  young and tender pullet we happy three discussed was
  a near and dear relative of the gay patrician rooster that
  I first caught peering so inquisitively in at the kitchen
  door; and I am always—always thinking of “The Nest-egg.”




  WEE WILLIE WINKIE

  BY

  RUDYARD KIPLING

As the sub-title, “An Officer and a Gentleman,” indicates, this is a
story of character. Mr. Kipling, like Robert Louis Stevenson, James
Whitcomb Riley, and Eugene Field, has carried into his maturity
an imperishable youth of spirit which makes him an interpreter of
children. Here he has shown what our Anglo-Saxon ideals—honor,
obedience, and reverence for woman—mean to a little child.




WEE WILLIE WINKIE[9]

 “An officer and a gentleman.”


His full name was Percival William Williams, but he picked up the other
name in a nursery-book, and that was the end of the christened titles.
His mother’s _ayah_ called him Willie-_Baba_, but as he never paid the
faintest attention to anything that the _ayah_ said, her wisdom did not
help matters.

His father was the Colonel of the 195th, and as soon as Wee Willie
Winkie was old enough to understand what Military Discipline meant,
Colonel Williams put him under it. There was no other way of managing
the child. When he was good for a week, he drew good-conduct pay; and
when he was bad, he was deprived of his good-conduct stripe. Generally
he was bad, for India offers many chances of going wrong to little
six-year-olds.

Children resent familiarity from strangers, and Wee Willie Winkie was
a very particular child. Once he accepted an acquaintance, he was
graciously pleased to thaw. He accepted Brandis, a subaltern of the
195th, on sight. Brandis was having tea at the Colonel’s, and Wee
Willie Winkie entered strong in the possession of a good-conduct badge
won for not chasing the hens round the compound. He regarded Brandis
with gravity for at least ten minutes, and then delivered himself of
his opinion.

“I like you,” said he slowly, getting off his chair and coming over to
Brandis. “I like you. I shall call you Coppy, because of your hair. Do
you _mind_ being called Coppy? It is because of ve hair, you know.”

Here was one of the most embarrassing of Wee Willie Winkie’s
peculiarities. He would look at a stranger for some time, and then,
without warning or explanation, would give him a name. And the
name stuck. No regimental penalties could break Wee Willie Winkie
of this habit. He lost his good-conduct badge for christening the
Commissioner’s wife “Pobs”; but nothing that the Colonel could do made
the Station forego the nickname, and Mrs. Collen remained “Pobs” till
the end of her stay. So Brandis was christened “Coppy,” and rose,
therefore, in the estimation of the regiment.

If Wee Willie Winkie took an interest in any one, the fortunate man was
envied alike by the mess and the rank and file. And in their envy lay
no suspicion of self-interest. “The Colonel’s son” was idolized on his
own merits entirely. Yet Wee Willie Winkie was not lovely. His face
was permanently freckled, as his legs were permanently scratched, and
in spite of his mother’s almost tearful remonstrances he had insisted
upon having his long yellow locks cut short in the military fashion. “I
want my hair like Sergeant Tummil’s,” said Wee Willie Winkie, and, his
father abetting, the sacrifice was accomplished.

Three weeks after the bestowal of his youthful affections on Lieutenant
Brandis—henceforward to be called “Coppy” for the sake of brevity—Wee
Willie Winkie was destined to behold strange things and far beyond his
comprehension.

Coppy returned his liking with interest. Coppy had let him wear
for five rapturous minutes his own big sword—just as tall as Wee
Willie Winkie. Coppy had promised him a terrier puppy, and Coppy had
permitted him to witness the miraculous operation of shaving. Nay,
more—Coppy had said that even he, Wee Willie Winkie, would rise in
time to the ownership of a box of shiny knives, a silver soap-box,
and a silver-handled “sputter-brush,” as Wee Willie Winkie called it.
Decidedly, there was no one except his own father, who could give
or take away good-conduct badges at pleasure, half so wise, strong,
and valiant as Coppy with the Afghan and Egyptian medals on his
breast. Why, then, should Coppy be guilty of the unmanly weakness of
kissing—vehemently kissing—a “big girl,” Miss Allardyce to wit? In
the course of a morning ride Wee Willie Winkie had seen Coppy so doing,
and, like the gentleman he was, had promptly wheeled round and cantered
back to his groom, lest the groom should also see.

Under ordinary circumstances he would have spoken to his father, but he
felt instinctively that this was a matter on which Coppy ought first to
be consulted.

“Coppy,” shouted Wee Willie Winkie, reining up outside that subaltern’s
bungalow early one morning—“I want to see you, Coppy!”

“Come in, young ’un,” returned Coppy, who was at early breakfast in the
midst of his dogs. “What mischief have you been getting into now?”

Wee Willie Winkie had done nothing notoriously bad for three days, and
so stood on a pinnacle of virtue.

“_I’ve_ been doing nothing bad,” said he, curling himself into a long
chair with a studious affectation of the Colonel’s languor after a hot
parade. He buried his freckled nose in a tea-cup and, with eyes staring
roundly over the rim, asked: “I say, Coppy, is it pwoper to kiss big
girls?”

“By Jove! You’re beginning early. Who do you want to kiss?”

“No one. My muvver’s always kissing me if I don’t stop her. If it isn’t
pwoper, how was you kissing Major Allardyce’s big girl last morning,
by ve canal?”

Coppy’s brow wrinkled. He and Miss Allardyce had with great craft
managed to keep their engagement secret for a fortnight. There were
urgent and imperative reasons why Major Allardyce should not know how
matters stood for at least another month, and this small marplot had
discovered a great deal too much.

“I saw you,” said Wee Willie Winkie calmly. “But ve _sais_ didn’t see.
I said, ’_Hut jao!_’”

“Oh, you had that much sense, you young Rip,” groaned poor Coppy, half
amused and half angry. “And how many people may you have told about it?”

“Only me myself. You didn’t tell when I twied to wide ve buffalo ven my
pony was lame; and I fought you wouldn’t like.”

“Winkie,” said Coppy enthusiastically, shaking the small hand, “you’re
the best of good fellows. Look here, you can’t understand all these
things. One of these days—hang it, how can I make you see it!—I’m
going to marry Miss Allardyce, and then she’ll be Mrs. Coppy, as you
say. If your young mind is so scandalized at the idea of kissing big
girls, go and tell your father.”

“What will happen?” said Wee Willie Winkie, who firmly believed that
his father was omnipotent.

“I shall get into trouble,” said Coppy, playing his trump card with an
appealing look at the holder of the ace.

“Ven I won’t,” said Wee Willie Winkie briefly. “But my faver says it’s
un-man-ly to be always kissing, and I didn’t fink _you’d_ do vat,
Coppy.”

“I’m not always kissing, old chap. It’s only now and then, and when
you’re bigger you’ll do it too. Your father meant it’s not good for
little boys.”

“Ah!” said Wee Willie Winkie, now fully enlightened. “It’s like ve
sputter-brush?”

“Exactly,” said Coppy gravely.

“But I don’t fink I’ll ever want to kiss big girls, nor no one, ’cept
my muvver. And I _must_ do vat, you know.”

There was a long pause, broken by Wee Willie Winkie.

“Are you fond of vis big girl, Coppy?”

“Awfully!” said Coppy.

“Fonder van you are of Bell or ve Butcha—or me?”

“It’s in a different way,” said Coppy. “You see, one of these days
Miss Allerdyce will belong to me, but you’ll grow up and command the
Regiment and—all sorts of things. It’s quite different, you see.”

“Very well,” said Wee Willie Winkie, rising. “If you’re fond of ve big
girl, I won’t tell any one. I must go now.”

Coppy rose and escorted his small guest to the door, adding—“You’re
the best of little fellows, Winkie. I tell you what. In thirty days
from now you can tell if you like—tell any one you like.”

Thus the secret of the Brandis-Allardyce engagement was dependent on a
little child’s word. Coppy, who knew Wee Willie Winkie’s idea of truth,
was at ease, for he felt that he would not break promises. Wee Willie
Winkie betrayed a special and unusual interest in Miss Allardyce, and,
slowly revolving round that embarrassed young lady, was used to regard
her gravely with unwinking eye. He was trying to discover why Coppy
should have kissed her. She was not half so nice as his own mother. On
the other hand, she was Coppy’s property, and would in time belong to
him. Therefore it behooved him to treat her with as much respect as
Coppy’s big sword or shiny pistol.

The idea that he shared a great secret in common with Coppy kept Wee
Willie Winkie unusually virtuous for three weeks. Then the Old Adam
broke out, and he made what he called a “camp-fire” at the bottom of
the garden. How could he have foreseen that the flying sparks would
have lighted the Colonel’s little hay-rick and consumed a week’s store
for the horses? Sudden and swift was the punishment—deprivation of the
good-conduct badge and, most sorrowful of all, two days’ confinement
to barracks—the house and veranda—coupled with the withdrawal of the
light of his father’s countenance.

He took the sentence like the man he strove to be, drew himself up with
a quivering under-lip, saluted, and, once clear of the room, ran to
weep bitterly in his nursery—called by him “my quarters.” Coppy came
in the afternoon and attempted to console the culprit.

“I’m under awwest,” said Wee Willie Winkie mournfully, “and I didn’t
ought to speak to you.”

Very early the next morning he climbed on to the roof of the
house—that was not forbidden—and beheld Miss Allardyce going for a
ride.

“Where are you going?” cried Wee Willie Winkie.

“Across the river,” she answered, and trotted forward.

Now the cantonment in which the 195th lay was bounded on the north
by a river—dry in the winter. From his earliest years, Wee Willie
Winkie had been forbidden to go across the river, and had noted that
even Coppy—the almost almighty Coppy—had never set foot beyond it.
Wee Willie Winkie had once been read to, out of a big blue book, the
history of the Princess and the Goblins—a most wonderful tale of a
land where the Goblins were always warring with the children of men
until they were defeated by one Curdie. Ever since that date it
seemed to him that the bare black and purple hills across the river
were inhabited by Goblins, and, in truth, every one had said that
there lived the Bad Men. Even in his own house the lower halves of the
windows were covered with green paper on account of the Bad Men who
might, if allowed clear view, fire into peaceful drawing-rooms and
comfortable bedrooms. Certainly, beyond the river, which was the end of
all the Earth, lived the Bad Men. And here was Major Allardyce’s big
girl, Coppy’s property, preparing to venture into their borders! What
would Coppy say if anything happened to her? If the Goblins ran off
with her as they did with Curdie’s Princess? She must at all hazards be
turned back.

The house was still. Wee Willie Winkie reflected for a moment on the
very terrible wrath of his father; and then—broke his arrest! It was
a crime unspeakable. The low sun threw his shadow, very large and very
black, on the trim garden-paths, as he went down to the stables and
ordered his pony. It seemed to him in the hush of the dawn that all the
big world had been bidden to stand still and look at Wee Willie Winkie
guilty of mutiny. The drowsy _sais_ gave him his mount, and, since
the one great sin made all others insignificant, Wee Willie Winkie
said that he was going to ride over to Coppy Sahib, and went out at a
foot-pace, stepping on the soft mould of the flower-borders.

The devastating track of the pony’s feet was the last misdeed that cut
him off from all sympathy of Humanity. He turned into the road, leaned
forward, and rode at fast as the pony could put foot to the ground in
the direction of the river.

But the liveliest of twelve-two ponies can do little against the long
canter of a Waler. Miss Allardyce was far ahead, had passed through the
crops, beyond the Police-posts, when all the guards were asleep, and
her mount was scattering the pebbles of the river-bed as Wee Willie
Winkie left the cantonment and British India behind him. Bowed forward
and still flogging, Wee Willie Winkie shot into Afghan territory, and
could just see Miss Allardyce a black speck flickering across the stony
plain. The reason of her wandering was simple enough. Coppy, in a tone
of too-hastily-assumed authority, had told her over night that she must
not ride out by the river. And she had gone to prove her own spirit and
teach Coppy a lesson.

Almost at the foot of the inhospitable hills, Wee Willie Winkie saw the
Waler blunder and come down heavily. Miss Allardyce struggled clear,
but her ankle had been severely twisted, and she could not stand.
Having fully shown her spirit, she wept, and was surprised by the
apparition of a white, wide-eyed child in khaki, on a nearly spent pony.

“Are you badly, badly hurted?” shouted Wee Willie Winkie, as soon as he
was within range. “You didn’t ought to be here.”

“I don’t know,” said Miss Allardyce ruefully, ignoring the reproof.
“Good gracious, child, what are _you_ doing here?”

“You said you was going acwoss ve wiver,” panted Wee Willie Winkie,
throwing himself off his pony. “And nobody—not even Coppy—must go
acwoss ve wiver, and I came after you ever so hard, but you wouldn’t
stop, and now you’ve hurted yourself, and Coppy will be angwy wiv me,
and—I’ve bwoken my awwest! I’ve bwoken my awwest!”

The future Colonel of the 195th sat down and sobbed. In spite of the
pain in her ankle, the girl was moved.

“Have you ridden all the way from cantonments, little man? What for?”

“You belonged to Coppy. Coppy told me so!” wailed Wee Willie Winkie
disconsolately. “I saw him kissing you, and he said he was fonder of
you van Bell or ve Butcha or me. And so I came. You must get up and
come back. You didn’t ought to be here. Vis is a bad place, and I’ve
bwoken my awwest.”

“I can’t move, Winkie,” said Miss Allardyce, with a groan. “I’ve hurt
my foot. What shall I do?”

She showed a readiness to weep anew, which steadied Wee Willie Winkie,
who had been brought up to believe that tears were the depth of
unmanliness. Still, when one is as great a sinner as Wee Willie Winkie,
even a man may be permitted to break down.

“Winkie,” said Miss Allardyce, “when you’ve rested a little, ride back
and tell them to send out something to carry me back in. It hurts
fearfully.”

The child sat still for a little time, and Miss Allardyce closed her
eyes; the pain was nearly making her faint. She was roused by Wee
Willie Winkie tying up the reins on his pony’s neck and setting it free
with a vicious cut of his whip that made it whicker. The little animal
headed towards the cantonments.

“Oh, Winkie! What are you doing?”

“Hush!” said Wee Willie Winkie. “Vere’s a man coming—one of ve Bad
Men. I must stay wiv you. My faver says a man must _always_ look after
a girl. Jack will go home, and ven vey’ll come and look for us. Vat’s
why I let him go.”

Not one man, but two or three, had appeared from behind the rocks
of the hills, and the heart of Wee Willie Winkie sank within him,
for just in this manner were the Goblins wont to steal out and vex
Curdie’s soul. Thus had they played in Curdie’s garden (he had seen the
picture), and thus had they frightened the Princess’s nurse. He heard
them talking to each other, and recognized with joy the bastard Pushto
that he had picked up from one of his father’s grooms lately dismissed.
People who spoke that tongue could not be the Bad Men. They were only
natives, after all.

They came up to the boulders on which Miss Allardyce’s horse had
blundered.

Then rose from the rock Wee Willie Winkie, child of the Dominant
Race, aged six and three-quarters, and said briefly and emphatically,
“_Jao!_” The pony had crossed the river-bed.

The man laughed, and laughter from natives was the one thing Wee Willie
Winkie could not tolerate. He asked them what they wanted and why they
did not depart. Other men with most evil faces and crooked-stocked guns
crept out of the shadows of the hills, till, soon, Wee Willie Winkie
was face to face with an audience some twenty strong. Miss Allardyce
screamed.

“Who are you?” said one of the men.

“I am the Colonel Sahib’s son, and my order is that you go at once.
You black men are frightening the Miss Sahib. One of you must run into
cantonments and take the news that the Miss Sahib has hurt herself, and
that the Colonel’s son is here with her.”

“Put our feet into the trap?” was the laughing reply. “Hear this boy’s
speech!”

“Say that I sent you—I, the Colonel’s son. They will give you money.”

“What is the use of this talk? Take up the child and the girl, and we
can at least ask for the ransom. Ours are the villages on the heights,”
said a voice in the background.

These _were_ the Bad Men—worse than Goblins—and it needed all Wee
Willie Winkie’s training to prevent him from bursting into tears.
But he felt that to cry before a native, excepting only his mother’s
_ayah_, would be an infamy greater than any mutiny. Moreover, he, as
future Colonel of the 195th, had that grim regiment at his back.

“Are you going to carry us away?” said Wee Willie Winkie, very blanched
and uncomfortable.

“Yes, my little Sahib Bahadur,” said the tallest of the men, “and eat
you afterwards.”

“That is child’s talk,” said Wee Willie Winkie. “Men do not eat men.”

A yell of laughter interrupted him, but he went on firmly—“And if you
do carry us away, I tell you that all my regiment will come up in a day
and kill you all without leaving one. Who will take my message to the
Colonel Sahib?”

Speech in any vernacular—and Wee Willie Winkie had a colloquial
acquaintance with three—was easy to the boy who could not yet manage
his “r’s” and “th’s” aright.

Another man joined the conference, crying, “O foolish men! What this
babe says is true. He is the heart’s heart of those white troops. For
the sake of peace let them go both, for if he be taken, the regiment
will break loose and gut the valley. _Our_ villages are in the valley,
and we shall not escape. That regiment are devils. They broke Khoda
Yar’s breastbone with kicks when he tried to take the rifles; and if we
touch this child they will fire and rape and plunder for a month till
nothing remains. Better to send a man back to take the message and get
a reward. I say that this child is their God, and that they will spare
none of us, nor our women, if we harm him.”

It was Din Mahommed, the dismissed groom of the Colonel, who made the
diversion, and an angry and heated discussion followed. Wee Willie
Winkie, standing over Miss Allardyce, waited the upshot. Surely his
“wegiment,” his own “wegiment,” would not desert him if they knew of
his extremity.

       *       *       *       *       *

The riderless pony brought the news to the 195th, though there had been
consternation in the Colonel’s household for an hour before. The little
beast came in through the parade-ground in front of the main barracks,
where the men were settling down to play Spoilfive till the afternoon.
Devlin, the Color-Sergeant of E Company, glanced at the empty saddle
and tumbled through the barrack-rooms, kicking up each Room Corporal as
he passed. “Up, ye beggars! There’s something happened to the Colonel’s
son,” he shouted.

“He couldn’t fall off! S’help me, ’e _couldn’t_ fall off,” blubbered
a drummer-boy. “Go an’ hunt acrost the river. He’s over there if he’s
anywhere, an’ maybe those Pathans have got ’im. For the love o’ Gawd
don’t look for ’im in the nullahs! Let’s go over the river.”

“There’s sense in Mott yet,” said Devlin. “E Company, double out to the
river—sharp!”

So E Company, in its shirt-sleeves mainly, doubled for the dear life,
and in the rear toiled the perspiring Sergeant, adjuring it to double
yet faster. The cantonment was alive with the men of the 195th hunting
for Wee Willie Winkie, and the Colonel finally overtook E Company, far
too exhausted to swear, struggling in the pebbles of the river-bed.

Up the hill under which Wee Willie Winkie’s Bad Men were discussing
the wisdom of carrying off the child and the girl, a lookout fired two
shots.

“What have I said?” shouted Din Mahommed. “There is the warning! The
_pulton_ are out already and are coming across the plain! Get away! Let
us not be seen with the boy!”

The men waited for an instant, and then, as another shot was fired,
withdrew into the hills, silently as they had appeared.

“The wegiment is coming,” said Wee Willie Winkie confidently to Miss
Allardyce, “and it’s all wight. Don’t cwy!”

He needed the advice himself, for ten minutes later, when his father
came up, he was weeping bitterly with his head in Miss Allardyce’s lap.

And the men of the 195th carried him home with shouts and rejoicings;
and Coppy, who had ridden a horse into a lather, met him, and, to his
intense disgust, kissed him openly in the presence of the men.

But there was balm for his dignity. His father assured him that
not only would the breaking of arrest be condoned, but that the
good-conduct badge would be restored as soon as his mother could sew it
on his blouse-sleeve. Miss Allardyce had told the Colonel a story that
made him proud of his son.

“She belonged to you, Coppy,” said Wee Willie Winkie, indicating Miss
Allardyce with a grimy forefinger. “I _knew_ she didn’t ought to go
acwoss ve wiver, and I knew ve wegiment would come to me if I sent Jack
home.”

“You’re a hero, Winkie,” said Coppy—“a _pukka_ hero!”

“I don’t know what vat means,” said Wee Willie Winkie, “but you mustn’t
call me Winkie any no more. I’m Percival Will’am Will’ams.”

And in this manner did Wee Willie Winkie enter into his manhood.




  THE GOLD BUG

  BY

  EDGAR ALLAN POE

Poe was the first American short-story writer. Others had written
stories that were short, but he was the first to recognize the
short-story as having a form and an aim all its own. Moreover, he
was willing to admit the public to his laboratory and to explain his
process, for he discounted inspiration and emphasized craftsmanship.
In “The Philosophy of Composition” he declares that every plot “must
be elaborated to its dénouement before anything is attempted with
the pen. It is only with the dénouement constantly in view that we
can give a plot its indispensable air of consequence, or causation,
by making the incidents and especially the tone, at all points,
tend to the development of the intention.” He also tells us that he
prefers beginning with an effect. Having chosen, in the first place,
an effect that is both novel and vivid, he decides “whether it can
be best wrought by incident or tone,” and afterward looks about “for
such combinations of events, or tone, as shall best aid ... in the
construction of the effect.”

In view of such explanations, it is interesting to study “The Gold
Bug” and to see how well the plot has been worked out and the tone
established. It is doubtful whether in this story the plot meant to
the writer what it means to the reader. The latter likes the adventure
with its ingeniously fitted parts, each so necessary to the whole.
But after the gold has been found—and that is the point of greatest
interest—the story goes on and on to explain the cryptogram. This,
no doubt, was to Poe the most interesting thing about the story, the
tracing of the steps by which the scrap of parchment was deciphered
and reasoned upon and made to yield up its secret. As to the time
and place, the strange conduct and character of Legrand, the fears
and superstitions of Jupiter, and the puzzled solicitude of the
narrator—all these aid materially in establishing and maintaining the
tone.




THE GOLD BUG[10]

  “What ho! what ho! this fellow is dancing mad!
  He hath been bitten by the Tarantula.”

  —_All in the Wrong._


Many years ago, I contracted an intimacy with a Mr. William Legrand.
He was of an ancient Huguenot family, and had once been wealthy;
but a series of misfortunes had reduced him to want. To avoid the
mortification consequent upon his disasters, he left New Orleans,
the city of his forefathers, and took up his residence at Sullivan’s
Island, near Charleston, South Carolina.

This island is a very singular one. It consists of little else than
the sea sand, and is about three miles long. Its breadth at no point
exceeds a quarter of a mile. It is separated from the mainland by a
scarcely perceptible creek, oozing its way through a wilderness of
reeds and slime, a favorite resort of the marsh-hen. The vegetation,
as might be supposed, is scant, or at least dwarfish. No trees of
any magnitude are to be seen. Near the western extremity, where Fort
Moultrie stands, and where are some miserable frame buildings, tenanted
during summer by the fugitives from Charleston dust and fever, may be
found, indeed, the bristly palmetto; but the whole island, with the
exception of this western point, and a line of hard white beach on the
seacoast, is covered with a dense undergrowth of the sweet myrtle, so
much prized by the horticulturists of England. The shrub here often
attains the height of fifteen or twenty feet, and forms an almost
impenetrable coppice, burdening the air with its fragrance.

In the utmost recesses of this coppice, not far from the eastern or
more remote end of the island, Legrand had built himself a small
hut, which he occupied when I first, by mere accident, made his
acquaintance. This soon ripened into friendship—for there was much in
the recluse to excite interest and esteem. I found him well educated,
with unusual powers of mind, but infected with misanthropy, and subject
to perverse moods of alternate enthusiasm and melancholy. He had
with him many books, but rarely employed them. His chief amusements
were gunning and fishing, or sauntering along the beach and through
the myrtles, in quest of shells or entomological specimens;—his
collection of the latter might have been envied by a Swammerdamm. In
these excursions he was usually accompanied by an old <DW64>, called
Jupiter, who had been manumitted before the reverses of the family, but
who could be induced, neither by threats nor by promises, to abandon
what he considered his right of attendance upon the footsteps of his
young “Massa Will.” It is not improbable that the relatives of Legrand,
conceiving him to be somewhat unsettled in intellect, had contrived to
instil this obstinacy into Jupiter, with a view to the supervision and
guardianship of the wanderer.

The winters in the latitude of Sullivan’s Island are seldom very
severe, and in the fall of the year it is a rare event indeed when a
fire is considered necessary. About the middle of October, 18—, there
occurred, however, a day of remarkable chilliness. Just before sunset
I scrambled my way through the evergreens to the hut of my friend,
whom I had not visited for several weeks—my residence being at that
time in Charleston, a distance of nine miles from the island, while
the facilities of passage and re-passage were very far behind those
of the present day. Upon reaching the hut I rapped, as was my custom,
and, getting no reply, sought for the key where I knew it was secreted,
unlocked the door and went in. A fine fire was blazing upon the hearth.
It was a novelty, and by no means an ungrateful one. I threw off an
overcoat, took an armchair by the crackling logs, and awaited patiently
the arrival of my hosts.

Soon after dark they arrived, and gave me a most cordial welcome.
Jupiter, grinning from ear to ear, bustled about to prepare some
marsh-hens for supper. Legrand was in one of his fits—how else shall
I term them?—of enthusiasm. He had found an unknown bivalve, forming
a new genus, and, more than this, he had hunted down and secured, with
Jupiter’s assistance, a _scarabæus_ which he believed to be totally
new, but in respect to which he wished to have my opinion on the morrow.

“And why not to-night?” I asked, rubbing my hands over the blaze, and
wishing the whole tribe of _scarabæi_ at the devil.

“Ah, if I had only known you were here!” said Legrand, “but it’s so
long since I saw you; and how could I foresee that you would pay me
a visit this very night of all others? As I was coming home I met
Lieutenant G——, from the fort, and, very foolishly, I lent him the
bug; so it will be impossible for you to see it until the morning. Stay
here to-night, and I will send Jup down for it at sunrise. It is the
loveliest thing in creation!”

“What?—sunrise?”

“Nonsense! no!—the bug. It is of a brilliant gold color—about
the size of a large hickory-nut—with two jet black spots near one
extremity of the back, and another, somewhat longer, at the other. The
_antennæ_ are——“

“Dey aint _no_ tin in him, Massa Will, I keep a-tellin’ on you,” here
interrupted Jupiter; “de bug is a goole-bug, solid, ebery bit of him,
inside and all, sep him wing—neber feel half so hebby a bug in my
life.”

“Well, suppose it is, Jup,” replied Legrand, somewhat more earnestly,
it seemed to me, than the case demanded, “is that any reason for your
letting the birds burn? The color”—here he turned to me—“is really
almost enough to warrant Jupiter’s idea. You never saw a more brilliant
metallic lustre than the scales emit—but of this you cannot judge till
to-morrow. In the mean time I can give you some idea of the shape.”
Saying this, he seated himself at a small table, on which were a pen
and ink, but no paper. He looked for some in a drawer, but found none.

“Never mind,” said he at length, “this will answer;” and he drew from
his waistcoat pocket a scrap of what I took to be very dirty foolscap,
and made upon it a rough drawing with the pen. While he did this, I
retained my seat by the fire, for I was still chilly. When the design
was complete, he handed it to me without rising. As I received it, a
low growl was heard, succeeded by a scratching at the door. Jupiter
opened it, and a large Newfoundland, belonging to Legrand, rushed in,
leaped upon my shoulders, and loaded me with caresses; for I had shown
him much attention during previous visits. When his gambols were over,
I looked at the paper, and, to speak the truth, found myself not a
little puzzled at what my friend had depicted.

“Well!” I said, after contemplating it for some minutes, “this _is_
a strange _scarabæus_, I must confess; new to me: never saw anything
like it before—unless it was a skull, or a death’s-head, which it
more nearly resembles than anything else that has come under _my_
observation.”

“A death’s-head!” echoed Legrand—“Oh—yes—well, it has something of
that appearance upon paper, no doubt. The two upper black spots look
like eyes, eh? and the longer one at the bottom like a mouth—and then
the shape of the whole is oval.”

“Perhaps so,” said I; “but, Legrand, I fear you are no artist. I must
wait until I see the beetle itself, if I am to form any idea of its
personal appearance.”

“Well, I don’t know,” said he, a little nettled, “I draw
tolerably—_should_ do it at least—have had good masters, and flatter
myself that I am not quite a blockhead.”

“But, my dear fellow, you are joking then,” said I, “this is a very
passable _skull_,—indeed, I may say that it is a very _excellent_
skull, according to the vulgar notions about such specimens of
physiology—and your _scarabæus_ must be the queerest _scarabæus_ in
the world if it resembles it. Why, we may get up a very thrilling
bit of superstition upon this hint. I presume you will call the bug
_scarabæus caput hominis_, or something of that kind—there are many
similar titles in the Natural Histories. But where are the _antennæ_
you spoke of?”

“The _antennæ_!” said Legrand, who seemed to be getting unaccountably
warm upon the subject; “I am sure you must see the _antennæ_. I made
them as distinct as they are in the original insect, and I presume that
is sufficient.”

“Well, well,” I said, “perhaps you have—still I don’t see them;” and I
handed him the paper without additional remark, not wishing to ruffle
his temper; but I was much surprised at the turn affairs had taken; his
ill humor puzzled me—and, as for the drawing of the beetle, there
were positively _no antennæ_ visible, and the whole _did_ bear a very
close resemblance to the ordinary cuts of a death’s-head.

He received the paper very peevishly, and was about to crumple it,
apparently to throw it in the fire, when a casual glance at the design
seemed suddenly to rivet his attention. In an instant his face grew
violently red—in another as excessively pale. For some minutes he
continued to scrutinize the drawing minutely where he sat. At length he
arose, took a candle from the table, and proceeded to seat himself upon
a sea-chest in the farthest corner of the room. Here again he made an
anxious examination of the paper; turning it in all directions. He said
nothing, however, and his conduct greatly astonished me; yet I thought
it prudent not to exacerbate the growing moodiness of his temper by any
comment. Presently he took from his coat pocket a wallet, placed the
paper carefully in it, and deposited both in a writing-desk, which he
locked. He now grew more composed in his demeanor; but his original air
of enthusiasm had quite disappeared. Yet he seemed not so much sulky as
abstracted. As the evening wore away he became more and more absorbed
in revery, from which no sallies of mine could arouse him. It had been
my intention to pass the night at the hut, as I had frequently done
before, but, seeing my host in this mood, I deemed it proper to take
leave. He did not press me to remain, but, as I departed, he shook my
hand with even more than his usual cordiality.

It was about a month after this (and during the interval I had seen
nothing of Legrand) when I received a visit, at Charleston, from his
man, Jupiter. I had never seen the good old <DW64> look so dispirited,
and I feared that some serious disaster had befallen my friend.

“Well, Jup,” said I, “what is the matter now?—how is your master?”

“Why, to speak de troof, massa, him not so berry well as mought be.”

“Not well! I am truly sorry to hear it. What does he complain of?”

“Dar! dat’s it!—him neber plain of notin—but him berry sick for all
dat.”

“_Very_ sick, Jupiter!—why didn’t you say so at once? Is he confined
to bed?”

“No, dat he aint!—he aint find nowhar—dat’s just whar de shoe
pinch—my mind is got to be berry hebby bout poor Massa Will.”

“Jupiter, I should like to understand what it is you are talking about.
You say your master is sick. Hasn’t he told you what ails him?”

“Why, massa, taint worf while for to git mad bout de matter—Massa Will
say noffin at all aint de matter wid him—but den what make him go
about looking dis here way, wid he head down and he soldiers up, and as
white as a gose? And den he keep a syphon all de time——”

“Keeps a what, Jupiter?”

“Keeps a syphon wid de figgurs on de slate—de queerest figgurs I ebber
did see. Ise gittin to be skeered, I tell you. Hab for to keep mighty
tight eye pon him noovers. Todder day he gib me slip fore de sun up and
was gone de whole ob de blessed day. I had a big stick ready cut for to
gib him d——d good beating when he did come—but Ise sich a fool dat I
hadn’t de heart arter all—he look so berry poorly.”

“Eh?—what?—ah yes!—upon the whole I think you had better not be too
severe with the poor fellow—don’t flog him, Jupiter—he can’t very
well stand it—but can you form no idea of what has occasioned this
illness, or rather this change of conduct? Has anything unpleasant
happened since I saw you?”

“No, massa, dey aint bin noffin onpleasant _since_ den—’twas _fore_
den I’m feared—’twas de berry day you was dare.”

“How? what do you mean?”

“Why, massa, I mean de bug—dare now.”

“The what?”

“De bug—I’m berry sartain dat Massa Will bin bit somewhere bout de
head by dat goole-bug.”

“And what cause have you, Jupiter, for such a supposition?”

“Claws enuff, massa, and mouff too. I nebber did see sich a d——d
bug—he kick and he bite ebery ting what cum near him. Massa Will cotch
him fuss, but had for to let him go gin mighty quick, I tell you—den
was de time he must ha got de bite. I didn’t like de look ob de bug
mouff, myself, no how, so I wouldn’t take hold ob him wid my finger,
but I cotch him wid a piece ob paper dat I found. I rap him up in de
paper and stuff piece ob it in he mouff—dat was de way.”

“And you think, then, that your master was really bitten by the beetle,
and that the bite made him sick?”

“I don’t tink noffin about it—I nose it. What make him dream bout de
goole so much, if taint cause he bit by de goole-bug? Ise heerd bout
dem goole-bugs fore dis.”

“But how do you know he dreams about gold?”

“How I know? why cause he talk about it in he sleep—dat’s how I nose.”

“Well, Jup, perhaps you are right; but to what fortunate circumstance
am I to attribute the honor of a visit from you to-day?”

“What de matter, massa?”

“Did you bring any message from Mr. Legrand?”

“No, massa, I bring dis here pissel;” and here Jupiter handed me a note
which ran thus:

 “MY DEAR——, Why have I not seen you for so long a time? I hope you
 have not been so foolish as to take offence at any little _brusquerie_
 of mine; but no, that is improbable.

 “Since I saw you I have had great cause for anxiety. I have something
 to tell you, yet scarcely know how to tell it, or whether I should
 tell it at all.

 “I have not been quite well for some days past, and poor old Jup
 annoys me, almost beyond endurance, by his well-meant attentions.
 Would you believe it?—he had prepared a huge stick, the other day,
 with which to chastise me for giving him the slip, and spending the
 day, _solus_, among the hills on the mainland. I verily believe that
 my ill looks alone saved me a flogging.

 “I have made no addition to my cabinet since we met.

 “If you can, in any way, make it convenient, come over with Jupiter.
 _Do_ come. I wish to see you _to-night_, upon business of importance.
 I assure you that it is of the _highest_ importance.

  “Ever yours,

  “WILLIAM LEGRAND.”

There was something in the tone of this note which gave me great
uneasiness. Its whole style differed materially from that of Legrand.
What could he be dreaming of? What new crotchet possessed his excitable
brain? What “business of the highest importance” could _he_ possibly
have to transact? Jupiter’s account of him boded no good. I dreaded
lest the continued pressure of misfortune had, at length, fairly
unsettled the reason of my friend. Without a moment’s hesitation,
therefore, I prepared to accompany the <DW64>.

Upon reaching the wharf, I noticed a scythe and three spades, all
apparently new, lying in the bottom of the boat in which we were to
embark.

“What is the meaning of all this, Jup?” I inquired.

“Him syfe, massa, and spade.”

“Very true; but what are they doing here?”

“Him de syfe and de spade what Massa Will sis pon my buying for him in
de town, and de debbil’s own lot of money I had to gib for ’em.”

“But what, in the name of all that is mysterious, is your ’Massa Will’
going to do with scythes and spades?”

“Dat’s more dan _I_ know, and debbil take me if I don’t blieve ’tis
more dan he know, too. But it’s all cum ob de bug.”

Finding that no satisfaction was to be obtained of Jupiter, whose whole
intellect seemed to be absorbed by “de bug,” I now stepped into the
boat and made sail. With a fair and strong breeze we soon ran into
the little cove to the northward of Fort Moultrie, and a walk of some
two miles brought us to the hut. It was about three in the afternoon
when we arrived. Legrand had been awaiting us in eager expectation. He
grasped my hand with a nervous _empressement_, which alarmed me and
strengthened the suspicions already entertained. His countenance was
pale even to ghastliness, and his deep-set eyes glared with unnatural
lustre. After some inquiries respecting his health, I asked him, not
knowing what better to say, if he had yet obtained the _scarabæus_ from
Lieutenant G——.

“Oh, yes,” he replied, coloring violently, “I got it from him the next
morning. Nothing should tempt me to part with that _scarabæus_. Do you
know that Jupiter is quite right about it?”

“In what way?” I asked, with a sad foreboding at heart.

“In supposing it to be a bug of _real gold_.” He said this with an air
of profound seriousness, and I felt inexpressibly shocked.

“This bug is to make my fortune,” he continued, with a triumphant
smile, “to reinstate me in my family possessions. Is it any wonder,
then, that I prize it? Since Fortune has thought fit to bestow it upon
me, I have only to use it properly and I shall arrive at the gold of
which it is the index. Jupiter, bring me that _scarabæus_!”

“What! de bug, massa? I’d rudder not go fer trubble dat bug—you mus
git him for your own self.” Hereupon Legrand arose, with a grave and
stately air, and brought me the beetle from a glass case in which
it was enclosed. It was a beautiful _scarabæus_, and, at that time,
unknown to naturalists—of course a great prize in a scientific point
of view. There were two round, black spots near one extremity of the
back, and a long one near the other. The scales were exceedingly
hard and glossy, with all the appearance of burnished gold. The
weight of the insect was very remarkable, and, taking all things into
consideration, I could hardly blame Jupiter for his opinion respecting
it; but what to make of Legrand’s agreement with that opinion, I could
not, for the life of me, tell.

“I sent for you,” said he, in a grandiloquent tone, when I had
completed my examination of the beetle, “I sent for you, that I might
have your counsel and assistance in furthering the views of Fate and of
the bug——”

“My dear Legrand,” I cried, interrupting him, “you are certainly
unwell, and had better use some little precautions. You shall go to
bed, and I will remain with you a few days, until you get over this.
You are feverish and——”

“Feel my pulse,” said he.

I felt it, and, to say the truth, found not the slightest indication of
fever.

“But you may be ill, and yet have no fever. Allow me this once to
prescribe for you. In the first place, go to bed. In the next——”

“You are mistaken,” he interposed, “I am as well as I can expect to be
under the excitement which I suffer. If you really wish me well, you
will relieve this excitement.”

“And how is this to be done?”

“Very easily. Jupiter and myself are going upon an expedition into the
hills, upon the mainland, and, in this expedition, we shall need the
aid of some person in whom we can confide. You are the only one we
can trust. Whether we succeed or fail, the excitement which you now
perceive in me will be equally allayed.”

“I am anxious to oblige you in any way,” I replied; “but do you mean to
say that this infernal beetle has any connection with your expedition
into the hills?”

“It has.”

“Then, Legrand, I can become a party to no such absurd proceeding.”

“I am sorry—very sorry—for we shall have to try it by ourselves.”

“Try it by yourselves! The man is surely mad!—but stay—how long do
you propose to be absent?”

“Probably all night. We shall start immediately, and be back, at all
events, by sunrise.”

“And will you promise me, upon your honor, that when this freak
of yours is over, and the bug business (good God!) settled to
your satisfaction, you will then return home and follow my advice
implicitly, as that of your physician?”

“Yes; I promise; and now let us be off, for we have no time to lose.”

With a heavy heart I accompanied my friend. We started about four
o’clock—Legrand, Jupiter, the dog, and myself. Jupiter had with
him the scythe and spades—the whole of which he insisted upon
carrying, more through fear, it seemed to me, of trusting either of
the implements within reach of his master, than from any excess of
industry or complaisance. His demeanor was dogged in the extreme, and
“dat d——d bug” were the sole words which escaped his lips during the
journey. For my own part, I had charge of a couple of dark lanterns,
while Legrand contented himself with the _scarabæus_, which he carried
attached to the end of a bit of whip-cord; twirling it to and fro,
with the air of a conjurer, as he went. When I observed this last,
plain evidence of my friend’s aberration of mind, I could scarcely
refrain from tears. I thought it best, however, to humor his fancy,
at least for the present, or until I could adopt some more energetic
measures with a chance of success. In the mean time I endeavored, but
all in vain, to sound him in regard to the object of the expedition.
Having succeeded in inducing me to accompany him, he seemed unwilling
to hold conversation upon any topic of minor importance, and to all my
questions vouchsafed no other reply than “we shall see!”

We crossed the creek at the head of the island by means of a skiff,
and, ascending the high grounds on the shore of the mainland, proceeded
in a northwesterly direction, through a tract of country excessively
wild and desolate, where no trace of a human footstep was to be seen.
Legrand led the way with decision; pausing only for an instant, here
and there, to consult what appeared to be certain landmarks of his own
contrivance upon a former occasion.

In this manner we journeyed for about two hours, and the sun was
just setting when we entered a region infinitely more dreary than
any yet seen. It was a species of tableland, near the summit of an
almost inaccessible hill, densely wooded from base to pinnacle, and
interspersed with huge crags that appeared to lie loosely upon the
soil, and in many cases were prevented from precipitating themselves
into the valleys below merely by the support of the trees against which
they reclined. Deep ravines, in various directions, gave an air of
still sterner solemnity to the scene.

The natural platform to which we had clambered was thickly overgrown
with brambles, through which we soon discovered that it would have
been impossible to force our way but for the scythe; and Jupiter, by
direction of his master, proceeded to clear for us a path to the foot
of an enormously tall tulip-tree, which stood, with some eight or ten
oaks, upon the level, and far surpassed them all, and all other trees
which I had then ever seen, in the beauty of its foliage and form, in
the wide spread of its branches, and in the general majesty of its
appearance. When we reached this tree, Legrand turned to Jupiter,
and asked him if he thought he could climb it. The old man seemed a
little staggered by the question, and for some moments made no reply.
At length he approached the huge trunk, walked slowly around it, and
examined it with minute attention. When he had completed his scrutiny,
he merely said:

“Yes, massa, Jup climb any tree he ebber see in he life.”

“Then up with you as soon as possible, for it will soon be too dark to
see what we are about.”

“How far mus go up, massa?” inquired Jupiter.

“Get up the main trunk first, and then I will tell you which way to
go—and here—stop! take this beetle with you.”

“De bug, Massa Will!—de goole-bug!” cried the <DW64>, drawing back in
dismay—“what for mus tote de bug way up de tree?—d——n if I do!”

“If you are afraid, Jup, a great big <DW64> like you, to take hold
of a harmless little dead beetle, why, you can carry it up by this
string—but, if you do not take it up with you in some way, I shall be
under the necessity of breaking your head with this shovel.”

“What de matter now, massa?” said Jup, evidently shamed into
compliance; “always want fur to raise fuss wid old <DW65>. Was only
funnin anyhow. _Me_ feered de bug! what I keer for de bug?” Here he
took cautiously hold of the extreme end of the string, and, maintaining
the insect as far from his person as circumstances would permit,
prepared to ascend the tree.

In youth, the tulip-tree, or _Liriodendron Tulipifera_, the most
magnificent of American foresters, has a trunk peculiarly smooth, and
often rises to a great height without lateral branches; but, in its
riper age, the bark becomes gnarled and uneven, while many short limbs
make their appearance on the stem. Thus the difficulty of ascension,
in the present case, lay more in semblance than in reality. Embracing
the huge cylinder, as closely as possible, with his arms and knees,
seizing with his hands some projections, and resting his naked toes
upon others, Jupiter, after one or two narrow escapes from falling,
at length wriggled himself into the first great fork, and seemed to
consider the whole business as virtually accomplished. The _risk_ of
the achievement was, in fact, now over, although the climber was some
sixty or seventy feet from the ground.

“Which way mus go now, Massa Will?” he asked.

“Keep up the largest branch,—the one on this side,” said Legrand. The
<DW64> obeyed him promptly, and apparently with but little trouble,
ascending higher and higher, until no glimpse of his squat figure could
be obtained through the dense foliage which enveloped it. Presently his
voice was heard in a sort of halloo.

“How much fudder is got for go?”

“How high up are you?” asked Legrand.

“Ebber so fur,” replied the <DW64>; “can see de sky fru de top ob de
tree.”

“Never mind the sky, but attend to what I say. Look down the trunk and
count the limbs below you on this side. How many limbs have you passed?”

“One, two, tree, four, fibe—I done pass fibe big limb, massa, pon dis
side.”

“Then go one limb higher.”

In a few minutes the voice was heard again, announcing that the seventh
limb was attained.

“Now, Jup,” cried Legrand, evidently much excited, “I want you to work
your way out upon that limb as far as you can. If you see anything
strange, let me know.”

By this time what little doubt I might have entertained of my poor
friend’s insanity was put finally at rest. I had no alternative but to
conclude him stricken with lunacy, and I became seriously anxious about
getting him home. While I was pondering upon what was best to be done,
Jupiter’s voice was again heard.

“Mos feerd for to ventur pon dis limb berry far—’tis dead limb putty
much all de way.”

“Did you say it was a _dead_ limb, Jupiter?” cried Legrand in a
quavering voice.

“Yes, massa, him dead as de door-nail—done up for sartain—done
departed dis here life.”

“What in the name of heaven shall I do?” asked Legrand, seemingly in
the greatest distress.

“Do!” said I, glad of an opportunity to interpose a word, “why come
home and go to bed. Come now!—that’s a fine fellow. It’s getting late,
and, besides, you remember your promise.”

“Jupiter,” cried he, without heeding me in the least, “do you hear me?”

“Yes, Massa Will, hear you ebber so plain.”

“Try the wood well, then, with your knife, and see if you think it
_very_ rotten.”

“Him rotten, massa, sure nuff,” replied the <DW64> in a few moments,
“but not so berry rotten as mought be. Mought ventur out leetle way pon
de limb by myself, dat’s true.”

“By yourself!—what do you mean?”

“Why, I mean de bug. ’Tis _berry_ hebby bug. Spose I drop him down
fuss, and den de limb won’t break wid just de weight ob one <DW65>.”

“You infernal scoundrel!” cried Legrand, apparently much relieved,
“what do you mean by telling me such nonsense as that? As sure as you
let that beetle fall, I’ll break your neck. Look here, Jupiter! do you
hear me?”

“Yes, massa, needn’t hollo at poor <DW65> dat style.”

“Well! now listen!—if you will venture out on the limb as far as you
think safe, and not let go the beetle, I’ll make you a present of a
silver dollar as soon as you get down.”

“I’m gwine, Massa Will—deed I is,” replied the <DW64> very
promptly—“mos out to the eend now.”

“_Out to the end!_” here fairly screamed Legrand, “do you say you are
out to the end of that limb?”

“Soon be to de eend, massa,—o-o-o-o-oh! Lord-gol-a-marcy! what _is_
dis here pon de tree?”

“Well!” cried Legrand, highly delighted, “what is it?”

“Why taint noffin but a skull—somebody bin lef him head up de tree,
and de crows done gobble ebery bit ob de meat off.”

“A skull, you say!—very well!—how is it fastened to the limb?—what
holds it on?”

“Sure nuff, massa; mus look. Why, dis berry curous sarcumstance, pon
my word—dare’s a great big nail in de skull, what fastens ob it on to
de tree.”

“Well now, Jupiter, do exactly as I tell you—do you hear?”

“Yes, massa.”

“Pay attention, then!—find the left eye of the skull.”

“Hum! hoo! dat’s good! why, dar aint no eye lef at all.”

“Curse your stupidity! do you know your right hand from your left?”

“Yes, I nose dat—nose all bout dat—’tis my lef hand what I chops de
wood wid.”

“To be sure! you are left-handed; and your left eye is on the same side
as your left hand. Now, I suppose, you can find the left eye of the
skull, or the place where the left eye has been. Have you found it?”

Here was a long pause. At length the <DW64> asked,

“Is de lef eye of de skull pon de same side as de lef hand of de skull,
too?—cause de skull aint got not a bit ob a hand at all—nebber mind!
I got de lef eye now—here de lef eye! what must do wid it?”

“Let the beetle drop through it, as far as the string will reach—but
be careful and not let go your hold of the string.”

“All dat done, Massa Will; mighty easy ting for to put de bug fru de
hole—look for him dar below!”

During this colloquy no portion of Jupiter’s person could be seen; but
the beetle, which he had suffered to descend, was now visible at the
end of the string, and glistened, like a globe of burnished gold, in
the last rays of the setting sun, some of which still faintly illumined
the eminence upon which we stood. The _scarabæus_ hung quite clear of
any branches, and, if allowed to fall, would have fallen at our feet.
Legrand immediately took the scythe, and cleared with it a circular
space, three or four yards in diameter, just beneath the insect, and,
having accomplished this, ordered Jupiter to let go the string and come
down from the tree.

Driving a peg, with great nicety, into the ground, at the precise
spot where the beetle fell, my friend now produced from his pocket a
tape-measure. Fastening one end of this at that point of the trunk of
the tree which was nearest the peg, he unrolled it till it reached
the peg, and thence farther unrolled it, in the direction already
established by the two points of the tree and the peg, for the distance
of fifty feet—Jupiter clearing away the brambles with the scythe. At
the spot thus attained a second peg was driven, and about this, as a
centre, a rude circle, about four feet in diameter, described. Taking
now a spade himself, and giving one to Jupiter and one to me, Legrand
begged us to set about digging as quickly as possible.

To speak the truth, I had no especial relish for such amusement at
any time, and, at that particular moment, would most willingly have
declined it; for the night was coming on, and I felt much fatigued
with the exercise already taken; but I saw no mode of escape, and
was fearful of disturbing my poor friend’s equanimity by a refusal.
Could I have depended, indeed, upon Jupiter’s aid, I would have had
no hesitation in attempting to get the lunatic home by force; but I
was too well assured of the old <DW64>’s disposition to hope that he
would assist me, under any circumstances, in a personal contest with
his master. I made no doubt that the latter had been infected with
some of the innumerable Southern superstitions about money buried,
and that his fantasy had received confirmation by the finding of the
_scarabæus_, or, perhaps, by Jupiter’s obstinacy in maintaining it to
be “a bug of real gold.” A mind disposed to lunacy would readily be
led away by such suggestions, especially if chiming in with favorite
preconceived ideas; and then I called to mind the poor fellow’s speech
about the beetle’s being “the index of his fortune.” Upon the whole, I
was sadly vexed and puzzled, but at length I concluded to make a virtue
of necessity—to dig with a good will, and thus the sooner to convince
the visionary, by ocular demonstration, of the fallacy of the opinions
he entertained.

The lanterns having been lit, we all fell to work with a zeal worthy
a more rational cause; and, as the glare fell upon our persons and
implements, I could not help thinking how picturesque a group we
composed, and how strange and suspicious our labors must have appeared
to any interloper who, by chance, might have stumbled upon our
whereabouts.

We dug very steadily for two hours. Little was said; and our chief
embarrassment lay in the yelpings of the dog, who took exceeding
interest in our proceedings. He, at length, became so obstreperous
that we grew fearful of his giving the alarm to some stragglers in the
vicinity; or, rather, this was the apprehension of Legrand; for myself,
I should have rejoiced at any interruption which might have enabled me
to get the wanderer home. The noise was, at length, very effectually
silenced by Jupiter, who, getting out of the hole with a dogged air of
deliberation, tied the brute’s mouth up with one of his suspenders, and
then returned, with a grave chuckle, to his task.

When the time mentioned had expired, we had reached a depth of five
feet, and yet no signs of any treasure became manifest. A general
pause ensued, and I began to hope that the farce was at an end.
Legrand, however, although evidently much disconcerted, wiped his
brow thoughtfully and recommenced. We had excavated the entire circle
of four feet diameter, and now we slightly enlarged the limit, and
went to the farther depth of two feet. Still nothing appeared. The
gold-seeker, whom I sincerely pitied, at length clambered from the
pit, with the bitterest disappointment imprinted upon every feature,
and proceeded, slowly and reluctantly, to put on his coat, which he
had thrown off at the beginning of his labor. In the mean time I made
no remark. Jupiter, at a signal from his master, began to gather up
his tools. This done, and the dog having been unmuzzled, we turned in
profound silence towards home.

We had taken, perhaps, a dozen steps in this direction, when, with a
loud oath, Legrand strode up to Jupiter, and seized him by the collar.
The astonished <DW64> opened his eyes and mouth to the fullest extent,
let fall the spades, and fell upon his knees.

“You scoundrel,” said Legrand, hissing out the syllables from between
his clenched teeth—“you infernal black villain!—speak, I tell
you!—answer me this instant, without prevarication!—which—which is
your left eye?”

“Oh, my golly, Massa Will! aint dis here my lef eye for sartain?”
roared the terrified Jupiter, placing his hand upon his _right_ organ
of vision, and holding it there with a desperate pertinacity, as if in
immediate dread of his master’s attempt at a gouge.

“I thought so!—I knew it! hurrah!” vociferated Legrand, letting the
<DW64> go, and executing a series of curvets and caracoles, much to the
astonishment of his valet, who, arising from his knees, looked mutely
from his master to myself, and then from myself to his master.

“Come! we must go back,” said the latter, “the game’s not up yet;” and
he again led the way to the tulip-tree.

“Jupiter,” said he, when we reached its foot, “come here! was the
skull nailed to the limb with the face outward, or with the face to the
limb?”

“De face was out, massa, so dat de crows could get at de eyes good,
widout any trouble.”

“Well, then, was it this eye or that through which you dropped the
beetle?”—here Legrand touched each of Jupiter’s eyes.

“‘Twas dis eye, massa—de lef eye—jis as you tell me,” and here it was
his right eye that the <DW64> indicated.

“That will do—we must try it again.”

Here my friend, about whose madness I now saw, or fancied that I saw,
certain indications of method, removed the peg which marked the spot
where the beetle fell, to a spot about three inches to the westward of
its former position. Taking, now, the tape-measure from the nearest
point of the trunk to the peg, as before, and continuing the extension
in a straight line to the distance of fifty feet, a spot was indicated,
removed, by several yards, from the point at which we had been digging.

Around the new position a circle, somewhat larger than in the former
instance, was now described, and we again set to work with the spades.
I was dreadfully weary, but, scarcely understanding what had occasioned
the change in my thoughts, I felt no longer any great aversion from
the labor imposed. I had become most unaccountably interested—nay,
even excited. Perhaps there was something, amid all the extravagant
demeanor of Legrand—some air of forethought, or of deliberation—which
impressed me. I dug eagerly, and now and then caught myself actually
looking, with something that very much resembled expectation, for the
fancied treasure, the vision of which had demented my unfortunate
companion. At a period when such vagaries of thought most fully
possessed me, and when we had been at work perhaps an hour and a half,
we were again interrupted by the violent howlings of the dog. His
uneasiness, in the first instance, had been evidently but the result
of playfulness or caprice, but he now assumed a bitter and serious
tone. Upon Jupiter’s again attempting to muzzle him, he made furious
resistance, and, leaping into the hole, tore up the mould frantically
with his claws. In a few seconds he had uncovered a mass of human
bones, forming two complete skeletons, intermingled with several
buttons of metal, and what appeared to be the dust of decayed woollen.
One or two strokes of a spade upturned the blade of a large Spanish
knife, and, as we dug farther, three or four loose pieces of gold and
silver coin came to light.

At sight of these the joy of Jupiter could scarcely be restrained, but
the countenance of his master wore an air of extreme disappointment. He
urged us, however, to continue our exertions, and the words were hardly
uttered when I stumbled and fell forward, having caught the toe of my
boot in a large ring of iron that lay half buried in the loose earth.

We now worked in earnest, and never did I pass ten minutes of more
intense excitement. During this interval we had fairly unearthed
an oblong chest of wood, which, from its perfect preservation and
wonderful hardness, had plainly been subjected to some mineralizing
process—perhaps that of the bichloride of mercury. This box was three
feet and a half long, three feet broad, and two and a half feet deep.
It was firmly secured by bands of wrought iron, riveted, and forming a
kind of trellis-work over the whole. On each side of the chest, near
the top, were three rings of iron—six in all—by means of which a firm
hold could be obtained by six persons. Our utmost united endeavors
served only to disturb the coffer very slightly in its bed. We at once
saw the impossibility of removing so great a weight. Luckily, the sole
fastenings of the lid consisted of two sliding bolts. These we drew
back—trembling and panting with anxiety. In an instant, a treasure of
incalculable value lay gleaming before us. As the rays of the lanterns
fell within the pit, there flashed upwards, from a confused heap of
gold and of jewels, a glow and a glare that absolutely dazzled our eyes.

I shall not pretend to describe the feelings with which I gazed.
Amazement was, of course, predominant. Legrand appeared exhausted
with excitement, and spoke very few words. Jupiter’s countenance
wore, for some minutes, as deadly a pallor as it is possible, in
the nature of things, for any <DW64>’s visage to assume. He seemed
stupefied—thunderstricken. Presently he fell upon his knees in the
pit, and, burying his naked arms up to the elbows in gold, let them
there remain, as if enjoying the luxury of a bath. At length, with a
deep sigh, he exclaimed, as if in a soliloquy:

“And dis all cum ob de goole-bug! de putty goole-bug! de poor little
goole-bug, what I boosed in dat sabage kind ob style! Aint you shamed
ob yourself, <DW65>?—answer me dat!”

It became necessary, at last, that I should arouse both master and
valet to the expediency of removing the treasure. It was growing late,
and it behooved us to make exertion, that we might get everything
housed before daylight. It was difficult to say what should be done,
and much time was spent in deliberation—so confused were the ideas
of all. We finally lightened the box by removing two-thirds of its
contents, when we were enabled, with some trouble, to raise it from
the hole. The articles taken out were deposited among the brambles, and
the dog left to guard them, with strict orders from Jupiter neither,
upon any pretence, to stir from the spot, nor to open his mouth until
our return. We then hurriedly made for home with the chest; reaching
the hut in safety, but after excessive toil, at one o’clock in the
morning. Worn out as we were, it was not in human nature to do more
just now. We rested until two, and had supper; starting for the hills
immediately afterwards, armed with three stout sacks, which by good
luck were upon the premises. A little before four we arrived at the
pit, divided the remainder of the booty, as equally as might be, among
us, and, leaving the holes unfilled, again set out for the hut, at
which, for the second time, we deposited our golden burdens, just as
the first streaks of the dawn gleamed from over the tree-tops in the
East.

We were now thoroughly broken down; but the intense excitement of the
time denied us repose. After an unquiet slumber of some three or four
hours’ duration, we arose, as if by pre-concert, to make examination of
our treasure.

The chest had been full to the brim, and we spent the whole day, and
the greater part of the next night, in a scrutiny of its contents.
There had been nothing like order or arrangement. Everything had
been heaped in promiscuously. Having assorted all with care, we
found ourselves possessed of even vaster wealth than we had at first
supposed. In coin there was rather more than four hundred and fifty
thousand dollars: estimating the value of the pieces, as accurately
as we could, by the tables of the period. There was not a particle
of silver. All was gold of antique date and of great variety:
French, Spanish, and German money, with a few English guineas, and
some counters, of which we had never seen specimens before. There
were several very large and heavy coins, so worn that we could make
nothing of their inscriptions. There was no American money. The value
of the jewels we found more difficulty in estimating. There were
diamonds—some of them exceedingly large and fine—a hundred and ten
in all, and not one of them small; eighteen rubies of remarkable
brilliancy; three hundred and ten emeralds, all very beautiful; and
twenty-one sapphires, with an opal. These stones had all been broken
from their settings and thrown loose in the chest. The settings
themselves, which we picked out from among the other gold, appeared
to have been beaten up with hammers, as if to prevent identification.
Besides all this, there was a vast quantity of solid gold ornaments:
nearly two hundred massive finger and ear rings; rich chains—thirty
of these, if I remember; eighty-three very large and heavy crucifixes;
five gold censers of great value; a prodigious golden punch-bowl,
ornamented with richly chased vine-leaves and Bacchanalian figures;
with two sword handles exquisitely embossed, and many other smaller
articles which I cannot recollect. The weight of these valuables
exceeded three hundred and fifty pounds avoirdupois; and in this
estimate I have not included one hundred and ninety-seven superb gold
watches; three of the number being worth each five hundred dollars, if
one. Many of them were very old, and as time-keepers valueless, the
works having suffered more or less from corrosion; but all were richly
jewelled and in cases of great worth. We estimated the entire contents
of the chest, that night, at a million and a half of dollars; and,
upon the subsequent disposal of the trinkets and jewels (a few being
retained for our own use), it was found that we had greatly undervalued
the treasure.

When, at length, we had concluded our examination, and the intense
excitement of the time had in some measure subsided, Legrand,
who saw that I was dying with impatience for a solution of this
most extraordinary riddle, entered into a full detail of all the
circumstances connected with it.

“You remember,” said he, “the night when I handed you the rough sketch
I had made of the _scarabæus_. You recollect also, that I became quite
vexed at you for insisting that my drawing resembled a death’s-head.
When you first made this assertion I thought you were jesting; but
afterwards I called to mind the peculiar spots on the back of the
insect, and admitted to myself that your remark had some little
foundation in fact. Still, the sneer at my graphic powers irritated
me—for I am considered a good artist—and, therefore, when you handed
me the scrap of parchment, I was about to crumple it up and throw it
angrily into the fire.”

“The scrap of paper, you mean,” said I.

“No: it had much of the appearance of paper, and at first I supposed
it to be such, but when I came to draw upon it, I discovered it,
at once, to be a piece of very thin parchment. It was quite dirty,
you remember. Well, as I was in the very act of crumpling it up, my
glance fell upon the sketch at which you had been looking, and you
may imagine my astonishment when I perceived, in fact, the figure of
a death’s-head just where, it seemed to me, I had made the drawing of
the beetle. For a moment I was too much amazed to think with accuracy.
I knew that my design was very different in detail from this—although
there was a certain similarity in general outline. Presently I took
a candle and, seating myself at the other end of the room, proceeded
to scrutinize the parchment more closely. Upon turning it over, I
saw my own sketch upon the reverse, just as I had made it. My first
idea, now, was mere surprise at the really remarkable similarity
of outline—at the singular coincidence involved in the fact that,
unknown to me, there should have been a skull upon the other side
of the parchment, immediately beneath my figure of the _scarabæus_,
and that this skull, not only in outline, but in size, should so
closely resemble my drawing. I say the singularity of this coincidence
absolutely stupefied me for a time. This is the usual effect of such
coincidences. The mind struggles to establish a connection—a sequence
of cause and effect—and, being unable to do so, suffers a species of
temporary paralysis. But, when I recovered from this stupor, there
dawned upon me gradually a conviction which startled me even far more
than the coincidence. I began distinctly, positively, to remember that
there had been _no_ drawing on the parchment when I made my sketch of
the _scarabæus_. I became perfectly certain of this; for I recollected
turning up first one side and then the other, in search of the cleanest
spot. Had the skull been then there, of course I could not have failed
to notice it. Here was indeed a mystery which I felt it impossible
to explain; but, even at that early moment, there seemed to glimmer,
faintly, within the most remote and secret chambers of my intellect,
a glowworm-like conception of that truth which last night’s adventure
brought to so magnificent a demonstration. I arose at once, and,
putting the parchment securely away, dismissed all farther reflection
until I should be alone.

“When you had gone, and when Jupiter was fast asleep, I betook myself
to a more methodical investigation of the affair. In the first place
I considered the manner in which the parchment had come into my
possession. The spot where we discovered the _scarabæus_ was on the
coast of the mainland, about a mile eastward of the island, and but a
short distance above high-water mark. Upon my taking hold of it, it
gave me a sharp bite, which caused me to let it drop. Jupiter, with his
accustomed caution, before seizing the insect, which had flown towards
him, looked about him for a leaf, or something of that nature, by which
to take hold of it. It was at this moment that his eyes, and mine also,
fell upon the scrap of parchment, which I then supposed to be paper.
It was lying half buried in the sand, a corner sticking up. Near the
spot where we found it, I observed the remnants of the hull of what
appeared to have been a ship’s long boat. The wreck seemed to have been
there for a very great while; for the resemblance to boat timbers could
scarcely be traced.

“Well, Jupiter picked up the parchment, wrapped the beetle in it, and
gave it to me. Soon afterwards we turned to go home, and on the way met
Lieutenant G——. I showed him the insect, and he begged me to let him
take it to the fort. On my consenting, he thrust it forthwith into his
waistcoat pocket, without the parchment in which it had been wrapped,
and which I had continued to hold in my hand during his inspection.
Perhaps he dreaded my changing my mind, and thought it best to make
sure of the prize at once—you know how enthusiastic he is on all
subjects connected with Natural History. At the same time, without
being conscious of it, I must have deposited the parchment in my own
pocket.

“You remember that when I went to the table, for the purpose of
making a sketch of the beetle, I found no paper where it was usually
kept. I looked in the drawer, and found none there. I searched my
pockets, hoping to find an old letter, and then my hand fell upon the
parchment. I thus detail the precise mode in which it came into my
possession; for the circumstances impressed me with peculiar force.

“No doubt you will think me fanciful—but I had already established a
kind of _connection_. I had put together two links of a great chain.
There was a boat lying on a seacoast, and not far from the boat was
a parchment—_not a paper_—with a skull depicted on it. You will,
of course, ask ’where is the connection?’ I reply that the skull, or
death’s-head, is the well-known emblem of the pirate. The flag of the
death’s-head is hoisted in all engagements.

“I have said that the scrap was parchment, and not paper. Parchment
is durable—almost imperishable. Matters of little moment are rarely
consigned to parchment; since, for the mere ordinary purposes of
drawing or writing, it is not nearly so well adapted as paper. This
reflection suggested some meaning—some relevancy—in the death’s-head.
I did not fail to observe, also, the _form_ of the parchment. Although
one of its corners had been, by some accident, destroyed, it could
be seen that the original form was oblong. It was just such a slip,
indeed, as might have been chosen for a memorandum—for a record of
something to be long remembered and carefully preserved.”

“But,” I interposed, “you say that the skull was _not_ upon the
parchment when you made the drawing of the beetle. How then do you
trace any connection between the boat and the skull—since this latter,
according to your own admission, must have been designed (God only
knows how or by whom) at some period subsequent to your sketching the
_scarabæus_?”

“Ah, hereupon turns the whole mystery; although the secret, at this
point, I had comparatively little difficulty in solving. My steps were
sure, and could afford but a single result. I reasoned, for example,
thus: When I drew the _scarabæus_, there was no skull apparent on the
parchment. When I had completed the drawing I gave it to you, and
observed you narrowly until you returned it. _You_, therefore, did not
design the skull, and no one else was present to do it. Then it was not
done by human agency. And nevertheless it was done.

“At this stage of my reflections I endeavored to remember, and _did_
remember, with entire distinctness, every incident which occurred
about the period in question. The weather was chilly (O rare and happy
accident!), and a fire was blazing on the hearth. I was heated with
exercise and sat near the table. You, however, had drawn a chair close
to the chimney. Just as I placed the parchment in your hand, and as you
were in the act of inspecting it, Wolf, the Newfoundland, entered, and
leaped upon your shoulders. With your left hand you caressed him and
kept him off, while your right, holding the parchment, was permitted
to fall listlessly between your knees, and in close proximity to the
fire. At one moment I thought the blaze had caught it, and was about to
caution you, but, before I could speak, you had withdrawn it, and were
engaged in its examination. When I considered all these particulars, I
doubted not for a moment that _heat_ had been the agent in bringing to
light, on the parchment, the skull which I saw designed on it. You are
well aware that chemical preparations exist, and have existed time out
of mind, by means of which it is possible to write on either paper or
vellum, so that the characters shall become visible only when subjected
to the action of fire. Zaffre, digested in _aqua regia_, and diluted
with four times its weight of water, is sometimes employed; a green
tint results. The regulus of cobalt, dissolved in spirit of nitre,
gives a red. These colors disappear at longer or shorter intervals
after the material written upon cools, but again become apparent upon
the re-application of heat.

“I now scrutinized the death’s-head with care. Its outer edges—the
edges of the drawing nearest the edge of the vellum—were far more
_distinct_ than the others. It was clear that the action of the
caloric had been imperfect or unequal. I immediately kindled a fire,
and subjected every portion of the parchment to a glowing heat. At
first, the only effect was the strengthening of the faint lines in the
skull; but, on persevering in the experiment, there became visible at
the corner of the slip, diagonally opposite to the spot in which the
death’s-head was delineated, the figure of what I at first supposed
to be a goat. A closer scrutiny, however, satisfied me that it was
intended for a kid.”

“Ha! ha!” said I, “to be sure I have no right to laugh at you—a
million and a half of money is too serious a matter for mirth—but you
are not about to establish a third link in your chain: you will not
find any especial connection between your pirates and a goat; pirates,
you know, have nothing to do with goats; they appertain to the farming
interest.”

“But I have just said that the figure was _not_ that of a goat.”

“Well, a kid, then—pretty much the same thing.”

“Pretty much, but not altogether,” said Legrand. “You may have heard of
one _Captain_ Kidd. I at once looked on the figure of the animal as a
kind of punning or hieroglyphical signature. I say signature; because
its position on the vellum suggested this idea. The death’s-head at the
corner diagonally opposite had, in the same manner, the air of a stamp,
or seal. But I was sorely put out by the absence of all else—of the
body to my imagined instrument—of the text for my context.”

“I presume you expected to find a letter between the stamp and the
signature.”

“Something of that kind. The fact is, I felt irresistibly impressed
with a presentiment of some vast good fortune impending. I can
scarcely say why. Perhaps, after all, it was rather a desire than an
actual belief;—but do you know that Jupiter’s silly words, about the
bug being of solid gold, had a remarkable effect on my fancy? And
then the series of accidents and coincidences—these were so _very_
extraordinary. Do you observe how mere an accident it was that these
events should have occurred on the _sole_ day of all the year in which
it has been, or may be, sufficiently cool for fire, and that without
the fire, or without the intervention of the dog at the precise
moment in which he appeared, I should never have become aware of the
death’s-head, and so never the possessor of the treasure?”

“But proceed—I am all impatience.”

“Well; you have heard, of course, the many stories current—the
thousand vague rumors afloat about money buried, somewhere on the
Atlantic coast, by Kidd and his associates. These rumors must have had
some foundation in fact. And that the rumors have existed so long and
so continuously, could have resulted, it appeared to me, only from the
circumstance of the buried treasure still _remaining_ entombed. Had
Kidd concealed his plunder for a time, and afterwards reclaimed it, the
rumors would scarcely have reached us in their present unvarying form.
You will observe that the stories told are all about money-seekers,
not about money-finders. Had the pirate recovered his money, there the
affair would have dropped. It seemed to me that some accident—say the
loss of a memorandum indicating its locality—had deprived him of the
means of recovering it, and that this accident had become known to
his followers, who otherwise might never have heard that treasure had
been concealed at all, and, who, busying themselves in vain, because
unguided, attempts to regain it, had given first birth, and then
universal currency, to the reports which are now so common. Have you
ever heard of any important treasure being unearthed along the coast?”

“Never.”

“But that Kidd’s accumulations were immense is well known. I took
it for granted, therefore, that the earth still held them; and you
will scarcely be surprised when I tell you that I felt a hope, nearly
amounting to certainty, that the parchment so strangely found involved
a lost record of the place of deposit.”

“But how did you proceed?”

“I held the vellum again to the fire, after increasing the heat, but
nothing appeared. I now thought it possible that the coating of dirt
might have something to do with the failure; so I carefully rinsed
the parchment by pouring warm water over it, and, having done this, I
placed it in a tin pan, with the skull downwards, and put the pan upon
a furnace of lighted charcoal. In a few minutes, the pan having become
thoroughly heated, I removed the slip, and, to my inexpressible joy,
found it spotted, in several places, with what appeared to be figures
arranged in lines. Again I placed it in the pan, and suffered it to
remain another minute. Upon taking it off, the whole was just as you
see it now.”

Here Legrand, having reheated the parchment, submitted it to my
inspection. The following characters were rudely traced, in a red tint,
between the death’s-head and the goat:—

53‡‡†305))6*;4826)4‡.)4‡);806*;48†8¶60))85;;]8*;:
‡*8†83(88)5*†;46(;88*96*?;8)*‡(;485);5*†2:*‡(;4956
*2(5*—4)8¶8*;4069285);)6†8)4‡‡;1(‡9;48081;8:8‡1;48
†85;4)485†528806*81(‡9;48;(88;4(‡?34;48)4‡;161;:188 ;‡?;

“But,” said I, returning him the slip, “I am as much in the dark as
ever. “Were all the jewels of Golconda awaiting me on my solution of
this enigma, I am quite sure that I should be unable to earn them.”

“And yet,” said Legrand, “the solution is by no means so difficult as
you might be led to imagine from the first hasty inspection of the
characters. These characters, as any one might readily guess, form a
cipher—that is to say, they convey a meaning; but then, from what is
known of Kidd, I could not suppose him capable of constructing any of
the more abstruse cryptographs. I made up my mind, at once, that this
was of a simple species—such, however, as would appear, to the crude
intellect of the sailor, absolutely insoluble without the key.”

“And you really solved it?”

“Readily; I have solved others of an abstruseness ten thousand times
greater. Circumstances, and a certain bias of mind, have led me to take
interest in such riddles, and it may well be doubted whether human
ingenuity can construct an enigma of the kind which human ingenuity may
not, by proper application, resolve. In fact, having once established
connected and legible characters, I scarcely gave a thought to the mere
difficulty of developing their import.

“In the present case—indeed in all cases of secret writing—the first
question regards the _language_ of the cipher; for the principles of
solution, so far, especially, as the more simple ciphers are concerned,
depend on, and are varied by, the genius of the particular idiom.
In general, there is no alternative but experiment (directed by
probabilities) of every tongue known to him who attempts the solution,
until the true one be attained. But, with the cipher now before us,
all difficulty is removed by the signature. The pun upon the word
’Kidd’ is appreciable in no other language than the English. But for
this consideration I should have begun my attempts with the Spanish
and French, as the tongues in which a secret of this kind would most
naturally have been written by a pirate of the Spanish main. As it was,
I assumed the cryptograph to be English.

“You observe there are no divisions between the words. Had there been
divisions, the task would have been comparatively easy. In such case
I should have commenced with a collation and analysis of the shorter
words, and, had a word of a single letter occurred, as is most likely
(_a_ or _I_, for example), I should have considered the solution as
assured. But, there being no division, my first step was to ascertain
the predominant letters, as well as the least frequent. Counting all, I
constructed a table, thus:

  “Of the character 8 there are 33
                    ;    “      26
                    4    “      19
                   ‡)    “      16
                    *    “      13
                    5    “      12
                    6    “      11
                   †1    “       8
                    0    “       6
                   92    “       5
                   :3    “       4
                    ?    “       3
                    ¶    “       2
                  ]—    “       1

“Now, in English, the letter which most frequently occurs is _e_.
Afterwards the succession runs thus: _a o i d h n r s t u y c f g l
m w b k p q x z_. _E_ predominates, however, so remarkably that an
individual sentence of any length is rarely seen, in which it is not
the prevailing character.

“Here, then, we have, in the very beginning, the groundwork for
something more than a mere guess. The general use which may be made of
the table is obvious—but, in this particular cipher, we shall only
very partially require its aid. As our predominant character is 8,
we will commence by assuming it as the _e_ of the natural alphabet.
To verify the supposition, let us observe if the 8 be seen often in
couples—for _e_ is doubled with great frequency in English—in such
words, for example, as ’meet,’ ’fleet,’ ’speed,’ ’seen,’ ’been,’
’a’gree,’ &c. In the present instance we see it doubled no less than
five times, although the cryptograph is brief.

“Let us assume 8, then, as _e_. Now, of all _words_ in the language,
‘the’ is most usual; let us see, therefore, whether there are not
repetitions of any three characters, in the same order of collocation,
the last of them being 8. If we discover repetitions of such letters,
so arranged, they will most probably represent the word ’the.’
On inspection, we find no less than seven such arrangements, the
characters being ;48. We may, therefore, assume that the semicolon
represents _t_, that 4 represents _h_, and that 8 represents _e_—the
last being now well confirmed. Thus a great step has been taken.

“But, having established a single word, we are enabled to establish
a vastly important point; that is to say, several commencements and
terminations of other words. Let us refer, for example, to the last
instance but one, in which the combination ;48 occurs—not far from
the end of the cipher. We know that the semicolon immediately ensuing
is the commencement of a word, and, of the six characters succeeding
this ’the,’ we are cognizant of no less than five. Let us set these
characters down, thus, by the letters we know them to represent,
leaving a space for the unknown—

  t eeth.

“Here we are enabled, at once, to discard the ’_th_,’ as forming no
portion of the word commencing with the first _t_; since, by experiment
of the entire alphabet for a letter adapted to the vacancy, we perceive
that no word can be formed of which this _th_ can be a part. We are
thus narrowed into

  t ee,

and, going through the alphabet, if necessary, as before, we arrive
at the word ’tree’ as the sole possible reading. We thus gain
another letter, _r_, represented by (, with the words ’the tree’ in
juxtaposition.

“Looking beyond these words, for a short distance, we again see
the combination ;48, and employ it by way of _termination_ to what
immediately precedes. We have thus this arrangement:

  the tree ;4(‡?34 the,

or, substituting the natural letters, where known, it reads thus:

  the tree thr‡?3h the.

“Now, if, in place of the unknown characters, we leave blank spaces, or
substitute dots, we read thus:

  the tree thr . . . h the,

when the word ’_through_’ makes itself evident at once. But this
discovery gives us three new letters, _o_, _u_, and _g_, represented by
‡ ? and 3.

“Looking now, narrowly, through the cipher for combinations of known
characters, we find, not very far from the beginning, this arrangement,

  83(88, or egree,

which, plainly, is the conclusion of the word ’degree,’ and gives us
another letter, _d_, represented by †.

“Four letters beyond the word ’degree,’ we perceive the combination

  ;46(;88*

“Translating the known characters, and representing the unknown by
dots, as before, we read thus:

  th . rtee . ,

an arrangement immediately suggestive of the word ’thirteen,’ and again
furnishing us with two new characters, _i_ and _n_, represented by 6
and *.

“Referring, now, to the beginning of the cryptograph, we find the
combination,

  53‡‡†.

“Translating, as before, we obtain

  good,

which assures us that the first letter is _A_, and that the first two
words are ’A good.’

“To avoid confusion, it is now time that we arrange our key, as far as
discovered, in a tabular form. It will stand thus:

  5   represents   a
  † “      d
  8        “       e
  3        “       g
  4        “       h
  6        “       i
  *        “       n
  ‡        “       o
  (        “       r
  ;        “       t

“We have, therefore, no less than ten of the most important letters
represented, and it will be unnecessary to proceed with the details
of the solution. I have said enough to convince you that ciphers of
this nature are readily soluble, and to give you some insight into the
rationale of their development. But be assured that the specimen before
us appertains to the very simplest species of cryptograph. It now only
remains to give you the full translation of the characters upon the
parchment, as unriddled. Here it is:

_“‘A good glass in the Bishop’s hostel in the devil’s seat twenty-one
degrees and thirteen minutes north-east and by north main branch
seventh limb east side shoot from the left eye of the death’s-head a
bee-line from the tree through the shot fifty feet out.’”_

“But,” said I, “the enigma seems still in as bad a condition as ever.
How is it possible to extort a meaning from all this jargon about
’devil’s seats,’ ’death’s-heads,’ and ’Bishop’s hotels’?”

“I confess,” replied Legrand, “that the matter still wears a serious
aspect, when regarded with a casual glance. My first endeavor was
to divide the sentence into the natural division intended by the
cryptographist.”

“You mean, to punctuate it?”

“Something of that kind.”

“But how was it possible to effect this?”

“I reflected that it had been a _point_ with the writer to run his
words together without division, so as to increase the difficulty of
solution. Now, a not over-acute man, in pursuing such an object, would
be nearly certain to overdo the matter. When, in the course of his
composition, he arrived at a break in his subject which would naturally
require a pause, or a point, he would be exceedingly apt to run his
characters, at this place, more than usually close together. If you
will observe the MS., in the present instance, you will easily detect
five such cases of unusual crowding. Acting on this hint, I made the
division thus:

_“‘A good glass in the Bishop’s hostel in the Devil’s seat—twenty-one
degrees and thirteen minutes—north-east and by north—main branch
seventh limb east side—shoot from the left eye of the death’s-head—a
bee-line from the tree through the shot fifty feet out.’”_

“Even this division,” said I, “leaves me still in the dark.”

“It left me also in the dark,” replied Legrand, “for a few days; during
which I made diligent inquiry, in the neighborhood of Sullivan’s
Island, for any building which went by the name of the ’Bishop’s
Hotel’; for, of course, I dropped the obsolete word ’hostel.’ Gaining
no information on the subject, I was on the point of extending my
sphere of search, and proceeding in a more systematic manner, when one
morning it entered into my head, quite suddenly, that this ’Bishop’s
Hostel’ might have some reference to an old family, of the name of
Bessop, which, time out of mind, had held possession of an ancient
manor-house, about four miles to the northward of the island. I
accordingly went over to the plantation, and reinstituted my inquiries
among the older <DW64>s of the place. At length one of the most aged
of the women said that she had heard of such a place as _Bessop’s
Castle_, and thought that she could guide me to it, but that it was not
a castle, nor a tavern, but a high rock.

“I offered to pay her well for her trouble, and, after some demur,
she consented to accompany me to the spot. We found it without much
difficulty, when, dismissing her, I proceeded to examine the place. The
’castle’ consisted of an irregular assemblage of cliffs and rocks—one
of the latter being quite remarkable for its height as well as for its
insulated and artificial appearance. I clambered to its apex, and then
felt much at a loss as to what should be next done.

“While I was busied in reflection, my eyes fell on a narrow ledge in
the eastern face of the rock, perhaps a yard below the summit upon
which I stood. This ledge projected about eighteen inches, and was not
more than a foot wide, while a niche in the cliff just above it gave
it a rude resemblance to one of the hollow-backed chairs used by our
ancestors. I made no doubt that here was the ’devil’s seat’ alluded to
in the MS., and now I seemed to grasp the full secret of the riddle.

“The ’good glass,’ I knew, could have reference to nothing but a
telescope; for the word ’glass’ is rarely employed in any other sense
by seamen. Now here, I at once saw, was a telescope to be used, and a
definite point of view, _admitting no variation_, from which to use it.
Nor did I hesitate to believe that the phrases, ’twenty-one degrees
and thirteen minutes,’ and ‘north-east and by north,’ were intended as
directions for the levelling of the glass. Greatly excited by these
discoveries, I hurried home, procured a telescope, and returned to the
rock.

“I let myself down the ledge, and found that it was impossible to
retain a seat on it unless in one particular position. This fact
confirmed my preconceived idea. I proceeded to use the glass. Of
course, the ’twenty-one degrees and thirteen minutes’ could allude to
nothing but elevation above the visible horizon, since the horizontal
direction was clearly indicated by the words, ‘north-east and by
north.’ This latter direction I at once established by means of a
pocket-compass; then, pointing the glass as nearly at an angle of
twenty-one degrees of elevation as I could do it by guess, I moved it
cautiously up or down, until my attention was arrested by a circular
rift or opening in the foliage of a large tree that overtopped its
fellows in the distance. In the centre of this rift I perceived a white
spot, but could not, at first, distinguish what it was. Adjusting the
focus of the telescope, I again looked, and now made it out to be a
human skull.

“On this discovery I was so sanguine as to consider the enigma solved;
for the phrase ’main branch, seventh limb, east side,’ could refer only
to the position of the skull on the tree, while ’shoot from the left
eye of the death’s-head’ admitted, also, of but one interpretation, in
regard to a search for buried treasure. I perceived that the design was
to drop a bullet from the left eye of the skull, and that a bee-line,
or, in other words, a straight line, drawn from the nearest point of
the trunk through ’the shotì (or the spot where the bullet fell), and
thence extended to a distance of fifty feet, would indicate a definite
point—and beneath this point I thought it at least _possible_ that a
deposit of value lay concealed.”

“All this,” I said, “is exceedingly clear, and, although ingenious,
still simple and explicit. When you left the Bishop’s Hotel, what
then?”

“Why, having carefully taken the bearings of the tree, I turned
homewards. The instant that I left ’the devil’s seat,’ however, the
circular rift vanished; nor could I get a glimpse of it afterwards,
turn as I would. What seems to me the chief ingenuity in this whole
business, is the fact (for repeated experiment has convinced me it _is_
a fact) that the circular opening in question is visible from no other
attainable point of view than that afforded by the narrow ledge on the
face of the rock.

“In this expedition to the ’Bishop’s Hotel’ I had been attended
by Jupiter, who had no doubt observed, for some weeks past, the
abstraction of my demeanor, and took especial care not to leave me
alone. But on the next day, getting up very early, I contrived to give
him the slip, and went into the hills in search of the tree. After much
toil I found it. When I came home at night my valet proposed to give me
a flogging. With the rest of the adventure I believe you are as well
acquainted as myself.”

“I suppose,” said I, “you missed the spot, in the first attempt at
digging, through Jupiter’s stupidity in letting the bug fall through
the right instead of through the left eye of the skull.”

“Precisely. This mistake made a difference of about two inches and a
half in the ’shot’—that is to say, in the position of the peg nearest
the tree; and had the treasure been _beneath_ the ’shot,’ the error
would have been of little moment; but ’the shot,’ together with the
nearest point of the tree, were merely two points for the establishment
of a line of direction; of course the error, however trivial in the
beginning, increased as we proceeded with the line, and, by the time
we had gone fifty feet, threw us quite off the scent. But for my
deep-seated convictions that treasure was here somewhere actually
buried, we might have had all our labor in vain.”

“I presume the fancy of _the skull_—of letting fall a bullet through
the skull’s eye—was suggested to Kidd by the piratical flag. No doubt
he felt a kind of poetical consistency in recovering his money through
this ominous insignium.”

“Perhaps so; still, I cannot help thinking that common-sense had
quite as much to do with the matter as poetical consistency. To be
visible from the Devil’s seat, it was necessary that the object, if
small, should be _white_; and there is nothing like your human skull
for retaining and even increasing its whiteness under exposure to all
vicissitudes of weather.”

“But your grandiloquence, and your conduct in swinging the beetle—how
excessively odd! I was sure you were mad. And why did you insist on
letting fall the bug, instead of a bullet, from the skull?”

“Why, to be frank, I felt somewhat annoyed by your evident suspicions
touching my sanity, and so resolved to punish you quietly, in my
own way, by a little bit of sober mystification. For this reason I
swung the beetle, and for this reason I let it fall from the tree. An
observation of yours about its great weight suggested the latter idea.”

“Yes, I perceive; and now there is only one point which puzzles me.
What are we to make of the skeletons found in the hole?”

“That is a question I am no more able to answer than yourself. There
seems, however, only one plausible way of accounting for them—and
yet it is dreadful to believe in such atrocity as my suggestion would
imply. It is clear that Kidd—if Kidd indeed secreted this treasure,
which I doubt not—it is clear that he must have had assistance in the
labor. But, the worst of this labor concluded, he may have thought it
expedient to remove all participants in his secret. Perhaps a couple of
blows with a mattock were sufficient, while his coadjutors were busy in
the pit; perhaps it required a dozen—who shall tell?”




  THE RANSOM OF RED CHIEF

  BY

  O. HENRY

This is a plot-story of the kind in which the American public delights.
The reader enjoys the humor due to situation, hyperbole, satire, and
astounding verbal liberties to which the writer is given; but he enjoys
even more the sharp surprise that awaits him in the plot. He has
prepared himself for a certain conclusion and finds himself entirely in
the wrong. Nevertheless, he admits that the ending is not illogical nor
out of harmony with the general tone. Bill and Sam subscribe themselves
“Two Desperate Men,” but they are so characterized as to prepare us for
their surrender of the boy on the father’s own terms.

It is interesting to know that O. Henry himself put slight value
upon local color. “People say that I know New York well!” he says.
“But change Twenty-third Street to Main Street, rub out the Flatiron
Building and put in the Town Hall. Then the story will fit just as
truly elsewhere. At least, I hope that is the case with what I write.
So long as your story is true to life, the mere change of local color
will set it in the East, West, South, or North. The characters in ’The
Arabian Nights’ parade up and down Broadway at midday, or Main Street
in Dallas, Texas.”




THE RANSOM OF RED CHIEF[11]


It looked like a good thing: but wait till I tell you. “We were down
South, in Alabama—Bill Driscoll and myself—when this kidnapping idea
struck us. It was, as Bill afterward expressed it, “during a moment of
temporary mental apparition”; but we didn’t find that out till later.

There was a town down there, as flat as a flannel-cake, and called
Summit, of course. It contained inhabitants of as undeleterious and
self-satisfied a class of peasantry as ever clustered around a Maypole.

Bill and me had a joint capital of about six hundred dollars, and
we needed, just two thousand dollars more to pull off a fraudulent
town-lot scheme in Western Illinois with. We talked it over on the
front steps of the hotel. Philoprogenitiveness, says we, is strong in
semirural communities; therefore, and for other reasons, a kidnapping
project ought to do better there than in the radius of newspapers that
send reporters out in plain clothes to stir up talk about such things.
We knew that Summit couldn’t get after us with anything stronger than
constables and, maybe, some lackadaisical bloodhounds and a diatribe or
two in the _Weekly Farmers’ Budget_. So, it looked good.

We selected for our victim the only child of a prominent citizen named
Ebenezer Dorset. The father was respectable and tight, a mortgage
fancier and a stern, upright collection-plate passer and forecloser.
The kid was a boy of ten, with bas-relief freckles, and hair the color
of the cover of the magazine you buy at the news-stand when you want
to catch a train. Bill and me figured that Ebenezer would melt down for
a ransom of two thousand dollars to a cent. But wait till I tell you.

About two miles from Summit was a little mountain, covered with a dense
cedar brake. On the rear elevation of this mountain was a cave. There
we stored provisions.

One evening after sundown, we drove in a buggy past old Dorset’s house.
The kid was in the street, throwing rocks at a kitten on the opposite
fence.

“Hey, little boy!” says Bill, “would you like to have a bag of candy
and a nice ride?”

The boy catches Bill neatly in the eye with a piece of brick.

“That will cost the old man an extra five hundred dollars,” says Bill,
climbing over the wheel.

That boy put up a fight like a welter-weight cinnamon bear; but, at
last, we got him down in the bottom of the buggy and drove away. We
took him up to the cave, and I hitched the horse in the cedar brake.
After dark I drove the buggy to the little village, three miles away,
where we had hired it, and walked back to the mountain.

Bill was pasting court-plaster over the scratches and bruises on his
features. There was a fire burning behind the big rock at the entrance
of the cave, and the boy was watching a pot of boiling coffee, with two
buzzard tail-feathers stuck in his red hair. He points a stick at me
when I come up, and says:

“Ha! cursed paleface, do you dare to enter the camp of Red Chief, the
terror of the plains?”

“He’s all right now,” says Bill, rolling up his trousers and examining
some bruises on his shins. “We’re playing Indian. We’re making Buffalo
Bill’s show look like magic-lantern views of Palestine in the town
hall. I’m Old Hank, the Trapper, Red Chief’s captive, and I’m to be
scalped at daybreak. By Geronimo! that kid can kick hard.”

Yes, sir, that boy seemed to be having the time of his life. The fun
of camping out in a cave had made him forget that he was a captive
himself. He immediately christened me Snake-eye, the Spy, and announced
that, when his braves returned from the warpath, I was to be broiled at
the stake at the rising of the sun.

Then we had supper; and he filled his mouth full of bacon and bread and
gravy, and began to talk. He made a during-dinner speech something like
this:

“I like this fine. I never camped out before; but I had a pet ’possum
once, and I was nine last birthday. I hate to go to school. Rats ate
up sixteen of Jimmy Talbot’s aunt’s speckled hen’s eggs. Are there any
real Indians in these woods? I want some more gravy. Does the trees
moving make the wind blow? We had five puppies. What makes your nose so
red, Hank? My father has lots of money. Are the stars hot? I whipped
Ed Walker twice, Saturday. I don’t like girls. You dassent catch toads
unless with a string. Do oxen make any noise? Why are oranges round?
Have you got beds to sleep on in this cave? Amos Murray has got six
toes. A parrot can talk, but a monkey or a fish can’t. How many does it
take to make twelve?”

Every few minutes he would remember that he was a pesky redskin, and
pick up his stick rifle and tip-toe to the mouth of the cave to rubber
for the scouts of the hated paleface. Now and then he would let out a
war-whoop that made Old Hank the Trapper, shiver. That boy had Bill
terrorized from the start.

“Red Chief,” says I to the kid, “would you like to go home?”

“Aw, what for?” says he. “I don’t have any fun at home. I hate to go
to school. I like to camp out. You won’t take me back home again,
Snake-eye, will you?”

“Not right away,” says I. “We’ll stay here in the cave a while.”

“All right!” says he. “That’ll be fine. I never had such fun in all my
life.”

We went to bed about eleven o ’clock. We spread down some wide blankets
and quilts and put Red Chief between us. We weren’t afraid he’d run
away. He kept us awake for three hours, jumping up and reaching for
his rifle and screeching: “Hist! pard,” in mine and Bill’s ears, as
the fancied crackle of a twig or the rustle of a leaf revealed to his
young imagination the stealthy approach of the outlaw band. At last, I
fell into a troubled sleep, and dreamed that I had been kidnapped and
chained to a tree by a ferocious pirate with red hair.

Just at daybreak, I was awakened by a series of awful screams from
Bill. They weren’t yells, or howls, or shouts, or whoops, or yawps,
such as you’d expect from a manly set of vocal organs—they were simply
indecent, terrifying, humiliating screams, such as women emit when
they see ghosts or caterpillars. It’s an awful thing to hear a strong,
desperate, fat man scream incontinently in a cave at daybreak.

I jumped up to see what the matter was. Red Chief was sitting on Bill’s
chest, with one hand twined in Bill’s hair. In the other he had the
sharp case-knife we used for slicing bacon; and he was industriously
and realistically trying to take Bill’s scalp, according to the
sentence that had been pronounced upon him the evening before.

I got the knife away from the kid and made him lie down again. But,
from that moment, Bill’s spirit was broken. He laid down on his side
of the bed, but he never closed an eye again in sleep as long as that
boy was with us. I dozed off for a while, but along toward sun-up I
remembered that Red Chief had said I was to be burned at the stake at
the rising of the sun. I wasn’t nervous or afraid; but I sat up and lit
my pipe and leaned against a rock.

“What you getting up so soon for, Sam?” asked Bill.

“Me?” says I. “Oh, I got a kind of a pain in my shoulder. I thought
sitting up would rest it.”

“You’re a liar!” says Bill. “You’re afraid. You was to be burned at
sunrise, and you was afraid he’d do it. And he would, too, if he could
find a match. Ain’t it awful, Sam? Do you think anybody will pay out
money to get a little imp like that back home?”

“Sure,” said I. “A rowdy kid like that is just the kind that parents
dote on. Now, you and the Chief get up and cook breakfast, while I go
up on the top of this mountain and reconnoitre.”

I went up on the peak of the little mountain and ran my eye over the
contiguous vicinity. Over toward Summit I expected to see the sturdy
yeomanry of the village armed with scythes and pitchforks beating the
countryside for the dastardly kidnappers. But what I saw was a peaceful
landscape dotted with one man ploughing with a dun mule. Nobody was
dragging the creek; no couriers dashed hither and yon, bringing tidings
of no news to the distracted parents. There was a sylvan attitude of
somnolent sleepiness pervading that section of the external outward
surface of Alabama that lay exposed to my view. “Perhaps,” says I to
myself, “it has not yet been discovered that the wolves have borne away
the tender lambkin from the fold. Heaven help the wolves!” says I, and
I went down the mountain to breakfast.

When I got to the cave I found Bill backed up against the side of it,
breathing hard, and the boy threatening to smash him with a rock half
as big as a cocoanut.

“He put a red-hot boiled potato down my back,” explained Bill, “and
then mashed it with his foot; and I boxed his ears. Have you got a gun
about you, Sam?”

I took the rock away from the boy and kind of patched up the argument.
“I’ll fix you,” says the kid to Bill. “No man ever yet struck the Red
Chief but what he got paid for it. You better beware!”

After breakfast the kid takes a piece of leather with strings wrapped
around it out of his pocket and goes outside the cave unwinding it.

“What’s he up to now?” says Bill, anxiously. “You don’t think he’ll run
away, do you, Sam?”

“No fear of it,” says I. “He don’t seem to be much of a home body. But
we’ve got to fix up some plan about the ransom. There don’t seem to
be much excitement around Summit on account of his disappearance; but
maybe they haven’t realized yet that he’s gone. His folks may think
he’s spending the night with Aunt Jane or one of the neighbors. Anyhow,
he’ll be missed to-day. To-night we must get a message to his father
demanding the two thousand dollars for his return.”

Just then we heard a kind of war-whoop, such as David might have
emitted when he knocked out the champion Goliath. It was a sling that
Red Chief had pulled out of his pocket, and he was whirling it around
his head.

I dodged, and heard a heavy thud and a kind of a sigh from Bill, like
a horse gives out when you take his saddle off. A niggerhead rock the
size of an egg had caught Bill just behind his left ear. He loosened
himself all over and fell in the fire across the frying pan of hot
water for washing the dishes. I dragged him out and poured cold water
on his head for half an hour.

By and by, Bill sits up and feels behind his ear and says: “Sam, do you
know who my favorite Biblical character is?”

“Take it easy,” says I. “You’ll come to your senses presently.”

“King Herod,” says he. “You won’t go away and leave me here alone, will
you, Sam?”

I went out and caught that boy and shook him until his freckles rattled.

“If you don’t behave,” says I, “I’ll take you straight home. Now, are
you going to be good, or not?”

“I was only funning,” says he sullenly. “I didn’t mean to hurt Old
Hank. But what did he hit me for? I’ll behave, Snake-eye, if you won’t
send me home, and if you’ll let me play the Black Scout to-day.”

“I don’t know the game,” says I. “That’s for you and Mr. Bill to
decide. He’s your playmate for the day. I’m going away for a while, on
business. Now, you come in and make friends with him and say you are
sorry for hurting him, or home you go, at once.”

I made him and Bill shake hands, and then I took Bill aside and told
him I was going to Poplar Cove, a little village three miles from the
cave, and find out what I could about how the kidnapping had been
regarded in Summit. Also, I thought it best to send a peremptory letter
to old man Dorset that day, demanding the ransom and dictating how it
should be paid.

“You know, Sam,” says Bill, “I’ve stood by you without batting an eye
in earthquakes, fire, and flood—in poker games, dynamite outrages,
police raids, train robberies, and cyclones. I never lost my nerve
yet till we kidnapped that two-legged skyrocket of a kid. He’s got me
going. You won’t leave me long with him, will you, Sam?”

“I’ll be back some time this afternoon,” says I. “You must keep the boy
amused and quiet till I return. And now we’ll write the letter to old
Dorset.”

Bill and I got paper and pencil and worked on the letter while Red
Chief, with a blanket wrapped around him, strutted up and down,
guarding the mouth of the cave. Bill begged me tearfully to make the
ransom fifteen hundred dollars instead of two thousand. “I ain’t
attempting,” says he, “to decry the celebrated moral aspect of parental
affection, but we’re dealing with humans, and it ain’t human for
anybody to give up two thousand dollars for that forty-pound chunk
of freckled wildcat. I’m willing to take a chance at fifteen hundred
dollars. You can charge the difference up to me.”

So, to relieve Bill, I acceded, and we collaborated a letter that ran
this way:

 “_Ebenezer Dorset, Esq._:

 “We have your boy concealed in a place far from Summit. It is useless
 for you or the most skillful detectives to attempt to find him.
 Absolutely, the only terms on which you can have him restored to you
 are these: We demand fifteen hundred dollars in large bills for his
 return; the money to be left at midnight to-night at the same spot and
 in the same box as your reply—as hereinafter described. If you agree
 to these terms, send your answer in writing by a solitary messenger
 to-night at half-past eight o’clock. After crossing Owl Creek, on the
 road to Poplar Cove, there are three large trees about a hundred yards
 apart, close to the fence of the wheat field on the right-hand side.
 At the bottom of the fence-post, opposite the third tree, will be
 found a small pasteboard box.

 “The messenger will place the answer in this box and return
 immediately to Summit.

 “If you attempt any treachery or fail to comply with our demand as
 stated, you will never see your boy again.

 “If you pay the money as demanded, he will be returned to you safe
 and well within three hours. These terms are final, and if you do not
 accede to them no further communication will be attempted.

 “TWO DESPERATE MEN.”

I addressed this letter to Dorset, and put it in my pocket. As I was
about to start, the kid comes up to me and says:

“Aw, Snake-eye, you said I could play the Black Scout while you was
gone.”

“Play it, of course,” says I. “Mr. Bill will play with you. What kind
of a game is it?”

“I’m the Black Scout,” says Red Chief, “and I have to ride to the
stockade to warn the settlers that the Indians are coming. I’m tired of
playing Indian myself. I want to be the Black Scout.”

“All right.” says I. “It sounds harmless to me. I guess Mr. Bill will
help you foil the pesky savages.”

“What am I to do?” asks Bill, looking at the kid suspiciously.

“You are the hoss,” says Black Scout. “Get down on your hands and
knees. How can I ride to the stockade without a hoss?”

“You’d better keep him interested,” said I, “till we get the scheme
going. Loosen up.”

Bill gets down on his all fours, and a look comes in his eye like a
rabbit’s when you catch it in a trap.

“How far is it to the stockade, kid?” he asks, in a husky manner of
voice.

“Ninety miles,” says the Black Scout. “And you have to hump yourself to
get there on time. Whoa, now!”

The Black Scout jumps on Bill’s back and digs his heels in his side.

“For Heaven’s sake,” says Bill, “hurry back, Sam, as soon as you can.
I wish we hadn’t made the ransom more than a thousand. Say, you quit
kicking me or I’ll get up and warm you good.”

I walked over to Poplar Cove and sat around the post-office and store,
talking with the chawbacons that came in to trade. One whiskerando says
that he hears Summit is all upset on account of Elder Ebenezer Dorset’s
boy having been lost or stolen. That was all I wanted to know. I bought
some smoking tobacco, referred casually to the price of black-eyed
peas, posted my letter surreptitiously, and came away. The postmaster
said the mail-carrier would come by in an hour to take the mail on to
Summit.

When I got back to the cave Bill and the boy were not to be found. I
explored the vicinity of the cave, and risked a yodel or two, but there
was no response.

So I lighted my pipe and sat down on a mossy bank to await developments.

In about half an hour I heard the bushes rustle, and Bill wabbled out
into the little glade in front of the cave. Behind him was the kid,
stepping softly like a scout, with a broad grin on his face. Bill
stopped, took off his hat, and wiped his face with a red handkerchief.
The kid stopped about eight feet behind him.

“Sam,” says Bill, “I suppose you’ll think I’m a renegade, but I
couldn’t help it. I’m a grown person with masculine proclivities and
habits of self-defence, but there is a time when all systems of egotism
and predominance fail. The boy is gone. I have sent him home. All is
off. There was martyrs in old times,” goes on Bill, “that suffered
death rather than give up the particular graft they enjoyed. None of
’em ever was subjugated to such supernatural tortures as I have been.
I tried to be faithful to our articles of depredation; but there came a
limit.”

“What’s the trouble, Bill?” I asks him.

“I was rode,” says Bill, “the ninety miles to the stockade, not barring
an inch. Then, when the settlers was rescued, I was given oats. Sand
ain’t a palatable substitute. And then, for an hour I had to try to
explain to him why there was nothin’ in holes, how a road can run both
ways, and what makes the grass green. I tell you, Sam, a human can only
stand so much. I takes him by the neck of his clothes and drags him
down the mountain. On the way he kicks my legs black-and-blue from the
knees down; and I’ve got to have two or three bites on my thumb and
hand cauterized.

“But he’s gone”—continues Bill—“gone home. I showed him the road to
Summit and kicked him about eight feet nearer there at one kick. I’m
sorry we lose the ransom; but it was either that or Bill Driscoll to
the madhouse.”

Bill is puffing and blowing, but there is a look of ineffable peace and
growing content on his rose-pink features.

“Bill,” says I, “there isn’t any heart disease in your family, is
there?”

“No,” says Bill, “nothing chronic except malaria and accidents. Why?”

“Then you might turn around,” says I, “and have a look behind you.”

Bill turns and sees the boy, and loses his complexion and sits down
plump on the ground and begins to pluck aimlessly at grass and little
sticks. For an hour I was afraid for his mind. And then I told him
that my scheme was to put the whole job through immediately and that
we would get the ransom and be off with it by midnight if old Dorset
fell in with our proposition. So Bill braced up enough to give the kid
a weak sort of a smile and a promise to play the Russian in a Japanese
war with him as soon as he felt a little better.

I had a scheme for collecting that ransom without danger of being
caught by counterplots that ought to commend itself to professional
kidnappers. The tree under which the answer was to be left—and the
money later on—was close to the road fence with big, bare fields on
all sides. If a gang of constables should be watching for any one to
come for the note, they could see him a long way off crossing the
fields or in the road. But no, sirree! At half-past eight I was up in
that tree as well hidden as a tree toad, waiting for the messenger to
arrive.

Exactly on time, a half-grown boy rides up the road on a bicycle,
locates the pasteboard box at the foot of the fence-post, slips a
folded piece of paper into it, and pedals away again back toward Summit.

I waited an hour and then concluded the thing was square. I slid down
the tree, got the note, slipped along the fence till I struck the
woods, and was back at the cave in another half an hour. I opened the
note, got near the lantern, and read it to Bill. It was written with a
pen in a crabbed hand, and the sum and substance of it was this:

 “_Two Desperate Men._

 “_Gentlemen_: I received your letter to-day by post, in regard to the
 ransom you ask for the return of my son. I think you are a little high
 in your demands, and I hereby make you a counter-proposition, which I
 am inclined to believe you will accept. You bring Johnny home and pay
 me two hundred and fifty dollars in cash, and I agree to take him off
 your hands. You had better come at night, for the neighbors believe
 he is lost, and I couldn’t be responsible for what they would do to
 anybody they saw bringing him back.

  Very respectfully,

  “EBENEZER DORSET.”

“Great pirates of Penzance!” says I; “of all the impudent——”

But I glanced at Bill, and hesitated. He had the most appealing look in
his eyes I ever saw on the face of a dumb or a talking brute.

“Sam,” says he, “what’s two hundred and fifty dollars, after all? We’ve
got the money. One more night of this kid will send me to a bed in
Bedlam. Besides being a thorough gentleman, I think Mr. Dorset is a
spendthrift for making us such a liberal offer. You ain’t going to let
the chance go, are you?”

“Tell you the truth, Bill,” says I, “this little he ewe lamb has
somewhat got on my nerves too. We’ll take him home, pay the ransom, and
make our get-away.”

We took him home that night. We got him to go by telling him that his
father had bought a silver-mounted rifle and a pair of moccasins for
him, and we were going to hunt bears the next day.

It was just twelve o’clock when we knocked at Ebenezer’s front door.
Just at the moment when I should have been abstracting the fifteen
hundred dollars from the box under the tree, according to the original
proposition, Bill was counting out two hundred and fifty dollars into
Dorset’s hand.

When the kid found out we were going to leave him at home he started
up a howl like a calliope and fastened himself as tight as a leech to
Bill’s leg. His father peeled him away gradually, like a porous plaster.

“How long can you hold him?” asks Bill.

“I’m not as strong as I used to be,” says old Dorset, “but I think I
can promise you ten minutes.”

“Enough,” says Bill. “In ten minutes I shall cross the Central,
Southern, and Middle Western States, and be legging it trippingly for
the Canadian border.”

And, as dark as it was, and as fat as Bill was, and as good a runner as
I am, he was a good mile and a half out of Summit before I could catch
up with him.




THE FRESHMAN FULL-BACK

BY

RALPH D. PAINE

The chief interest in “The Freshman Full-Back” is that of character.
The action has real dramatic quality and is staged with the local color
of a college contest. But the great value of the action is ethical,
for it shows that one may “wrest victory from defeat” and that it is a
shameful thing to be a “coward and a quitter.”




THE FRESHMAN FULL-BACK[12]


The boyish night city editor glanced along the copy-readers’ table and
petulantly exclaimed:

“Isn’t that spread head ready yet, Mr. Seeley? It goes on the front
page and we are holding open for it. Whew, but you are slow. You ought
to be holding down a job on a quarterly review.”

A portly man of middle age dropped his pencil and turned heavily in his
chair to face the source of this public humiliation. An angry flush
overspread his face and he chewed at a grayish mustache as if fighting
down rebellion. His comrades at the long table had looked up from their
work and were eyeing the oldest copy-reader with sympathetic uneasiness
while they hoped that he would be able to hold himself in hand. The
night city editor felt the tension of this brief tableau and awaited
the threatened outbreak with a nervous smile. But Seeley jerked his
green eyeshade so low that his face was partly in eclipse, and wheeled
round to resume his task with a catch of the breath and a tone of
surrender in his reply.

“The head will be ready in five minutes, sir. The last pages of the
story are just coming in.”

A much younger man, at the farther end of the table, whispered to his
neighbor:

“That’s cheap and nasty, to call down old man Seeley as if he were
a cub reporter. He may have lost his grip, but he deserves decent
treatment for what he has been. Managing editor of this very sheet,
London correspondent before that, and the crack man of the staff when
most of the rest of us were in short breeches. And now Henry Harding
Seeley isn’t any too sure of keeping his job on the copy-desk.”

“That’s what the New York newspaper game can do to you if you stick at
it too long,” murmured the other. “Back to the farm for mine.”

It was long after midnight when these two put on their coats and bade
the city editor’s desk a perfunctory “Good-night.”

They left Henry Harding Seeley still slumped in his chair, writing with
dogged industry.

“He’s dead tired, you can see that,” commented one of the pair as they
headed for Broadway, “but, as usual, he is grinding out stuff for the
Sunday sheet after hours. He must need the extra coin mighty bad. I
came back for my overcoat at four the other morning, after the poker
game, and he was still pegging away just like that.”

Other belated editors and reporters of the _Chronicle_ staff drifted
toward the elevator, until the gray-haired copy-reader was left alone
in the city room as if marooned. Writing as steadily as if he were a
machine warranted to turn out so many words an hour, Seeley urged his
pencil until the last page was finished. Then he read and corrected the
“story,” slipped it through a slit in a door marked “Sunday Editor,”
and trudged out, while the tower clock was striking three.

Instead of seeking the chop-house, wherein the vivacious and tireless
youth of the staff were wont to linger over supper, he turned into a
side street and betook himself to a small café as yet unfrequented by
the night-owls of journalism. Seeley was a beaten man, and he preferred
to nurse his wounds in a morbid isolation. His gait and aspect were
those of one who was stolidly struggling on the defensive, as if
hostile circumstances had driven him into a corner where he was making
his last stand.

Through the years of his indomitable youth as a reporter of rare
ability and resourcefulness, he had never spared himself. Burning the
candle at both ends, with a vitality which had seemed inexhaustible,
he had won step after step of promotion until, at forty, he was made
managing editor of that huge and hard-driven organization, the _New
York Chronicle_. For five years of racking responsibility Henry Harding
Seeley had been able to maintain the pace demanded of his position.

Then came an error of judgment—a midnight decision demanded of a
fagged mind—and his O. K. was scrawled upon the first sheet of a
story of embezzlement in Wall Street. By an incredible blunder the
name of the fugitive cashier was coupled with that of the wrong bank.
Publication of the _Chronicle_ story started a terrific run on this
innocent institution, which won its libel suit against the newspaper in
the amount of one hundred thousand dollars.

The managing editor, two reporters, and the copy-reader who had handled
the fatal manuscript, were swept out of the building by one cyclonic
order from the owner thereof. Henry Seeley accepted his indirect
responsibility for the disaster in grim, manly fashion, and straightway
sought another berth befitting his journalistic station. But his one
costly slip was more than a nine-days’ scandal along Park Row, and
other canny proprietors were afraid that he might hit them in the very
vital regions of their pockets. Worse than this, his confidence in
himself had suffered mortal damage. The wear and tear of his earlier
years had left him with little reserve power, and he went to pieces in
the face of adverse fortune.

“Worked out at forty-five,” was the verdict of his friends, and they
began to pity him.

The will to succeed had been broken, but Seeley might have rallied had
not his wife died during the ebb-tide of his affairs. She had walked
hand in hand with him since his early twenties, her faith in him had
been his mainstay, and his happiness in her complete and beautiful.
Bereft of her when he stood most in need of her, he seemed to have no
more fight in him, and, drifting from one newspaper office to another,
he finally eddied into his old “shop” as a drudging copy-reader and an
object of sympathy to a younger generation.

There was one son, strong, bright, eager, and by dint of driving
his eternally wearied brain overtime, the father had been able to
send him to Yale, his own alma mater. More or less pious deception
had led young Ernest Seeley to believe that his father had regained
much of his old-time prestige with the _Chronicle_ and that he had
a hand in guiding its editorial destinies. The lad was a Freshman,
tremendously absorbed in the activities of the autumn term, and his
father was content that he should be so hedged about by the interests
of the campus world as to have small time or thought for the grizzled,
taciturn toiler in New York.

This was the kind of man that trudged heavily into the little German
café of an early morning after his long night’s slavery at the
copy-desk. His mind, embittered and sensitive to slights like a raw
nerve, was brooding over the open taunt of the night city editor, who
had been an office boy under him in the years gone by. From force of
habit he seated himself at a table in the rear of the room, shunning
the chance of having to face an acquaintance. Unfolding a copy of the
city edition, which had been laid on his desk damp from the press-room,
Seeley scanned the front page with scowling uneasiness, as if fearing
to find some blunder of his own handiwork. Then he turned to the
sporting page and began to read the football news.

His son Ernest had been playing as a substitute with the university
eleven, an achievement which stirred the father’s pride without moving
his enthusiasm. And the boy, chilled by his father’s indifference, had
said little about it during his infrequent visits to New York. But
now the elder Seeley sat erect, and his stolid countenance was almost
animated as he read, under a New Haven date line:

 “The Yale confidence of winning the game with Princeton to-morrow has
 been shattered, and gloom enshrouds the camp of the Elis to-night.
 Collins, the great full-back, who has been the key-stone of Yale’s
 offensive game, was taken to the infirmary late this afternoon. He
 complained of feeling ill after the signal practice yesterday; fever
 developed overnight, and the consulting physicians decided that he
 must be operated on for appendicitis without delay. His place in the
 Princeton game will be filled by Ernest Seeley, the Freshman, who
 has been playing a phenomenal game in the back-field, but who is so
 lacking in experience that the coaches are all at sea to-night. The
 loss of Collins has swung the betting around to even money instead of
 5 to 3 on Yale.”

The elder Seeley wiped his glasses as if not sure that he had read
aright.

Ernest had seemed to him no more than a sturdy infant and here he was,
on the eve of a championship football battle, picked to fight for the
“old blue.” The father’s career at Yale had been a most honorable one.
He, too, had played on the eleven and had helped to win two desperate
contests against Princeton. But all this belonged to a part of his life
which was dead and done for. He had not achieved in after years what
Yale expected of him, and his record there was with his buried memories.

Supper was forgotten while Henry Seeley wondered whether he really
wanted to go to New Haven to see his boy play. Many of his old friends
and classmates would be there and he did not wish to meet them.

And it stung him to the quick as he reflected:

“I should be very happy to see him win, but—but to see him whipped! I
couldn’t brace and comfort him. And supposing it breaks his heart to be
whipped as it has broken mine? No, I won’t let myself think that. I’m a
poor Yale man and a worse father, but I couldn’t stand going up there
to-day.”

Even more humiliating was the thought that he would shrink from asking
leave of the city editor. Saturday was not his “day off,” and he so
greatly hated to ask favors at the office, that the possibility of
being rebuffed was more than he was willing to face.

Into his unhappy meditations broke a boisterous hail:

“Diogenes Seeley, as I live. Why, you old rascal, I thought you were
dead or something. Glad I didn’t get foolish and go to bed. Here,
waiter, get busy.”

Seeley was startled, and he looked much more distressed than rejoiced
as he lumbered from his table to grasp the outstretched hand of a
classmate. The opera-hat of this Mr. Richard Giddings was cocked at a
rakish angle, his blue eye twinkled good cheer and youthful hilarity,
and his aspect was utterly care-free.

“How are you, Dick?” said Seeley, with an unusual smile which
singularly brightened his face. “You don’t look a day older than when I
last saw you. Still cutting coupons for a living?”

“Oh, money is the least of my worries,” gayly rattled Mr. Giddings.
“Been doing the heavy society act to-night, and on my way home found
I needed some sauerkraut and beer to tone up my jaded system. By Jove,
Harry, you’re as gray as a badger. This newspaper game must be bad for
the nerves. Lots of fellows have asked me about you. Never see you at
the University Club, nobody sees you anywhere. Remarkable how a man can
lose himself right here in New York. Still running the _Chronicle_, I
suppose.”

“I’m still in the old shop, Dick,” replied Seeley, glad to be rid of
this awkward question. “But I work nearly all night and sleep most of
the day, and am like a cog in a big machine that never stops grinding.”

“Shouldn’t do it. Wears a man out,” and Mr. Giddings sagely nodded his
head. “Course you are going up to the game to-day. Come along with
me. Special car with a big bunch of your old pals inside. They’ll be
tickled to death to find I’ve dug you out of your hole. Hello! Is that
this morning’s paper? Let me look at the sporting page. Great team at
New Haven, they tell me. What’s the latest odds? I put up a thousand at
five to three last week and am looking for some more easy money.”

The alert eye of the volatile Richard Giddings swept down the New Haven
dispatch like lightning.

With a grievous outcry he smote the table and shouted:

“Collins out of the game? Great Scott, Harry, that’s awful news. And a
green Freshman going to fill his shoes at the last minute. I feel like
weeping, honest I do. Who the deuce is this Seeley? Any kin of yours? I
suppose not or you would have bellowed it at me before this.”

“He is my only boy, Dick,” and the father held up his head with a
shadow of his old manner. “I didn’t know he had the ghost of a show to
make the team until I saw this dispatch.”

“Then, of course, you are coming up with me,” roared Mr. Giddings. “I
hope he’s a chip of the old block. If he has your sand they can’t stop
him. Jumping Jupiter, they couldn’t have stopped you with an axe when
you were playing guard in our time, Harry. I feel better already to
know that it is your kid going in at full-back to-day.”

“No, I’m not going up, Dick,” said Seeley slowly. “For one thing, it is
too short notice for me to break away from the office, and I—I haven’t
the nerve to watch the boy go into the game. I’m not feeling very fit.”

“Stuff and nonsense, you need a brain cure,” vociferated Richard
Giddings. “You, an old Yale guard, with a pup on the team, and he a
Freshman at that! Throw out your chest, man; tell the office to go to
the devil—where all newspapers belong—and meet me at the station at
ten o’clock sharp. You talk and look like the oldest living grad with
one foot in the grave.”

Seeley flushed and bit his lip. His dulled realization of what Yale
had been to him was quickened by this tormenting comrade of the brave
days of old, but he could not be shaken from his attitude of morbid
self-effacement.

“No, Dick, it’s no use,” he returned with a tremulous smile. “You can’t
budge me. But give my love to the crowd and tell them to cheer for that
youngster of mine until they’re blue in the face.”

Mr. Richard Giddings eyed him quizzically, and surmised that something
or other was gravely wrong with his grizzled classmate. But Seeley
offered no more explanations and the vivacious intruder fell to his
task of demolishing sauerkraut with great gusto, after which he nimbly
vanished into a cruising hansom with a sense of having been rebuffed.

Seeley watched him depart at great speed and then plodded toward his
up-town lodgings. His sleep was distressed with unhappy dreams, and
during a wakeful interval he heard a knock at his sitting-room door.

An office boy from the _Chronicle_ editorial rooms gave him a note and
waited for an answer.

Seeley recognized the handwriting of the managing editor and was
worried, for he was always expecting the worst to happen. He sighed
with relieved surprise as he read:

  “MY DEAR MR. SEELEY:

 “Please go to New Haven as soon as possible and do a couple of columns
 of descriptive introduction of the Yale-Princeton game. The sporting
 department will cover the technical story, but a big steamboat
 collision has just happened in North River, two or three hundred
 drowned and so on, and I need every man in the shop. As an old Yale
 player I am sure I can depend on you for a good story, and I know you
 used to do this kind of stuff in fine style.”

Seeley fished his watch from under a pillow. It was after ten o’clock
and the game would begin at two. While he hurried into his clothes he
was conscious of a distinct thrill of excited interest akin to his
old-time joy in the day’s work. Could he “do this kind of stuff in fine
style”? Why, before his brain had begun to be always tired, when he was
the star reporter of the _Chronicle_, his football introductions had
been classics in Park Row. If there was a spark of the old fire left
in him he would try to strike it out, and for the moment he forgot the
burden of inertia which had so long crushed him.

“But I don’t want to run into Dick Giddings and his crowd,” he muttered
as he sought his hat and overcoat. “And I’ll be up in the press-box
away from the mob of old grads. Perhaps my luck has turned.”

When Henry Seeley reached the Yale field the eleven had gone to the
dressing-rooms in the training house, and he hovered on the edge of
the flooding crowds, fairly yearning for a glimpse of the Freshman
full-back and a farewell grasp of his hand. The habitual dread lest
the son find cause to be ashamed of his father had been shoved into
the background by a stronger, more natural emotion. But he well knew
that he ought not to invade the training quarters in these last crucial
moments. Ernest must not be distraught by a feather’s weight of any
other interest than the task in hand. The coaches would be delivering
their final words of instruction and the old Yale guard could picture
to himself the tense absorption of the scene. Like one coming out of a
dream, the past was returning to him in vivid, heart-stirring glimpses.
Reluctantly he sought his place in the press-box high above the vast
amphitheatre.

The preliminary spectacle was movingly familiar: the rippling banks of
color which rose on all sides to frame the long carpet of chalked turf;
the clamorous outbursts of cheering when an eddy of Yale or Princeton
undergraduates swirled and tossed at command of the dancing dervish of
a leader at the edge of the field below; the bright, buoyant aspect of
the multitude as viewed en masse. Seeley leaned against the railing of
his lofty perch and gazed at this pageant until a sporting editor, long
in harness, nudged his elbow and said:

“Hello! I haven’t seen you at a game in a dozen years. Doing the story
or just working the press-badge graft? That namesake of yours will be
meat for the Tigers, I’m afraid. Glad he doesn’t belong to you, aren’t
you?”

Seeley stared at him like a man in a trance and replied evasively:

“He may be good enough. It all depends on his sand and nerve. Yes, I am
doing the story for a change. Have you the final line-up?”

“Princeton is playing all her regular men,” said the sporting editor,
giving Seeley his note-book. “The only Yale change is at full-back—and
that’s a catastrophe.”

Seeley copied the lists for reference and his pencil was not steady
when he came to “Full-back, Ernest T. Seeley.” But he pulled his
thoughts away from the eleven and began to jot down notes of the
passing incidents which might serve to weave into the fabric of his
description. The unwonted stimulus aroused his talent as if it were
not dead but dormant. The scene appealed to him with almost as much
freshness and color as if he were observing it for the first time.

A roar of cheering rose from a far corner of the field and ran swiftly
along the Yale side of the amphitheatre, which blossomed in tossing
blue. The Yale eleven scampered into view like colts at pasture, the
substitutes veering toward the benches behind the side-line. Without
more ado the team scattered in formation for signal practice, paying
no heed to the tumult which raged around and above them. Agile,
clean-limbed, splendid in their disciplined young manhood, the dark
blue of their stockings and the white “Y” gleaming on their sweaters
fairly trumpeted their significance to Henry Seeley. And poised behind
the rush-line, wearing his hard-won university blue, was the lithe
figure of the Freshman full-back, Ernest Seeley.

The youngster, whose fate it was to be called a “forlorn hope,” looked
fragile beside his comrades of the eleven. Although tall and wiry, he
was like a greyhound in a company of mastiffs. His father, looking
down at him from so great a height that he could not read his face,
muttered to himself while he dug his nails into his palms:

“He is too light for this day’s work. But he carries himself like a
thoroughbred.”

The boy and his fellows seemed singularly remote from the shouting
thousands massed so near them. They had become the sole arbiters of
their fate, and their impressive isolation struck Henry Seeley anew as
the most dramatic feature of this magnificent picture. He must sit idly
by and watch his only son battle through the most momentous hour of his
young life, as if he were gazing down from another planet.

The staccato cheers of Princeton rocketed along the other side of the
field, and the eleven from Old Nassau ran briskly over the turf and
wheeled into line for a last rehearsal of their machine-like tactics.
Henry Seeley was finding it hard to breathe, just as it had happened
in other days when he was waiting for the “kick-off” and facing a
straining Princeton line. The minutes were like hours while the
officials consulted with the captains in the centre of the field. Then
the two elevens ranged themselves across the brown turf, there was
breathless silence, and a Princeton toe lifted the ball far down toward
the Yale goal. It was the young full-back who waited to receive the
opening kick, while his comrades thundered toward him to form a flying
screen of interference. But the twisting ball bounded from his too
eager arms, and another Yale back fell on it in time to save it from
the clutches of a meteoric Princeton end.

“Nervous. Hasn’t steadied down yet,” exclaimed a reporter behind Henry
Seeley. “But he can’t afford to give Princeton any more chances like
that. Her ends are faster than chain lightning.”

The father groaned and wiped the sweat from his eyes. If the team were
afraid of this untried full-back, such a beginning would not give
them confidence. Then the two lines locked and heaved in the first
scrimmage, and a stocky Yale half-back was pulled down in his tracks.
Again the headlong Princeton defence held firm and the Yale captain
gasped, “Second down and three yards to gain.” The Yale interferers
sped to circle one end of the line, but they were spilled this way and
that and the runner went down a yard short of the needed distance.

The Yale full-back dropped back to punt. Far and true the ball soared
into the Princeton field, and the lithe Freshman had somewhat redeemed
himself. But now, for their own part, the sons of Old Nassau found
themselves unable to make decisive gains against the Yale defence.
Greek met Greek in these early clashes, and both teams were forced to
punt again and again. Trick-plays were spoiled by alert end-rushers for
the blue or the orange and black, fiercely launched assaults at centre
were torn asunder, and the longer the contest raged up and down the
field the more clearly it was perceived that these ancient rivals were
rarely well matched in point of strength and strategy.

The Yale coaches were dismayed at this turn of events. They had hoped
to see the ball carried toward the Princeton goal by means of shrewdly
devised teamwork, instead of which the burden of the game was shifted
to one man, the weakest link in the chain, the Freshman at full-back.
He was punting with splendid distance, getting the ball away when it
seemed as if he must be overwhelmed by the hurtling Tigers. Once or
twice, however, a hesitant nervousness almost wrought quick disaster,
and the Yale partisans watched him with tormenting apprehension.

The first half of the game was fought into the last few minutes of
play and neither eleven had been able to score. Then luck and skill
combined to force the struggle far down into Yale territory. Only ten
yards more of trampled turf to gain and Princeton would cross the last
white line. The indomitable spirit which had placed upon the escutcheon
of Yale football the figure of a bulldog rampant, rallied to meet this
crisis, and the hard-pressed line held staunch and won possession of
the ball on downs. Back to the very shadow of his own goal-posts the
Yale full-back ran to punt the ball out of the danger zone. It shot
fairly into his grasp from a faultless pass, but his fingers juggled
the slippery leather as if it were bewitched. For a frantic, awful
instant he fumbled with the ball and wildly dived after it as it
caromed off to one side, bounded crazily, and rolled beyond his reach.

The Princeton quarter-back had darted through the line like a bullet.
Without slackening speed or veering from his course, he scooped up
the ball as he fled toward the Yale goal-line. It was done and over
within a twinkling, and while the Yale team stampeded helplessly in his
wake the devastating hero was circling behind the goal-posts where he
flopped to earth, the precious ball apparently embedded in his stomach.
It was a Princeton touchdown fairly won, but made possible by the
tragic blunder of one Yale man. While ten thousand Princeton throats
were barking their jubilation, as many more loyal friends of Yale sat
sad-eyed and sullen and glowered their unspeakable displeasure at the
slim figure of the full-back as he limped into line to face the try for
goal.

The goal was not scored, however, and the fateful tally stood five
to nothing when the first half ended, with the blue banners drooping
disconsolate.

Henry Seeley pulled his slouch hat over his eyes and sat with hunched
shoulders staring at the Yale team as it left the field for the
intermission. He had forgotten about his story of the game. The old
spectre of failure obsessed him. It was already haunting the pathway
of his boy. Was he also to be beaten by one colossal blunder? Henry
Seeley felt that Ernest’s whole career hung upon his behavior in the
second half. How would the lad “take his medicine”? Would it break his
heart or rouse him to fight more valiantly? As if the father had been
thinking aloud, the sporting editor at his side observed:

“He may win the game yet. I like the looks of that boy. But he did
make a hideous mess of it, didn’t he? I hope he hasn’t got a streak of
yellow in him.”

Henry Seeley turned on his neighbor with a savage scowl and could not
hold, back the quivering retort:

“He belongs to me, I want you to understand, and we’ll say nothing
about yellow streaks until he has a chance to make good next half.”

“Whew-w-w, why did you hold it out on me, old man?” gasped the sporting
editor. “No wonder you kicked me black and blue without knowing it. I
hope he is a chip of the old block. I saw you play here in your last
game.”

Seeley grunted something and resumed staring at the field. He was
thinking of the present moment in the training quarters, of the muddy,
weary players sprawled around the head coach, of his wise, bitter,
stinging rebukes and admonitions. Perhaps he would take Ernest out of
the game. But Seeley was confident that the coaches would give the
boy a chance to redeem himself if they believed his heart was in the
right place. Presently the two teams trotted on the field, not as
nimbly as at their first appearance, but with dogged resolution in
their demeanor. Henry Seeley saw his son glance up at the “cheering
sections,” as if wondering whether their welcome was meant to include
him. One cheer, at least, was intended to greet him, for Henry Seeley
stood on his chair, waved his hat, and thundered:

“‘Rah, ’rah, ’rah, for Yale, my boy. Eat ’em alive as your daddy used
to do.”

The men from Princeton had no intention of being devoured in this
summary fashion. They resumed their tireless, whirlwind attack like
giants refreshed, and so harried their Yale foemen that they were
forced to their utmost to ward off another touchdown. This incessant
battering dulled the edges of their offensive tactics, and they seemed
unable to set in motion a consistent series of advances. But the joy of
Princeton was tempered by the knowledge that this, her dearest enemy,
was not beaten until the last play had been signalled.

And somehow the Yale machine of muscle, brains, and power began to find
itself when the afternoon shadows were slanting athwart the arena.
With the ball on Princeton’s forty-yard line the chosen sons of Eli
began a heroic advance down the field. It was as if some missing cog
had been supplied. “Straight old-fashioned football” it was, eleven
minds and bodies working as one and animated by a desperate resolve,
which carried the Yale team along for down after down into the heart of
Princeton’s ground.

Perhaps because he was fresher than the other backs, perhaps because
the captain knew his man, the ball was given to the Yale full-back for
one swift and battering assault after another. His slim figure pelted
at the rush-line, was overwhelmed in an avalanche of striped arms and
legs, but somehow twisted, wriggled, dragged itself ahead as if there
was no stopping him. The multitude comprehended that this despised and
disgraced Freshman was working out his own salvation along with that
of his comrades. Once, when the scrimmage was untangled, he was dragged
from beneath a heap of players, unable to regain his feet. He lay on
the grass a huddled heap, blood smearing his forehead. A surgeon and
the trainer doused and bandaged him, and presently he staggered to his
feet and hobbled to his station, rubbing his hands across his eyes as
if dazed.

When, at length, the stubbornly retreating Princeton line had been
driven deep down into their end of the field, they, too, showed that
they could hold fast in the last extremity. The Yale attack crumpled
against them as if it had struck a stone wall. Young Seeley seemed to
be so crippled and exhausted that he had been given a respite from the
interlocked, hammering onslaught, but at the third down the panting
quarter-back croaked out his signal. His comrades managed to rip a
semblance of an opening for him, he plunged through, popped clear of
the line, fell to his knees, recovered his footing by a miracle of
agility, and lunged onward, to be brought down within five yards of the
coveted goal-posts.

He had won the right to make the last momentous charge. Swaying in his
tracks, the full-back awaited the summons. Then he dived in behind the
interference for a circuit of the right end. Two Princeton men broke
through as if they had been shot out of mortars, but the Yale full-back
had turned and was ploughing straight ahead. Pulled down, dragging the
tackler who clung to his waist, he floundered to earth with most of the
Princeton team piled above him. But the ball lay beyond the fateful
chalk-line, the Yale touchdown was won, and the game was tied.

The captain clapped Seeley on the shoulder, nodded at the ball, and the
full-back limped on to the field to kick the goal or lose a victory.
There were no more signs of nervousness in his bearing. With grave
deliberation he stood waiting for the ball to be placed in front of
the goal-posts. The sun had dropped behind the lofty grand-stands. The
field lay in a kind of wintry twilight. Thirty thousand men and women
gazed in tensest silence at the mud-stained, battered youth who had
become the crowning issue of this poignant moment. Up in the press-box
a thick-set, grayish man dug his fists in his eyes and could not bear
to look at the lonely, reliant figure down yonder on the quiet field.
The father found courage to take his hands from his face only when a
mighty roar of joy boomed along the Yale side of the amphitheatre, and
he saw the ball drop in a long arc behind the goal-posts. The kick had
won the game for Yale.

Once clear of the crowds, Henry Seeley hurried toward the training
quarters. His head was up, his shoulders squared, and he walked with
the free stride of an athlete. Mr. Richard Giddings danced madly across
to him:

“Afraid to see him play were you, you silly old fool? He is a chip of
the old block. He didn’t know when he was licked. Wow, wow, wow, blood
will tell! Come along with us, Harry.”

“I must shake hands with the youngster, Dick. Glad I changed my mind
and came to see him do it.”

“All right, see you at Mory’s to-night. Tell the boy we’re all proud of
him.”

Seeley resumed his course, saying over and over again, as if he loved
the sound of the words, “chip of the old block,” “blood will tell.”

This verdict was like the ringing call of bugles. It made him feel
young, hopeful, resolute, that life were worth having for the sake of
its strife. One thing at least was certain. His son could “take his
punishment” and wrest victory from disaster, and he deserved something
better than a coward and a quitter for a father.

The full-back was sitting on a bench when the elder Seeley entered the
crowded, steaming room of the training house. The surgeon had removed
the muddy, blood-stained bandage from around his tousled head and was
cleansing an ugly, ragged gash. The boy scowled and winced but made no
complaint, although his bruised face was very pale.

“Must have made you feel pretty foggy,” said the surgeon. “I shall have
to put in a few stitches. It was a deuce of a thump.”

“I couldn’t see very well and my legs went queer for a few minutes, but
I’m all right now, thanks,” replied the full-back, and then, glancing
up, he espied his father standing near the door. The young hero of the
game beckoned him with a grimy fist. Henry Seeley went over to him,
took the fist in his two hands, and then patted the boy’s cheek with
awkward and unaccustomed tenderness.

“Sit still, Ernest. I won’t interfere with the doctor’s job. I just
wanted to let you know that I saw your bully work. It made me think
of—it made me think of——”

Henry Seeley’s voice broke curiously and his lip quivered. He had not
meant to show any emotion.

His son replied with a smile of affectionate admiration:

“It made you think of your own teams, didn’t it? And I was thinking
of you in that last half. It helped my nerve a whole lot to remember
that my dad never knew when he was licked. Why, even the coaches told
me that between the halves. It put more ginger into me than anything
else. We’ve got to keep up the family record between us.”

The father looked beyond the boy as if he were thinking of a bigger,
sterner game than football. There was the light of a resurrected
determination in his eyes, and a vibrant earnestness in his voice as he
said:

“I’m not worrying about your keeping the family record bright, Ernest.
And, however things may go with me, you will be able to hang fast to
the doctrine which helped you to-day, that your father, too, doesn’t
know when he is whipped.”




  GALLEGHER

  A NEWSPAPER STORY

  BY

  RICHARD HARDING DAVIS




This is an illustration of a popular type of the short-story. The
movement from beginning to end is swift and urgent; something important
is happening all the time. Description is reduced to the minimum, and
where it is used does not impede the action. The local color of a
great newspaper office in a large city contributes to the impression
of orderly activity and haste. Gallegher, moreover, is the kind of
character that enlists sympathy by his youth, his daring, and his
resourcefulness.




GALLEGHER[13]


We had had so many office-boys before Gallegher came among us that they
had begun to lose the characteristics of individuals, and became merged
in a composite photograph of small boys, to whom we applied the generic
title of “Here, you”; or “You, boy.”

We had had sleepy boys, and lazy boys, and bright, “smart” boys, who
became so familiar on so short an acquaintance that we were forced to
part with them to save our own self-respect.

They generally graduated into district-messenger boys, and occasionally
returned to us in blue coats with nickel-plated buttons, and patronized
us.

But Gallegher was something different from anything we had experienced
before. Gallegher was short and broad in build, with a solid, muscular
broadness, and not a fat and dumpy shortness. He wore perpetually on
his face a happy and knowing smile, as if you and the world in general
were not impressing him as seriously as you thought you were, and his
eyes, which were very black and very bright, snapped intelligently at
you like those of a little black-and-tan terrier.

All Gallegher knew had been learnt on the streets; not a very good
school in itself, but one that turns out very knowing scholars. And
Gallagher had attended both morning and evening sessions. He could not
tell you who the Pilgrim Fathers were, nor could he name the thirteen
original States, but he knew all the officers of the twenty-second
police district by name, and he could distinguish the clang of a
fire-engine’s gong from that of a patrol-wagon or an ambulance fully
two blocks distant. It was Gallegher who rang the alarm when the
Woolwich Mills caught fire, while the officer on the beat was asleep,
and it was Gallegher who led the “Black Diamonds” against the “Wharf
Rats,” when they used to stone each other to their hearts’ content on
the coal-wharves of Richmond.

I am afraid, now that I see these facts written down, that Gallegher
was not a reputable character; but he was so very young and so very old
for his years that we all liked him very much nevertheless. He lived
in the extreme northern part of Philadelphia, where the cotton- and
woollen-mills run down to the river, and how he ever got home after
leaving the _Press_ building at two in the morning, was one of the
mysteries of the office. Sometimes he caught a night car, and sometimes
he walked all the way, arriving at the little house, where his mother
and himself lived alone, at four in the morning. Occasionally he was
given a ride on an early milk-cart, or on one of the newspaper delivery
wagons, with its high piles of papers still damp and sticky from the
press. He knew several drivers of “night hawks”—those cabs that prowl
the streets at night looking for belated passengers—and when it was a
very cold morning he would not go home at all, but would crawl into one
of these cabs and sleep, curled upon the cushions, until daylight.

Besides being quick and cheerful, Gallegher possessed a power of
amusing the _Press’s_ young men to a degree seldom attained by the
ordinary mortal. His clog-dancing on the city editor’s desk, when
that gentleman was upstairs fighting for two more columns of space,
was always a source of innocent joy to us, and his imitations of the
comedians of the variety halls delighted even the dramatic critic, from
whom the comedians themselves failed to force a smile.

But Gallegher’s chief characteristic was his love for that element of
news generically classed as “crime.”

Not that he ever did anything criminal himself. On the contrary, his
was rather the work of the criminal specialist, and his morbid interest
in the doings of all queer characters, his knowledge of their methods,
their present whereabouts, and their past deeds of transgression often
rendered him a valuable ally to our police reporter, whose daily
feuilletons were the only portion of the paper Gallegher deigned to
read.

In Gallegher the detective element was abnormally developed. He had
shown this on several occasions, and to excellent purpose.

Once the paper had sent him into a Home for Destitute Orphans which was
believed to be grievously mismanaged, and Gallegher, while playing the
part of a destitute orphan, kept his eyes open to what was going on
around him so faithfully that the story he told of the treatment meted
out to the real orphans was sufficient to rescue the unhappy little
wretches from the individual who had them in charge, and to have the
individual himself sent to jail.

Gallegher’s knowledge of the aliases, terms of imprisonment, and
various misdoings of the leading criminals in Philadelphia was almost
as thorough as that of the chief of police himself, and he could tell
to an hour when “Dutchy Mack” was to be let out of prison, and could
identify at a glance “Dick Oxford, confidence man,” as “Gentleman Dan,
petty thief.”

There were, at this time, only two pieces of news in any of the
papers. The least important of the two was the big fight between the
Champion of the United States and the Would-be Champion, arranged to
take place near Philadelphia; the second was the Burrbank murder, which
was filling space in newspapers all over the world, from New York to
Bombay.

Richard F. Burrbank was one of the most prominent of New York’s
railroad lawyers; he was also, as a matter of course, an owner of much
railroad stock, and a very wealthy man. He had been spoken of as a
political possibility for many high offices, and, as the counsel for a
great railroad, was known even further than the great railroad itself
had stretched its system.

At six o’clock one morning he was found by his butler lying at the foot
of the hall stairs with two pistol wounds above his heart. He was quite
dead. His safe, to which only he and his secretary had the keys, was
found open, and $200,000 in bonds, stocks, and money, which had been
placed there only the night before, was found missing. The secretary
was missing also. His name was Stephen S. Hade, and his name and his
description had been telegraphed and cabled to all parts of the world.
There was enough circumstantial evidence to show, beyond any question
or possibility of mistake, that he was the murderer.

It made an enormous amount of talk, and unhappy individuals were
being arrested all over the country, and sent on to New York for
identification. Three had been arrested at Liverpool, and one man just
as he landed at Sydney, Australia. But so far the murderer had escaped.

We were all talking about it one night, as everybody else was all over
the country, in the local room, and the city editor said it was worth
a fortune to any one who chanced to run across Hade and succeeded in
handing him over to the police. Some of us thought Hade had taken
passage from some one of the smaller sea-ports, and others were of the
opinion that he had buried himself in some cheap lodging-house in New
York, or in one of the smaller towns in New Jersey.

“I shouldn’t be surprised to meet him out walking, right here in
Philadelphia,” said one of the staff. “He’ll be disguised, of course,
but you could always tell him by the absence of the trigger finger on
his right hand. It’s missing, you know; shot off when he was a boy.”

“You want to look for a man dressed like a tough,” said the city
editor; “for as this fellow is to all appearances a gentleman, he will
try to look as little like a gentleman as possible.”

“No, he won’t,” said Gallegher, with that calm impertinence that made
him dear to us. “He’ll dress just like a gentleman. Toughs don’t wear
gloves, and you see he’s got to wear ’em. The first thing he thought
of after doing for Burrbank was of that gone finger, and how he was to
hide it. He stuffed the finger of that glove with cotton so’s to make
it look like a whole finger, and the first time he takes off that glove
they’ve got him—see, and he knows it. So what youse want to do is to
look for a man with gloves on. I’ve been a-doing it for two weeks now,
and I can tell you it’s hard work, for everybody wears gloves this
kind of weather. But if you look long enough you’ll find him. And when
you think it’s him, go up to him and hold out your hand in a friendly
way, like a bunco-steerer, and shake his hand; and if you feel that
his forefinger ain’t real flesh, but just wadded cotton, then grip to
it with your right and grab his throat with your left, and holler for
help.”

There was an appreciative pause.

“I see, gentlemen,” said the city editor, drily, “that Gallegher’s
reasoning has impressed you; and I also see that before the week is
out all of my young men will be under bonds for assaulting innocent
pedestrians whose only offence is that they wear gloves in mid-winter.”

       *       *       *       *       *

It was about a week after this that Detective Hefflefinger, of
Inspector Byrnes’s staff, came over to Philadelphia after a burglar,
of whose whereabouts he had been misinformed by telegraph. He brought
the warrant, requisition, and other necessary papers with him, but the
burglar had flown. One of our reporters had worked on a New York paper,
and knew Hefflefinger, and the detective came to the office to see if
he could help him in his so far unsuccessful search.

He gave Gallegher his card, and after Gallegher had read it, and had
discovered who the visitor was, he became so demoralized that he was
absolutely useless.

“One of Byrnes’s men” was a much more awe-inspiring individual to
Gallegher than a member of the Cabinet. He accordingly seized his hat
and overcoat, and leaving his duties to be looked after by others,
hastened out after the object of his admiration, who found his
suggestions and knowledge of the city so valuable, and his company so
entertaining, that they became very intimate, and spent the rest of the
day together.

In the meanwhile the managing editor had instructed his subordinates
to inform Gallegher, when he condescended to return, that his services
were no longer needed. Gallegher had played truant once too often.
Unconscious of this, he remained with his new friend until late the
same evening, and started the next afternoon toward the _Press_ office.

       *       *       *       *       *

As I have said, Gallegher lived in the most distant part of the city,
not many minutes’ walk from the Kensington railroad station, where
trains ran into the suburbs and on to New York.

It was in front of this station that a smoothly-shaven, well-dressed
man brushed past Gallegher and hurried up the steps to the ticket
office.

He held a walking-stick in his right hand, and Gallegher, who now
patiently scrutinized the hands of every one who wore gloves, saw that
while three fingers of the man’s hand were closed around the cane, the
fourth stood out in almost a straight line with his palm.

Gallegher stopped with a gasp and with a trembling all over his little
body, and his brain asked with a throb if it could be possible. But
possibilities and probabilities were to be discovered later. Now was
the time for action.

He was after the man in a moment, hanging at his heels and his eyes
moist with excitement.

He heard the man ask for a ticket to Torresdale, a little station just
outside of Philadelphia, and when he was out of hearing, but not out of
sight, purchased one for the same place.

The stranger went into the smoking-car, and seated himself at one end
toward the door. Gallegher took his place at the opposite end.

He was trembling all over, and suffered from a slight feeling of
nausea. He guessed it came from fright, not of any bodily harm that
might come to him, but at the probability of failure in his adventure
and of its most momentous possibilities.

The stranger pulled his coat collar up around his ears, hiding the
lower portion of his face, but not concealing the resemblance in his
troubled eyes and close-shut lips to the likenesses of the murderer
Hade.

They reached Torresdale in half an hour, and the stranger, alighting
quickly, struck off at a rapid pace down the country road leading to
the station.

Gallegher gave him a hundred yards’ start, and then followed slowly
after. The road ran between fields and past a few frame-houses set far
from the road in kitchen gardens.

Once or twice the man looked back over his shoulder, but he saw only a
dreary length of road with a small boy splashing through the slush in
the midst of it and stopping every now and again to throw snowballs at
belated sparrows.

After a ten minutes’ walk the stranger turned into a side road which
led to only one place, the Eagle Inn, an old roadside hostelry known
now as the headquarters for pothunters from the Philadelphia game
market and the battle-ground of many a cock-fight.

Gallegher knew the place well. He and his young companions had often
stopped there when out chestnutting on holidays in the autumn.

The son of the man who kept it had often accompanied them on their
excursions, and though the boys of the city streets considered him a
dumb lout, they respected him somewhat owing to his inside knowledge of
dog- and cock-fights.

The stranger entered the inn at a side door, and Gallegher, reaching
it a few minutes later, let him go for the time being, and set about
finding his occasional playmate, young Keppler.

Keppler’s offspring was found in the wood-shed.

“‘Tain’t hard to guess what brings you out here,” said the
tavern-keeper’s son, with a grin; “it’s the fight.”

“What fight?” asked Gallegher, unguardedly.

“What fight? Why, _the_ fight,” returned his companion, with the slow
contempt of superior knowledge.

“It’s to come off here to-night. You knew that as well as me; anyway
your sportin’ editor knows it. He got the tip last night, but that
won’t help you any. You needn’t think there’s any chance of your
getting a peep at it. Why, tickets is two hundred and fifty apiece!”

“Whew!” whistled Gallegher, “where’s it to be?”

“In the barn,” whispered Keppler. “I helped ’em fix the ropes this
morning, I did.”

“Gosh, but you’re in luck,” exclaimed Gallegher, with flattering envy.
“Couldn’t I jest get a peep at it?”

“Maybe,” said the gratified Keppler. “There’s a winder with a wooden
shutter at the back of the barn. You can get in by it, if you have some
one to boost you up to the sill.”

“Sa-a-y,” drawled Gallegher, as if something had but just that moment
reminded him. “Who’s that gent who come down the road just a bit ahead
of me—him with the cape-coat! Has he got anything to do with the
fight?”

“Him?” repeated Keppler in tones of sincere disgust. “No-oh, he ain’t
no sport. He’s queer, Dad thinks. He come here one day last week about
ten in the morning, said his doctor told him to go out ’en the country
for his health. He’s stuck up and citified, and wears gloves, and takes
his meals private in his room, and all that sort of truck. They was
saying in the saloon last night that they thought he was hiding from
something, and Dad, just to try him, asks him last night if he was
coming to see the fight. He looked sort of scared, and said he didn’t
want to see no fight. And then Dad says, ’I guess you mean you don’t
want no fighters to see you.’ Dad didn’t mean no harm by it, just
passed it as a joke; but Mr. Carleton, as he calls himself, got white
as a ghost an’ says, ’I’ll go to the fight willing enough,’ and begins
to laugh and joke. And this morning he went right into the bar-room,
where all the sports were setting, and said he was going in to town to
see some friends; and as he starts off he laughs an’ says, ’This don’t
look as if I was afraid of seeing people, does it?’ but Dad says it was
just bluff that made him do it, and Dad thinks that if he hadn’t said
what he did, this Mr. Carleton wouldn’t have left his room at all.”

Gallegher had got all he wanted, and much more than he had hoped
for—so much more that his walk back to the station was in the nature
of a triumphal march.

He had twenty minutes to wait for the next train, and it seemed an
hour. While waiting he sent a telegram to Hefflefinger at his hotel.
It read: “Your man is near the Torresdale station, on Pennsylvania
Railroad; take cab, and meet me at station. Wait until I come.
GALLEGHER.”

With the exception of one at midnight, no other train stopped at
Torresdale that evening, hence the direction to take a cab.

The train to the city seemed to Gallegher to drag itself by inches. It
stopped and backed at purposeless intervals, waited for an express to
precede it, and dallied at stations, and when, at last, it reached the
terminus, Gallegher was out before it had stopped and was in the cab
and off on his way to the home of the sporting editor.

The sporting editor was at dinner and came out in the hall to see him,
with his napkin in his hand. Gallegher explained breathlessly that he
had located the murderer for whom the police of two continents were
looking, and that he believed, in order to quiet the suspicions of the
people with whom he was hiding, that he would be present at the fight
that night.

The sporting editor led Gallegher into his library and shut the door.
“Now,” he said, “go over all that again.”

Gallegher went over it again in detail, and added how he had sent for
Hefflefinger to make the arrest in order that it might be kept from the
knowledge of the local police and from the Philadelphia reporters.

“What I want Hefflefinger to do is to arrest Hade with the warrant he
has for the burglar,” explained Gallegher; “and to take him on to New
York on the owl train that passes Torresdale at one. It don’t get to
Jersey City until four o’clock, one hour after the morning papers go to
press. Of course, we must fix Hefflefinger so’s he’ll keep quiet and
not tell who his prisoner really is.”

The sporting editor reached his hand out to pat Gallegher on the head,
but changed his mind and shook hands with him instead.

“My boy,” he said, “you are an infant phenomenon. If I can pull the
rest of this thing off to-night, it will mean the $5,000 reward and
fame galore for you and the paper. Now, I’m going to write a note to
the managing editor, and you can take it around to him and tell him
what you’ve done and what I am going to do, and he’ll take you back on
the paper and raise your salary. Perhaps you didn’t know you’ve been
discharged?”

“Do you think you ain’t a-going to take me with you?” demanded
Gallegher.

“Why, certainly not. Why should I? It all lies with the detective and
myself now. You’ve done your share, and done it well. If the man’s
caught, the reward’s yours. But you’d only be in the way now. You’d
better go to the office and make your peace with the chief.”

“If the paper can get along without me, I can get along without the
old paper,” said Gallegher, hotly. “And if I ain’t a-going with you,
you ain’t neither, for I know where Hefflefinger is to be, and you
don’t, and I won’t tell you.”

“Oh, very well, very well,” replied the sporting editor, weakly
capitulating. “I’ll send the note by a messenger; only mind, if you
lose your place, don’t blame me.”

Gallegher wondered how this man could value a week’s salary against the
excitement of seeing a noted criminal run down, and of getting the news
to the paper, and to that one paper alone.

From that moment the sporting editor sank in Gallegher’s estimation.

Mr. Dwyer sat down at his desk and scribbled off the following note:

 “I have received reliable information that Hade, the Burrbank
 murderer, will be present at the fight to-night. We have arranged it
 so that he will be arrested quietly and in such a manner that the fact
 may be kept from all other papers. I need not point out to you that
 this will be the most important piece of news in the country to-morrow.

  “Yours, etc.,

  “MICHAEL E. DWYER.”

The sporting editor stepped into the waiting cab, while Gallegher
whispered the directions to the driver. He was told to go first to a
district-messenger office, and from there up to the Ridge Avenue Road,
out Broad Street, and on to the old Eagle Inn, near Torresdale.

       *       *       *       *       *

It was a miserable night. The rain and snow were falling together, and
freezing as they fell. The sporting editor got out to send his message
to the _Press_ office, and then lighting a cigar, and turning up the
collar of his great-coat, curled up in the corner of the cab.

“Wake me when we get there, Gallegher,” he said. He knew he had a long
ride, and much rapid work before him, and he was preparing for the
strain.

To Gallegher the idea of going to sleep seemed almost criminal. From
the dark corner of the cab his eyes shone with excitement, and with the
awful joy of anticipation. He glanced every now and then to where the
sporting editor’s cigar shone in the darkness, and watched it as it
gradually burnt more dimly and went out. The lights in the shop windows
threw a broad glare across the ice on the pavements, and the lights
from the lamp-posts tossed the distorted shadow of the cab, and the
horse, and the motionless driver, sometimes before and sometimes behind
them.

After half an hour Gallegher slipped down to the bottom of the cab and
dragged out a lap-robe, in which he wrapped himself. It was growing
colder, and the damp, keen wind swept in through the cracks until the
window-frames and woodwork were cold to the touch.

An hour passed, and the cab was still moving more slowly over the
rough surface of partly paved streets, and by single rows of new
houses standing at different angles to each other in fields covered
with ash-heaps and brick-kilns. Here and there the gaudy lights of a
drug-store, and the forerunner of suburban civilization, shone from
the end of a new block of houses, and the rubber cape of an occasional
policeman showed in the light of the lamp-post that he hugged for
comfort.

Then even the houses disappeared, and the cab dragged its way between
truck farms, with desolate-looking, glass-covered beds, and pools of
water, half-caked with ice, and bare trees, and interminable fences.

Once or twice the cab stopped altogether, and Gallegher could hear the
driver swearing to himself, or at the horse, or the roads. At last they
drew up before the station at Torresdale. It was quite deserted, and
only a single light cut a swath in the darkness and showed a portion
of the platform, the ties, and the rails glistening in the rain. They
walked twice past the light before a figure stepped out of the shadow
and greeted them cautiously.

“I am Mr. Dwyer, of the _Press_,” said the sporting editor, briskly.
“You’ve heard of me, perhaps. Well, there shouldn’t be any difficulty
in our making a deal, should there? This boy here has found Hade,
and we have reason to believe he will be among the spectators at the
fight to-night. We want you to arrest him quietly, and as secretly as
possible. You can do it with your papers and your badge easily enough.
We want you to pretend that you believe he is this burglar you came
over after. If you will do this, and take him away without any one so
much as suspecting who he really is, and on the train that passes here
at 1.20 for New York, we will give you $500 out of the $5,000 reward.
If, however, one other paper, either in New York or Philadelphia, or
anywhere else, knows of the arrest, you won’t get a cent. Now, what do
you say?”

The detective had a great deal to say. He wasn’t at all sure the man
Gallegher suspected was Hade; he feared he might get himself into
trouble by making a false arrest, and if it should be the man, he was
afraid the local police would interfere.

“We’ve no time to argue or debate this matter,” said Dwyer, warmly.
“We agree to point Hade out to you in the crowd. After the fight is
over you arrest him as we have directed, and you get the money and the
credit of the arrest. If you don’t like this, I will arrest the man
myself, and have him driven to town, with a pistol for a warrant.”

Hefflefinger considered in silence and then agreed unconditionally. “As
you say, Mr. Dwyer,” he returned. “I’ve heard of you for a thoroughbred
sport. I know you’ll do what you say you’ll do; and as for me I’ll do
what you say and just as you say, and it’s a very pretty piece of work
as it stands.”

They all stepped back into the cab, and then it was that they were met
by a fresh difficulty, how to get the detective into the barn where the
fight was to take place, for neither of the two men had $250 to pay for
his admittance.

But this was overcome when Gallegher remembered the window of which
young Keppler had told him.

In the event of Hade’s losing courage and not daring to show himself in
the crowd around the ring, it was agreed that Dwyer should come to the
barn and warn Hefflefinger; but if he should come, Dwyer was merely to
keep near him and to signify by a prearranged gesture which one of the
crowd he was.

They drew up before a great black shadow of a house, dark, forbidding,
and apparently deserted. But at the sound of the wheels on the gravel
the door opened, letting out a stream of warm, cheerful light, and a
man’s voice said, “Put out those lights. Don’t youse know no better
than that?” This was Keppler, and he welcomed Mr. Dwyer with effusive
courtesy.

The two men showed in the stream of light, and the door closed on them,
leaving the house as it was at first, black and silent, save for the
dripping of the rain and snow from the eaves.

The detective and Gallegher put out the cab’s lamps and led the horse
toward a long, low shed in the rear of the yard, which they now noticed
was almost filled with teams of many different makes, from the
Hobson’s choice of a livery stable to the brougham of the man about
town.

“No,” said Gallegher, as the cabman stopped to hitch the horse beside
the others, “we want it nearest that lower gate. When we newspaper men
leave this place we’ll leave it in a hurry, and the man who is nearest
town is likely to get there first. You won’t be a-following of no
hearse when you make your return trip.”

Gallegher tied the horse to the very gate-post itself, leaving the gate
open and allowing a clear road and a flying start for the prospective
race to Newspaper Row.

The driver disappeared under the shelter of the porch, and Gallegher
and the detective moved off cautiously to the rear of the barn. “This
must be the window,” said Hefflefinger, pointing to a broad wooden
shutter some feet from the ground.

“Just you give me a boost once, and I’ll get that open in a jiffy,”
said Gallegher.

The detective placed his hands on his knees, and Gallegher stood upon
his shoulders, and with the blade of his knife lifted the wooden button
that fastened the window on the inside, and pulled the shutter open.

Then he put one leg inside over the sill, and leaning down helped to
draw his fellow-conspirator up to a level with the window. “I feel just
like I was burglarizing a house,” chuckled Gallegher, as he dropped
noiselessly to the floor below and refastened the shutter. The barn was
a large one, with a row of stalls on either side in which horses and
cows were dozing. There was a haymow over each row of stalls, and at
one end of the barn a number of fence-rails had been thrown across from
one mow to the other. These rails were covered with hay.

In the middle of the floor was the ring. It was not really a ring, but
a square, with wooden posts at its four corners through which ran a
heavy rope. The space inclosed by the rope was covered with sawdust.

Gallegher could not resist stepping into the ring, and after stamping
the sawdust once or twice, as if to assure himself that he was really
there, began dancing around it, and indulging in such a remarkable
series of fistic manœuvres with an imaginary adversary that the
unimaginative detective precipitately backed into a corner of the barn.

“Now, then,” said Gallegher, having apparently vanquished his foe, “you
come with me.” His companion followed quickly as Gallegher climbed
to one of the haymows, and crawling carefully out on the fence-rail,
stretched himself at full length, face downward. In this position, by
moving the straw a little, he could look down, without being himself
seen, upon the heads of whomsoever stood below. “This is better’n a
private box, ain’t it?” said Gallegher.

The boy from the newspaper office and the detective lay there in
silence, biting at straws and tossing anxiously on their comfortable
bed.

It seemed fully two hours before they came. Gallegher had listened
without breathing, and with every muscle on a strain, at least a dozen
times, when some movement in the yard had led him to believe that they
were at the door.

And he had numerous doubts and fears. Sometimes it was that the police
had learnt of the fight, and had raided Keppler’s in his absence, and
again it was that the fight had been postponed, or, worst of all, that
it would be put off until so late that Mr. Dwyer could not get back in
time for the last edition of the paper. Their coming, when at last
they came, was heralded by an advance-guard of two sporting men, who
stationed themselves at either side of the big door.

“Hurry up, now, gents,” one of the men said with a shiver, “don’t keep
this door open no longer’n is needful.”

It was not a very large crowd, but it was wonderfully well selected. It
ran, in the majority of its component parts, to heavy white coats with
pearl buttons. The white coats were shouldered by long blue coats with
astrakhan fur trimmings, the wearers of which preserved a cliqueness
not remarkable when one considers that they believed every one else
present to be either a crook or a prize-fighter.

There were well-fed, well-groomed clubmen and brokers in the crowd, a
politician or two, a popular comedian with his manager, amateur boxers
from the athletic clubs, and quiet, close-mouthed sporting men from
every city in the country. Their names if printed in the papers would
have been as familiar as the types of the papers themselves.

And among these men, whose only thought was of the brutal sport to
come, was Hade, with Dwyer standing at ease at his shoulder,—Hade,
white, and visibly in deep anxiety, hiding his pale face beneath a
cloth travelling-cap, and with his chin muffled in a woollen scarf.
He had dared to come because he feared his danger from the already
suspicious Keppler was less than if he stayed away. And so he was
there, hovering restlessly on the border of the crowd, feeling his
danger and sick with fear.

When Hefflefinger first saw him he started up on his hands and elbows
and made a movement forward as if he would leap down then and there and
carry off his prisoner single-handed.

“Lie down,” growled Gallegher; “an officer of any sort wouldn’t live
three minutes in that crowd.”

The detective drew back slowly and buried himself again in the straw,
but never once through the long fight which followed did his eyes leave
the person of the murderer. The newspaper men took their places in the
foremost row close around the ring, and kept looking at their watches
and begging the master of ceremonies to “shake it up, do.”

There was a great deal of betting, and all of the men handled the
great roll of bills they wagered with a flippant recklessness which
could only be accounted for in Gallegher’s mind by temporary mental
derangement. Some one pulled a box out into the ring and the master of
ceremonies mounted it, and pointed out in forcible language that as
they were almost all already under bonds to keep the peace, it behooved
all to curb their excitement and to maintain a severe silence, unless
they wanted to bring the police upon them and have themselves “sent
down” for a year or two.

Then two very disreputable-looking persons tossed their respective
principals’ high hats into the ring, and the crowd, recognizing in
this relic of the days when brave knights threw down their gauntlets
in the lists as only a sign that the fight was about to begin, cheered
tumultuously.

This was followed by a sudden surging forward, and a mutter of
admiration much more flattering than the cheers had been, when the
principals followed their hats, and slipping out of their great-coats,
stood forth in all the physical beauty of the perfect brute.

Their pink skin was as soft and healthy-looking as a baby’s, and glowed
in the lights of the lanterns like tinted ivory, and underneath this
silken covering the great biceps and muscles moved in and out and
looked like the coils of a snake around the branch of a tree.

Gentleman and blackguard shouldered each other for a nearer view; the
coachmen, whose metal buttons were unpleasantly suggestive of police,
put their hands, in the excitement of the moment, on the shoulders
of their masters; the perspiration stood out in great drops on the
foreheads of the backers, and the newspaper men bit somewhat nervously
at the ends of their pencils.

And in the stalls the cows munched contentedly at their cuds and gazed
with gentle curiosity at their two fellow-brutes, who stood waiting
the signal to fall upon, and kill each other if need be, for the
delectation of their brothers.

“Take your places,” commanded the master of ceremonies.

In the moment in which the two men faced each other the crowd became so
still that, save for the beating of the rain upon the shingled roof and
the stamping of a horse in one of the stalls, the place was as silent
as a church.

“Time!” shouted the master of ceremonies.

The two men sprang into a posture of defence, which was lost as quickly
as it was taken, one great arm shot out like a piston-rod; there was
the sound of bare fists beating on naked flesh; there was an exultant
indrawn gasp of savage pleasure and relief from the crowd, and the
great fight had begun.

How the fortunes of war rose and fell, and changed and rechanged that
night, is an old story to those who listen to such stories; and those
who do not will be glad to be spared the telling of it. It was, they
say, one of the bitterest fights between two men that this country has
ever known.

But all that is of interest here is that after an hour of this
desperate brutal business the champion ceased to be the favorite; the
man whom he had taunted and bullied, and for whom the public had but
little sympathy, was proving himself a likely winner, and under his
cruel blows, as sharp and clean as those from a cutlass, his opponent
was rapidly giving way.

The men about the ropes were past all control now; they drowned
Keppler’s petitions for silence with oaths and in inarticulate shouts
of anger, as if the blows had fallen upon them, and in mad rejoicings.
They swept from one end of the ring to the other, with every muscle
leaping in unison with those of the man they favored, and when a New
York correspondent muttered over his shoulder that this would be the
biggest sporting surprise since the Heenan-Sayers fight, Mr. Dwyer
nodded his head sympathetically in assent.

In the excitement and tumult it is doubtful if any heard the three
quickly repeated blows that fell heavily from the outside upon the
big doors of the barn. If they did, it was already too late to mend
matters, for the door fell, torn from its hinges, and as it fell a
captain of police sprang into the light from out of the storm, with his
lieutenants and their men crowding close at his shoulder.

In the panic and stampede that followed, several of the men stood as
helplessly immovable as though they had seen a ghost; others made a mad
rush into the arms of the officers and were beaten back against the
ropes of the ring; others dived headlong into the stalls, among the
horses and cattle, and still others shoved the rolls of money they held
into the hands of the police and begged like children to be allowed to
escape.

The instant the door fell and the raid was declared Hefflefinger
slipped over the cross rails on which he had been lying, hung for an
instant by his hands, and then dropped into the centre of the fighting
mob on the floor. He was out of it in an instant with the agility of
a pickpocket, was across the room and at Hade’s throat like a dog. The
murderer, for the moment, was the calmer man of the two.

“Here,” he panted, “hands off, now. There’s no need for all this
violence. There’s no great harm in looking at a fight, is there?
There’s a hundred-dollar bill in my right hand; take it and let me slip
out of this. No one is looking. Here.”

But the detective only held him the closer.

“I want you for burglary,” he whispered under his breath. “You’ve got
to come with me now, and quick. The less fuss you make, the better for
both of us. If you don’t know who I am, you can feel my badge under my
coat there. I’ve got the authority. It’s all regular, and when we’re
out of this d——d row I’ll show you the papers.”

He took one hand from Hade’s throat and pulled a pair of handcuffs from
his pocket.

“It’s a mistake. This is an outrage,” gasped the murderer, white and
trembling, but dreadfully alive and desperate for his liberty. “Let me
go, I tell you! Take your hands off of me! Do I look like a burglar,
you fool?”

“I know who you look like,” whispered the detective, with his face
close to the face of his prisoner. “Now, will you go easy as a burglar,
or shall I tell these men who you are and what I _do_ want you for?
Shall I call out your real name or not? Shall I tell them? Quick, speak
up; shall I?”

There was something so exultant—something so unnecessarily savage in
the officer’s face that the man he held saw that the detective knew him
for what he really was, and the hands that had held his throat slipped
down around his shoulders, or he would have fallen. The man’s eyes
opened and closed again, and he swayed weakly backward and forward, and
choked as if his throat were dry and burning. Even to such a hardened
connoisseur in crime as Gallegher, who stood closely by, drinking it
in, there was something so abject in the man’s terror that he regarded
him with what was almost a touch of pity.

“For God’s sake,” Hade begged, “let me go. Come with me to my room and
I’ll give you half the money. I’ll divide with you fairly. We can both
get away. There’s a fortune for both of us there. We both can get away.
You’ll be rich for life. Do you understand—for life!”

But the detective, to his credit, only shut his lips the tighter.

“That’s enough,” he whispered, in return. “That’s more than I expected.
You’ve sentenced yourself already. Come!”

Two officers in uniform barred their exit at the door, but Hefflefinger
smiled easily and showed his badge.

“One of Byrnes’s men,” he said, in explanation; “came over expressly to
take this chap. He’s a burglar; ’Arlie’ Lane, _alias_ Carleton. I’ve
shown the papers to the captain. It’s all regular. I’m just going to
get his traps at the hotel and walk him over to the station. I guess
we’ll push right on to New York to-night.”

The officers nodded and smiled their admiration for the representative
of what is, perhaps, the best detective force in the world, and let him
pass.

Then Hefflefinger turned and spoke to Gallegher, who still stood as
watchful as a dog at his side. “I’m going to his room to get the bonds
and stuff,” he whispered; “then I’ll march him to the station and take
that train. I’ve done my share; don’t forget yours!”

“Oh, you’ll get your money right enough,” said Gallegher. “And, sa-ay,”
he added, with the appreciative nod of an expert, “do you know, you did
it rather well.”

Mr. Dwyer had been writing while the raid was settling down, as he had
been writing while waiting for the fight to begin. Now he walked over
to where the other correspondents stood in angry conclave.

The newspaper men had informed the officers who hemmed them in that
they represented the principal papers of the country, and were
expostulating vigorously with the captain, who had planned the raid,
and who declared they were under arrest.

“Don’t be an ass, Scott,” said Mr. Dwyer, who was too excited to be
polite or politic. “You know our being here isn’t a matter of choice.
We came here on business, as you did, and you’ve no right to hold us.”

“If we don’t get our stuff on the wire at once,” protested a New York
man, “we’ll be too late for to-morrow’s paper, and——”

Captain Scott said he did not care a profanely small amount for
to-morrow’s paper, and that all he knew was that to the station-house
the newspaper men would go. There they would have a hearing, and if the
magistrate chose to let them off, that was the magistrate’s business,
but that his duty was to take them into custody.

“But then it will be too late, don’t you understand?” shouted Mr.
Dwyer. “You’ve got to let us go _now_, at once.”

“I can’t do it, Mr. Dwyer,” said the captain, “and that’s all there is
to it. Why, haven’t I just sent the president of the Junior Republican
Club to the patrol-wagon, the man that put this coat on me, and do
you think I can let you fellows go after that? You were all put
under bonds to keep the peace not three days ago, and here you’re at
it—fighting like badgers. It’s worth my place to let one of you off.”

What Mr. Dwyer said next was so uncomplimentary to the gallant Captain
Scott that that overwrought individual seized the sporting editor by
the shoulder, and shoved him into the hands of two of his men.

This was more than the distinguished Mr. Dwyer could brook, and he
excitedly raised his hand in resistance. But before he had time to do
anything foolish his wrist was gripped by one strong, little hand, and
he was conscious that another was picking the pocket of his great-coat.

He slapped his hands to his sides, and looking down, saw Gallegher
standing close behind him and holding him by the wrist. Mr. Dwyer
had forgotten the boy’s existence, and would have spoken sharply if
something in Gallegher’s innocent eyes had not stopped him.

Gallegher’s hand was still in that pocket, in which Mr. Dwyer had
shoved his note-book filled with what he had written of Gallegher’s
work and Hade’s final capture, and with a running descriptive account
of the fight. With his eyes fixed on Mr. Dwyer, Gallegher drew it out,
and with a quick movement shoved it inside his waistcoat. Mr. Dwyer
gave a nod of comprehension. Then glancing at his two guardsmen, and
finding that they were still interested in the wordy battle of the
correspondents with their chief, and had seen nothing, he stooped and
whispered to Gallegher: “The forms are locked at twenty minutes to
three. If you don’t get there by that time it will be of no use, but if
you’re on time you’ll beat the town—and the country too.”

Gallegher’s eyes flashed significantly, and nodding his head to show he
understood, started boldly on a run toward the door. But the officers
who guarded it brought him to an abrupt halt, and, much to Mr. Dwyer’s
astonishment, drew from him what was apparently a torrent of tears.

“Let me go to me father. I want me father,” the boy shrieked,
hysterically. “They’ve ’rested father. Oh, daddy, daddy. They’re
a-goin’ to take you to prison.”

“Who is your father, sonny?” asked one of the guardians of the gate.

“Keppler’s me father,” sobbed Gallegher. “They’re a-goin’ to lock him
up, and I’ll never see him no more.”

“Oh, yes, you will,” said the officer, good-naturedly; “he’s there in
that first patrol-wagon. You can run over and say good-night to him,
and then you’d better get to bed. This ain’t no place for kids of your
age.”

“Thank you, sir,” sniffed Gallegher, tearfully, as the two officers
raised their clubs, and let him pass out into the darkness.

The yard outside was in a tumult, horses were stamping, and plunging,
and backing the carriages into one another; lights were flashing from
every window of what had been apparently an uninhabited house, and the
voices of the prisoners were still raised in angry expostulation.

Three police patrol-wagons were moving about the yard, filled with
unwilling passengers, who sat or stood, packed together like sheep, and
with no protection from the sleet and rain.

Gallegher stole off into a dark corner, and watched the scene until his
eyesight became familiar with the position of the land.

Then with his eyes fixed fearfully on the swinging light of a lantern
with which an officer was searching among the carriages, he groped
his way between horses’ hoofs and behind the wheels of carriages to
the cab which he had himself placed at the furthermost gate. It was
still there, and the horse, as he had left it, with its head turned
toward the city. Gallegher opened the big gate noiselessly, and worked
nervously at the hitching strap. The knot was covered with a thin
coating of ice, and it was several minutes before he could loosen it.
But his teeth finally pulled it apart, and with the reins in his hands
he sprang upon the wheel. And as he stood so, a shock of fear ran down
his back like an electric current, his breath left him, and he stood
immovable, gazing with wide eyes into the darkness.

The officer with the lantern had suddenly loomed up from behind a
carriage not fifty feet distant, and was standing perfectly still, with
his lantern held over his head, peering so directly toward Gallegher
that the boy felt that he must see him. Gallegher stood with one foot
on the hub of the wheel and with the other on the box waiting to
spring. It seemed a minute before either of them moved, and then the
officer took a step forward, and demanded sternly, “Who is that? What
are you doing there?”

There was no time for parley then. Gallegher felt that he had been
taken in the act, and that his only chance lay in open flight. He
leaped up on the box, pulling out the whip as he did so, and with a
quick sweep lashed the horse across the head and back. The animal
sprang forward with a snort, narrowly clearing the gate-post, and
plunged off into the darkness.

“Stop!” cried the officer.

So many of Gallegher’s acquaintances among the ’longshoremen and mill
hands had been challenged in so much the same manner that Gallegher
knew what would probably follow if the challenge was disregarded. So he
slipped from his seat to the footboard below, and ducked his head.

The three reports of a pistol, which rang out briskly from behind him,
proved that his early training had given him a valuable fund of useful
miscellaneous knowledge.

“Don’t you be scared,” he said, reassuringly, to the horse; “he’s
firing in the air.”

The pistol-shots were answered by the impatient clangor of a
patrol-wagon’s gong, and glancing over his shoulder Gallegher saw its
red and green lanterns tossing from side to side and looking in the
darkness like the side-lights of a yacht plunging forward in a storm.

“I hadn’t bargained to race you against no patrol-wagons,” said
Gallegher to his animal; “but if they want a race, we’ll give them a
tough tussle for it, won’t we?”

Philadelphia, lying four miles to the south, sent up a faint yellow
glow to the sky. It seemed very far away, and Gallegher’s braggadocio
grew cold within him at the loneliness of his adventure and the thought
of the long ride before him.

It was still bitterly cold.

The rain and sleet beat through his clothes, and struck his skin with a
sharp chilling touch that set him trembling.

Even the thought of the overweighted patrol-wagon probably sticking in
the mud some safe distance in the rear, failed to cheer him, and the
excitement that had so far made him callous to the cold died out and
left him weaker and nervous.

But his horse was chilled with the long standing, and now leaped
eagerly forward, only too willing to warm the half-frozen blood in its
veins.

“You’re a good beast,” said Gallegher, plaintively. “You’ve got more
nerve than me. Don’t you go back on me now. Mr. Dwyer says we’ve got
to beat the town.” Gallegher had no idea what time it was as he rode
through the night, but he knew he would be able to find out from a
big clock over a manufactory at a point nearly three-quarters of the
distance from Keppler’s to the goal.

He was still in the open country and driving recklessly, for he knew
the best part of his ride must be made outside the city limits.

He raced between desolate-looking corn-fields with bare stalks and
patches of muddy earth rising above the thin covering of snow, truck
farms and brick-yards fell behind him on either side. It was very
lonely work, and once or twice the dogs ran yelping to the gates and
barked after him.

Part of his way lay parallel with the railroad tracks, and he drove
for some time beside long lines of freight and coal cars as they stood
resting for the night. The fantastic Queen Anne suburban stations were
dark and deserted, but in one or two of the block-towers he could
see the operators writing at their desks, and the sight in some way
comforted him.

Once he thought of stopping to get out the blanket in which he had
wrapped himself on the first trip, but he feared to spare the time, and
drove on with his teeth chattering and his shoulders shaking with the
cold.

He welcomed the first solitary row of darkened houses with a faint
cheer of recognition. The scattered lamp-posts lightened his spirits,
and even the badly paved streets rang under the beats of his
horse’s feet like music. Great mills and manufactories, with only a
night-watchman’s light in the lowest of their many stories, began
to take the place of the gloomy farmhouses and gaunt trees that had
startled him with their grotesque shapes. He had been driving nearly
an hour, he calculated, and in that time the rain had changed to a wet
snow, that fell heavily and clung to whatever it touched. He passed
block after block of trim workmen’s houses, as still and silent as the
sleepers within them, and at last he turned the horse’s head into Broad
Street, the city’s great thoroughfare, that stretches from its one end
to the other and cuts it evenly in two.

He was driving noiselessly over the snow and slush in the street, with
his thoughts bent only on the clock-face he wished so much to see, when
a hoarse voice challenged him from the sidewalk. “Hey, you, stop there,
hold up!” said the voice.

Gallegher turned his head, and though he saw that the voice came from
under a policeman’s helmet, his only answer was to hit his horse
sharply over the head with his whip and to urge it into a gallop.

This, on his part, was followed by a sharp, shrill whistle from the
policeman. Another whistle answered it from a street-corner one block
ahead of him. “Whoa,” said Gallegher, pulling on the reins. “There’s
one too many of them,” he added, in apologetic explanation. The horse
stopped, and stood, breathing heavily, with great clouds of steam
rising from its flanks.

“Why in hell didn’t you stop when I told you to?” demanded the voice,
now close at the cab’s side.

“I didn’t hear you,” returned Gallegher, sweetly. “But I heard you
whistle, and I heard your partner whistle, and I thought maybe it was
me you wanted to speak to, so I just stopped.”

“You heard me well enough. Why aren’t your lights lit?” demanded the
voice.

“Should I have ’em lit?” asked Gallegher, bending over and regarding
them with sudden interest.

“You know you should, and if you don’t, you’ve no right to be driving
that cab. I don’t believe you’re the regular driver, anyway. Where’d
you get it?”

“It ain’t my cab, of course,” said Gallegher, with an easy laugh. “It’s
Luke McGovern’s. He left it outside Cronin’s while he went in to get a
drink, and he took too much, and me father told me to drive it round to
the stable for him. I’m Cronin’s son. McGovern ain’t in no condition to
drive. You can see yourself how he’s been misusing the horse. He puts
it up at Bachman’s livery stable, and I was just going around there
now.”

Gallegher’s knowledge of the local celebrities of the district confused
the zealous officer of the peace. He surveyed the boy with a steady
stare that would have distressed a less skilful liar, but Gallegher
only shrugged his shoulders slightly, as if from the cold, and waited
with apparent indifference to what the officer would say next.

In reality his heart was beating heavily against his side, and he felt
that if he was kept on a strain much longer he would give way and break
down. A second snow-covered form emerged suddenly from the shadow of
the houses.

“What is it, Reeder?” it asked.

“Oh, nothing much,” replied the first officer. “This kid hadn’t any
lamps lit, so I called to him to stop and he didn’t do it, so I
whistled to you. It’s all right, though. He’s just taking it round to
Bachman’s. Go ahead,” he added, sulkily.

“Get up!” chirped Gallegher. “Good-night,” he added, over his shoulder.

Gallegher gave an hysterical little gasp of relief as he trotted away
from the two policemen, and poured bitter maledictions on their heads
for two meddling fools as he went.

“They might as well kill a man as scare him to death,” he said, with
an attempt to get back to his customary flippancy. But the effort was
somewhat pitiful, and he felt guiltily conscious that a salt, warm tear
was creeping slowly down his face, and that a lump that would not keep
down was rising in his throat.

“‘Tain’t no fair thing for the whole police force to keep worrying at
a little boy like me,” he said, in shame-faced apology. “I’m not doing
nothing wrong, and I’m half froze to death, and yet they keep a-nagging
at me.”

It was so cold that when the boy stamped his feet against the footboard
to keep them warm, sharp pains shot up through his body, and when he
beat his arms about his shoulders, as he had seen real cabmen do, the
blood in his finger-tips tingled so acutely that he cried aloud with
the pain.

He had often been up that late before, but he had never felt so sleepy.
It was as if some one was pressing a sponge heavy with chloroform near
his face, and he could not fight off the drowsiness that lay hold of
him.

He saw, dimly hanging above his head, a round disc of light that seemed
like a great moon, and which he finally guessed to be the clock-face
for which he had been on the lookout. He had passed it before he
realized this; but the fact stirred him into wakefulness again,
and when his cab’s wheels slipped around the City Hall corner, he
remembered to look up at the other big clock-face that keeps awake over
the railroad station and measures out the night.

He gave a gasp of consternation when he saw that it was half-past
two, and that there was but ten minutes left to him. This, and the
many electric lights and the sight of the familiar pile of buildings,
startled him into a semi-consciousness of where he was and how great
was the necessity for haste.

He rose in his seat and called on the horse, and urged it into a
reckless gallop over the slippery asphalt. He considered nothing else
but speed, and looking neither to the left nor right dashed off down
Broad Street into Chestnut, where his course lay straight away to the
office, now only seven blocks distant.

Gallegher never knew how it began, but he was suddenly assaulted by
shouts on either side, his horse was thrown back on its haunches, and
he found two men in cabmen’s livery hanging at its head, and patting
its sides, and calling it by name. And the other cabmen who have their
stand at the corner were swarming about the carriage, all of them
talking and swearing at once, and gesticulating wildly with their whips.

They said they knew the cab was McGovern’s and they wanted to know
where he was, and why he wasn’t on it; they wanted to know where
Gallegher had stolen it, and why he had been such a fool as to drive it
into the arms of its owner’s friends; they said that it was about time
that a cab-driver could get off his box to take a drink without having
his cab run away with, and some of them called loudly for a policeman
to take the young thief in charge.

Gallegher felt as if he had been suddenly dragged into consciousness
out of a bad dream, and stood for a second like a half-awakened
somnambulist.

They had stopped the cab under an electric light, and its glare shone
coldly down upon the trampled snow and the faces of the men around him.

Gallegher bent forward, and lashed savagely at the horse with his whip.

“Let me go,” he shouted, as he tugged impotently at the reins. “Let me
go, I tell you. I haven’t stole no cab, and you’ve got no right to stop
me. I only want to take it to the _Press_ office,” he begged. “They’ll
send it back to you all right. They’ll pay you for the trip. I’m not
running away with it. The driver’s got the collar—he’s ’rested—and
I’m only a-going to the _Press_ office. Do you hear me?” he cried, his
voice rising and breaking in a shriek of passion and disappointment.
“I tell you to let go those reins. Let me go, or I’ll kill you. Do you
hear me? I’ll kill you.” And leaning forward, the boy struck savagely
with his long whip at the faces of the men about the horse’s head.

Some one in the crowd reached up and caught him by the ankles, and with
a quick jerk pulled him off the box, and threw him on to the street.
But he was up on his knees in a moment, and caught at the man’s hand.

“Don’t let them stop me, mister,” he cried, “please let me go. I didn’t
steal the cab, sir. S’help me, I didn’t. I’m telling you the truth.
Take me to the _Press_ office, and they’ll prove it to you. They’ll pay
you anything you ask ’em. It’s only such a little ways now, and I’ve
come so far, sir. Please don’t let them stop me,” he sobbed, clasping
the man about the knees. “For Heaven’s sake, mister, let me go!”

       *       *       *       *       *

The managing editor of the _Press_ took up the india-rubber
speaking-tube at his side, and answered, “Not yet” to an inquiry the
night editor had already put to him five times within the last twenty
minutes.

Then he snapped the metal top of the tube impatiently, and went
upstairs. As he passed the door of the local room, he noticed that the
reporters had not gone home, but were sitting about on the tables and
chairs, waiting. They looked up inquiringly as he passed, and the city
editor asked, “Any news yet?” and the managing editor shook his head.

The compositors were standing idle in the composing-room, and their
foreman was talking with the night editor.

“Well?” said that gentleman, tentatively.

“Well,” returned the managing editor, “I don’t think we can wait; do
you?”

“It’s a half-hour after time now,” said the night editor, “and we’ll
miss the suburban trains if we hold the paper back any longer. We
can’t afford to wait for a purely hypothetical story. The chances are
all against the fight’s having taken place or this Hade’s having been
arrested.”

“But if we’re beaten on it——” suggested the chief. “But I don’t think
that is possible. If there were any story to print, Dwyer would have
had it here before now.”

The managing editor looked steadily down at the floor.

“Very well,” he said, slowly, “we won’t wait any longer. Go ahead,” he
added, turning to the foreman with a sigh of reluctance. The foreman
whirled himself about, and began to give his orders; but the two
editors still looked at each other doubtfully.

As they stood so, there came a sudden shout and the sound of people
running to and fro in the reportorial rooms below. There was the tramp
of many footsteps on the stairs, and above the confusion they heard the
voice of the city editor telling some one to “run to Madden’s and get
some brandy, quick.”

No one in the composing-room said anything; but those compositors who
had started to go home began slipping off their overcoats, and every
one stood with his eyes fixed on the door.

It was kicked open from the outside, and in the doorway stood a
cab-driver and the city editor, supporting between them a pitiful
little figure of a boy, wet and miserable, and with the snow melting
on his clothes and running in little pools to the floor. “Why,
it’s Gallegher,” said the night editor, in a tone of the keenest
disappointment.

Gallegher shook himself free from his supporters, and took an unsteady
step forward, his fingers fumbling stiffly with the buttons of his
waistcoat.

“Mr. Dwyer, sir,” he began faintly, with his eyes fixed fearfully on
the managing editor, “he got arrested—and I couldn’t get here no
sooner, ’cause they kept a-stopping me, and they took me cab from under
me—but—” he pulled the note-book from his breast and held it out with
its covers damp and limp from the rain, “but we got Hade, and here’s
Mr. Dwyer’s copy.”

And then he asked, with a queer note in his voice, partly of dread and
partly of hope, “ Am I in time, sir?”

The managing editor took the book, and tossed it to the foreman, who
ripped out its leaves and dealt them out to his men as rapidly as a
gambler deals out cards.

Then the managing editor stooped and picked Gallegher up in his arms,
and, sitting down, began to unlace his wet and muddy shoes.

Gallegher made a faint effort to resist this degradation of the
managerial dignity; but his protest was a very feeble one, and his head
fell back heavily on the managing editor’s shoulder.

To Gallegher the incandescent lights began to whirl about in circles,
and to burn in different colors; the faces of the reporters kneeling
before him and chafing his hands and feet grew dim and unfamiliar, and
the roar and rumble of the great presses in the basement sounded far
away, like the murmur of the sea.

And then the place and the circumstances of it came back to him again
sharply and with sudden vividness.

Gallegher looked up, with a faint smile, into the managing editor’s
face. “You won’t turn me off for running away, will you?” he whispered.

The managing editor did not answer immediately. His head was bent, and
he was thinking, for some reason or other, of a little boy of his own,
at home in bed. Then he said, quietly, “Not this time, Gallegher.”

Gallegher’s head sank back comfortably on the older man’s shoulder, and
he smiled comprehensively at the faces of the young men crowded around
him. “You hadn’t ought to,” he said, with a touch of his old impudence,
“‘cause—I beat the town.”




THE JUMPING FROG

BY

MARK TWAIN

This is a story typical of American humor. As William Lyon Phelps
says, “The essentially American qualities of common-sense, energy,
good-humor, and Philistinism fairly shriek from his [Mark Twain’s]
pages.”—_Essays on Modern Novelists._




THE NOTORIOUS JUMPING FROG OF CALAVERAS[14] COUNTY[15]


In compliance with the request of a friend of mine, who wrote me from
the East, I called on good-natured, garrulous old Simon Wheeler, and
inquired after my friend’s friend, Leonidas W. Smiley, as requested
to do, and I hereunto append the result. I have a lurking suspicion
that _Leonidas W._ Smiley is a myth; that my friend never knew
such a personage; and that he only conjectured that if I asked old
Wheeler about him, it would remind him of his infamous _Jim_ Smiley,
and he would go to work and bore me to death with some exasperating
reminiscence of him as long and as tedious as it should be useless to
me. If that was the design, it succeeded.

I found Simon Wheeler dozing comfortably by the bar-room stove of
the dilapidated tavern in the decaying mining camp of Angel’s, and
I noticed that he was fat and bald-headed, and had an expression of
winning gentleness and simplicity upon his tranquil countenance. He
roused up, and gave me good-day. I told him a friend of mine had
commissioned me to make some inquiries about a cherished companion of
his boyhood named _Leonidas W._ Smiley—_Rev. Leonidas W._ Smiley,
a young minister of the Gospel, who he had heard was at one time a
resident of Angel’s Camp. I added that if Mr. Wheeler could tell me
anything about this Rev. Leonidas W. Smiley, I would feel under many
obligations to him.

Simon Wheeler backed me into a corner and blockaded me there with
his chair, and then sat down and reeled off the monotonous narrative
which follows this paragraph. He never smiled, he never frowned, he
never changed his voice from the gentle-flowing key to which he tuned
his initial sentence, he never betrayed the slightest suspicion of
enthusiasm; but all through the interminable narrative there ran a
vein of impressive earnestness and sincerity, which showed me plainly
that, so far from his imagining that there was anything ridiculous or
funny about his story, he regarded it as a really important matter, and
admired its two heroes as men of transcendent genius in _finesse_. I
let him go on in his own way, and never interrupted him once.

“Rev. Leonidas W. H’m, Reverend Le—well, there was a feller here once
by the name of _Jim_ Smiley, in the winter of ’49—or maybe it was the
spring of ’50—I don’t recollect exactly, somehow, though what makes
me think it was one or the other is because I remember the big flume
warn’t finished when he first come to the camp; but anyway, he was
the curiosest man about always betting on anything that turned up you
ever see, if he could get anybody to bet on the other side; and if he
couldn’t he’d change sides. Any way that suited the other man would
suit _him_—any way just so’s he got a bet, _he_ was satisfied. But
still he was lucky, uncommon lucky; he ’most always come out winner. He
was always ready and laying for a chance; there couldn’t be no solit’ry
thing mentioned but that feller’d offer to bet on it, and take ary
side you please, as I was just telling you. If there was a horse-race,
you’d find him flush or you’d find him busted at the end of it; if
there was a dogfight, he’d bet on it; if there was a cat-fight, he’d
bet on it; if there was a chicken-fight, he’d bet on it; why, if there
was two birds setting on a fence, he would bet you which one would fly
first; or if there was a camp-meeting, he would be there reg’lar to
bet on Parson Walker, which he judged to be the best exhorter about
here, and so he was, too, and a good man. If he even see a straddle-bug
start to go anywheres, he would bet you how long it would take him to
get to—to wherever he was going to, and if you took him up, he would
foller that straddle-bug to Mexico but what he would find out where
he was bound for and how long he was on the road. Lots of the boys
here has seen that Smiley, and can tell you about him. Why, it never
made no difference to _him_—he’d bet on _any_ thing—the dangdest
feller. Parson Walker’s wife laid very sick once, for a good while,
and it seemed as if they warn’t going to save her; but one morning he
come in, and Smiley up and asked him how she was, and he said she was
consid’able better—thank the Lord for his inf’nite mercy—and coming
on so smart that with the blessing of Prov’dence she’d get well yet;
and Smiley, before he thought, says: ’Well, I’ll resk two-and-a-half
she don’t anyway.’

“Thish-yer Smiley had a mare—the boys called her the fifteen-minute
nag, but that was only in fun, you know, because, of course, she was
faster than that—and he used to win money on that horse, for all
she was so slow and always had the asthma, or the distemper, or the
consumption, or something of that kind. They used to give her two or
three hundred yards start, and then pass her under way; but always at
the fag end of the race she’d get excited and desperate like, and come
cavorting and straddling up, and scattering her legs around limber,
sometimes in the air, and sometimes out to one side among the fences,
and kicking up m-o-r-e dust and raising m-o-r-e racket with her
coughing and sneezing and blowing her nose—and _always_ fetch up at
the stand just about a neck ahead, as near as you could cipher it down.

“And he had a little small bull-pup, that to look at him you’d think
he warn’t worth a cent but to set around and look ornery and lay for a
chance to steal something. But as soon as money was up on him he was a
different dog; his under-jaw’d begin to stick out like the fo’castle of
a steamboat, and his teeth would uncover and shine like the furnaces.
And a dog might tackle him and bully-rag him, and bite him, and throw
him over his shoulder two or three times, and Andrew Jackson—which was
the name of the pup—Andrew Jackson would never let on but what _he_
was satisfied, and hadn’t expected nothing else—and the bets being
doubled and doubled on the other side all the time, till the money was
all up; and then all of a sudden he would grab that other dog jest by
the j’int of his hind leg and freeze to it—not chaw, you understand,
but only just grip and hang on till they throwed up the sponge, if
it was a year. Smiley always come out winner on that pup, till he
harnessed a dog once that didn’t have no hind legs, because they’d
been sawed off in a circular saw, and when the thing had gone along
far enough, and the money was all up, and he come to make a snatch for
his pet holt, he see in a minute how he’d been imposed on, and how the
other dog had him in the door, so to speak, and he ’peared surprised,
and then he looked sorter discouraged-like and didn’t try no more to
win the fight, and so he got shucked out bad. He give Smiley a look, as
much as to say his heart was broke, and it was _his_ fault, for putting
up a dog that hadn’t no hind legs for him to take holt of, which was
his main dependence in a fight, and then he limped off a piece and
laid down and died. It was a good pup, was that Andrew Jackson, and
would have made a name for hisself if he’d lived, for the stuff was in
him and he had genius—I know it, because he hadn’t no opportunities
to speak of, and it don’t stand to reason that a dog could make such a
fight as he could under them circumstances if he hadn’t no talent. It
always makes me feel sorry when I think of that last fight of his’n,
and the way it turned out.

“Well, thish-yer Smiley had rat-tarriers, and chicken cocks, and
tomcats, and all them kind of things, till you couldn’t rest, and you
couldn’t fetch nothing for him to bet on but he’d match you. He ketched
a frog one day, and took him home, and said he cal’lated to educate
him; and so he never done nothing for three months but set in his
back yard and learn that frog to jump. And you bet you he _did_ learn
him, too. He’d give him a little punch behind, and the next minute
you’d see that frog whirling in the air like a doughnut—see him turn
one summerset, or maybe a couple, if he got a good start, and come
down flat-footed and all right, like a cat. He got him up so in the
matter of ketching flies, and kep’ him in practice so constant, that
he’d nail a fly every time as fur as he could see him. Smiley said
all a frog wanted was education, and he could do ’most anything—and
I believe him. Why, I’ve seen him set Dan’l Webster down here on this
floor—Dan’l Webster was the name of the frog—and sing out, ’Flies,
Dan’l, flies!’ and quicker’n you could wink he’d spring straight up and
snake a fly off’n the counter there, and flop down on the floor ag’in
as solid as a gob of mud, and fall to scratching the side of his head
with his hind foot as indifferent as if he hadn’t no idea he’d been
doin’ any more’n any frog might do. You never see a frog so modest
and straightfor’ard as he was, for all he was so gifted. And when it
come to fair and square jumping on a dead level, he could get over
more ground at one straddle than any animal of his breed you ever see.
Jumping on a dead level was his strong suit, you understand; and when
it come to that, Smiley would ante up money on him as long as he had a
red. Smiley was monstrous proud of his frog, and well he might be, for
fellers that had travelled and been everywheres all said he laid over
any frog that ever _they_ see.

“Well, Smiley kep’ the beast in a little lattice box, and he used to
fetch him down-town sometimes and lay for a bet. One day a feller—a
stranger in the camp, he was—come acrost him with his box, and says:

“‘What might it be that you’ve got in the box?’

“And Smiley says, sorter indifferent-like: ’It might be a parrot, or it
might be a canary, maybe, but it ain’t—it’s only just a frog.’

“And the feller took it, and looked at it careful, and turned it round
this way and that, and says: ’H’m—so ’tis. Well, what’s _he_ good for?’

“‘Well,’ Smiley says, easy and careless, ’he’s good enough for _one_
thing, I should judge—he can outjump any frog in Calaveras county.’

“The feller took the box again, and took another long, particular look,
and give it back to Smiley, and says, very deliberate, ’Well,’ he says,
’I don’t see no p’ints about that frog that’s any better’n any other
frog.’

“‘Maybe you don’t,’ Smiley says. ’Maybe you understand frogs and maybe
you don’t understand ’em; maybe you’ve had experience, and maybe you
ain’t only a amature, as it were. Anyways, I’ve got _my_ opinion, and
I’ll resk forty dollars that he can outjump any frog in Calaveras
county.’

“And the feller studied a minute, and then says, kinder sad like,
’Well, I’m only a stranger here, and I ain’t got no frog; but if I had
a frog, I’d bet you.’

“And then Smiley says, ’That’s all right—that’s all right—if you’ll
hold my box a minute, I’ll go and get you a frog.’ And so the feller
took the box, and put up his forty dollars along with Smiley’s, and set
down to wait.

“So he set there a good while thinking and thinking to hisself, and
then he got the frog out and prized his mouth open and took a teaspoon
and filled him full of quail shot—filled him pretty near up to his
chin—and set him on the floor. Smiley he went to the swamp and slopped
around in the mud for a long time, and finally he ketched a frog, and
fetched him in, and give him to this feller, and says:

“‘Now, if you’re ready, set him alongside of Dan’l, with his forepaws
just even with Dan’l’s, and I’ll give the word.’ Then he says,
’One—two—three—_git_!’ and him and the feller touched up the frogs
from behind, and the new frog hopped off lively, but Dan’l give a
heave, and hysted up his shoulders—so—like a Frenchman, but it warn’t
no use—he couldn’t budge; he was planted as solid as a church, and he
couldn’t no more stir than if he was anchored out. Smiley was a good
deal surprised, and he was disgusted too, but he didn’t have no idea
what the matter was, of course.

“The feller took the money and started away; and when he was going
out at the door, he sorter jerked his thumb over his shoulder—so—at
Dan’l, and says again, very deliberate, ’Well,’ he says, ’_I_ don’t see
no p’ints about that frog that’s any better’n any other frog.’

“Smiley he stood scratching his head and looking down at Dan’l a long
time, and at last he says, ’I do wonder what in the nation that frog
throw’d off for—I wonder if there ain’t something the matter with
him—he ’pears to look mighty baggy, somehow.’ And he ketched Dan’l by
the nap of the neck, and hefted him, and says, ’Why, blame my cats if
he don’t weigh five pound!’ and turned him upside down and he belched
out a double handful of shot. And then he see how it was, and he was
the maddest man—he set the frog down and took out after that feller,
but he never ketched him. And——”

[Here Simon Wheeler heard his name called from the front yard, and got
up to see what was wanted.] And turning to me as he moved away, he
said: “Just set where you are, stranger, and rest easy—I ain’t going
to be gone a second.”

But, by your leave, I did not think that a continuation of the history
of the enterprising vagabond _Jim_ Smiley would be likely to afford me
much information concerning the Rev. _Leonidas W._ Smiley, and so I
started away.

At the door I met the sociable Wheeler returning, and he button-holed
me and recommenced:

“Well, thish-yer Smiley had a yeller one-eyed cow that didn’t have no
tail, only just a short stump like a bannanner, and——”

However, lacking both time and inclination, I did not wait to hear
about the afflicted cow, but took my leave.




THE LADY OR THE TIGER?

BY

FRANK R. STOCKTON




This is an illustration of the symmetrical plot. It challenges the
constructive imagination of the reader to search the story for the
evidence that will lead to a logical conclusion.




THE LADY OR THE TIGER?[16]


In the very olden time, there lived a semi-barbaric king, whose ideas,
though somewhat polished and sharpened by the progressiveness of
distant Latin neighbors, were still large, florid, and untrammelled, as
became the half of him which was barbaric. He was a man of exuberant
fancy, and, withal, of an authority so irresistible that, at his will,
he turned his varied fancies into facts. He was greatly given to
self-communing, and when he and himself agreed upon anything, the thing
was done. When every member of his domestic and political systems moved
smoothly in its appointed course, his nature was bland and genial; but
whenever there was a little hitch, and some of his orbs got out of
their orbits, he was blander and more genial still, for nothing pleased
him so much as to make the crooked straight, and crush down uneven
places.

Among the borrowed notions by which his barbarism had become semified
was that of the public arena, in which, by exhibitions of manly and
beastly valor, the minds of his subjects were refined and cultured.

But even here the exuberant and barbaric fancy asserted itself. The
arena of the king was built, not to give the people an opportunity of
hearing the rhapsodies of dying gladiators, nor to enable them to view
the inevitable conclusion of a conflict between religious opinions and
hungry jaws, but for purposes far better adapted to widen and develop
the mental energies of the people. This vast amphitheatre, with its
encircling galleries, its mysterious vaults, and its unseen passages,
was an agent of poetic justice, in which crime was punished, or virtue
rewarded, by the decrees of an impartial and incorruptible chance.

When a subject was accused of a crime of sufficient importance to
interest the king, public notice was given that on an appointed day
the fate of the accused person would be decided in the king’s arena—a
structure which well deserved its name; for, although its form and plan
were borrowed from afar, its purpose emanated solely from the brain
of this man, who, every barleycorn a king, knew no tradition to which
he owed more allegiance than pleased his fancy, and who ingrafted on
every adopted form of human thought and action the rich growth of his
barbaric idealism.

When all the people had assembled in the galleries, and the king,
surrounded by his court, sat high up on his throne of royal state on
one side of the arena, he gave a signal, a door beneath him opened,
and the accused subject stepped out into the amphitheatre. Directly
opposite him, on the other side of the enclosed space, were two doors,
exactly alike and side by side. It was the duty and the privilege
of the person on trial to walk directly to these doors and open one
of them. He could open either door he pleased. He was subject to no
guidance or influence but that of the aforementioned impartial and
incorruptible chance. If he opened the one, there came out of it a
hungry tiger, the fiercest and most cruel that could be procured, which
immediately sprang upon him, and tore him to pieces, as a punishment
for his guilt. The moment that the case of the criminal was thus
decided, doleful iron bells were clanged, great wails went up from the
hired mourners posted on the outer rim of the arena, and the vast
audience, with bowed heads and downcast hearts, wended slowly their
homeward way, mourning greatly that one so young and fair, or so old
and respected, should have merited so dire a fate.

But if the accused person opened the other door, there came forth
from it a lady, the most suitable to his years and station that his
Majesty could select among his fair subjects; and to this lady he was
immediately married, as a reward of his innocence. It mattered not that
he might already possess a wife and family, or that his affections
might be engaged upon an object of his own selection. The king allowed
no such subordinate arrangements to interfere with his great scheme
of retribution and reward. The exercises, as in the other instance,
took place immediately, and in the arena. Another door opened beneath
the king, and a priest, followed by a band of choristers, and dancing
maidens blowing joyous airs on golden horns and treading an epithalamic
measure, advanced to where the pair stood side by side, and the wedding
was promptly and cheerily solemnized. Then the gay brass bells rang
forth their merry peals, the people shouted glad hurrahs, and the
innocent man, preceded by children strewing flowers on his path, led
his bride to his home.

This was the king’s semi-barbaric method of administering justice.
Its perfect fairness is obvious. The criminal could not know out of
which door would come the lady. He opened either he pleased, without
having the slightest idea whether, in the next instant, he was to be
devoured or married. On some occasions the tiger came out of one door,
and on some out of the other. The decisions of this tribunal were not
only fair—they were positively determinate. The accused person was
instantly punished if he found himself guilty, and if innocent he was
rewarded on the spot, whether he liked it or not. There was no escape
from the judgments of the king’s arena.

The institution was a very popular one. When the people gathered
together on one of the great trial days, they never knew whether they
were to witness a bloody slaughter or a hilarious wedding. This element
of uncertainty lent an interest to the occasion which it could not
otherwise have attained. Thus the masses were entertained and pleased,
and the thinking part of the community could bring no charge of
unfairness against this plan; for did not the accused person have the
whole matter in his own hands?

This semi-barbaric king had a daughter as blooming as his most florid
fancies, and with a soul as fervent and imperious as his own. As is
usual in such cases, she was the apple of his eye, and was loved by
him above all humanity. Among his courtiers was a young man of that
fineness of blood and lowness of station common to the conventional
heroes of romance who love royal maidens. This royal maiden was well
satisfied with her lover, for he was handsome and brave to a degree
unsurpassed in all this kingdom, and she loved him with an ardor that
had enough of barbarism in it to make it exceedingly warm and strong.
This love affair moved on happily for many months, until, one day, the
king happened to discover its existence. He did not hesitate nor waver
in regard to his duty in the premises. The youth was immediately cast
into prison, and a day was appointed for his trial in the king’s arena.
This, of course, was an especially important occasion, and his Majesty,
as well as all the people, was greatly interested in the workings and
development of this trial. Never before had such a case occurred—never
before had a subject dared to love the daughter of a king. In after
years such things became commonplace enough, but then they were, in no
slight degree, novel and startling.

The tiger cages of the kingdom were searched for the most savage and
relentless beasts, from which the fiercest monster might be selected
for the arena, and the ranks of maiden youth and beauty throughout the
land were carefully surveyed by competent judges, in order that the
young man might have a fitting bride in case fate did not determine for
him a different destiny. Of course, everybody knew that the deed with
which the accused was charged had been done. He had loved the princess,
and neither he, she, nor any one else thought of denying the fact. But
the king would not think of allowing any fact of this kind to interfere
with the workings of the tribunal, in which he took such great delight
and satisfaction. No matter how the affair turned out, the youth
would be disposed of, and the king would take an æsthetic pleasure in
watching the course of events which would determine whether or not the
young man had done wrong in allowing himself to love the princess.

The appointed day arrived. From far and near the people gathered, and
thronged the great galleries of the arena, while crowds, unable to gain
admittance, massed themselves against its outside walls. The king and
his court were in their places, opposite the twin doors—those fateful
portals, so terrible in their similarity!

All was ready. The signal was given. A door beneath the royal party
opened, and the lover of the princess walked into the arena. Tall,
beautiful, fair, his appearance was greeted with a low hum of
admiration and anxiety. Half the audience had not known so grand a
youth had lived among them. No wonder the princess loved him! What a
terrible thing for him to be there!

As the youth advanced into the arena, he turned, as the custom was, to
bow to the king. But he did not think at all of that royal personage;
his eyes were fixed upon the princess, who sat to the right of her
father. Had it not been for the moiety of barbarism in her nature, it
is probable that lady would not have been there. But her intense and
fervid soul would not allow her to be absent on an occasion in which
she was so terribly interested. From the moment that the decree had
gone forth that her lover should decide his fate in the king’s arena,
she had thought of nothing, night or day, but this great event and the
various subjects connected with it. Possessed of more power, influence,
and force of character than any one who had ever before been interested
in such a case, she had done what no other person had done—she had
possessed herself of the secret of the doors. She knew in which of the
two rooms behind those doors stood the cage of the tiger, with its open
front, and in which waited the lady. Through these thick doors, heavily
curtained with skins on the inside, it was impossible that any noise or
suggestion should come from within to the person who should approach to
raise the latch of one of them. But gold, and the power of a woman’s
will, had brought the secret to the princess.

Not only did she know in which room stood the lady, ready to emerge,
all blushing and radiant, should her door be opened, but she knew who
the lady was. It was one of the fairest and loveliest of the damsels
of the court who had been selected as the reward of the accused youth,
should he be proved innocent of the crime of aspiring to one so far
above him; and the princess hated her. Often had she seen, or imagined
that she had seen, this fair creature throwing glances of admiration
upon the person of her lover, and sometimes she thought these glances
were perceived and even returned. Now and then she had seen them
talking together. It was but for a moment or two, but much can be said
in a brief space. It may have been on most unimportant topics, but how
could she know that? The girl was lovely, but she had dared to raise
her eyes to the loved one of the princess, and, with all the intensity
of the savage blood transmitted to her through long lines of wholly
barbaric ancestors, she hated the woman who blushed and trembled behind
that silent door.

When her lover turned and looked at her, and his eye met hers as she
sat there paler and whiter than any one in the vast ocean of anxious
faces about her, he saw, by that power of quick perception which is
given to those whose souls are one, that she knew behind which door
crouched the tiger, and behind which stood the lady. He had expected
her to know it. He understood her nature, and his soul was assured that
she would never rest until she had made plain to herself this thing,
hidden to all other lookers-on, even to the king. The only hope for the
youth in which there was any element of certainty was based upon the
success of the princess in discovering this mystery, and the moment he
looked upon her, he saw she had succeeded.

Then it was that his quick and anxious glance asked the question,
“Which?” It was as plain to her as if he shouted it from where he
stood. There was not an instant to be lost. The question was asked in a
flash; it must be answered in another.

Her right arm lay on the cushioned parapet before her. She raised her
hand, and made a slight, quick movement toward the right. No one but
her lover saw her. Every eye but his was fixed on the man in the arena.

He turned, and with a firm and rapid step he walked across the empty
space. Every heart stopped beating, every breath was held, every eye
was fixed immovably upon that man. Without the slightest hesitation, he
went to the door on the right, and opened it.

       *       *       *       *       *

Now, the point of the story is this: Did the tiger come out of that
door, or did the lady?

The more we reflect upon this question, the harder it is to answer.
It involves a study of the human heart which leads us through devious
mazes of passion, out of which it is difficult to find our way. Think
of it, fair reader, not as if the decision of the question depended
upon yourself, but upon that hot-blooded, semi-barbaric princess,
her soul at a white heat beneath the combined fires of despair and
jealousy. She had lost him, but who should have him?

How often, in her waking hours and in her dreams, had she started in
wild horror and covered her face with her hands as she thought of her
lover opening the door on the other side of which waited the cruel
fangs of the tiger!

But how much oftener had she seen him at the other door! How in her
grievous reveries had she gnashed her teeth and torn her hair when
she saw his start of rapturous delight as he opened the door of the
lady! How her soul had burned in agony when she had seen him rush to
meet that woman, with her flushing cheek and sparkling eye of triumph;
when she had seen him lead her forth, his whole frame kindled with the
joy of recovered life; when she had heard the glad shouts from the
multitude, and the wild ringing of the happy bells; when she had seen
the priest, with his joyous followers, advance to the couple, and make
them man and wife before her very eyes; and when she had seen them walk
away together upon their path of flowers, followed by the tremendous
shouts of the hilarious multitude, in which her one despairing shriek
was lost and drowned!

Would it not be better for him to die at once, and go to wait for her
in the blessed regions of semi-barbaric futurity?

And yet, that awful tiger, those shrieks, that blood!

Her decision had been indicated in an instant, but it had been made
after days and nights of anguished deliberation. She had known she
would be asked, she had decided what she would answer, and, without the
slightest hesitation, she had moved her hand to the right.

The question of her decision is one not to be lightly considered, and
it is not for me to presume to set up myself as the one person able to
answer it. So I leave it with all of you: Which came out of the opened
door—the lady or the tiger?




  THE OUTCASTS OF POKER FLAT

  BY

  FRANCIS BRET HARTE

This is often called a story of local color. And it is. It is rich
in the characteristics of California in the gold-seeking days. It is
also classified as a story of setting. And it is. The setting is a
determining factor in the conduct of these outcasts. They are men and
women as inevitably drawn to the mining camp as the ill-fated ship in
“The Arabian Nights” was attracted to the lode-stone mountain, and with
as much certainty of shipwreck. These the blizzard of the west gathers
into its embrace, and compels them to reveal their better selves. But
it is more than a story of local color and of setting. It is also an
illustration of the artistic blending of plot, character, and setting,
and of the magical power of youth to see life at the time truly enough,
but to transform it later into something fine and noble.




THE OUTCASTS OF POKER FLAT[17]


As Mr. John Oakhurst, gambler, stepped into the main street of Poker
Flat on the morning of the twenty-third of November, 1850, he was
conscious of a change in its moral atmosphere since the preceding
night. Two or three men, conversing earnestly together, ceased as he
approached, and exchanged significant glances. There was a Sabbath lull
in the air, which, in a settlement unused to Sabbath influences, looked
ominous.

Mr. Oakhurst’s calm, handsome face betrayed small concern of these
indications. Whether he was conscious of any predisposing cause, was
another question. “I reckon they’re after somebody,” he reflected;
“likely it’s me.” He returned to his pocket the handkerchief with which
he had been whipping away the red dust of Poker Flat from his neat
boots, and quietly discharged his mind of any further conjecture.

In point of fact, Poker Flat was “after somebody.” It had lately
suffered the loss of several thousand dollars, two valuable horses, and
a prominent citizen. It was experiencing a spasm of virtuous reaction,
quite as lawless and ungovernable as any of the acts that had provoked
it. A secret committee had determined to rid the town of all improper
persons. This was done permanently in regard of two men who were then
hanging from the boughs of a sycamore in the gulch, and temporarily in
the banishment of certain other objectionable characters. I regret to
say that some of these were ladies. It is but due to the sex, however,
to state that their impropriety was professional, and it was only in
such easily established standards of evil that Poker Flat ventured to
sit in judgment.

Mr. Oakhurst was right in supposing that he was included in this
category. A few of the committee had urged hanging him as a possible
example, and a sure method of reimbursing themselves from his pockets
of the sums he had won from them. “It’s agin justice,” said Jim
Wheeler, “to let this yer young man from Roaring Camp—an entire
stranger—carry away our money.” But a crude sentiment of equity
residing in the breasts of those who had been fortunate enough to win
from Mr. Oakhurst overruled this narrower local prejudice.

Mr. Oakhurst received his sentence with philosophic calmness, none the
less coolly that he was aware of the hesitation of his judges. He was
too much of a gambler not to accept Fate. With him life was at best an
uncertain game, and he recognized the usual percentage in favor of the
dealer.

A body of armed men accompanied the deported wickedness of Poker Flat
to the outskirts of the settlement. Besides Mr. Oakhurst, who was
known to be a coolly desperate man, and for whose intimidation the
armed escort was intended, the expatriated party consisted of a young
woman familiarly known as “The Duchess”; another, who had gained the
infelicitous title of “Mother Shipton”; and “Uncle Billy,” a suspected
sluice-robber and confirmed drunkard. The cavalcade provoked no
comments from the spectators, nor was any word uttered by the escort.
Only, when the gulch which marked the uttermost limit of Poker Flat
was reached, the leader spoke briefly and to the point. The exiles
were forbidden to return at the peril of their lives.

As the escort disappeared, their pent-up feelings found vent in a few
hysterical tears from “The Duchess,” some bad language from Mother
Shipton, and a Parthian volley of expletives from Uncle Billy. The
philosophic Oakhurst alone remained silent. He listened calmly to
Mother Shipton’s desire to cut somebody’s heart out, to the repeated
statements of “The Duchess” that she would die in the road, and to
the alarming oaths that seemed to be bumped out of Uncle Billy as he
rode forward. With the easy good-humor characteristic of his class, he
insisted upon exchanging his own riding-horse, “Five Spot,” for the
sorry mule which the Duchess rode. But even this act did not draw the
party into any closer sympathy. The young woman readjusted her somewhat
draggled plumes with a feeble, faded coquetry; Mother Shipton eyed the
possessor of “Five Spot” with malevolence, and Uncle Billy included the
whole party in one sweeping anathema.

The road to Sandy Bar—a camp that, not having as yet experienced the
regenerating influences of Poker Flat, consequently seemed to offer
some invitation to the emigrants—lay over a steep mountain range. It
was distant a day’s severe journey. In that advanced season, the party
soon passed out of the moist, temperate regions of the foot-hills
into the dry, cold, bracing air of the Sierras. The trail was narrow
and difficult. At noon the Duchess, rolling out of her saddle upon
the ground, declared her intention of going no farther, and the party
halted.

The spot was singularly wild and impressive. A wooded amphitheatre,
surrounded on three sides by precipitous cliffs of naked granite,
sloped gently toward the crest of another precipice that overlooked
the valley. It was undoubtedly the most suitable spot for a camp, had
camping been advisable. But Mr. Oakhurst knew that scarcely half the
journey to Sandy Bar was accomplished, and the party were not equipped
or provisioned for delay. This fact he pointed out to his companions
curtly, with a philosophic commentary on the folly of “throwing up
their hand before the game was played out.” But they were furnished
with liquor, which in this emergency stood them in place of food, fuel,
rest, and prescience. In spite of his remonstrances, it was not long
before they were more or less under its influence. Uncle Billy passed
rapidly from a bellicose state into one of stupor, the Duchess became
maudlin, and Mother Shipton snored. Mr. Oakhurst alone remained erect,
leaning against a rock, calmly surveying them.

Mr. Oakhurst did not drink. It interfered with a profession which
required coolness, impassiveness, and presence of mind, and, in his
own language, he “couldn’t afford it.” As he gazed at his recumbent
fellow-exiles, the loneliness begotten of his pariah-trade, his habits
of life, his very vices, for the first time seriously oppressed him.
He bestirred himself in dusting his black clothes, washing his hands
and face, and other acts characteristic of his studiously neat habits,
and for a moment forgot his annoyance. The thought of deserting his
weaker and more pitiable companions never perhaps occurred to him.
Yet he could not help feeling the want of that excitement which,
singularly enough, was most conducive to that calm equanimity for which
he was notorious. He looked at the gloomy walls that rose a thousand
feet sheer above the circling pines around him; at the sky, ominously
clouded; at the valley below, already deepening into shadow. And,
doing so, suddenly he heard his own name called.

A horseman slowly ascended the trail. In the fresh, open face of the
new-comer Mr. Oakhurst recognized Tom Simson, otherwise known as
“The Innocent” of Sandy Bar. He had met him some months before over
a “little game,” and had, with perfect equanimity, won the entire
fortune—amounting to some forty dollars—of that guileless youth.
After the game was finished, Mr. Oakhurst drew the youthful speculator
behind the door and thus addressed him: “Tommy, you’re a good little
man, but you can’t gamble worth a cent. Don’t try it over again.” He
then handed him his money back, pushed him gently from the room, and so
made a devoted slave of Tom Simson.

There was a remembrance of this in his boyish and enthusiastic greeting
of Mr. Oakhurst. He had started, he said, to go to Poker Flat to seek
his fortune. “Alone?” No, not exactly alone; in fact—a giggle—he had
run away with Piney Woods. Didn’t Mr. Oakhurst remember Piney? She
that used to wait on the table at the Temperance House? They had been
engaged a long time, but old Jake Woods had objected, and so they had
run away, and were going to Poker Flat to be married, and here they
were. And they were tired out, and how lucky it was they had found a
place to camp and company. All this the Innocent delivered rapidly,
while Piney—a stout, comely damsel of fifteen—emerged from behind the
pine-tree, where she had been blushing unseen, and rode to the side of
her lover.

Mr. Oakhurst seldom troubled himself with sentiment, still less
with propriety; but he had a vague idea that the situation was not
felicitous. He retained, however, his presence of mind sufficiently to
kick Uncle Billy, who was about to say something, and Uncle Billy was
sober enough to recognize in Mr. Oakhurst’s kick a superior power that
would not bear trifling. He then endeavored to dissuade Tom Simson from
delaying further, but in vain. He even pointed out the fact that there
was no provision, nor means of making a camp. But, unluckily, “The
Innocent” met this objection by assuring the party that he was provided
with an extra mule loaded with provisions, and by the discovery of a
rude attempt at a log-house near the trail. “Piney can stay with Mrs.
Oakhurst,” said the Innocent, pointing to the Duchess, “and I can shift
for myself.”

Nothing but Mr. Oakhurst’s admonishing foot saved Uncle Billy from
bursting into a roar of laughter. As it was, he felt compelled to
retire up the cañon until he could recover his gravity. There he
confided the joke to the tall pine-trees, with many slaps of his
leg, contortions of his face, and the usual profanity. But when
he returned to the party, he found them seated by a fire—for the
air had grown strangely chill and the sky overcast—in apparently
amicable conversation. Piney was actually talking in an impulsive,
girlish fashion to the Duchess, who was listening with an interest and
animation she had not shown for many days. The Innocent was holding
forth, apparently with equal effect, to Mr. Oakhurst and Mother
Shipton, who was actually relaxing into amiability. “Is this yer a
d—-d picnic?” said Uncle Billy, with inward scorn, as he surveyed the
sylvan group, the glancing fire-light, and the tethered animals in the
foreground. Suddenly an idea mingled with the alcoholic fumes that
disturbed his brain. It was apparently of a jocular nature, for he felt
impelled to slap his leg again and cram his fist into his mouth.

As the shadows crept slowly up the mountain, a slight breeze rocked
the tops of the pine-trees, and moaned through their long and gloomy
aisles. The ruined cabin, patched and covered with pine boughs, was set
apart for the ladies. As the lovers parted, they unaffectedly exchanged
a kiss, so honest and sincere that it might have been heard above the
swaying pines. The frail Duchess and the malevolent Mother Shipton were
probably too stunned to remark upon this last evidence of simplicity,
and so turned without a word to the hut. The fire was replenished, the
men lay down before the door, and in a few minutes were asleep.

Mr. Oakhurst was a light sleeper. Toward morning he awoke benumbed and
cold. As he stirred the dying fire, the wind, which was now blowing
strongly, brought to his cheek that which caused the blood to leave
it,—snow!

He started to his feet with the intention of awakening the sleepers,
for there was no time to lose. But turning to where Uncle Billy had
been lying, he found him gone. A suspicion leaped to his brain and
a curse to his lips. He ran to the spot where the mules had been
tethered; they were no longer there. The tracks were already rapidly
disappearing in the snow.

The momentary excitement brought Mr. Oakhurst back to the fire with
his usual calm. He did not waken the sleepers. The Innocent slumbered
peacefully, with a smile on his good-humored, freckled face; the virgin
Piney slept beside her frailer sisters as sweetly as though attended
by celestial guardians, and Mr. Oakhurst, drawing his blanket over his
shoulders, stroked his mustachios and waited for the dawn. It came
slowly in a whirling mist of snowflakes, that dazzled and confused the
eye. What could be seen of the landscape appeared magically changed. He
looked over the valley, and summed up the present and future in two
words,—“Snowed in!”

A careful inventory of the provisions, which, fortunately for the
party, had been stored within the hut, and so escaped the felonious
fingers of Uncle Billy, disclosed the fact that with care and prudence
they might last ten days longer. “That is,” said Mr. Oakhurst,
_sotto voce_ to the Innocent, “if you’re willing to board us. If you
ain’t—and perhaps you’d better not—you can wait till Uncle Billy
gets back with provisions.” For some occult reason, Mr. Oakhurst could
not bring himself to disclose Uncle Billy’s rascality, and so offered
the hypothesis that he had wandered from the camp and had accidentally
stampeded the animals. He dropped a warning to the Duchess and Mother
Shipton, who of course knew the facts of their associate’s defection.
“They’ll find out the truth about us _all_, when they find out
anything,” he added, significantly, “and there’s no good frightening
them now.”

Tom Simson not only put all his worldly store at the disposal of Mr.
Oakhurst, but seemed to enjoy the prospect of their enforced seclusion.
“We’ll have a good camp for a week, and then the snow’ll melt, and
we’ll all go back together.” The cheerful gaiety of the young man and
Mr. Oakhurst’s calm infected the others. The Innocent, with the aid
of pine boughs, extemporized a thatch for the roofless cabin, and the
Duchess directed Piney in the rearrangement of the interior with a
taste and tact that opened the blue eyes of that provincial maiden
to their fullest extent. “I reckon now you’re used to fine things at
Poker Flat,” said Piney. The Duchess turned away sharply to conceal
something that reddened her cheek through its professional tint, and
Mother Shipton requested Piney not to “chatter.” But when Mr. Oakhurst
returned from a weary search for the trail, he heard the sound of
happy laughter echoed from the rocks. He stopped in some alarm, and
his thoughts first naturally reverted to the whiskey, which he had
prudently _cachéd_. “And yet it don’t somehow sound like whiskey,”
said the gambler. It was not until he caught sight of the blazing fire
through the still blinding storm, and the group around it, that he
settled to the conviction that it was “square fun.”

Whether Mr. Oakhurst had _cachéd_ his cards with the whiskey as
something debarred the free access of the community, I cannot say.
It was certain that, in Mother Shipton’s words, he “didn’t say cards
once” during that evening. Haply the time was beguiled by an accordion,
produced somewhat ostentatiously by Tom Simson, from his pack.
Notwithstanding some difficulties attending the manipulation of this
instrument, Piney Woods managed to pluck several reluctant melodies
from its keys, to an accompaniment by the Innocent on a pair of bone
castanets. But the crowning festivity of the evening was reached in
a rude camp-meeting hymn, which the lovers, joining hands, sang with
great earnestness and vociferation. I fear that a certain defiant
tone and Covenanter’s swing to its chorus, rather than any devotional
quality, caused it speedily to infect the others, who at last joined in
the refrain:

  “‘I’m proud to live in the service of the Lord,
  And I’m bound to die in His army.’”

The pines rocked, the storm eddied and whirled above the miserable
group, and the flames of their altar leaped heavenward, as if in token
of the vow.

At midnight the storm abated, the rolling clouds parted, and the
stars glittered keenly above the sleeping camp. Mr. Oakhurst, whose
professional habits had enabled him to live on the smallest possible
amount of sleep, in dividing the watch with Tom Simson, somehow
managed to take upon himself the greater part of that duty. He excused
himself to the Innocent, by saying that he had “often been a week
without sleep.” “Doing what?” asked Tom. “Poker!” replied Oakhurst,
sententiously; “when a man gets a streak of luck,—<DW65>-luck,—he
don’t get tired. The luck gives in first. Luck,” continued the gambler,
reflectively, “is a mighty queer thing. All you know about it for
certain is that it’s bound to change. And it’s finding out when it’s
going to change that makes you. We’ve had a streak of bad luck since
we left Poker Flat—you come along, and slap you get into it, too. If
you can hold your cards right along you’re all right. For,” added the
gambler, with cheerful irrelevance,

  “‘I’m proud to live in the service of the Lord,
  And I’m bound to die in His army.’”

The third day came, and the sun, looking through the white-curtained
valley, saw the outcasts divide their slowly decreasing store of
provisions for the morning meal. It was one of the peculiarities of
that mountain climate that its rays diffused a kindly warmth over the
wintry landscape, as if in regretful commiseration of the past. But it
revealed drift on drift of snow piled high around the hut; a hopeless,
uncharted, trackless sea of white lying below the rocky shores to which
the castaways still clung. Through the marvellously clear air, the
smoke of the pastoral village of Poker Flat rose miles away. Mother
Shipton saw it, and from a remote pinnacle of her rocky fastness,
hurled in that direction a final malediction. It was her last
vituperative attempt, and perhaps for that reason was invested with a
certain degree of sublimity. It did her good, she privately informed
the Duchess. “Just you go out there and cuss, and see.” She then set
herself to the task of amusing “the child,” as she and the Duchess were
pleased to call Piney. Piney was no chicken, but it was a soothing and
ingenious theory of the pair thus to account for the fact that she
didn’t swear and wasn’t improper.

When night crept up again through the gorges, the reedy notes of the
accordion rose and fell in fitful spasms and long-drawn gasps by the
flickering camp-fire. But music failed to fill entirely the aching
void left by insufficient food, and a new diversion was proposed by
Piney—story-telling. Neither Mr. Oakhurst nor his female companions
caring to relate their personal experiences, this plan would have
failed, too, but for the Innocent. Some months before he had chanced
upon a stray copy of Mr. Pope’s ingenious translation of the Iliad. He
now proposed to narrate the principal incidents of that poem—having
thoroughly mastered the argument and fairly forgotten the words—in
the current vernacular of Sandy Bar. And so for the rest of that
night the Homeric demigods again walked the earth. Trojan bully and
wily Greek wrestled in the winds, and the great pines in the cañon
seemed to bow to the wrath of the son of Peleus. Mr. Oakhurst listened
with quiet satisfaction. Most especially was he interested in the
fate of “Ash-heels,” as the Innocent persisted in denominating the
“swift-footed Achilles.”

So with small food and much of Homer and the accordion, a week passed
over the heads of the outcasts. The sun again forsook them, and again
from leaden skies the snowflakes were sifted over the land. Day by day
closer around them drew the snowy circle, until at last they looked
from their prison over drifted walls of dazzling white, that towered
twenty feet above their heads. It became more and more difficult to
replenish their fires, even from the fallen trees beside them, now half
hidden in the drifts. And yet no one complained. The lovers turned from
the dreary prospect and looked into each other’s eyes, and were happy.
Mr. Oakhurst settled himself coolly to the losing game before him. The
Duchess, more cheerful than she had been, assumed the care of Piney.
Only Mother Shipton—once the strongest of the party—seemed to sicken
and fade. At midnight on the tenth day she called Oakhurst to her side.
“I’m going,” she said, in a voice of querulous weakness, “but don’t say
anything about it. Don’t waken the kids. Take the bundle from under my
head and open it.” Mr. Oakhurst did so. It contained Mother Shipton’s
rations for the last week, untouched. “Give ’em to the child,” she
said, pointing to the sleeping Piney. “You’ve starved yourself,” said
the gambler. “That’s what they call it,” said the woman, querulously,
as she lay down again, and, turning her face to the wall, passed
quietly away.

The accordion and the bones were put aside that day, and Homer was
forgotten. When the body of Mother Shipton had been committed to the
snow, Mr. Oakhurst took the Innocent aside, and showed him a pair of
snowshoes, which he had fashioned from the old packsaddle. “There’s one
chance in a hundred to save her yet,” he said, pointing to Piney; “but
it’s there,” he added, pointing toward Poker Flat. “If you can reach
there in two days she’s safe.” “And you?” asked Tom Simson. “I’ll stay
here,” was the curt reply.

The lovers parted with a long embrace. “You are not going, too?” said
the Duchess, as she saw Mr. Oakhurst apparently waiting to accompany
him. “As far as the cañon,” he replied. He turned suddenly, and kissed
the Duchess, leaving her pallid face aflame, and her trembling limbs
rigid with amazement.

Night came, but not Mr. Oakhurst. It brought the storm again and the
whirling snow. Then the Duchess, feeding the fire, found that some one
had quietly piled beside the hut enough fuel to last a few days longer.
The tears rose to her eyes, but she hid them from Piney.

The women slept but little. In the morning, looking into each other’s
faces, they read their fate. Neither spoke; but Piney, accepting the
position of the stronger, drew near and placed her arm around the
Duchess’s waist. They kept this attitude for the rest of the day. That
night the storm reached its greatest fury, and, rending asunder the
protecting pines, invaded the very hut.

Toward morning they found themselves unable to feed the fire, which
gradually died away. As the embers slowly blackened, the Duchess
crept closer to Piney, and broke the silence of many hours: “Piney,
can you pray?” “No, dear,” said Piney, simply. The Duchess, without
knowing exactly why, felt relieved, and, putting her head upon Piney’s
shoulder, spoke no more. And so reclining, the younger and purer
pillowing the head of her soiled sister upon her virgin breast, they
fell asleep.

The wind lulled as if it feared to waken them. Feathery drifts of
snow, shaken from the long pine boughs, flew like white-winged birds,
and settled about them as they slept. The moon through the rifted
clouds looked down upon what had been the camp. But all human stain,
all trace of earthly travail, was hidden beneath the spotless mantle
mercifully flung from above.

They slept all that day and the next, nor did they waken when voices
and footsteps broke the silence of the camp. And when pitying fingers
brushed the snow from their wan faces, you could scarcely have told
from the equal peace that dwelt upon them, which was she that had
sinned. Even the Law of Poker Flat recognized this, and turned away,
leaving them still locked in each other’s arms.

But at the head of the gulch, on one of the largest pine-trees, they
found the deuce of clubs pinned to the bark with a bowie knife. It bore
the following, written in pencil, in a firm hand:

                                   †
                           BENEATH THIS TREE
                             LIES THE BODY
                                  OF
                            JOHN OAKHURST,
                    WHO STRUCK A STREAK OF BAD LUCK
                     ON THE 23D OF NOVEMBER, 1850,
                                  AND
                          ANDED IN HIS CHECKS
                      ON THE 7TH DECEMBER, 1850.
                                   †

And, pulseless and cold, with a Derringer by his side and a bullet in
his heart, though still calm as in life, beneath the snow lay he who
was at once the strongest and yet the weakest of the outcasts of Poker
Flat.




  THE REVOLT OF “MOTHER”

  BY

  MARY E. WILKINS FREEMAN

This is a story of character against a New England background. Each
character is worked out with the delicacy and minuteness of a cameo.
Each is intensely realistic, yet, as in the cameo, palely flushed
with romance. “Mother,” along with her originality of action and
long-concealed ideals, has the saving quality of common-sense, which
makes its powerful appeal to the daily realities of life. Thus when
“Father,” dazed by the unexpected revelation of the character and
ideals of the woman he has misunderstood for forty years, stands
uncertain whether to assert or to surrender his long-established
supremacy, she decides him in her favor by a practical suggestion of
acquiescence: “You’d better take your coat off an’ get washed—there’s
the wash-basin—an’ then we’ll have supper.”




THE REVOLT OF “MOTHER”[18]


“Father!”

“What is it?”

“What are them men diggin’ over there in the field for?”

There was a sudden dropping and enlarging of the lower part of the old
man’s face, as if some heavy weight had settled therein; he shut his
mouth tight, and went on harnessing the great bay mare. He hustled the
collar on to her neck with a jerk.

“Father!”

The old man slapped the saddle upon the mare’s back.

“Look here, father, I want to know what them men are diggin’ over in
the field for, an’ I’m goin’ to know.”

“I wish you’d go into the house, mother, an’ ’tend to your own
affairs,” the old man said then. He ran his words together, and his
speech was almost as inarticulate as a growl.

But the woman understood; it was her most native tongue. “I ain’t goin’
into the house till you tell me what them men are doin’ over there in
the field,” said she.

Then she stood waiting. She was a small woman, short and
straight-waisted like a child in her brown cotton gown. Her forehead
was mild and benevolent between the smooth curves of gray hair; there
were meek downward lines about her nose and mouth; but her eyes, fixed
upon the old man, looked as if the meekness had been the result of her
own will, never of the will of another.

They were in the barn, standing before the wide-open doors. The spring
air, full of the smell of growing grass and unseen blossoms, came in
their faces. The deep yard in front was littered with farm wagons and
piles of wood; on the edges, close to the fence and the house, the
grass was a vivid green, and there were some dandelions.

The old man glanced doggedly at his wife as he tightened the last
buckles on the harness. She looked as immovable to him as one of the
rocks in his pastureland, bound to the earth with generations of
blackberry vines. He slapped the reins over the horse, and started
forth from the barn.

“_Father!_” said she.

The old man pulled up. “What is it?”

“I want to know what them men are diggin’ over there in that field for.”

“They’re diggin’ a cellar, I s’pose, if you’ve got to know.”

“A cellar for what?”

“A barn.”

“A barn? You ain’t goin’ to build a barn over there where we was goin’
to have a house, father?”

The old man said not another word. He hurried the horse into the farm
wagon, and clattered out of the yard, jouncing as sturdily on his seat
as a boy.

The woman stood a moment looking after him, then she went out of the
barn across a corner of the yard to the house. The house, standing
at right angles with the great barn and a long reach of sheds and
out-buildings, was infinitesimal compared with them. It was scarcely
as commodious for people as the little boxes under the barn eaves were
for doves.

A pretty girl’s face, pink and delicate as a flower, was looking out of
one of the house windows. She was watching three men who were digging
over in the field which bounded the yard near the road line. She turned
quietly when the woman entered.

“What are they digging for, mother?” said she. “Did he tell you?”

“They’re diggin’ for—a cellar for a new barn.”

“Oh, mother, he ain’t going to build another barn?”

“That’s what he says.”

A boy stood before the kitchen glass combing his hair. He combed slowly
and painstakingly, arranging his brown hair in a smooth hillock over
his forehead. He did not seem to pay any attention to the conversation.

“Sammy, did you know father was going to build a new barn?” asked the
girl.

The boy combed assiduously.

“Sammy!”

He turned, and showed a face like his father’s under his smooth crest
of hair. “Yes, I s’pose I did,” he said, reluctantly.

“How long have you known it?” asked his mother.

“‘Bout three months, I guess.”

“Why didn’t you tell of it?”

“Didn’t think ’twould do no good.”

“I don’t see what father wants another barn for,” said the girl, in
her sweet, slow voice. She turned again to the window, and stared out
at the digging men in the field. Her tender, sweet face was full of a
gentle distress. Her forehead was as bald and innocent as a baby’s,
with the light hair strained back from it in a row of curl-papers. She
was quite large, but her soft curves did not look as if they covered
muscles.

Her mother looked sternly at the boy. “Is he goin’ to buy more cows?”
said she.

The boy did not reply; he was tying his shoes.

“Sammy, I want you to tell me if he’s goin’ to buy more cows.”

“I s’pose he is.”

“How many?”

“Four, I guess.”

His mother said nothing more. She went into the pantry, and there was
a clatter of dishes. The boy got his cap from a nail behind the door,
took an old arithmetic from the shelf, and started for school. He was
lightly built, but clumsy. He went out of the yard with a curious
spring in the hips, that made his loose home-made jacket tilt up in the
rear.

The girl went to the sink, and began to wash the dishes that were piled
up there. Her mother came promptly out of the pantry, and shoved her
aside. “You wipe ’em,” said she; “I’ll wash. There’s a good many this
mornin’.”

The mother plunged her hands vigorously into the water, the girl wiped
the plates slowly and dreamily. “Mother,” said she, “don’t you think
it’s too bad father’s going to build that new barn, much as we need a
decent house to live in?”

Her mother scrubbed a dish fiercely. “You ain’t found out yet we’re
women-folks, Nanny Penn,” said she. “You ain’t seen enough of men-folks
yet to. One of these days you’ll find it out, an’ then you’ll know that
we know only what men-folks think we do, so far as any use of it goes,
an’ how we’d ought to reckon men-folks in with Providence, an’ not
complain of what they do any more than we do of the weather.”

“I don’t care; I don’t believe George is anything like that, anyhow,”
said Nanny. Her delicate face flushed pink, her lips pouted softly, as
if she were going to cry.

“You wait an’ see. I guess George Eastman ain’t no better than other
men. You hadn’t ought to judge father, though. He can’t help it, ’cause
he don’t look at things jest the way we do. An’ we’ve been pretty
comfortable here, after all. The roof don’t leak—ain’t never but
once—that’s one thing. Father’s kept it shingled right up.”

“I do wish we had a parlor.”

“I guess it won’t hurt George Eastman any to come to see you in a nice
clean kitchen. I guess a good many girls don’t have as good a place as
this. Nobody’s ever heard me complain.”

“I ain’t complained either, mother.”

“Well, I don’t think you’d better, a good father an’ a good home as
you’ve got. S’pose your father made you go out an’ work for your
livin’? Lots of girls have to that ain’t no stronger an’ better able to
than you be.”

Sarah Penn washed the frying-pan with a conclusive air. She scrubbed
the outside of it as faithfully as the inside. She was a masterly
keeper of her box of a house. Her one living-room never seemed to have
in it any of the dust which the friction of life with inanimate matter
produces. She swept, and there seemed to be no dirt to go before the
broom; she cleaned, and one could see no difference. She was like an
artist so perfect that he has apparently no art. To-day she got out a
mixing bowl and a board, and rolled some pies, and there was no more
flour upon her than upon her daughter who was doing finer work. Nanny
was to be married in the fall, and she was sewing on some white cambric
and embroidery. She sewed industriously while her mother cooked, her
soft milk-white hands and wrists showed whiter than her delicate work.

“We must have the stove moved out in the shed before long,” said Mrs.
Penn. “Talk about not havin’ things, it’s been a real blessin’ to be
able to put a stove up in that shed in hot weather. Father did one good
thing when he fixed that stove-pipe out there.”

Sarah Penn’s face as she rolled her pies had that expression of meek
vigor which might have characterized one of the New Testament saints.
She was making mince-pies. Her husband, Adoniram Penn, liked them
better than any other kind. She baked twice a week. Adoniram often
liked a piece of pie between meals. She hurried this morning. It had
been later than usual when she began, and she wanted to have a pie
baked for dinner. However deep a resentment she might be forced to hold
against her husband, she would never fail in sedulous attention to his
wants.

Nobility of character manifests itself at loop-holes when it is not
provided with large doors. Sarah Penn’s showed itself to-day in flaky
dishes of pastry. So she made the pies faithfully, while across the
table she could see, when she glanced up from her work, the sight that
rankled in her patient and steadfast soul—the digging of the cellar of
the new barn in the place where Adoniram forty years ago had promised
her their new house should stand.

The pies were done for dinner. Adoniram and Sammy were home a few
minutes after twelve o’clock. The dinner was eaten with serious haste.
There was never much conversation at the table in the Penn family.
Adoniram asked a blessing, and they ate promptly, then rose up and went
about their work.

Sammy went back to school, taking soft sly lopes out of the yard like
a rabbit. He wanted a game of marbles before school, and feared his
father would give him some chores to do. Adoniram hastened to the door
and called after him, but he was out of sight.

“I don’t see what you let him go for, mother,” said he. “I wanted him
to help me unload that wood.”

Adoniram went to work out in the yard unloading wood from the wagon.
Sarah put away the dinner dishes, while Nanny took down her curl-papers
and changed her dress. She was going down to the store to buy some more
embroidery and thread.

When Nanny was gone, Mrs. Penn went to the door. “Father!” she called.

“Well, what is it!”

“I want to see you jest a minute, father.”

“I can’t leave this wood nohow. I’ve got to git it unloaded an’ go for
a load of gravel afore two o’clock. Sammy had ought to helped me. You
hadn’t ought to let him go to school so early.”

“I want to see you jest a minute.”

“I tell ye I can’t, nohow, mother.”

“Father, you come here.” Sarah Penn stood in the door like a queen;
she held her head as if it bore a crown; there was that patience which
makes authority royal in her voice. Adoniram went.

Mrs. Penn led the way into the kitchen, and pointed to a chair. “Sit
down, father,” said she; “I’ve got somethin’ I want to say to you.”

He sat down heavily; his face was quite stolid, but he looked at her
with restive eyes. “Well, what is it, mother?”

“I want to know what you’re buildin’ that new barn for, father?”

“I ain’t got nothin’ to say about it.”

“It can’t be you think you need another barn?”

“I tell ye I ain’t got nothin’ to say about it, mother; an’ I ain’t
goin’ to say nothin’.”

“Be you goin’ to buy more cows?”

Adoniram did not reply; he shut his mouth tight.

“I know you be, as well as I want to. Now, father, look here”—Sarah
Penn had not sat down; she stood before her husband in the humble
fashion of a Scripture woman—“I’m goin’ to talk real plain to you; I
never have sence I married you, but I’m goin’ to now. I ain’t never
complained, an’ I ain’t goin’ to complain now, but I’m goin’ to talk
plain. You see this room here, father; you look at it well. You see
there ain’t no carpet on the floor, an’ you see the paper is all dirty,
an’ droppin’ off the walls. We ain’t had no new paper on it for ten
year, an’ then I put it on myself, an’ it didn’t cost but ninepence a
roll. You see this room, father; it’s all the one I’ve had to work in
an’ eat in an’ sit in sence we was married. There ain’t another woman
in the whole town whose husband ain’t got half the means you have but
what’s got better. It’s all the room Nanny’s got to have her company
in; an’ there ain’t one of her mates but what’s got better, an’ their
fathers not so able as hers is. It’s all the room she’ll have to be
married in. What would you have thought, father, if we had had our
weddin’ in a room no better than this? I was married in my mother’s
parlor, with a carpet on the floor, an’ stuffed furniture, an’ a
mahogany card-table. An’ this is all the room my daughter will have to
be married in. Look here, father!”

Sarah Penn went across the room as though it were a tragic stage. She
flung open a door and disclosed a tiny bedroom, only large enough
for a bed and bureau, with a path between. “There, father,” said
she—“there’s all the room I’ve had to sleep in forty year. All my
children were born there—the two that died, an’ the two that’s livin’.
I was sick with a fever there.”

She stepped to another door and opened it. It led into the small,
ill-lighted pantry. “Here,” said she, “is all the buttery I’ve
got—every place I’ve got for my dishes, to set away my victuals in,
an’ to keep my milk-pans in. Father, I’ve been takin’ care of the milk
of six cows in this place, an’ now you’re goin’ to build a new barn,
an’ keep more cows, an’ give me more to do in it.”

She threw open another door. A narrow crooked flight of stairs wound
upward from it. “There, father,” said she, “I want you to look at the
stairs that go up to them two unfinished chambers that are all the
places our son an’ daughter have had to sleep in all their lives. There
ain’t a prettier girl in town nor a more ladylike one than Nanny, an’
that’s the place she has to sleep in. It ain’t so good as your horse’s
stall; it ain’t so warm an’ tight.”

Sarah Penn went back and stood before her husband. “Now, father,” said
she, “I want to know if you think you’re doin’ right an’ accordin’
to what you profess. Here, when we was married, forty year ago, you
promised me faithful that we should have a new house built in that
lot over in the field before the year was out. You said you had money
enough, an’ you wouldn’t ask me to live in no such place as this. It is
forty year now, an’ you’ve been makin’ more money, an’ I’ve been savin’
of it for you ever sence, an’ you ain’t built no house yet. You’ve
built sheds an’ cow-houses an’ one new barn, an’ now you’re goin’ to
build another. Father, I want to know if you think it’s right. You’re
lodgin’ your dumb beasts better than you are your own flesh an’ blood.
I want to know if you think it’s right.”

“I ain’t got nothin’ to say.”

“You can’t say nothin’ without ownin’ it ain’t right, father. An’
there’s another thing—I ain’t complained; I’ve got along forty year,
an’ I s’pose I should forty more, if it wa’n’t for that—if we don’t
have another house. Nanny she can’t live with us after she’s married.
She’ll have to go somewheres else to live away from us, an’ it don’t
seem as if I could have it so, noways, father. She wa’n’t ever strong.
She’s got considerable color, but there wa’n’t never any backbone to
her. I’ve always took the heft of everything off her, an’ she ain’t fit
to keep house an’ do everything herself. She’ll be all worn out inside
of a year. Think of her doin’ all the washin’ an’ ironin’ an’ bakin’
with them soft white hands an’ arms, an’ sweepin’! I can’t have it so,
noways, father.”

Mrs. Penn’s face was burning; her mild eyes gleamed. She had pleaded
her little cause like a Webster; she had ranged from severity to
pathos; but her opponent employed that obstinate silence which makes
eloquence futile with mocking echoes. Adoniram arose clumsily.

“Father, ain’t you got nothin’ to say?” said Mrs. Penn.

“I’ve got to go off after that load of gravel. I can’t stan’ here
talkin’ all day.”

“Father, won’t you think it over, an’ have a house built there instead
of a barn?”

“I ain’t got nothin’ to say.”

Adoniram shuffled out. Mrs. Penn went into her bedroom. When she came
out, her eyes were red. She had a roll of unbleached cotton cloth. She
spread it out on the kitchen table, and began cutting out some shirts
for her husband. The men over in the field had a team to help them this
afternoon; she could hear their halloos. She had a scanty pattern for
the shirts; she had to plan and piece the sleeves.

Nanny came home with her embroidery, and sat down with her needlework.
She had taken down her curl-papers, and there was a soft roll of fair
hair like an aureole over her forehead; her face was as delicately fine
and clear as porcelain. Suddenly she looked up, and the tender red
flamed all over her face and neck. “Mother,” said she.

“What say?”

“I’ve been thinking—I don’t see how we’re goin’ to have any—wedding
in this room. I’d be ashamed to have his folks come if we didn’t have
anybody else.”

“Mebbe we can have some new paper before then; I can put it on. I guess
you won’t have no call to be ashamed of your belongin’s.”

“We might have the wedding in the new barn,” said Nanny, with gentle
pettishness. “Why, mother, what makes you look so?”

Mrs. Penn had started, and was staring at her with a curious
expression. She turned again to her work, and spread out a pattern
carefully on the cloth. “Nothin’,” said she.

Presently Adoniram clattered out of the yard in his two-wheeled dump
cart, standing as proudly upright as a Roman charioteer. Mrs. Penn
opened the door and stood there a minute looking out; the halloos of
the men sounded louder.

It seemed to her all through the spring months that she heard nothing
but the halloos and the noises of saws and hammers. The new barn grew
fast. It was a fine edifice for this little village. Men came on
pleasant Sundays, in their meeting suits and clean shirt bosoms, and
stood around it admiringly. Mrs. Penn did not speak of it, and Adoniram
did not mention it to her, although sometimes, upon a return from
inspecting it, he bore himself with injured dignity.

“It’s a strange thing how your mother feels about the new barn,” he
said, confidentially, to Sammy one day.

Sammy only grunted after an odd fashion for a boy; he had learned it
from his father.

The barn was all completed ready for use by the third week in July.
Adoniram had planned to move his stock in on Wednesday; on Tuesday he
received a letter which changed his plans. He came in with it early
in the morning. “Sammy’s been to the post-office,” said he, “an’ I’ve
got a letter from Hiram.” Hiram was Mrs. Penn’s brother, who lived in
Vermont.

“Well,” said Mrs. Penn, “what does he say about the folks?”

“I guess they’re all right. He says he thinks if I come up country
right off there’s a chance to buy jest the kind of a horse I want.” He
stared reflectively out of the window at the new barn.

Mrs. Penn was making pies. She went on clapping the rolling-pin into
the crust, although she was very pale, and her heart beat loudly.

“I dun’ know but what I’d better go,” said Adoniram. “I hate to go off
jest now, right in the midst of hayin’, but the ten-acre lot’s cut, an’
I guess Rufus an’ the others can git along without me three or four
days. I can’t get a horse round here to suit me, nohow, an’ I’ve got
to have another for all that wood-haulin’ in the fall. I told Hiram to
watch out, an’ if he got wind of a good horse to let me know. I guess
I’d better go.”

“I’ll get out your clean shirt an’ collar,” said Mrs. Penn, calmly.

She laid out Adoniram’s Sunday suit and his clean clothes on the bed in
the little bedroom. She got his shaving-water and razor ready. At last
she buttoned on his collar and fastened his black cravat.

Adoniram never wore his collar and cravat except on extra occasions. He
held his head high, with a rasped dignity. When he was all ready, with
his coat and hat brushed, and a lunch of pie and cheese in a paper bag,
he hesitated on the threshold of the door. He looked at his wife, and
his manner was defiantly apologetic. “_If_ them cows come to-day, Sammy
can drive ’em into the new barn,” said he; “an’ when they bring the hay
up, they can pitch it in there.”

“Well,” replied Mrs. Penn.

Adoniram set his shaven face ahead and started. When he had cleared the
door-step, he turned and looked back with a kind of nervous solemnity.
“I shall be back by Saturday if nothin’ happens,” said he.

“Do be careful, father,” returned his wife.

She stood in the door with Nanny at her elbow and watched him out
of sight. Her eyes had a strange, doubtful expression in them; her
peaceful forehead was contracted. She went in, and about her baking
again. Nanny sat sewing. Her wedding-day was drawing nearer, and she
was getting pale and thin with her steady sewing. Her mother kept
glancing at her.

“Have you got that pain in your side this mornin’?” she asked.

“A little.”

Mrs. Penn’s face, as she worked, changed, her perplexed forehead
smoothed, her eyes were steady, her lips firmly set. She formed a
maxim for herself, although incoherently with her unlettered thoughts.
“Unsolicited opportunities are the guide-posts of the Lord to the new
roads of life,” she repeated in effect, and she made up her mind to her
course of action.

“S’posin’ I _had_ wrote to Hiram,” she muttered once, when she was
in the pantry—“s’posin’ I had wrote, an’ asked him if he knew of any
horse? But I didn’t, an’ father’s goin’ wa’n’t none of my doin’. It
looks like a providence.” Her voice rang out quite loud at the last.

“What you talkin’ about, mother?” called Nanny.

“Nothin’.”

Mrs. Penn hurried her baking; at eleven o’clock it was all done.
The load of hay from the west field came slowly down the cart
track, and drew up at the new barn. Mrs. Penn ran out. “Stop!” she
screamed—“stop!”

The men stopped and looked; Sammy upreared from the top of the load,
and stared at his mother.

“Stop!” she cried out again. “Don’t you put the hay in that barn; put
it in the old one.”

“Why, he said to put it in here,” returned one of the haymakers,
wonderingly. He was a young man, a neighbor’s son, whom Adoniram hired
by the year to help on the farm.

“Don’t you put the hay in the new barn; there’s room enough in the old
one, ain’t there?” said Mrs. Penn.

“Room enough,” returned the hired man, in his thick, rustic tones.
“Didn’t need the new barn, nohow, far as room’s concerned. Well, I
s’pose he changed his mind.” He took hold of the horses’ bridles.

Mrs. Penn went back to the house. Soon the kitchen windows were
darkened, and a fragrance like warm honey came into the room.

Nanny laid down her work. “I thought father wanted them to put the hay
into the new barn?” she said, wonderingly.

“It’s all right,” replied her mother.

Sammy slid down from the load of hay, and came in to see if dinner was
ready.

“I ain’t goin’ to get a regular dinner to-day, as long as father’s
gone,” said his mother. “I’ve let the fire go out. You can have some
bread an’ milk an’ pie. I thought we could get along.” She set out
some bowls of milk, some bread, and a pie on the kitchen table. “You’d
better eat your dinner now,” said she. “You might jest as well get
through with it. I want you to help me afterward.”

Nanny and Sammy stared at each other. There was something strange
in their mother’s manner. Mrs. Penn did not eat anything herself.
She went into the pantry, and they heard her moving dishes while
they ate. Presently she came out with a pile of plates. She got the
clothes-basket out of the shed, and packed them in it. Nanny and Sammy
watched. She brought out cups and saucers, and put them in with the
plates.

“What you goin’ to do, mother?” inquired Nanny, in a timid voice. A
sense of something unusual made her tremble, as if it were a ghost.
Sammy rolled his eyes over his pie.

“You’ll see what I’m goin’ to do,” replied Mrs. Penn. “If you’re
through, Nanny, I want you to go upstairs an’ pack up your things; an’
I want you, Sammy, to help me take down the bed in the bedroom.”

“Oh, mother, what for?” gasped Nanny.

“You’ll see.”

During the next few hours a feat was performed by this simple, pious
New England mother which was equal in its way to Wolfe’s storming of
the Heights of Abraham. It took no more genius and audacity of bravery
for Wolfe to cheer his wondering soldiers up those steep precipices,
under the sleeping eyes of the enemy, than for Sarah Penn, at the head
of her children, to move all their little household goods into the new
barn while her husband was away.

Nanny and Sammy followed their mother’s instructions without a murmur;
indeed, they were overawed. There is a certain uncanny and superhuman
quality about all such purely original undertakings as their mother’s
was to them. Nanny went back and forth with her light loads, and Sammy
tugged with sober energy.

At five o’clock in the afternoon the little house in which the Penns
had lived for forty years had emptied itself into the new barn.

Every builder builds somewhat for unknown purposes, and is in a measure
a prophet. The architect of Adoniram Penn’s barn, while he designed
it for the comfort of four-footed animals, had planned better than
he knew for the comfort of humans. Sarah Penn saw at a glance its
possibilities. Those great box-stalls, with quilts hung before them,
would make better bedrooms than the one she had occupied for forty
years, and there was a tight carriage-room. The harness-room, with its
chimney and shelves, would make a kitchen of her dreams. The great
middle space would make a parlor, by-and-by, fit for a palace. Upstairs
there was as much room as down. With partitions and windows, what a
house would there be! Sarah looked at the row of stanchions before the
allotted space for cows, and reflected that she would have her front
entry there.

At six o’clock the stove was up in the harness-room, the kettle was
boiling, and the table set for tea. It looked almost as home-like as
the abandoned house across the yard had ever done. The young hired man
milked, and Sarah directed him calmly to bring the milk to the new
barn. He came gaping, dropping little blots of foam from the brimming
pails on the grass. Before the next morning he had spread the story
of Adoniram Penn’s wife moving into the new barn all over the little
village. Men assembled in the store and talked it over, women with
shawls over their heads scuttled into each other’s houses before their
work was done. Any deviation from the ordinary course of life in this
quiet town was enough to stop all progress in it. Everybody paused to
look at the staid, independent figure on the side track. There was a
difference of opinion with regard to her. Some held her to be insane;
some, of a lawless and rebellious spirit.

Friday the minister went to see her. It was in the forenoon, and she
was at the barn door shelling peas for dinner. She looked up and
returned his salutation with dignity, then she went on with her work.
She did not invite him in. The saintly expression of her face remained
fixed, but there was an angry flush over it.

The minister stood awkwardly before her, and talked. She handled the
peas as if they were bullets. At last she looked up, and her eyes
showed the spirit that her meek front had covered for a lifetime.

“There ain’t no use talkin’, Mr. Hersey,” said she. “I’ve thought it
all over an’ over, an’ I believe I’m doin’ what’s right. I’ve made it
the subject of prayer, an’ it’s betwixt me an’ the Lord an’ Adoniram.
There ain’t no call for nobody else to worry about it.”

“Well, of course, if you have brought it to the Lord in prayer, and
feel satisfied that you are doing right, Mrs. Penn,” said the minister,
helplessly. His thin gray-bearded face was pathetic. He was a sickly
man; his youthful confidence had cooled; he had to scourge himself up
to some of his pastoral duties as relentlessly as a Catholic ascetic,
and then he was prostrated by the smart.

“I think it’s right jest as much as I think it was right for our
forefathers to come over from the old country ’cause they didn’t have
what belonged to ’em,” said Mrs. Penn. She arose. The barn threshold
might have been Plymouth Rock from her bearing. “I don’t doubt you mean
well, Mr. Hersey,” said she, “but there are things people hadn’t ought
to interfere with. I’ve been a member of the church for over forty
year. I’ve got my own mind an’ my own feet, an’ I’m goin’ to think my
own thoughts an’ go my own ways, an’ nobody but the Lord is goin’ to
dictate to me unless I’ve a mind to have him. Won’t you come in an’ set
down? How is Mis’ Hersey?”

“She is well, I thank you,” replied the minister. He added some more
perplexed apologetic remarks; then he retreated.

He could expound the intricacies of every character study in the
Scriptures, he was competent to grasp the Pilgrim Fathers and all
historical innovators, but Sarah Penn was beyond him. He could deal
with primal cases, but parallel ones worsted him. But, after all,
although it was aside from his province, he wondered more how Adoniram
Penn would deal with his wife than how the Lord would. Everybody shared
the wonder. When Adoniram’s four new cows arrived, Sarah ordered three
to be put in the old barn, the other in the house shed where the
cooking-stove had stood. That added to the excitement. It was whispered
that all four cows were domiciled in the house.

Towards sunset on Saturday, when Adoniram was expected home, there was
a knot of men in the road near the new barn. The hired man had milked,
but he still hung around the premises. Sarah Penn had supper all ready.
There were brown-bread and baked beans and a custard pie; it was the
supper that Adoniram loved on a Saturday night. She had on a clean
calico, and she bore herself imperturbably. Nanny and Sammy kept close
at her heels. Their eyes were large, and Nanny was full of nervous
tremors. Still there was to them more pleasant excitement than anything
else. An inborn confidence in their mother over their father asserted
itself.

Sammy looked out of the harness-room window. “There he is,” he
announced, in an awed whisper. He and Nanny peeped around the casing.
Mrs. Penn kept on about her work. The children watched Adoniram leave
the new horse standing in the drive while he went to the house door.
It was fastened. Then he went around to the shed. That door was seldom
locked, even when the family was away. The thought how her father would
be confronted by the cow flashed upon Nanny. There was a hysterical sob
in her throat. Adoniram emerged from the shed and stood looking about
in a dazed fashion. His lips moved; he was saying something, but they
could not hear what it was. The hired man was peeping around a corner
of the old barn, but nobody saw him.

Adoniram took the new horse by the bridle and led him across the yard
to the new barn. Nanny and Sammy slunk close to their mother. The barn
doors rolled back, and there stood Adoniram, with the long mild face of
the great Canadian farm horse looking over his shoulder.

Nanny kept behind her mother, but Sammy stepped suddenly forward, and
stood in front of her.

Adoniram stared at the group. “What on airth you all down here for?”
said he. “What’s the matter over to the house?”

“We’ve come here to live, father,” said Sammy. His shrill voice
quavered out bravely.

“What”—Adoniram sniffed—“what is it smells like cookin’?” said he. He
stepped forward and looked in the open door of the harness-room. Then
he turned to his wife. His old bristling face was pale and frightened.
“What on airth does this mean, mother?” he gasped.

“You come in here, father,” said Sarah. She led the way into the
harness-room and shut the door. “Now, father,” said she, “you needn’t
be scared. I ain’t crazy. There ain’t nothin’ to be upset over. But
we’ve come here to live, an’ we’re goin’ to live here. We’ve got jest
as good a right here as new horses an’ cows. The house wa’n’t fit for
us to live in any longer, an’ I made up my mind I wa’n’t goin’ to stay
there. I’ve done my duty by you forty year, an’ I’m goin’ to do it
now; but I’m goin’ to live here. You’ve got to put in some windows and
partitions; an’ you’ll have to buy some furniture.”

“Why, mother!” the old man gasped.

“You’d better take your coat off an’ get washed—there’s the
wash-basin—an’ then we’ll have supper.”

“Why, mother!”

Sammy went past the window, leading the new horse to the old barn. The
old man saw him, and shook his head speechlessly. He tried to take off
his coat, but his arms seemed to lack the power. His wife helped him.
She poured some water into the tin basin, and put in a piece of soap.
She got the comb and brush, and smoothed his thin gray hair after he
had washed. Then she put the beans, hot bread, and tea on the table.
Sammy came in, and the family drew up. Adoniram sat looking dazedly at
his plate, and they waited.

“Ain’t you goin’ to ask a blessin’, father?” said Sarah.

And the old man bent his head and mumbled.

All through the meal he stopped eating at intervals, and stared
furtively at his wife; but he ate well. The home food tasted good to
him, and his old frame was too sturdily healthy to be affected by his
mind. But after supper he went out, and sat down on the step of the
smaller door at the right of the barn, through which he had meant his
Jerseys to pass in stately file, but which Sarah designed for her front
house door, and he leaned his head on his hands.

After the supper dishes were cleared away and the milk-pans washed,
Sarah went out to him. The twilight was deepening. There was a clear
green glow in the sky. Before them stretched the smooth level of field;
in the distance was a cluster of hay-stacks like the huts of a village;
the air was very cool and calm and sweet. The landscape might have been
an ideal one of peace.

Sarah bent over and touched her husband on one of his thin, sinewy
shoulders. “Father!”

The old man’s shoulders heaved: he was weeping.

“Why, don’t do so, father,” said Sarah.

“I’ll—put up the—partitions, an’—everything you—want, mother.”

Sarah put her apron up to her face; she was overcome by her own triumph.

Adoniram was like a fortress whose walls had no active resistance,
and went down the instant the right besieging tools were used. “Why,
mother,” he said, hoarsely, “I hadn’t no idee you was so set on’t as
all this comes to.”




  MARSE CHAN

  A TALE OF OLD VIRGINIA

  BY

  THOMAS NELSON PAGE




Here plot, character, and setting are happily blended. The story is
sufficient to move smoothly and interestingly; the characters, both
black and white, reveal the Southerner at his best; and the setting
not only furnishes an appropriate background for plot and characters,
but is significant of the leisure, the isolation, and the pride of the
people.




MARSE CHAN[19]


One afternoon, in the autumn of 1872, I was riding leisurely down the
sandy road that winds along the top of the water-shed between two of
the smaller rivers of eastern Virginia. The road I was travelling,
following “the ridge” for miles, had just struck me as most significant
of the character of the race whose only avenue of communication with
the outside world it had formerly been. Their once splendid mansions,
now fast falling to decay, appeared to view from time to time, set back
far from the road, in proud seclusion, among groves of oak and hickory,
now scarlet and gold with the early frost. Distance was nothing to this
people; time was of no consequence to them. They desired but a level
path in life, and that they had, though the way was longer, and the
outer world strode by them as they dreamed.

I was aroused from my reflections by hearing some one ahead of me
calling, “Heah!—heah—whoo-oop, heah!”

Turning the curve in the road, I saw just before me a <DW64> standing,
with a hoe and a watering-pot in his hand. He had evidently just gotten
over the “worm-fence” into the road, out of the path which led zigzag
across the “old field” and was lost to sight in the dense growth of
sassafras. When I rode up, he was looking anxiously back down this path
for his dog. So engrossed was he that he did not even hear my horse,
and I reined in to wait until he should turn around and satisfy my
curiosity as to the handsome old place half a mile off from the road.

The numerous out-buildings and the large barns and stables told that
it had once been the seat of wealth, and the wild waste of sassafras
that covered the broad fields gave it an air of desolation that greatly
excited my interest. Entirely oblivious of my proximity, the <DW64> went
on calling “Whoo-oop, heah!” until along the path, walking very slowly
and with great dignity, appeared a noble-looking old orange and white
setter, gray with age, and corpulent with excessive feeding. As soon as
he came in sight, his master began:

“Yes, dat you! You gittin’ deaf as well as bline, I s’pose! Kyarnt heah
me callin’, I reckon? Whyn’t yo’ come on, dawg?”

The setter sauntered slowly up to the fence and stopped, without even
deigning a look at the speaker, who immediately proceeded to take the
rails down, talking meanwhile:

“Now, I got to pull down de gap, I s’pose! Yo’ so sp’ilt yo’ kyahn
hardly walk. Jes’ ez able to git over it as I is! Jes’ like white
folks—think ’cuz you’s white and I’se black, I got to wait on yo’ all
de time. Ne’m mine, I ain’ gwi’ do it!”

The fence having been pulled down sufficiently low to suit his dogship,
he marched sedately through, and, with a hardly perceptible lateral
movement of his tail, walked on down the road. Putting up the rails
carefully, the <DW64> turned and saw me.

“Sarvent, marster,” he said, taking his hat off. Then, as if
apologetically for having permitted a stranger to witness what was
merely a family affair, he added: “He know I don’ mean nothin’ by what
I sez. He’s Marse Chan’s dawg, an’ he’s so ole he kyahn git long no
pearter. He know I’se jes’ prodjickin’ wid ’im.”

“Who is Marse Chan?” I asked; “and whose place is that over there, and
the one a mile or two back—the place with the big gate and the carved
stone pillars?”

“Marse Chan,” said the <DW54>, “he’s Marse Channin’—my young marster;
an’ dem places—dis one’s Weall’s, an’ de one back dyar wid de rock
gate-pos’s is ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s. Dey don’ nobody live dyar now,
’cep’ <DW65>s. Arfter de war some one or nurr bought our place, but
his name done kind o’ slipped me. I nuver hearn on ’im befo’; I think
dey’s half-strainers. I don’ ax none on ’em no odds. I lives down de
road heah, a little piece, an’ I jes’ steps down of a evenin’ and looks
arfter de graves.”

“Well, where is Marse Chan?” I asked.

“Hi! don’ you know? Marse Chan, he went in de army. I was wid ’im. Yo’
know he warn’ gwine an’ lef’ Sam.”

“Will you tell me all about it?” I said, dismounting.

Instantly, and as if by instinct, the <DW54> stepped forward and took my
bridle. I demurred a little; but with a bow that would have honored old
Sir Roger, he shortened the reins, and taking my horse from me, led him
along.

“Now tell me about Marse Chan,” I said.

“Lawd, marster, hit’s so long ago, I’d a’most forgit all about it,
ef I hedn’ been wid him ever sence he wuz born. Ez ’tis, I remembers
it jes’ like ’twuz yistiddy. Yo’ know Marse Chan an’ me—we wuz boys
togerr. I wuz older’n he wuz, jes’ de same ez he wuz whiter’n me. I wuz
born plantin’ corn time, de spring arfter big Jim an’ de six steers
got washed away at de upper ford right down dyar b’low de quarters ez
he wuz a-bringin’ de Chris’mas things home; an’ Marse Chan, he warn’
born tell mos’ to de harves’ arfter my sister Nancy married Cun’l
Chahmb’lin’s Torm, ’bout eight years arfterwoods.

“Well, when Marse Chan wuz born, dey wuz de grettes’ doin’s at home you
ever did see. De folks all hed holiday, jes’ like in de Chris’mas. Ole
marster (we didn’ call ’im _ole_ marster tell arfter Marster Chan wuz
born—befo’ dat he wuz jes’ de marster, so)—well, ole marster, his
face fyar shine wid pleasure, an’ all de folks wuz mighty glad, too,
’cause dey all loved ole marster, and aldo’ dey did step aroun’ right
peart when ole marster was lookin’ at ’em, dyar warn’ nyar han’ on de
place but what, ef he wanted anythin’, would walk up to de back poach,
an’ say he warn’ to see de marster. An’ ev’ybody wuz talkin’ ’bout de
young marster, an’ de maids an’ de wimmens ’bout de kitchen wuz sayin’
how ’twuz de purties’ chile dey ever see; an’ at dinner-time de mens
(all on ’em hed holiday) come roun’ de poach an’ ax how de missis an’
de young marster wuz, an’ ole marster come out on de poach an’ smile
wus’n a ’possum, an’ sez, ’Thankee! Bofe doin’ fust rate, boys’; an’
den he stepped back in de house, sort o’ laughin’ to hisse’f, an’ in
a minute he come out ag’in wid de baby in he arms, all wrapped up in
flannens an’ things, an’ sez, ’Heah he is, boys.’ All de folks den, dey
went up on de poach to look at ’im, drappin’ dey hats on de steps, an’
scrapin’ dey feets ez dey went up. An’ pres’n’y old marster, lookin’
down at we all chil’en all packed togerr down dyah like a parecel o’
sheep-burrs, cotch sight _o’ me_ (he knowed my name, ’cause I use’ to
hole he hoss fur ’im sometimes; but he didn’t know all de chile’n by
name, dey wuz so many on ’em), an’ he sez, ’Come up heah!’ So up I goes
tippin’, skeered like, an’ old marster sez, ’Ain’ you Mymie’s son?’
’Yass, seh,’ sez I. ’Well,’ sez he, ’I’m gwine to give you to yo’ young
Marse Channin’ to be his body-servant,’ an’ he put de baby right in my
arms (it’s de truth I’m tellin’ yo’!), an’ yo’ jes’ ought to a-heard
de folks sayin’, ’Lawd! marster, dat boy’ll drap dat chile!’ ’Naw, he
won’t,’ sez marster; ’I kin trust ’im.’ And den he sez: ’Now, Sam, from
dis time you belong to yo’ young Marse Channin’; I wan’ you to tek keer
on ’im ez long ez he lives. You are to be his boy from dis time. An’
now,’ he sez, ’carry ’im in de house.’ An’ he walks arfter me an’ opens
de do’s fur me, an’ I kyars ’im in my arms, an’ lays ’im down on de
bed. An’ from dat time I was tooken in de house to be Marse Channin’s
body-servant.

“Well, you nuver see a chile grow so. Pres’n’y he growed up right big,
an’ ole marster sez he must have some edication. So he sont ’im to
school to ole Miss Lawry down dyar, dis side o’ Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s,
an’ I use’ to go ’long wid ’im an’ tote he books an’ we all’s snacks;
an’ when he larnt to read an’ spell right good, an’ got ’bout so-o
big, old Miss Lawry she died, an’ old marster said he mus’ have a man
to teach ’im an’ trounce ’im. So we all went to Mr. Hall, whar kep’ de
school-house beyant de creek, an’ dyar we went ev’y day, ’cep Sat’d’ys
of co’se, an’ sich days ez Marse Chan din’ warn’ go, an’ ole missis
begged ’im off.

“Hit wuz down dyar Marse Chan fust took notice o’ Miss Anne. Mr. Hall,
he taught gals ez well ez boys, an’ Cun’l Chahmb’lin he sont his
daughter (dat’s Miss Anne I’m talkin’ about). She wuz a leetle bit o’
gal when she fust come. Yo’ see, her ma wuz dead, an’ old Miss Lucy
Chahmb’lin, she lived wid her brurr an’ kep’ house for ’im; an’ he wuz
so busy wid politics, he didn’ have much time to spyar, so he sont Miss
Anne to Mr. Hall’s by a ’ooman wid a note. When she come dat day in
de school-house, an’ all de chil’en looked at her so hard, she tu’n
right red, an’ tried to pull her long curls over her eyes, an’ den put
bofe de backs of her little han’s in her two eyes, an’ begin to cry to
herse’f. Marse Chan he was settin’ on de een’ o’ de bench nigh de do’,
an’ he jes’ reached out an’ put he arm ’roun’ her an’ drawed her up to
’im. An’ he kep’ whisperin’ to her, an’ callin’ her name, an’ coddlin’
her; an’ pres’n’y she took her han’s down an’ begin to laugh.

“Well, dey ’peared to tek’ a gre’t fancy to each urr from dat time.
Miss Anne she warn’ nuthin’ but a baby hardly, an’ Marse Chan he wuz a
good big boy ’bout mos’ thirteen years ole, I reckon. Hows’ever, dey
sut’n’y wuz sot on each urr an’ (yo’ heah me!) ole marster an’ Cun’l
Chahmb’lin dey ’peared to like it ’bout well ez de chil’en. Yo’ see,
Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s place j’ined ourn, an’ it looked jes’ ez natural
fur dem two chil’en to marry an’ mek it one plantation, ez it did fur
de creek to run down de bottom from our place into Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s.
I don’ rightly think de chil’en thought ’bout gittin’ _married_, not
den, no mo’n I thought ’bout marryin’ Judy when she wuz a little gal
at Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s, runnin’ ’bout de house, huntin’ fur Miss Lucy’s
spectacles; but dey wuz good frien’s from de start. Marse Chan he use’
to kyar Miss Anne’s books fur her ev’y day, an’ ef de road wuz muddy or
she wuz tired, he use’ to tote her; an’ ’twarn’ hardly a day passed dat
he didn’ kyar her some’n’ to school—apples or hick’y nuts, or some’n.
He wouldn’t let none o’ de chil’en tease her, nurr. Heh! One day, one
o’ de boys poked he finger at Miss Anne, and arfter school Marse Chan
he axed ’im ’roun’ ’hine de school-house out o’ sight, an’ ef he didn’t
whop ’im!

“Marse Chan, he wuz de peartes’ scholar ole Mr. Hall hed, an’ Mr. Hall
he wuz mighty proud o’ ’im. I don’ think he use’ to beat ’im ez much
ez he did de urrs, aldo’ he wuz de head in all debilment dat went on,
jes’ ez he wuz in sayin’ he lessons.

“Heh! one day in summer, jes’ fo’ de school broke up, dyah come up a
storm right sudden, an’ riz de creek (dat one yo’ cross’ back yonder),
an’ Marse Chan he toted Miss Anne home on he back. He ve’y off’n did
dat when de parf wuz muddy. But dis day when dey come to de creek, it
had done washed all de logs ’way. ’Twuz still mighty high, so Marse
Chan he put Miss Anne down, an’ he took a pole an’ waded right in. Hit
took ’im long up to de shoulders. Den he waded back, an’ took Miss Anne
up on his head an’ kyared her right over. At fust she wuz skeered; but
he tol’ her he could swim an’ wouldn’ let her git hu’t, an’ den she let
’im kyar her ’cross, she hol’in’ his han’s. I warn’ ’long dat day, but
he sut’n’y did dat thing.

“Ole marster he wuz so pleased ’bout it, he giv’ Marse Chan a pony;
an’ Marse Chan rode ’im to school de day arfter he come, so proud,
an’ sayin’ how he wuz gwine to let Anne ride behine ’im; an’ when he
come home dat evenin’ he wuz walkin’. ’Hi! where’s yo’ pony?’ said ole
marster. ’I give ’im to Anne,’ says Marse Chan. ’She liked ’im, an’—I
kin walk.’ ’Yes,’ sez ole marster, laughin’, ’I s’pose you’s already
done giv’ her yo’se’f, an’ nex’ thing I know you’ll be givin’ her this
plantation and all my <DW65>s.’

“Well, about a fortnight or sich a matter arfter dat, Cun’l Chahmb’lin
sont over an’ invited all o’ we all over to dinner, an’ Marse Chan wuz
’spressly named in de note whar Ned brought; an’ arfter dinner he made
ole Phil, whar wuz his ker’ige-driver, bring ’roun’ Marse Chan’s pony
wid a little side-saddle on ’im, an’ a beautiful little hoss wid a
bran’-new saddle an’ bridle on ’im; an’ he gits up an’ meks Marse Chan
a gre’t speech, an’ presents ’im de little hoss; an’ den he calls Miss
Anne, an’ she comes out on de poach in a little ridin’ frock, an’ dey
puts her on her pony, an’ Marse Chan mounts his hoss, an’ dey goes to
ride, while de grown folks is a-laughin’ an’ chattin’ an’ smokin’ dey
cigars.

“Dem wuz good ole times, marster—de bes’ Sam ever see! Dey wuz, in
fac’! <DW65>s didn’ hed nothin’ ’t all to do—jes’ hed to ’ten’ to de
feedin’ an’ cleanin’ de hosses, an’ doin’ what de marster tell ’em to
do; an’ when dey wuz sick, dey had things sont ’em out de house, an’ de
same doctor come to see ’em whar ’ten’ to de white folks when dey wuz
po’ly. Dyar warn’ no trouble nor nothin’.

“Well, things tuk a change arfter dat. Marse Chan he went to de bo’din’
school, whar he use’ to write to me constant. Ole missis use’ to read
me de letters, an’ den I’d git Miss Anne to read ’em ag’in to me when
I’d see her. He use’ to write to her too, an’ she use’ to write to him
too. Den Miss Anne she wuz sont off to school too. An’ in de summer
time dey’d bofe come home, an’ yo’ hardly knowed whether Marse Chan
lived at home or over at Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s. He wuz over dyah constant.
’Twuz always ridin’ or fishin’ down dyah in de river; or sometimes
he’ go over dyah, an’ ’im an’ she’d go out an’ set in de yard onder
de trees; she settin’ up mekin’ out she wuz knittin’ some sort o’
bright-cullored some’n’, wid de grarss growin’ all up ’g’inst her, an’
her hat th’owed back on her neck, an’ he readin’ to her out books; an’
sometimes dey’d bofe read out de same book, fust one an’ den todder. I
use’ to see em! Dat wuz when dey wuz growin’ up like.

“Den ole marster he run for Congress, an’ ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin he wuz
put up to run ’g’inst ole marster by de Dimicrats; but ole marster he
beat ’im. Yo’ know he wuz gwine do dat! Co’se he wuz! Dat made ole
Cun’l Chahmb’lin mighty mad, and dey stopt visitin’ each urr reg’lar,
like dey had been doin’ all ’long. Den Cun’l Chahmb’lin he sort o’ got
in debt, an’ sell some o’ he <DW65>s, an’ dat’s de way de fuss begun.
Dat’s whar de lawsuit cum from. Ole marster he didn’ like nobody to
sell <DW65>s, an’ knowin’ dat Cun’l Chahmb’lin wuz sellin’ o’ his,
he writ an’ offered to buy his M’ria an’ all her chil’en, ’cause
she hed married our Zeek’yel. An’ don’ yo’ think, Cun’l Chahmb’lin
axed ole marster mo’ ‘n th’ee <DW65>s wuz wuth fur M’ria! Befo’ old
marster bought her, dough, de sheriff cum an’ levelled on M’ria an’
a whole parecel o’ urr <DW65>s. Ole marster he went to de sale, an’
bid for ’em; but Cun’l Chahmb’lin he got some one to bid ’g’inst ole
marster. Dey wuz knocked out to ole marster dough, an’ den dey hed a
big lawsuit, an’ ole marster wuz agwine to co’t, off an’ on, fur some
years, till at lars’ de co’t decided dat M’ria belonged to ole marster.
Ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin den wuz so mad he sued ole marster for a little
strip o’ lan’ down dyah on de line fence, whar he said belonged to ’im.
Ev’ybody knowed hit belonged to ole marster. Ef yo’ go down dyah now,
I kin show it to yo’, inside de line fence, whar it hed done bin ever
sence long befo’ Cun’l Chahmb’lin wuz born. But Cun’l Chahmb’lin wuz a
mons’us perseverin’ man, an’ ole marster he wouldn’ let nobody ran over
’im. No, dat he wouldn’! So dey wuz agwine down to co’t about dat, fur
I don’ know how long, till ole marster beat ’im.

“All dis time, yo’ know, Marse Chan wuz a-goin’ back’ads an’ for’ads
to college, an’ wuz growed up a ve’y fine young man. He wuz a ve’y
likely gent’man! Miss Anne she hed done mos’ growed up too—wuz puttin’
her hyar up like old missis use’ to put hers up, an’ ’twuz jes’ ez
bright ez de sorrel’s mane when de sun cotch on it, an’ her eyes wuz
gre’t big dark eyes, like her pa’s, on’y bigger an’ not so fierce, an’
’twarn’ none o’ de young ladies ez purty ez she wuz. She an’ Marse Chan
still set a heap o’ sto’ by one ‘nurr, but I don’ think dey wuz easy
wid each urr ez when he used to tote her home from school on his back.
Marse Chan he use’ to love de ve’y groun’ she walked on, dough, in my
’pinion. Heh! His face ’twould light up whenever she come into chu’ch,
or anywhere, jes’ like de sun hed come th’oo a chink on it suddenly.

“Den’ ole marster lost he eyes. D’ yo’ ever heah ’bout dat? Heish!
Didn’ yo’? Well, one night de big barn cotch fire. De stables, yo’
know, wuz under de big barn, an’ all de hosses wuz in dyah. Hit ’peared
to me like ’twarn’ no time befo’ all de folks an’ de neighbors dey
come, an’ dey wuz a-totin’ water, an’ a-tryin’ to save de po’ critters,
and dey got a heap on ’em out; but de ker’ige-hosses dey wouldn’ come
out, an’ dey wuz a-runnin’ back’ads an’ for’ads inside de stalls,
a-nikerin’ an’ a-screamin’, like dey knowed dey time hed come. Yo’
could heah ’em so pitiful, an’ pres’n’y old marster said to Ham Fisher
(he wuz de ker’ige-driver), ’Go in dyah an’ try to save ’em; don’ let
’em bu’n to death.’ An’ Ham he went right in. An’ jest arfter he got
in, de shed whar it hed fus’ cotch fell in, an’ de sparks shot ’way up
in de air; an’ Ham didn’ come back, an’ de fire begun to lick out under
de eaves over whar de ker’ige-hosses’ stalls wuz, an’ all of a sudden
ole marster tu’ned an’ kissed ole missis, who wuz standin’ nigh him,
wid her face jes’ ez white ez a sperit’s, an’, befo’ anybody knowed
what he wuz gwine do, jumped right in de do’, an’ de smoke come po’in’
out behine ’im. Well, seh, I nuver ’spects to heah tell Judgment sich a
soun’ ez de folks set up! Ole missis she jes’ drapt down on her knees
in de mud an’ prayed out loud. Hit ’peared like her pra’r wuz heard;
for in a minit, right out de same do’, kyarin’ Ham Fisher in his arms,
come ole marster, wid his clo’s all blazin’. Dey flung water on ’im,
an’ put ’im out; an’, ef you b’lieve me, yo’ wouldn’t a-knowed ’twuz
ole marster. Yo’ see, he had find Ham Fisher done fall down in de smoke
right by the ker’ige-hoss’ stalls, whar he sont him, an’ he hed to tote
’im back in his arms th’oo de fire what hed done cotch de front part o’
de stable, and to keep de flame from gittin’ down Ham Fisher’s th’oat
he hed tuk off his own hat and mashed it all over Ham Fisher’s face,
an’ he hed kep’ Ham Fisher from bein’ so much bu’nt; but _he_ wuz bu’nt
dreadful! His beard an’ hyar wuz all nyawed off, an’ his face an’ han’s
an’ neck wuz scorified terrible. Well, he jes’ laid Ham Fisher down,
an’ then he kind o’ staggered for’ad, an’ ole missis ketch’ ’im in her
arms. Ham Fisher, he warn’ bu’nt so bad, an’ he got out in a month to
two; an’ arf ter a long time, ole marster he got well, too; but he wuz
always stone blind arfter that. He nuver could see none from dat night.

“Marse Chan he comed home from college toreckly, an’ he sut’n’y did
nuss ole marster faithful—jes’ like a ’ooman. Den he took charge of
de plantation arfter dat; an’ I use’ to wait on ’im jes’ like when we
wuz boys togedder; an’ sometimes we’d slip off an’ have a fox-hunt, an’
he’d be jes’ like he wuz in ole times, befo’ ole marster got bline, an’
Miss Anne Chahmb’lin stopt comin’ over to our house, an’ settin’ onder
de trees, readin’ out de same book.

“He sut’n’y wuz good to me. Nothin’ nuver made no diffunce ’bout dat.
He nuver hit me a lick in his life—an’ nuver let nobody else do it,
nurr.

“I ’members one day, when he wuz a leetle bit o’ boy, ole marster hed
done tole we all chil’en not to slide on de straw-stacks; an’ one day
me an’ Marse Chan thought ole marster hed done gone ’way from home. We
watched him git on he hoss an’ ride up de road out o’ sight, an’ we wuz
out in de field a-slidin’ an’ a-slidin’, when up comes ole marster. We
started to run; but he hed done see us, an’ he called us to come back;
an’ sich a whuppin’ ez he did gi’ us!

“Fust he took Marse Chan, an’ den he teched me up. He nuver hu’t me,
but in co’se I wuz a-hollerin’ ez hard ez I could stave it, ’cause I
knowed dat wuz gwine mek him stop. Marse Chan he hed’n open he mouf
long ez ole marster wuz tunin’ ’im; but soon ez he commence warmin’ me
an’ I begin to holler, Marse Chan he bu’st out cryin’, an’ stept right
in befo’ ole marster an’ ketchin’ de whup, sed:

“‘Stop, seh! Yo’ sha’n’t whup ’im; he b’longs to me, an’ ef you hit ’im
another lick I’ll set ’im free!’

“I wish yo’ hed see old marster. Marse Chan he warn’ mo’n eight years
ole, an’ dyah dey wuz—old marster stan’in’ wid he whup raised up, an’
Marse Chan red an’ cryin’, hol’in’ on to it, an’ sayin’ I b’longst to
’im.

“Ole marster, he raise’ de whup, an’ den he drapt it, an’ broke out in
a smile over he face, an’ he chuck’ Marse Chan onder de chin, an’ tu’n
right ’roun’ an’ went away, laughin’ to hisse’f, an’ I heah ’im tellin’
ole missis dat evenin’, an’ laughin’ ’bout it.

“‘Twan’ so mighty long arfter dat when dey fust got to talkin’ ’bout de
war. Dey wuz a-dictatin’ back’ads an’ for’ads ’bout it fur two or th’ee
years ’fo’ it come sho’ nuff, you know. Ole marster, he was a Whig,
an’ of co’se Marse Chan he tuk after he pa. Cun’l Chahmb’lin, he wuz
a Dimicrat. He wuz in favor of de war, an’ ole marster and Marse Chan
dey wuz agin’ it. Dey wuz a-talkin’ ’bout it all de time, an’ purty
soon Cun’l Chahmb’lin he went about ev’ywhar speakin’ an’ noratin’
’bout Firginia ought to secede; an’ Marse Chan he’wuz picked up to
talk agin’ ’im. Dat wuz de way dey come to fight de dull. I sut’n’y
wuz skeered fur Marse Chan dat mawnin’, an’ he was jes’ ez cool! Yo’
see, it happen so: Marse Chan he wuz a-speakin’ down at de Deep Creek
Tavern, an’ he kind o’ got de bes’ of ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin. All de
white folks laughed an’ hoorawed, an’ ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin—my Lawd! I
fought he’d ’a’’ bu’st, he was so mad. Well, when it come to his time
to speak, he jes’ light into Marse Chan. He call ’im a traitor, an’ a
ab’litionis’, an’ I don’ know what all. Marse Chan, he jes’ kep’ cool
till de ole Cun’l light into he pa. Ez soon ez he name ole marster, I
seen Marse Chan sort o’ lif up he head. D’ yo’ ever sec a hoss rar he
head up right sudden at night when he see somethiu’ comin’ to’ds ’im
from de side an’ he don’ know what ’tis? Ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin he went
right on. He said ole marster hed taught Marse Chan; dat ole marster
wuz a wuss ab’litionis’ dan he son. I looked at Marse Chan, an’ sez to
myse’f: ’Fo’ Gord! old Cun’l Chahmb’lin better min’, an’ I hedn’ got de
wuds out, when ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin ’cuse’ old marster o’ cheatin’ ’im
out o’ he <DW65>s, an’ stealing piece o’ he lan’—dat’s de lan’ I tole
you ’bout. Well, seh, nex’ thing I knowed, I heahed Marse Chan—hit all
happen right ’long togerr, like lightnin’ and thunder when they hit
right at you—I heah ’im say:

“‘Cun’l Chahmb’lin, what you say is false, an’ yo’ know it to be so.
You have wilfully slandered one of de pures’ an’ nobles’ men Gord ever
made, an’ nothin’ but yo’ gray hyars protects you.’

“Well, ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin, he ra’d an’ he pitch’d. He said he wan’
too ole, an’ he’d show ’im so.

“‘Ve’y well,’ says Marse Chan.

“De meetin’ broke up den. I wuz hol’in’ de hosses out dyar in de road
by dee een’ o’ de poach, an’ I see Marse Chan talkin’ an’ talkin’ to
Mr. Gordon an’ anudder gent’man, and den he come out an’ got on de
sorrel an’ galloped off. Soon ez he got out o’ sight he pulled up,
an’ we walked along tell we come to de road whar leads off to ’ds Mr.
Barbour ’s. He wuz de big lawyer o’ de country. Dar he tu’ned off. All
dis time he hedn’ sed a wud, ’cep’ to kind o’ mumble to hisse’f now and
den. When we got to Mr. Harbour’s, he got down an’ went in. Dat wuz
in de late winter; de folks wuz jes’ beginnin’ to plough fur corn. He
stayed dyar ’bout two hours, an’ when he come out Mr. Barbour come out
to de gate wid ’im an’ shake han’s arfter he got up in de saddle. Den
we all rode off. ’Twuz late den—good dark; an’ we rid ez hard ez we
could, tell we come to de ole school-house at ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s
gate. When we got dar, Marse Chan got down an’ walked right slow ’roun’
de house. After lookin’ ’roun’ a little while an’ tryin’ de do’ to see
ef if wuz shet, he walked down de road tell he got to de creek. He
stop’ dyar a little while an’ picked up two or three little rocks an’
frowed ’em in, an’ pres’n’y he got up an’ we come on home. Ez he got
down, he tu’ned to me an’, rubbin’ de sorrel’s nose, said: ’Have ’em
well fed, Sam; I’ll want ’em early in de mawnin’.’

“Dat night at supper he laugh an’ talk, an’ he set at de table a long
time. Arfter ole marster went to bed, he went in de charmber an’ set
on de bed by ’im talkin’ to ’im an’ tellin’ ’im ’bout de meetin’ an’
ev’ything; but he nuver mention ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s name. When he
got up to come out to de office in de yard, whar he slept, he stooped
down an’ kissed ’im jes’ like he wuz a baby layin’ dyar in de bed, an’
he’d hardly let ole missis go at all. I knowed some’n wuz up, an’ nex’
mawnin’ I called ’im early befo’ light, like he tole me, an’ he dressed
an’ come out pres’n’y jes’ like he wuz goin’ to church. I had de hosses
ready, an’ we went out de back way to ’ds de river. Ez we rode along,
he said:

“‘Sam, you an’ I wuz boys togedder, wa’n’t we?’

“‘Yes,’ sez I, ’Marse Chan, dat we wuz.’

“‘You have been ve’y faithful to me,’ sez he, ’a’n’ I have seen to it
that you are well provided fur. You want to marry Judy, I know, an’
you’ll be able to buy her ef you want to.’

“Den he tole me he wuz goin’ to fight a duil, an’ in case he should git
shot, he had set me free an’ giv’ me nuff to tek keer o’ me an’ my wife
ez long ez we lived. He said he’d like me to stay an’ tek keer o’ ole
marster an’ ole missis ez long ez dey lived, an’ he said it wouldn’ be
very long, he reckoned. Dat wuz de on’y time he voice broke—when he
said dat; an’ I couldn’ speak a wud, my th’oat choked me so.

“When we come to de river, we tu’ned right up de bank, an’ arfter
ridin’ ’bout a mile or sich a matter, we stopped whar dey wuz a little
clearin’ wid elder bushes on one side an’ two big gum-trees on de urr,
an’ de sky wuz all red, an’ de water down to’ds whar the sun wuz comin’
wuz jes’ like de sky.

“Pres’n’y Mr. Gordon he come, wid a ’hogany box ’bout so big ’fore
’im, an’ he got down, an’ Marse Chan tole me to tek all de hosses an’
go ’roun’ behine de bushes whar I tell you ’bout—off to one side; an’
’fore I got ’roun’ dar, ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin an’ Mr. Hennin an’ Dr.
Call come ridin’ from t’urr way, to’ds ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s. When dey
hed tied dey hosses, de urr gent’mens went up to whar Mr. Gordon wuz,
an’ arfter some chattin’ Mr. Hennin step’ off ’bout fur ez ’cross dis
road, or mebbe it mout be a little furder; an’ den I seed ’em th’oo de
bushes loadin’ de pistils, an’ talk a little while; an’ den Marse Chan
an’ ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin walked up wid de pistils in dey han’s, an’
Marse Chan he stood wid his face right to’ds de sun. I seen it shine
on him jes’ ez it come up over de low groun’s, an’ he look like he did
sometimes when he come out of church. I wuz so skeered I couldn’ say
nothin’. Ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin could shoot fust rate, an’ Marse Chan he
never missed.

“Den I heared Mr. Gordon say, ’Gent’mens, is yo’ ready?’ and bofe of
’em sez, ’Ready,’ jes’ so.

“An’ he sez, ’Fire, one, two’—an’ ez he said ’one,’ old Cun’l
Chahmb’lin raised he pistil an’ shot right at Marse Chan. De ball went
th’oo his hat. I seen he hat sort o’ settle on he head ez de bullit
hit it, an’ _he_ jes’ tilted his pistil up in de a’r an’ shot—_bang_;
an’ ez de pistil went _bang_, he sez to Cun’l Chahmb’lin, ’I mek you a
present to yo’ fam’ly, seh!’

“Well, dey had some talkin’ arfter dat. I didn’t git rightly what it
wuz; but it ’peared like Cun’l Chahmb’lin he warn’t satisfied, an’
wanted to have anurr shot. De seconds dey wuz talkin’, an’ pres’n’y
dey put de pistils up, an’ Marse Chan an’ Mr. Gordon shook han’s wid
Mr. Hennin an’ Dr. Call, an’ come an’ got on dey bosses. An’ Cun’l
Chahmb’lin he got on his hoss an’ rode away wid de urr gent’mens,
lookin’ like he did de day befo’ when all de people laughed at ’im.

“I b’lieve ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin wan’ to shoot Marse Chan, anyway!

“We come on home to breakfast, I totin’ de box wid de pistils befo’ me
on de roan. Would you b’lieve me, seh, Marse Chan he nuver said a wud
’bout it to ole marster or nobody. Ole missis didn’ fin’ out ’bout it
for mo’n a month, an’ den, Lawd! how she did cry and kiss Marse Chan;
an’ ole marster, aldo’ he never say much, he wuz jes’ ez please’ ez ole
missis. He call me in de room an’ made me tole ’im all ’bout it, an’
when I got th’oo he gi’ me five dollars an’ a pyar of breeches.

“But ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin he nuver did furgive Marse Chan, an’ Miss
Anne she got mad too. Wimmens is mons’us onreasonable nohow. Dey’s jes’
like a catfish: you can n’ tek hole on ’em like udder folks, an’ when
you gits ’im yo’ can n’ always hole ’em.

“What meks me think so? Heaps o’ things—dis: Marse Chan he done gi’
Miss Anne her pa jes’ ez good ez I gi’ Marse Chan’s dawg sweet ’taters,
an’ she git mad wid ’im ez if he hed kill ’im ’stid o’ sen’in’ ’im back
to her dat mawnin’ whole an’ soun’. B’lieve me! she wouldn’ even speak
to him arfter dat!

“Don’ I ’member dat mawnin’!

“We wuz gwine fox-huntin’, ’bout six weeks or sich a matter arfter
de duil, an’ we met Miss Anne ridin’ ’long wid anurr lady an’ two
gent’mens whar wuz stayin’ at her house. Dyar wuz always some one or
nurr dyar co’ting her. Well, dat mawnin’ we meet ’em right in de road.
Twuz de fust time Marse Chan had see her sence de duil, an’ he raises
he hat ez he pahss, an’ she looks right at ’im wid her head up in de
yair like she nuver see ’im befo’ in her born days; an’ when she comes
by me, she sez, ’Good-mawnin’, Sam!’ Gord! I nuver see nuthin’ like
de look dat come on Marse Chan’s face when she pahss ’im like dat. He
gi’ de sorrel a pull dat fotch ’im back settin’ down in de san’ on
he handles. He ve’y lips wuz white. I tried to keep up wid ’im, but
’twarn’ no use. He sont me back home pres’n’y, an’ he rid on. I sez to
myself, ’Cun’l Chahmb’lin, don’ yo’ meet Marse Chan dis mawnin’. He
ain’ bin lookin’ ’roun’ de ole school-house, whar he an’ Miss Anne
use’ to go to school to ole Mr. Hall together, fur nuffin’. He won’
stan’ no prodjickin’ to-day.’

“He nuver come home dat night tell ’way late, an’ ef he’d been
fox-huntin’ it mus’ ha’ been de ole red whar lives down in de greenscum
mashes he’d been chasin’. De way de sorrel wuz gormed up wid sweat an’
mire sut’n’y did hu’t me. He walked up to de stable wid he head down
all de way, an’ I’se seen ’im go eighty miles of a winter day, an’
prance into de stable at night ez fresh ez if he hed jes’ cantered over
to ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s to supper. I nuver seen a hoss beat so sence
I knowed de fetlock from de fo’lock, an’ bad ez he wuz he wan’ ez bad
ez Marse Chan.

“Whew! he didn’ git over dat thing, seh—he nuver did git over it.

“De war come on jes’ den, an’ Marse Chan wuz elected cap’n; but he
wouldn’ tek it. He said Firginia hadn’ seceded, an’ he wuz gwine stan’
by her. Den dey ’lected Mr. Gordon cap’n.

“I sut’n’y did wan’ Marse Chan to tek de place, cuz I knowed he wuz
gwine tek me wid ’im. He wan’ gwine widout Sam. An’ beside, he look so
po’ an’ thin, I thought he wuz gwine die.

“Of co’se, ole missis she heared ’bout it, an’ she met Miss Anne in de
road, an’ cut her jes’ like Miss Anne cut Marse Chan.

“Ole missis, she wuz proud ez anybody! So we wuz mo’ strangers dan ef
we hadn’ live’ in a hundred miles of each urr. An’ Marse Chan he wuz
gittin’ thinner an’ thinner, an’ Firginia she come out, an’ den Marse
Chan he went to Richmond an’ listed, an’ come back an’ sey he wuz a
private, an’ he didn’ know whe’r he could tek me or not. He writ to Mr.
Gordon, hows’ever, an’ ’twuz ’cided dat when he went I wuz to go ’long
an’ wait on him an’ de cap’n too. I didn’ min’ dat, yo’ know, long ez I
could go wid Marse Chan, an’ I like’ Mr. Gordon, anyways.

“Well, one night Marse Chan come back from de offis wid a telegram dat
say, ’Come at once,’ so he wuz to start nex’ mawnin’. He uniform wuz
all ready, gray wid yaller trimmin’s, an’ mine wuz ready too, an’ he
had ole marster’s sword, whar de State gi’ ’im in de Mexikin war; an’
he trunks wuz all packed wid ev’rything in ’em, an’ my chist was packed
too, an’ Jim Rasher he druv ’em over to de depo’ in de waggin, an’ we
wuz to start nex’ mawuin’ ’bout light. Dis wuz ’bout de las’ o’ spring,
you know. Dat night ole missis made Marse Chan dress up in he uniform,
an’ he sut’n’y did look splendid, wid he long mustache an’ he wavin’
hyar an’ he tall figger.

“Arfter supper he come down an’ sez: ’Sam, I wan’ you to tek dis note
an’ kyar it over to Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s, an’ gi’ it to Miss Anne wid yo’
own han’s, an’ bring me wud what she sez. Don’ let any one know ’bout
it, or know why you’ve gone.’ ’Yes, seh,’ sez I.

“Yo’ see, I knowed Miss Anne’s maid over at ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s—dat
wuz Judy whar is my wife now—an’ I knowed I could wuk it. So I tuk de
roan an’ rid over, an’ tied ’im down de hill in de cedars, an’ I wen’
’roun’ to de back yard. ’Twuz a right blowy sort o’ night; de moon wuz
jes’ risin’, but de clouds wuz so big it didn’ shine ’cep’ th’oo a
crack now an’ den. I soon foun’ my gal, an’ arfter tellin’ her two or
three lies ’bout herse’f, I got her to go in an’ ax Miss Anne to come
to de do’. When she come, I gi’ her de note, an’ arfter a little while
she bro’t me anurr, an’ I tole her good-bye, an’ she gi’ me a dollar,
an’ I come home an’ gi’ de letter to Marse Chan. He read it, an’ tole
me to have de hosses ready at twenty minits to twelve at de corner of
de garden. An’ jes’ befo’ dat he come out ez ef he wuz gwine to bed,
but instid he come, an’ we all struck out to’ds Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s.
When we got mos’ to de gate, de hosses got sort o’ skeered, an’ I see
dey wuz some’n or somebody standin’ jes’ inside; an’ Marse Chan he
jumpt off de sorrel an’ flung me de bridle an’ he walked up.

“She spoke fust (’twuz Miss Anne had done come out dyar to meet Marse
Chan), an’ she sez, jes’ ez cold ez a chill, ’Well, seh, I granted your
favor. I wished to relieve myse’f of de obligations you placed me under
a few months ago, when you made me a present of my father, whom you
fust insulted an’ then prevented from gittin’ satisfaction.’

“Marse Chan he didn’ speak fur a minit, an’ den he said: ’Who is with
you?’ Dat wuz ev’y wud.

“‘No one,’ sez she; ’I came alone.’

“‘My God!’ sez he, ’you didn’ come all through those woods by yourse’f
at this time o’ night?’

“‘Yes, I’m not afraid,’ sez she. (An’ heah dis <DW65>! I don’ b’lieve
she wuz.)

“De moon come out, an’ I cotch sight o’ her stan’in’ dyar in her white
dress, wid de cloak she had wrapped herse’f up in drapped off on de
groun’, an’ she didn’ look like she wuz ’feared o’ nuthin’. She wuz
mons’us purty ez she stood dyar wid de green bushes behine her, an’ she
hed jes’ a few flowers in her breas’—right hyah—and some leaves in
her sorrel hyar; an’ de moon come out an’ shined down on her hyar an’
her frock an’ ’peared like de light wuz jes’ stan’in’ off it ez she
stood dyar lookin’ at Marse Chan wid her head tho’d back, jes’ like dat
mawnin’ when she pahss Marse Chan in de road widout speakin’ to ’im,
an’ sez to me, ’Good-mawnin’, Sam.’

“Marse Chan, he den tole her he hed come to say good-bye to her, ez
he wuz gwine ’way to de war nex’ mawnin’. I wuz watchin’ on her, an’
I tho’t, when Marse Chan tole her dat, she sort o’ started an’ looked
up at ’im like she wuz mighty sorry, an’ ’peared like she didn’ stan’
quite so straight arfter dat. Den Marse Chan he went on talkin’ right
fars’ to her; an’ he tole her how he had loved her ever sence she wuz
a little bit o’ baby mos’, an’ how he nuver ’membered de time when he
hedn’t ’spected to marry her. He tole her it wuz his love for her dat
hed made ’im stan’ fust at school an’ collige, an’ hed kep’ ’im good
an’ pure; an’ now he wuz gwine ’way, wouldn’t she let it be like ’twuz
in ole times, an’ ef he come back from de war wouldn’ she try to think
on him ez she use’ to do when she wuz a little guirl?

“Marse Chan he had done been talkin’ so serious, he hed done tuk Miss
Anne’s han’, an’ wuz lookin’ down in her face like he wuz list’nin’ wid
his eyes.

“Arfter a minit Miss Anne she said somethin’, an’ Marse Chan he cotch
her urr han’ an’ sez:

“‘But if you love me, Anne?’

“When he said dat, she tu’ned her head ’way from ’im, an’ wait’ a
minit, an’ den she said—right clear:

“‘But I don’ love yo’.’ (Jes’ dem th’ee wuds!) De wuds fall right
slow-like dirt falls out a spade on a coffin when yo’s buryin’ anybody,
an’ seys, ’Uth to uth.’ Marse Chan he jes’ let her hand drap, an’ he
stiddy hisse’f ’g’inst de gate-pos’, an’ he didn’ speak torekly. When
he did speak, all he sez wuz:

“‘I mus’ see you home safe.’

“I ’clar, marster, I didn’ know ’twuz Marse Chan’s voice tell I look at
’im right good. Well, she wouldn’ let ’im go wid her. She jes’ wrap’
her cloak ’roun’ her shoulders, an’ wen’ ’long back by herse’f, widout
doin’ more’n jes’ look up once at Marse Chan leanin’ dyah ’g’inst
de gate-pos’ in he sodger clo’s, wid he eyes on de groun’. She said
’Good-bye’ sort o’ sorf, an’ Marse Chan, widout lookin’ up, shake han’s
wid her, an’ she wuz done gone down de road. Soon ez she got ’mos’
’roun’ de curve, Marse Chan he followed her, keepin’ under de trees so
ez not to be seen, an’ I led de hosses on down de road behine ’im. He
kep’ ’long behine her tell she wuz safe in de house, an’ den he come
an’ got on he hoss, an’ we all come home.

“Nex’ mawnin’ we all come off to j’ine de army. An’ dey wuz a-drillin’
an’ a-drillin’ all ’bout for a while, an’ dey went ’long wid all de
res’ o’ de army, an’ I went wid Marse Chan an’ clean he boots, an’ look
arfter de tent, an’ tek keer o’ him an’ de hosses. An’ Marse Chan,
he wan’ a bit like he use’ to be. He wuz so solumn an’ moanful all
de time, at leas’ ’cep’ when dyah wuz gwine to be a fight. Den he’d
peartin’ up, an’ he alwuz rode at de head o’ de company, ’cause he wuz
tall; an’ hit wan’ on’y in battles whar all his company wuz dat _he_
went, but he use’ to volunteer whenever de cun’l wanted anybody to fine
out anythin’, an’ ’twuz so dangersome he didn’ like to mek one man go
no sooner’n anurr, yo’ know, an’ ax’d who’d volunteer. _He_ ’peared to
like to go prowlin’ aroun’ ’<DW41> dem Yankees, an’ he use’ to tek me wid
’im whenever he could. Yes, seh, he sut’n’y wuz a good sodger! He didn’
mine bullets no more’n he did so many draps o’ rain. But I use’ to be
pow’ful skeered sometimes. It jes’ use’ to ’pear like fun to ’im. In
camp he use’ to be so sorrerful he’d hardly open he mouf. You’d ’a’’
tho’t he wuz seekin’, he used to look so moanful; but jes le’ ’im git
into danger, an’ he use’ to be like ole times—jolly an’ laughin’ like
when he wuz a boy.

“When Cap’n Gordon got he leg shot off, dey mek Marse Chan cap’n on de
spot, ’cause one o’ de lieutenants got kilt de same day, an’ turr one
(named Mr. Ronny) wan’ no ’count, an’ de company said Marse Chan wuz de
man.

“An’ Marse Chan he wuz jes’ de same. He didn’ never mention Miss
Anne’s name, but I knowed he wuz thinkin’ on her constant. One night
he wuz settin’ by de fire in camp, an’ Mr. Ronny—he wuz de secon’
lieutenant—got to talkin’ ’bout ladies, an’ he say all sorts o’ things
’bout ’em, an’ I see Marse Chan kinder lookin’ mad; an’ de lieutenant
mention Miss Anne’s name. He had been courtin’ Miss Anne ’bout de time
Marse Chan fit de duil wid her pa, an’ Miss Anne hed kicked ’im, dough
he wuz mighty rich, ’cause he warn’ nuthin’ but a half-strainer, an’
’cause she like Marse Chan, I believe, dough she didn’ speak to ’im;
an’ Mr. Ronny he got drunk, an’ ’cause Cun’l Chahmb’lin tole ’im not to
come dyah no more, he got mighty mad. An’ dat evenin’ I’se tellin’ yo’
’bout, he wuz talkin’, an’ he mention’ Miss Anne’s name. I see Marse
Chan tu’n he eye ’roun’ on ’im an’ keep it on he face, and pres’n’y Mr.
Ronny said he wuz gwine hev some fun dyah yit. He didn’ mention her
name dat time; but he said dey wuz all on ’em a parecel of stuck-up
’risticrats, an’ her pa wan’ no gent’man anyway, an’——I don’ know
what he wuz gwine say (he nuver said it), fur ez he got dat far Marse
Chan riz up an’ hit ’im a crack, an’ he fall like he hed been hit wid
a fence-rail. He challenged Marse Chan to fight a duil, an’ Marse Chan
he excepted de challenge, an’ dey wuz gwine fight; but some on ’em
tole ’im Marse Chan wan’ gwine mek a present o’ him to his fam’ly, an’
he got somebody to bre’k up de duil; ’twan’ nuthin’ dough, but he wuz
’fred to fight Marse Chan. An’ purty soon he lef’ de comp’ny.

“Well, I got one o’ de gent’mens to write Judy a letter for me, an’
I tole her all ’bout de fight, an’ how Marse Chan knock Mr. Ronny
over fur speakin’ discontemptuous o’ Cun’l Chahmb’lin, an’ I tole her
how Marse Chan wuz a-dyin’ fur love o’ Miss Anne. An’ Judy she gits
Miss Anne to read de letter fur her. Den Miss Anne she tells her pa,
an’—you mind, Judy tells me all dis arfterwards, an’ she say when
Cun’l Chahmb’lin hear ’bout it, he wuz settin’ on de poach, an’ he set
still a good while, an’ den he sey to hisse’f:

“‘Well, he carn’ he’p bein’ a Whig.’

“An’ den he gits up an’ walks up to Miss Anne an’ looks at her right
hard; an’ Miss Anne she hed done tu’n away her haid an’ wuz makin’
out she wuz fixin’ a rose-bush ’g’inst de poach; an’ when her pa kep’
lookin’ at her, her face got jes’ de color o’ de roses on de bush, and
pres’n’y her pa sez:

“‘Anne!’

“An’ she tu’ned roun’, an’ he sez:

“‘Do yo’ want ’im?’

“An’ she sez, ’Yes,’ an’ put her head on he shoulder an’ begin to cry;
an’ he sez:

“‘Well, I won’ stan’ between yo’ no longer. Write to ’im an’ say so.’

“We didn’ know nuthin’ ’bout dis den. We wuz a-fightin’ an’ a-fightin’
all dat time; an’ come one day a letter to Marse Chan, an’ I see ’im
start to read it in his tent, an’ he face hit look so cu’ious, an’ he
han’s trembled so I couldn’ mek out what wuz de matter wid ’im. An’ he
fol’ de letter up an’ wen’ out an’ wen’ way down ’hine de camp, an’
stayed dyah ’bout nigh an hour. Well, seh, I wuz on de lookout for
’im when he come back, an’, fo’ Gord, ef he face didn’ shine like a
angel’s! I say to myse’f, ’Um’m! ef de glory o’ Gord ain’ done shine on
’im!’ An’ what yo’ ’spose ’twuz?

“He tuk me wid ’im dat evenin’, an’ he tell me he hed done git a
letter from Miss Anne, an’ Marse Chan he eyes look like gre’t big
stars, an’ he face wuz jes’ like ’twuz dat mawnin’ when de sun riz up
over de low groun’, an’ I see ’im stan’in’ dyah wid de pistil in he
han’, lookin’ at it, an’ not knowin’ but what it mout be de lars’ time,
an’ he done mek up he mine not to shoot ole Cun’l Chahmb’lin fur Miss
Anne’s sake, what writ ’im de letter.

“He fol’ de letter wha’ was in his han’ up, an’ put it in he inside
pocket—right dyar on de lef’ side; an’ den he tole me he tho’t mebbe
we wuz gwine hev some warm wuk in de nex’ two or th’ee days, an’ arfter
dat ef Gord speared ’im he’d git a leave o’ absence fur a few days, an’
we’d go home.

“Well, dat night de orders come, an’ we all hed to git over to’ds
Romney; an’ we rid all night till ’bout light; an’ we halted right on
a little creek, an’ we stayed dyah till mos’ breakfas’ time, an’ I see
Marse Chan set down on de groun’ ’hine a bush an’ read dat letter over
an’ over. I watch ’im, an’ de battle wuz a-goin’ on, but we had orders
to stay ’hine de hill, an’ ev’y now an’ den de bullets would cut de
limbs o’ de trees right over us, an’ one o’ dem big shells what goes
’_Awhar—awhar—awhar!_’ would fall right ’<DW41> us; but Marse Chan
he didn’ mine it no mo’n nuthin’! Den it ’peared to git closer an’
thicker, and Marse Chan he calls me, an’ I crep’ up, an’ he sez:

“‘Sam, we’se goin’ to win in dis battle, an’ den we’ll go home an’ git
married; an’ I’se goin’ home wid a star on my collar.’ An’ den he sez,
’Ef I’m wounded, kyar me home, yo’ hear?’ An’ I sez, ’Yes, Marse Chan.’

“Well, jes’ den dey blowed boots an’ saddles, an’ we mounted; an’ de
orders come to ride ’roun’ de <DW72>, an’ Marse Chan’s comp’ny wuz de
secon’, an’ when we got ’roun’ dyah, we wuz right in it. Hit wuz de
wust place ever dis <DW65> got in. An’ dey said, ’Charge ’em!’ an’ my
king! ef ever you see bullets fly, dey did dat day. Hit wuz jes’ like
hail; an’ we wen’ down de <DW72> (I ’long wid de res’) an’ up de hill
right to’ds de cannons, an’ de fire wuz so strong dyar (dey hed a whole
rigiment o’ infintrys layin’ down dyar onder de cannons) our lines
sort o’ broke an’ stop; de cun’l was kilt, an’ I b’lieve dey wuz jes’
’bout to bre’k all to pieces, when Marse Chan rid up an’ cotch hol’
de fleg an’ hollers, ’Foller me!’ an’ rid strainin’ up de hill ’<DW41>
de cannons. I seen ’im when he went, de sorrel four good length ahead
o’ ev’y urr hoss, jes’ like he use’ to be in a fox-hunt, an’ de whole
rigiment right arfter ’im. Yo’ ain’ nuver hear thunder! Fust thing I
knowed, de roan roll’ head over heels an’ flung me up ’g’inst de bank,
like yo’ chuck a nubbin over ’g’inst de foot o’ de corn pile. An’ dat’s
what kep’ me from bein’ kilt, I ’spects. Judy she say she think ’twuz
Providence, but I think ’twuz de bank! O’ co’se, Providence put de bank
dyah, but how come Providence nuver saved Marse Chan? When I look’
’roun’, de roan wuz layin’ dyah by me, stone dead, wid a cannon-ball
gone ’mos’ th’oo him, an’ our men hed done swep’ dem on t’urr side from
de top o’ de hill. ’Twan’ mo’n a minit, de sorrel come gallupin’ back
wid his mane flyin’, an’ de rein hangin’ down on one side to his knee.
’Dyar!’ says I, ’fo’ Gord! I ’specks dey done kill Marse Chan, an’ I
promised to tek care on him.’

“I jumped up an’ run over de bank, an’ dyar, wid a whole lot o’ dead
men, an’ some not dead yit, onder one o’ de guns wid de fleg still in
he han’, an’ a bullet right th’oo he body, lay Marse Chan. I tu’n ’im
over an’ call ’im, ’Marse Chan!’ but ’twan’ no use, he wuz done gone
home, sho’ ‘nuff. I pick’ ’im up in my arms wid de fleg still in he
han’s, an’ toted ’im back jes’ like I did dat day when he wuz a baby,
an’ ole marster gin ’im to me in my arms, an’ sez he could trus’ me,
an’ tell me to tek keer on ’im long ez he lived. I kyar’d ’im ’way
off de battlefiel’ out de way o’ de balls, an’ I laid ’im down onder
a big tree till I could git somebody to ketch de sorrel for me. He
wuz cotched arfter a while, an’ I hed some money, so I got some pine
plank an’ made a coffin dat evenin’, an’ wrapt Marse Chan’s body up in
de fleg, an’ put ’im in de coffin; but I didn’ nail de top on strong,
’cause I knowed ole missis wan’ see ’im; an’ I got a’ ambulance an’
set out for home dat night. We reached dyar de nex’ evein’, arfter
travellin’ all dat night an’ all nex’ day.

“Hit ’peared like somethin’ hed tole ole missis we wuz comin’ so; for
when we got home she wuz waitin’ for us—done drest up in her best
Sunday-clo’es, an’ stan’n’ at de head o’ de big steps, an’ ole marster
settin’ in his big cheer—ez we druv up de hill to’ds de house, I
drivin’ de ambulance an’ de sorrel leadin’ ’long behine wid de stirrups
crost over de saddle.

“She come down to de gate to meet us. We took de coffin out de
ambulance an’ kyar’d it right into de big parlor wid de pictures in it,
whar dey use’ to dance in ole times when Marse Chan wuz a schoolboy,
an’ Miss Anne Chahmb’lin use’ to come over, an’ go wid ole missis into
her charmber an’ tek her things off. In dyar we laid de coffin on two
o’ de cheers, an’ ole missis nuver said a wud; she jes’ looked so ole
an’ white.

“When I had tell ’em all ’bout it, I tu’ned right ’roun’ an’ rid over
to Cun’l Chahmb’lin’s, ’cause I knowed dat wuz what Marse Chan he’d
’a’’ wanted me to do. I didn’ tell nobody whar I wuz gwine, ’cause yo’
know none on ’em hadn’ nuver speak to Miss Anne, not sence de duil, an’
dey didn’ know ’bout de letter.

“When I rid up in de yard, dyar wuz Miss Anne a-stan’in’ on de poach
watchin’ me ez I rid up. I tied my hoss to de fence, an’ walked up de
parf. She knowed by de way I walked dyar wuz somethin’ de motter, an’
she wuz mighty pale. I drapt my cap down on de een’ o’ de steps an’
went up. She nuver opened her mouf; jes’ stan’ right still an’ keep her
eyes on my face. Fust, I couldn’ speak; den I cotch my voice, an’ I
say, ’Marse Chan, he done got he furlough.’

“Her face was mighty ashy, an’ she sort o’ shook, but she didn’ fall.
She tu’ned ’roun’ an’ said, ’Git me de ker’ige!’ Dat wuz all.

“When de ker’ige come ’roun’, she hed put on her bonnet, an’ wuz ready.
Ez she got in, she sey to me, ’Hev yo’ brought him home?’ an’ we drove
’long, I ridin’ behine.

“When we got home, she got out, an’ walked up de big walk—up to de
poach by herse’f. Ole missis hed done fin’ de letter in Marse Chan’s
pocket, wid de love in it, while I wuz ’way, an’ she wuz a-waitin’ on
de poach. Dey sey dat wuz de fust time ole missis cry when she find de
letter, an’ dat she sut’n’y did cry over it, pintedly.

“Well, seh, Miss Anne she walks right up de steps, mos’ up to ole
missis stan’in’ dyar on de poach, an’ jes’ falls right down mos’ to
her, on her knees fust, an’ den flat on her face right on de flo’,
ketchin’ at ole missis’ dress wid her two han’s—so.

“Ole missis stood for ’bout a minit lookin’ down at her, an’ den she
drapt down on de flo’ by her, an’ took her in bofe her arms.

“I couldn’ see, I wuz cryin’ so myse’f, an’ ev’ybody wuz cryin’. But
dey went in arfter a while in de parlor, an’ shet de do’; an’ I heahd
’em say, Miss Anne she tuk de coffin in her arms an’ kissed it, an’
kissed Marse Chan, an’ call ’im by his name, an’ her darlin’, an’ ole
missis lef’ her cryin’ in dyar tell some on ’em went in, an’ found her
done faint on de flo’.

“Judy (she’s my wife) she tell me she heah Miss Anne when she axed ole
missis mout she wear mo’nin’ fur ‘im. I don’ know how dat is; but when
we buried ‘im nex’ day, she wuz de one whar walked arfter de coffin,
holdin’ ole marster, an’ ole missis she walked next to ’em.

“Well, we buried Marse Chan dyar in de ole grabeyard, wid de fleg
wrapped roun’ ‘im, an’ he face lookin’ like it did dat mawnin’ down in
de low groun’s, wid de new sun shinin’ on it so peaceful.

“Miss Anne she nuver went home to stay arfter dat; she stay wid ole
marster an’ ole missis ez long ez dey lived. Dat warn’ so mighty
long, ’cause ole marster he died dat fall, when dey wuz fallerin’ fur
wheat—I had jes’ married Judy den—an’ ole missis she warn’ long
behine him. We buried her by him next summer. Miss Anne she went in de
hospitals toreckly arfter ole missis died; an’ jes’ fo’ Richmond fell
she come home sick wid de fever. Yo’ nuver would ’a’’ knowed her fur
de same ole Miss Anne. She wuz light ez a piece o’ peth, an’ so white,
’cep’ her eyes an’ her sorrel hyar, an’ she kep’ on gittin’ whiter an’
weaker. Judy she sut’n’y did nuss her faithful. But she nuver got no
betterment! De fever an’ Marse Chan’s bein’ kilt hed done strain her,
an’ she died jes’ fo’ de folks wuz sot free.

“So we buried Miss Anne right by Marse Chan, in a place whar ole missis
hed tole us to leave, an’ dey’s bofe on ’em sleep side by side over in
de ole grabeyard at home.

“An’ will yo’ please tell me, marster? Dey tells me dat de Bible sey
dyar won’ be marryin’ nor givin’ in marriage in heaven, but I don’
b’lieve it signifies dat—does you?”

I gave him the comfort of my earnest belief in some other
interpretation, together with several spare “eighteen-pences,” as he
called them, for which he seemed humbly grateful. And as I rode away I
heard him calling across the fence to his wife, who was standing in the
door of a small whitewashed cabin, near which we had been standing for
some time:

“Judy, have Marse Chan’s dawg got home?”




  “POSSON JONE’”

  BY

  GEORGE W. CABLE




Bliss Perry mentions this story as one that presents “people and
events and circumstances, blended into an artistic whole that defies
analysis.” It illustrates dramatic incident, local color, and complex
character analysis.




“POSSON JONE’”[20]


To Jules St.-Ange—elegant little heathen—there yet remained at
manhood a remembrance of having been to school, and of having been
taught by a stony-headed Capuchin that the world is round—for example,
like a cheese. This round world is a cheese to be eaten through, and
Jules had nibbled quite into his cheeseworld already at twenty-two.

He realized this as he idled about one Sunday morning where the
intersection of Royal and Conti streets some seventy years ago formed
a central corner of New Orleans. Yes, yes, the trouble was he had been
wasteful and honest. He discussed the matter with that faithful friend
and confidant, Baptiste, his yellow body-servant. They concluded that,
papa’s patience and _tante’s_ pin-money having been gnawed away quite
to the rind, there were left open only these few easily enumerated
resorts: to go to work—they shuddered; to join Major Innerarity’s
filibustering expedition; or else—why not?—to try some games of
confidence. At twenty-two one must begin to be something. Nothing else
tempted; could that avail? One could but try. It is noble to try; and,
besides, they were hungry. If one could “make the friendship” of some
person from the country, for instance, with money, not expert at cards
or dice, but, as one would say, willing to learn, one might find cause
to say some “Hail Marys.”

The sun broke through a clearing sky, and Baptiste pronounced it good
for luck. There had been a hurricane in the night. The weed-grown
tile-roofs were still dripping, and from lofty brick and low adobe
walls a rising steam responded to the summer sunlight. Upstreet, and
across the Rue du Canal, one could get glimpses of the gardens in
Faubourg Ste.-Marie standing in silent wretchedness, so many tearful
Lucretias, tattered victims of the storm. Short remnants of the wind
now and then came down the narrow street in erratic puffs heavily laden
with odors of broken boughs and torn flowers, skimmed the little pools
of rain-water in the deep ruts of the unpaved street, and suddenly went
away to nothing, like a juggler’s butterflies or a young man’s money.

It was very picturesque, the Rue Royale. The rich and poor met
together. The locksmith’s swinging key creaked next door to the bank;
across the way, crouching, mendicant-like, in the shadow of a great
importing-house, was the mud laboratory of the mender of broken combs.
Light balconies overhung the rows of showy shops and stores open for
trade this Sunday morning, and pretty Latin faces of the higher class
glanced over their savagely pronged railings upon the passers below. At
some windows hung lace curtains, flannel duds at some, and at others
only the scraping and sighing one-hinged shutter groaning toward Paris
after its neglectful master.

M. St.-Ange stood looking up and down the street for nearly an hour.
But few ladies, only the inveterate mass-goers, were out. About the
entrance of the frequent _cafés_ the masculine gentility stood leaning
on canes, with which now one and now another beckoned to Jules, some
even adding pantomimic hints of the social cup.

M. St.-Ange remarked to his servant without turning his head that
somehow he felt sure he should soon return those _bons_ that the
mulatto had lent him.

“What will you do with them?”

“Me!” said Baptiste, quickly; “I will go and see the bull-fight in the
Place Congo.”

“There is to be a bull-fight? But where is M. Cayetano?”

“Ah, got all his affairs wet in the tornado. Instead of his circus,
they are to have a bull-fight—not an ordinary bull-fight with sick
horses, but a buffalo-and-tiger fight. I would not miss it——”

Two or three persons ran to the opposite corner, and commenced striking
at something with their canes. Others followed. Can M. St.-Ange and
servant, who hasten forward—can the Creoles, Cubans, Spaniards, San
Domingo refugees, and other loungers—can they hope it is a fight?
They hurry forward. Is a man in a fit? The crowd pours in from the
side-streets. Have they killed a so-long snake? Bareheaded shopmen
leave their wives, who stand upon chairs. The crowd huddles and packs.
Those on the outside make little leaps into the air, trying to be tall.

“What is the matter?”

“Have they caught a real live rat?”

“Who is hurt?” asks some one in English.

“_Personne_,” replies a shopkeeper; “a man’s hat blow’ in the gutter;
but he has it now. Jules pick’ it. See, that is the man, head and
shoulders on top the res’.”

“He in the homespun?” asks a second shopkeeper. “Humph! an
_Américain_—a West-Floridian; bah!”

“But wait; ’st! he is speaking; listen!”

“To who is he speak——?”

“Sh-sh-sh! to Jules.”

“Jules who?”

“Silence, you! To Jules St.-Ange, what howe me a bill since long time.
Sh-sh-sh!”

Then the voice was heard.

Its owner was a man of giant stature, with a slight stoop in his
shoulders, as if he was making a constant, good-natured attempt to
accommodate himself to ordinary doors and ceilings. His bones were
those of an ox. His face was marked more by weather than age, and his
narrow brow was bald and smooth. He had instantaneously formed an
opinion of Jules St.-Ange, and the multitude of words, most of them
lingual curiosities, with which he was rasping the wide-open ears of
his listeners, signified, in short, that, as sure as his name was
Parson Jones, the little Creole was a “plum gentleman.”

M. St.-Ange bowed and smiled, and was about to call attention, by both
gesture and speech, to a singular object on top of the still uncovered
head, when the nervous motion of the _Américain_ anticipated him, as,
throwing up an immense hand, he drew down a large roll of bank-notes.
The crowd laughed, the West-Floridian joining, and began to disperse.

“Why, that money belongs to Smyrny Church,” said the giant.

“You are very dengerous to make your money expose like that, Misty
Posson Jone’,” said St.-Ange, counting it with his eyes.

The countryman gave a start and smile of surprise.

“How d’dyou know my name was Jones?” he asked; but, without pausing
for the Creole’s answer, furnished in his reckless way some further
specimens of West-Floridian English; and the conciseness with
which he presented full intelligence of his home, family, calling,
lodging-house, and present and future plans, might have passed for
consummate art, had it not been the most run-wild nature. “And I’ve
done been to Mobile, you know, on busi_ness_ for Bethesdy Church.
It’s the on’yest time I ever been from home; now you wouldn’t of
believed that, would you? But I admire to have saw you, that’s so.
You’ve got to come and eat with me. Me and my boy ain’t been fed
yit. “What might one call yo’ name? Jools? Come on, Jools. Come on,
Colossus. That’s my niggah—his name’s Colossus of Rhodes. Is that yo’
yallah boy, Jools? Fetch him along, Colossus. It seems like a special
provi_dence_.—Jools, do you believe in a special provi_dence_?”

Jules said he did.

The new-made friends moved briskly off, followed by Baptiste and a
short, square, old <DW64>, very black and grotesque, who had introduced
himself to the mulatto, with many glittering and cavernous smiles, as
“d’body-sarvant of d’Rev’n’ Mr. Jones.”

Both pairs enlivened their walk with conversation. Parson Jones
descanted upon the doctrine he had mentioned, as illustrated in the
perplexities of cotton-growing, and concluded that there would always
be “a special provi_dence_ again’ cotton untell folks quits a-pressin’
of it and haulin’ of it on Sundays!”

“_Je dis_,” said St.-Ange, in response, “I thing you is juz right. I
believe, me, strong-strong in the improvidence, yes. You know my papa
he hown a sugah-plantation, you know. ’Jules, me son,’ he say one
time to me, ’I goin’ to make one baril sugah to fedge the moze high
price in New Orleans.’ Well, he take his bez baril sugah—I nevah see
a so careful man like me papa always to make a so beautiful sugah _et
sirop_. ’Jules, go at Father Pierre an’ ged this lill pitcher fill with
holy-water, an’ tell him sen’ his tin bucket, and I will make it fill
with _quitte_.’ I ged the holy-water; my papa sprinkle it over the
baril, an’ make one cross on the ’ead of the baril.”

“Why, Jools,” said Parson Jones, “that didn’t do no good.”

“Din do no good! Id broughd the so great value! You can strike me dead
if thad baril sugah din fedge the more high cost than any other in the
city. _Parce-que_, the man what buy that baril sugah he make a mistake
of one hundred pound”—falling back—“_Mais_ certainlee!”

“And you think that was growin’ out of the holy-water?” asked the
parson.

“_Mais_, what could make it else? Id could not be the _quitte_, because
my papa keep the bucket, an’ forget to sen’ the _quitte_ to Father
Pierre.”

Parson Jones was disappointed.

“Well, now, Jools, you know, I don’t think that was right. I reckon you
must be a plum Catholic.”

M. St.-Ange shrugged. He would not deny his faith.

“I am a _Catholique_, _mais_”—brightening as he hoped to recommend
himself anew—“not a good one.”

“Well, you know,” said Jones—“where’s Colossus? Oh! all right.
Colossus strayed off a minute in Mobile, and I plum lost him for two
days. Here’s the place; come in. Colossus and this boy can go to the
kitchen.—Now, Colossus, what _air_ you a-beckonin’ at me faw?”

He let his servant draw him aside and address him in a whisper.

“Oh, go ’way!” said the parson with a jerk. “Who’s goin’ to throw me?
What? Speak louder. Why, Colossus, you shayn’t talk so, saw. ’Pon my
soul, you’re the mightiest fool I ever taken up with. Jest you go down
that alley-way with this yalla boy, and don’t show yo’ face untell yo’
called!”

The <DW64> begged; the master wrathily insisted.

“Colossus, will you do ez I tell you, or shell I hev to strike you,
saw?”

“O Mahs Jimmy, I—I’s gwine; but”—he ventured nearer—“don’t on no
account drink nothin’, Mahs Jimmy.”

Such was the <DW64>’s earnestness that he put one foot in the gutter,
and fell heavily against his master. The parson threw him off angrily.

“Thar, now! Why, Colossus, you most of been dosted with sumthin’; yo’
plum crazy.—Humph, come on, Jools, let’s eat! Humph! to tell me that
when I never taken a drop, exceptin’ for chills, in my life—which he
knows so as well as me!”

The two masters began to ascend a stair.

“_Mais_, he is a sassy; I would sell him, me,” said the young Creole.

“No, I wouldn’t do that,” replied the parson; “though there is people
in Bethesdy who says he is a rascal. He’s a powerful smart fool. Why,
that boy’s got money, Jools; more money than religion, I reckon. I’m
shore he fallen into mighty bad company”—they passed beyond earshot.

Baptiste and Colossus, instead of going to the tavern kitchen, passed
to the next door and entered the dark rear corner of a low grocery,
where, the law notwithstanding, liquor was covertly sold to slaves.
There, in the quiet company of Baptiste and the grocer, the colloquial
powers of Colossus, which were simply prodigious, began very soon to
show themselves.

“For whilst,” said he, “Mahs Jimmy has eddication, you know—whilst he
has eddication, I has ’scretion. He has eddication and I has ’scretion,
an’ so we gits along.”

He drew a black bottle down the counter, and, laying half his length
upon the damp board, continued:

“As a p’inciple I discredits de imbimin’ of awjus liquors. De imbimin’
of awjus liquors, de wiolution of de Sabbaf, de playin’ of de fiddle,
and de usin’ of by-words, dey is de fo’ sins of de conscience; an’ if
any man sin de fo’ sins of de conscience, de debble done sharp his fork
fo’ dat man.—Ain’t that so, boss?”

The grocer was sure it was so.

“Neberdeless, mind you”—here the orator brimmed his glass from the
bottle and swallowed the contents with a dry eye—“mind you, a roytious
man, sech as ministers of de gospel and dere body-sarvants, can take a
_leetle_ for de weak stomach.”

But the fascinations of Colossus’s eloquence must not mislead us; this
is the story of a true Christian; to wit, Parson Jones.

The parson and his new friend ate. But the coffee M. St.-Ange declared
he could not touch; it was too wretchedly bad. At the French Market,
near by, there was some noble coffee. This, however, would have to be
bought, and Parson Jones had scruples.

“You see, Jools, every man has his conscience to guide him, which it
does so in——”

“Oh, yes!” cried St.-Ange, “conscien’; thad is the bez, Posson Jone’.
Certainlee! I am a _Catholique_, you is a _schismatique_; you thing it
is wrong to dring some coffee—well, then, it _is_ wrong; you thing it
is wrong to make the sugah to ged the so large price—well, then, it
_is_ wrong; I thing it is right—well, then, it _is_ right; it is all
’a’bit; _c’est tout_. What a man thing is right, _is right_; ’tis all
’a’bit. A man muz nod go again’ his conscien’. My faith! do you thing
I would go again’ my conscien’? _Mais allons_, led us go and ged some
coffee.”

“Jools.”

“W’at?”

“Jools, it ain’t the drinkin’ of coffee, but the buyin’ of it on a
Sabbath. You must really excuse me, Jools, it’s again’ conscience, you
know.”

“Ah!” said St.-Ange, “_c’est_ very true. For you it would be a sin,
_mais_ for me it is only ’a’bit. Rilligion is a very strange; I know a
man one time, he thing it was wrong to go to cock-fight Sunday evening.
I thing it is all ’a’bit. _Mais_, come, Posson Jone’; I have got one
friend, Miguel; led us go at his house and ged some coffee. Come;
Miguel have no familie; only him and Joe—always like to see friend;
_allons_, led us come yonder.”

“Why, Jools, my dear friend, you know,” said the shame-faced parson, “I
never visit on Sundays.”

“Never w’at?” asked the astounded Creole.

“No,” said Jones, smiling awkwardly.

“Never visite?”

“Exceptin’ sometimes amongst church-members,” said Parson Jones.

“_Mais_,” said the seductive St.-Ange, “Miguel and Joe is
church-member’—certainlee! They love to talk about rilligion. Come at
Miguel and talk about some rilligion. I am nearly expire for me coffee.”

Parson Jones took his hat from beneath his chair and rose up.

“Jools,” said the weak giant, “I ought to be in church right now.”

“_Mais_, the church is right yonder at Miguel’, yes. Ah!” continued
St.-Ange, as they descended the stairs, “I thing every man muz have the
rilligion he like’ the bez—me, I like the _Catholique_ rilligion the
bez—for me it _is_ the bez. Every man will sure go to heaven if he
like his rilligion the bez.”

“Jools,” said the West-Floridian, laying his great hand tenderly upon
the Creole’s shoulder, as they stepped out upon the _banquette_, “do
you think you have any shore hopes of heaven?”

“Yass!” replied St.-Ange; “I am sure-sure. I thing everybody will go
to heaven. I thing you will go, _et_ I thing Miguel will go, _et_
Joe—everybody, I thing—_mais_, hof course, not if they not have been
christen’. Even I thing some <DW65>s will go.”

“Jools,” said the parson, stopping in his walk—“Jools, I _don’t_ want
to lose my niggah.”

“You will not loose him. With Baptiste he _cannot_ ged loose.”

But Colossus’s master was not reassured.

“Now,” said he, still tarrying, “this is jest the way; had I of gone to
church——”

“Posson Jone’,” said Jules.

“What?”

“I tell you. We goin’ to church!”

“Will you?” asked Jones, joyously.

“_Allons_, come along,” said Jules, taking his elbow.

They walked down the Rue Chartres, passed several corners, and by and
by turned into a cross street. The parson stopped an instant as they
were turning and looked back up the street.

“W’at you lookin’?” asked his companion.

“I thought I saw Colossus,” answered the parson, with an anxious face;
“I reckon ’twa’n’t him, though.” And they went on.

The street they now entered was a very quiet one. The eye of any chance
passer would have been at once drawn to a broad, heavy, white brick
edifice on the lower side of the way, with a flag-pole standing out
like a bowsprit from one of its great windows, and a pair of lamps
hanging before a large closed entrance. It was a theatre, honey-combed
with gambling-dens. At this morning hour all was still, and the only
sign of life was a knot of little barefoot girls gathered within its
narrow shade, and each carrying an infant relative. Into this place the
parson and M. St.-Ange entered, the little nurses jumping up from the
sills to let them pass in.

A half-hour may have passed. At the end of that time the whole juvenile
company were laying alternate eyes and ears to the chinks, to gather
what they could of an interesting quarrel going on within.

“I did not, saw! I given you no cause of offence, saw! It’s not
so, saw! Mister Jools simply mistaken the house, thinkin’ it was a
Sabbath-school! No such thing, saw; I _ain’t_ bound to bet! Yes, I kin
git out. Yes, without bettin’! I hev a right to my _o_pinion; I reckon
I’m _a white man_, saw! No, saw! I on’y said I didn’t think you could
get the game on them cards. ’Sno such thing, saw! I do _not_ know how
to play! I wouldn’t hev a rascal’s money ef I should win it! Shoot, ef
you dare! You can kill me, but you cayn’t scare me! No, I shayn’t bet!
I’ll die first! Yes, saw; Mr. Jools can bet for me if he admires to; I
ain’t his mostah.”

Here the speaker seemed to direct his words to St.-Ange.

“Saw, I don’t understand you, saw. I never said I’d loan you money to
bet for me. I didn’t suspicion this from you, saw. No, I won’t take any
more lemonade; it’s the most notorious stuff I ever drank, saw!”

M. St.-Ange’s replies were in _falsetto_ and not without effect; for
presently the parson’s indignation and anger began to melt. “Don’t ask
me, Jools, I can’t help you. It’s no use; it’s a matter of conscience
with me, Jools.”

“Mais oui! ’tis a matt’ of conscien’ wid me, the same.”

“But, Jools, the money’s none o’ mine, nohow; it belongs to Smyrny, you
know.”

“If I could make jus’ _one_ bet,” said the persuasive St.-Ange, “I
would leave this place, fas’-fas’, yes. If I had thing—_mais_ I did
not soupspicion this from you, Posson Jone’——”

“Don’t, Jools, don’t!”

“No! Posson Jone’.”

“You’re bound to win?” said the parson, wavering.

“_Mais certainement!_ But it is not to win that I want; ’tis me
conscien’—me honor!”

“Well, Jools, I hope I’m not a-doin’ no wrong. I’ll loan you some
of this money if you say you’ll come right out ’thout takin’ your
winnin’s.”

All was still. The peeping children could see the parson as he
lifted his hand to his breast-pocket. There it paused a moment in
bewilderment, then plunged to the bottom. It came back empty, and fell
lifelessly at his side. His head dropped upon his breast, his eyes
were for a moment closed, his broad palms were lifted and pressed
against his forehead, a tremor seized him, and he fell all in a lump
to the floor. The children ran off with their infant-loads, leaving
Jules St.-Ange swearing by all his deceased relatives, first to Miguel
and Joe, and then to the lifted parson, that he did not know what had
become of the money “except if” the black man had got it.

       *       *       *       *       *

In the rear of ancient New Orleans, beyond the sites of the old
rampart, a trio of Spanish forts, where the town has since sprung
up and grown old, green with all the luxuriance of the wild Creole
summer, lay the Congo Plains. Here stretched the canvas of the
historic Cayetano, who Sunday after Sunday sowed the sawdust for his
circus-ring.

But to-day the great showman had fallen short of his printed promise.
The hurricane had come by night, and with one fell swash had made an
irretrievable sop of everything. The circus trailed away its bedraggled
magnificence, and the ring was cleared for the bull.

Then the sun seemed to come out and work for the people. “See,” said
the Spaniards, looking up at the glorious sky with its great, white
fleets drawn off upon the horizon—“see—heaven smiles upon the
bull-fight!”

In the high upper seats of the rude amphitheatre sat the gaily-decked
wives and daughters of the Gascons, from the _métaries_ along the
Ridge, and the chattering Spanish women of the Market, their shining
hair unbonneted to the sun. Next below were their husbands and lovers
in Sunday blouses, milkmen, butchers, bakers, black-bearded fishermen,
Sicilian fruiterers, swarthy Portuguese sailors, in little woollen
caps, and strangers of the graver sort; mariners of England, Germany,
and Holland. The lowest seats were full of trappers, smugglers,
Canadian _voyageurs_, drinking and singing; _Américains_, too—more’s
the shame—from the upper rivers—who will not keep their seats—who
ply the bottle, and who will get home by and by and tell how wicked
Sodom is; broad-brimmed, silver-braided Mexicans, too, with their
copper cheeks and bat’s eyes, and their tinkling spurred heels. Yonder,
in that quieter section, are the quadroon women in their black lace
shawls—and there is Baptiste; and below them are the turbaned black
women, and there is—but he vanishes—Colossus.

The afternoon is advancing, yet the sport, though loudly demanded,
does not begin. The _Américains_ grow derisive and find pastime in
gibes and raillery. They mock the various Latins with their national
inflections, and answer their scowls with laughter. Some of the more
aggressive shout pretty French greetings to the women of Gascony, and
one bargeman, amid peals of applause, stands on a seat and hurls a
kiss to the quad-rooms. The mariners of England, Germany, and Holland,
as spectators, like the fun, while the Spaniards look black and cast
defiant imprecations upon their persecutors. Some Gascons, with timely
caution, pick their women out and depart, running a terrible fire of
gallantries.

In hope of truce, a new call is raised for the bull: “The bull, the
bull!—hush!”

In a tier near the ground a man is standing and calling—standing head
and shoulders above the rest—calling in the _Américaine_ tongue.
Another man, big and red, named Joe, and a handsome little Creole
in elegant dress and full of laughter, wish to stop him, but the
flat-boatmen, ha-ha-ing and cheering, will not suffer it. Ah, through
some shameful knavery of the men, into whose hands he has fallen, he is
drunk! Even the women can see that; and now he throws his arms wildly
and raises his voice until the whole great circle hears it. He is
preaching!

Ah! kind Lord, for a special providence now! The men of his own
nation—men from the land of the open English Bible and temperance cup
and song are cheering him on to mad disgrace. And now another call for
the appointed sport is drowned by the flat-boatmen singing the ancient
tune of Mear. You can hear the words—

  “Old Grimes is dead, that good old soul”

—from ribald lips and throats turned brazen with laughter, from
singers who toss their hats aloft and roll in their seats; the chorus
swells to the accompaniment of a thousand brogans—

  “He used to wear an old gray coat
  All buttoned down before.”

A ribboned man in the arena is trying to be heard, and the Latins
raise one mighty cry for silence. The big red man gets a hand over the
parson’s mouth, and the ribboned man seizes his moment.

“They have been endeavoring for hours,” he says, “to draw the terrible
animals from their dens, but such is their strength and fierceness,
that——”

His voice is drowned. Enough has been heard to warrant the inference
that the beasts cannot be whipped out of the storm-drenched cages to
which menagerie-life and long starvation have attached them, and from
the roar of indignation the man of ribbons flies. The noise increases.
Men are standing up by hundreds, and women are imploring to be let out
of the turmoil. All at once, like the bursting of a dam, the whole mass
pours down into the ring. They sweep across the arena and over the
showman’s barriers. Miguel gets a frightful trampling. Who cares for
gates or doors? They tear the beasts’ houses bar from bar, and, laying
hold of the gaunt buffalo, drag him forth by feet, ears, and tail;
and in the midst of the _mêlée_, still head and shoulders above all,
wilder, with the cup of the wicked, than any beast, is the man of God
from the Florida parishes!

In his arms he bore—and all the people shouted at once when they saw
it—the tiger. He had lifted it high up with its back to his breast,
his arms clasped under its shoulders; the wretched brute had curled up
caterpillar-wise, with its long tail against its belly, and through
its filed teeth grinned a fixed and impotent wrath. And Parson Jones
was shouting:

“The tiger and the buffler _shell_ lay down together! You dah to say
they shayn’t and I’ll comb you with this varmint from head to foot! The
tiger and the buffler _shell_ lay down together. They _shell_! Now,
you, Joe! Behold! I am here to see it done. The lion and the buffler
_shell_ lay down together!”

Mouthing these words again and again, the parson forced his way through
the surge in the wake of the buffalo. This creature the Latins had
secured by a lariat over his head, and were dragging across the old
rampart and into a street of the city.

The northern races were trying to prevent, and there was pommelling
and knocking down, cursing and knife-drawing, until Jules St.-Ange was
quite carried away with the fun, laughed, clapped his hands, and swore
with delight, and ever kept close to the gallant parson.

Joe, contrariwise, counted all this child’s-play an interruption. He
had come to find Colossus and the money. In an unlucky moment he made
bold to lay hold of the parson, but a piece of the broken barriers in
the hands of a flat-boatman felled him to the sod, the terrible crowd
swept over him, the lariat was cut, and the giant parson hurled the
tiger upon the buffalo’s back. In another instant both brutes were dead
at the hands of the mob; Jones was lifted from his feet, and prating
of Scripture and the millennium, of Paul at Ephesus and Daniel in the
“buffler’s” den, was borne aloft upon the shoulders of the huzzaing
_Américains_. Half an hour later he was sleeping heavily on the floor
of a cell in the _calaboza_.

When Parson Jones awoke, a bell was somewhere tolling for midnight.
Somebody was at the door of his cell with a key. The lock grated,
the door swung, the turnkey looked in and stepped back, and a ray of
moonlight fell upon M. Jules St.-Ange. The prisoner sat upon the empty
shackles and ring-bolt in the centre of the floor.

“Misty Posson Jone’,” said the visitor, softly.

“O Jools!”

“_Mais_, w’at de matter, Posson Jone’?”

“My sins, Jools, my sins!”

“Ah! Posson Jone’, is that something to cry, because a man get
sometime a litt’ bit intoxicate? _Mais_, if a man keep _all the time_
intoxicate, I think that is again’ the conscien’.”

“Jools, Jools, your eyes is darkened—oh! Jools, where’s my pore old
niggah?”

“Posson Jone’, never min’; he is wid Baptiste.”

“Where?”

“I don’ know w’ere—_mais_ he is wid Baptiste. Baptiste is a beautiful
to take care of somebody.”

“Is he as good as you, Jools?” asked Parson Jones, sincerely.

Jules was slightly staggered.

“You know, Posson Jone’, you know, a <DW65> cannot be good as a w’ite
man—_mais_ Baptiste is a good <DW65>.”

The parson moaned and dropped his chin into his hands.

“I was to of left for home to-morrow, sun-up, on the Isabella schooner.
Pore Smyrny!” He deeply sighed.

“Posson Jone’,” said Jules, leaning against the wall and smiling, “I
swear you is the moz funny man I ever see. If I was you I would say,
me, ’Ah! ’ow I am lucky! the money I los’, it was not mine, anyhow!’ My
faith! shall a man make hisse’f to be the more sorry because the money
he los’ is not his? Me, I would say, ’it is a specious providence.’

“Ah! Misty Posson Jone’,” he continued, “you make a so droll sermon ad
the bull-ring. Ha! ha! I swear I think you can make money to preach
thad sermon many time ad the theatre St. Philippe. Hah! you is the moz
brave dat I never see, _mais_ ad the same time the moz rilligious man.
Where I’m goin’ to fin’ one priest to make like dat? _Mais_, why you
can’t cheer up an’ be ’a’ppy? Me, if I should be miserabl’ like that I
would kill meself.”

The countryman only shook his head.

“_Bien_, Posson Jone’, I have the so good news for you.”

The prisoner looked up with eager inquiry.

“Las’ evening when they lock’ you, I come right off at M. De Blanc’s
house to get you let out of de calaboose; M. De Blanc he is the judge.
So soon I was entering—’Ah! Jules, me boy, juz the man to make
complete the game!’ Posson Jone’, it was a specious providence! I win
in t’ree hours more dan six hundred dollah! Look.” He produced a mass
of bank-notes, _bons_, and due-bills.

“And you got the pass?” asked the parson, regarding the money with a
sadness incomprehensible to Jules.

“It is here; it take the effect so soon the daylight.”

“Jools, my friend, your kindness is in vain.”

The Creole’s face became a perfect blank.

“Because,” said the parson, “for two reasons: firstly, I have broken
the laws, and ought to stand the penalty; and secondly—you must really
excuse me, Jools, you know, but the pass has been got onfairly, I’m
afeerd. You told the judge I was innocent; and in neither case it don’t
become a Christian (which I hope I can still say I am one) to ’do evil
that good may come.’ I muss stay.”

M. St.-Ange stood up aghast, and for a moment speechless, at this
exhibition of moral heroism; but an artifice was presently hit upon.
“_Mais_, Posson Jone’!”—in his old _falsetto_—“de order—you cannot
read it, it is in French—compel you to go hout, sir!”

“Is that so?” cried the parson, bounding up with radiant face—“is that
so, Jools?”

The young man nodded, smiling; but, though he smiled, the fountain of
his tenderness was opened. He made the sign of the cross as the parson
knelt in prayer, and even whispered “Hail Mary,” etc., quite through,
twice over.

       *       *       *       *       *

Morning broke in summer glory upon a cluster of villas behind the city,
nestled under live-oaks and magnolias on the banks of a deep bayou, and
known as Suburb St. Jean.

With the first beam came the West-Floridian and the Creole out upon
the bank below the village. Upon the parson’s arm hung a pair of
antique saddle-bags. Baptiste limped wearily behind; both his eyes were
encircled with broad, blue rings, and one cheek-bone bore the official
impress of every knuckle of Colossus’s left hand. The “beautiful to
take care of somebody” had lost his charge. At mention of the <DW64> he
became wild, and, half in English, half in the “gumbo” dialect, said
murderous things. Intimidated by Jules to calmness, he became able to
speak confidently on one point; he could, would, and did swear that
Colossus had gone home to the Florida parishes; he was almost certain;
in fact, he thought so.

There was a clicking of pulleys as the three appeared upon the bayou’s
margin, and Baptiste pointed out, in the deep shadow of a great oak,
the Isabella, moored among the bulrushes, and just spreading her sails
for departure. Moving down to where she lay, the parson and his friend
paused on the bank, loath to say farewell.

“O Jools!” said the parson, “supposin’ Colossus ain’t gone home! O
Jools, if you’ll look him out for me, I’ll never forget you—I’ll never
forget you, nohow, Jools. No, Jools, I never will believe he taken
that money. Yes, I know all niggahs will steal”—he set foot upon the
gang-plank—“but Colossus wouldn’t steal from me. Good-bye.”

“Misty Posson Jone’,” said St.-Ange, putting his hand on the parson’s
arm with genuine affection, “hol’ on. You see dis money—w’at I win
las’ night? Well, I win’ it by a specious providence, ain’t it?”

“There’s no tellin’,” said the humbled Jones. “Providence

  “‘Moves in a mysterious way
      His wonders to perform.’”

“Ah!” cried the Creole, “_c’est_ very true. I ged this money in the
mysterieuze way. _Mais_, if I keep dis money, you know where it goin’
be to-night?”

“I really can’t say,” replied the parson.

“Goin’ to de dev’,” said the sweetly-smiling young man.

The schooner-captain, leaning against the shrouds, and even Baptiste,
laughed outright.

“O Jools, you mustn’t!”

“Well, den, w’at I shall do wid _it_?”

“Any thing!” answered the parson; “better donate it away to some poor
man——”

“Ah! Misty Posson Jone’, dat is w’at I want. You los’ five hondred
dollar’—’twas me fault.”

“No, it wa’n’t, Jools.”

“_Mais_, it was!”

“No!”

“It _was_ me fault! I _swear_ it was me fault! _Mais_, here is five
hondred dollar’; I wish you shall take it. Here! I don’t got no use
for money.—Oh, my faith! Posson Jone’, you must not begin to cry some
more.”

Parson Jones was choked with tears. When he found voice he said:

“O Jools, Jools, Jools! my pore, noble, dear, misguidened friend! ef
you hed of hed a Christian raisin’! May the Lord show you your errors
better’n I kin, and bless you for your good intentions—oh, no! I
cayn’t touch that money with a ten-foot pole; it wa’n’t rightly got;
you must really excuse me, my dear friend, but I cayn’t touch it.”

St.-Ange was petrified.

“Good-bye, dear Jools,” continued the parson. “I’m in the Lord’s
haynds, and he’s very merciful, which I hope and trust you’ll
find it out. Good-bye!”—the schooner swang slowly off before the
breeze—“good-bye!”

St.-Ange roused himself.

“Posson Jone’! make me hany’ow _dis_ promise: you never, never, _never_
will come back to New Orleans.”

“Ah, Jools, the Lord willin’, I’ll never leave home again!”

“All right!” cried the Creole; “I thing he’s willin’. Adieu, Posson
Jone’. My faith’! you are the so fighting an’ moz rilligious man as I
never saw! Adieu! Adieu!”

Baptiste uttered a cry and presently ran by his master toward the
schooner, his hands full of clods.

St.-Ange looked just in time to see the sable form of Colossus of
Rhodes emerge from the vessel’s hold, and the pastor of Smyrna and
Bethesda seize him in his embrace.

“O Colossus! you outlandish old <DW65>! Thank the Lord! Thank the Lord!”

The little Creole almost wept. He ran down the tow-path, laughing and
swearing, and making confused allusion to the entire _personnel_ and
furniture of the lower regions.

By odd fortune, at the moment that St.-Ange further demonstrated his
delight by tripping his mulatto into a bog, the schooner came brushing
along the reedy bank with a graceful curve, the sails napped, and the
crew fell to poling her slowly along.

Parson Jones was on the deck, kneeling once more in prayer. His hat had
fallen before him; behind him knelt his slave. In thundering tones he
was confessing himself “a plum fool,” from whom “the conceit had been
jolted out,” and who had been made to see that even his “<DW65> had the
longest head of the two.”

Colossus clasped his hands and groaned.

The parson prayed for a contrite heart.

“Oh, yes!” cried Colossus.

The master acknowledged countless mercies.

“Dat’s so!” cried the slave.

The master prayed that they might still be “piled on.”

“Glory!” cried the black man, clapping his hands; “pile on!”

“An’ now,” continued the parson, “bring this pore, backslidin’ jackace
of a parson and this pore ole fool <DW65> back to thar home in peace!”

“Pray fo’ de money!” called Colossus.

But the parson prayed for Jules.

“Pray fo’ de _money_!” repeated the <DW64>.

“And oh, give thy servant back that there lost money!”

Colossus rose stealthily, and tiptoed by his still shouting master.
St.-Ange, the captain, the crew, gazed in silent wonder at the
strategist. Pausing but an instant over the master’s hat to grin an
acknowledgment of his beholders’ speechless interest, he softly placed
in it the faithfully mourned and honestly prayed-for Smyrna fund; then,
saluted by the gesticulative, silent applause of St.-Ange and the
schooner-men, he resumed his first attitude behind his roaring master.

“Amen!” cried Colossus, meaning to bring him to a close.

“Onworthy though I be——” cried Jones.

“_Amen!_” reiterated the <DW64>.

“A-a-amen!” said Parson Jones.

He rose to his feet, and, stooping to take up his hat, beheld the
well-known roll. As one stunned, he gazed for a moment upon his slave,
who still knelt with clasped hands and rolling eyeballs; but when he
became aware of the laughter and cheers that greeted him from both
deck and shore, he lifted eyes and hands to heaven, and cried like the
veriest babe. And when he looked at the roll again, and hugged and
kissed it, St.-Ange tried to raise a second shout, but choked, and the
crew fell to their poles.

And now up runs Baptiste, covered with slime, and prepares to cast his
projectiles. The first one fell wide of the mark; the schooner swung
round into a long reach of water, where the breeze was in her favor;
another shout of laughter drowned the maledictions of the muddy man;
the sails filled; Colossus of Rhodes, smiling and bowing as hero of
the moment, ducked as the main boom swept round, and the schooner,
leaning slightly to the pleasant influence, rustled a moment over the
bulrushes, and then sped far away down the rippling bayou.

M. Jules St.-Ange stood long, gazing at the receding vessel as it now
disappeared, now reappeared beyond the tops of the high undergrowth;
but, when an arm of the forest hid it finally from sight, he turned
townward, followed by that fagged-out spaniel, his servant, saying, as
he turned, “Baptiste.”

“_Miché?_”

“You know w’at I goin’ do wid dis money?”

“_Non, m’sieur._”

“Well, you can strike me dead if I don’t goin’ to pay hall my debts!
_Allons!_”

He began a merry little song to the effect that his sweetheart was a
wine-bottle, and master and man, leaving care behind, returned to the
picturesque Rue Royale. The ways of Providence are indeed strange. In
all Parson Jones’s after-life, amid the many painful reminiscences of
his visit to the City of the Plain, the sweet knowledge was withheld
from him that by the light of the Christian virtue that shone from him
even in his great fall, Jules St.-Ange arose, and went to his father an
honest man.




OUR AROMATIC UNCLE

BY

HENRY CUYLER BUNNER

The title of Mr. Bunner’s story is attractive and stimulating to
the imagination. The plot is slight, yet clever in its use of the
surprise element. Its leading character is a splendid illustration
of a hero-worshipper who is himself the real hero. The atmosphere is
especially good. It is warmed by family affection and fragrant with
romance. This romance, as Mr. Grabo points out in “The Art of the Short
Story,” is suggested rather than recorded. The running away of the
Judge’s son and of his little admirer, the butcher-boy, really lies
outside the story proper. “With these youthful adventures the story has
not directly to do, but the hints of the antecedent action envelop the
story with a romantic atmosphere. The reader speculates upon the story
suggested, and thereby is the written story enriched and made a part of
a larger whole.”




OUR AROMATIC UNCLE[21]


It is always with a feeling of personal tenderness and regret that I
recall his story, although it began long before I was born, and must
have ended shortly after that important date, and although I myself
never laid eyes on the personage of whom my wife and I always speak as
“The Aromatic Uncle.”

The story begins so long ago, indeed, that I can tell it only as a
tradition of my wife’s family. It goes back to the days when Boston was
so frankly provincial a town that one of its leading citizens, a man of
eminent position and ancient family, remarked to a young kinsman whom
he was entertaining at his hospitable board, by way of pleasing and
profitable discourse: “Nephew, it may interest you to know that it is
Mr. Everett who has the _other_ hindquarter of this lamb.” This simple
tale I will vouch for, for I got it from the lips of the nephew, who
has been my uncle for so many years that I know him to be a trustworthy
authority.

In those days which seem so far away—and yet the space between them
and us is spanned by a lifetime of threescore years and ten—life was
simpler in all its details; yet such towns as Boston, already old,
had well-established local customs which varied not at all from year
to year; many of which lingered in later phases of urban growth. In
Boston, or at least in that part of Boston where my wife’s family
dwelt, it was the invariable custom for the head of the family to go to
market in the early morning with his wife’s list of the day’s needs.
When the list was filled, the articles were placed in a basket; and the
baskets thus filled were systematically deposited by the market-boys
at the back-door of the house to which they were consigned. Then the
housekeeper came to the back-door at her convenience, and took the
basket in. Exposed as this position must have been, such a thing as
a theft of the day’s edibles was unknown, and the first authentic
account of any illegitimate handling of the baskets brings me to the
introduction of my wife’s uncle.

It was on a summer morning, as far as I can find out, that a little
butcher-boy—a very little butcher-boy to be driving so big a
cart—stopped in the rear of two houses that stood close together
in a suburban street. One of these houses belonged to my wife’s
father, who was, from all I can gather, a very pompous, severe, and
generally objectionable old gentleman; a Judge, and a very considerable
dignitary, who apparently devoted all his leisure to making life
miserable for his family. The other was owned by a comparatively poor
and unimportant man, who did a shipping business in a small way. He had
bought it during a period of temporary affluence, and it hung on his
hands like a white elephant. He could not sell it, and it was turning
his hair gray to pay the taxes on it. On this particular morning he had
got up at four o’clock to go down to the wharves to see if a certain
ship in which he was interested had arrived. It was due and overdue,
and its arrival would settle the question of his domestic comfort for
the whole year; for if it failed to appear, or came home with an empty
bottom, his fate would be hard indeed; but if it brought him money or
marketable goods from its long Oriental trip, he might take heart of
grace and look forward to better times.

When the butcher’s boy stopped at the house of my wife’s father, he set
down at the back-door a basket containing fish, a big joint of roast
beef, and a generous load of fruit and vegetables, including some fine,
fat oranges. At the other door he left a rather unpromising-looking
lump of steak and a half-peck of potatoes, not of the first quality.
When he had deposited these two burdens he ran back and started his
cart up the road.

But he looked back as he did so, and he saw a sight familiar to him,
and saw the commission of a deed entirely unfamiliar. A handsome young
boy of about his own age stepped out of the back-door of my wife’s
father’s house and looked carelessly around him. He was one of the boys
who compel the admiration of all other boys—strong, sturdy, and a
trifle arrogant.

He had long ago compelled the admiration of the little butcher-boy.
They had been playmates together at the public school, and although the
Judge’s son looked down from an infinite height upon his poor little
comrade, the butcher-boy worshipped him with the deepest and most
fervent adoration. He had for him the admiring reverence which the boy
who can’t lick anybody has for the boy who can lick everybody. He was
a superior being, a pattern, a model; an ideal never to be achieved,
but perhaps in a crude, humble way to be imitated. And there is no
hero-worship in the world like a boy’s worship of a boy-hero.

The sight of this fortunate and adorable youth was familiar enough to
the butcher-boy, but the thing he did startled and shocked that poor
little workingman almost as much as if his idol had committed a capital
crime right before his very eyes. For the Judge’s son suddenly let
a look into his face that meant mischief, glanced around him to see
whether anybody was observing him or not, and, failing to notice the
butcher-boy, quickly and dexterously changed the two baskets. Then he
went back into the house and shut the door on himself.

The butcher-boy reined up his horse and jumped from his cart. His first
impulse, of course, was to undo the shocking iniquity which the object
of his admiration had committed. But before he had walked back a dozen
yards, it struck him that he was taking a great liberty in spoiling
the other boy’s joke. It was wrong, of course, he knew it; but was
it for him to rebuke the wrong-doing of such an exalted personage?
If the Judge’s son came out again, he would see that his joke had
miscarried, and then he would be displeased. And to the butcher-boy
it did not seem right in the nature of things that anything should
displease the Judge’s son. Three times he went hesitatingly backward
and forward, trying to make up his mind, and then he made it up. The
king could do no wrong. Of course he himself was doing wrong in not
putting the baskets back where they belonged; but then he reflected,
he took that sin on his own humble conscience, and in some measure
took it off the conscience of the Judge’s son—if, indeed, it troubled
that lightsome conscience at all. And, of course, too, he knew that,
being an apprentice, he would be whipped for it when the substitution
was discovered. But he didn’t mind being whipped for the boy he
worshipped. So he drove out along the road; and the wife of the poor
shipping-merchant, coming to the back-door, and finding the basket full
of good things, and noticing especially the beautiful China oranges,
naturally concluded that her husband’s ship had come in, and that he
had provided his family with a rare treat. And the Judge, when he came
home to dinner, and Mrs. Judge introduced him to the rump-steak and
potatoes—but I do not wish to make this story any more pathetic than
is necessary.

       *       *       *       *       *

A few months after this episode, perhaps indirectly in consequence of
it—I have never been able to find out exactly—the Judge’s son, my
wife’s uncle, ran away to sea, and for many years his recklessness, his
strength, and his good looks were only traditions in the family, but
traditions which he himself kept alive by remembrances than which none
could have been more effective.

At first he wrote but seldom, later on more regularly, but his
letters—I have seen many of them—were the most uncommunicative
documents that I ever saw in my life. His wanderings took him to many
strange places on the other side of the globe, but he never wrote
of what he saw or did. His family gleaned from them that his health
was good, that the weather was such-and-such, and that he wished to
have his love, duty, and respects conveyed to his various relatives.
In fact, the first positive bit of personal intelligence that they
received from him was five years after his departure, when he wrote
them from a Chinese port on letter-paper whose heading showed that he
was a member of a commercial firm. The letter itself made no mention
of the fact. As the years passed on, however, the letters came more
regularly and they told less about the weather, and were slightly—very
slightly—more expressive of a kind regard for his relatives. But at
the best they were cramped by the formality of his day and generation,
and we of to-day would have called them cold and perfunctory.

But the practical assurances that he gave of his undiminished—nay,
his steadily increasing—affection for the people at home, were of a
most satisfying character, for they were convincing proof not only of
his love but of his material prosperity. Almost from his first time
of writing he began to send gifts to all the members of the family. At
first these were mere trifles, little curios of travel such as he was
able to purchase out of a seaman’s scanty wages; but as the years went
on they grew richer and richer, till the munificence of the runaway son
became the pride of the whole family.

The old house that had been in the suburbs of Boston was fairly in
the heart of the city when I first made its acquaintance, and one of
the famous houses of the town. And it was no wonder it was famous,
for such a collection of Oriental furniture, bric-à-brac, and objects
of art never was seen outside of a museum. There were ebony cabinets,
book-cases, tables, and couches wonderfully carved and inlaid with
mother-of-pearl. There were beautiful things in bronze and jade and
ivory. There were all sorts of strange rugs and curtains and portières.
As to the china-ware and the vases, no house was ever so stocked; and
as for such trifles as shawls and fans and silk handkerchiefs, why such
things were sent not singly but by dozens.

No one could forget his first entrance into that house. The great
drawing-room was darkened by heavy curtains, and at first you had
only a dim vision of the strange and graceful shapes of its curious
furnishing. But you could not but be instantly conscious of the
delicate perfume that pervaded the apartment, and, for the matter of
that, the whole house. It was a combination of all the delightful
Eastern smells—not sandal-ood only, nor teak, nor couscous, but all
these odors and a hundred others blent in one. Yet it was not heavy nor
overpowering, but delightfully faint and sweet, diffused through those
ample rooms. There was good reason, indeed, for the children of the
generation to which my wife belonged to speak of the generous relative
whom they had never seen as “Our Aromatic Uncle.” There were other
uncles, and I have no doubt they gave presents freely, for it was a
wealthy and free-handed family; but there was no other uncle who sent
such a delicate and delightful reminder with every gift, to breathe a
soft memory of him by day and by night.

       *       *       *       *       *

I did my courting in the sweet atmosphere of that house, and, although
I had no earthly desire to live in Boston, I could not help missing
that strangely blended odor when my wife and I moved into an old house
in an old part of New York, whose former owners had no connections in
the Eastern trade. It was a charming and home-like old house; but at
first, although my wife had brought some belongings from her father’s
house, we missed the pleasant flavor of our aromatic uncle, for he was
now my uncle, as well as my wife’s. I say at first, for we did not miss
it long. Uncle David—that was his name—not only continued to send
his fragrant gifts to my wife at Christmas and upon her birthday, but
he actually adopted me, too, and sent me Chinese cabinets and Chinese
gods in various minerals and metals, and many articles designed for a
smoker’s use, which no smoker would ever want to touch with a ten-foot
pole. But I cared very little about the utility of these presents,
for it was not many years before, among them all, they set up that
exquisite perfume in the house, which we had learned to associate with
our aromatic uncle.

  “FOO-CHOO-LI, CHINA, January—, 18—.

 “DEAR NEPHEW AND NIECE: The Present is to inform you that I have this
 day shipped to your address, per Steamer Ocean Queen, one marble and
 ebony Table, six assorted gods, and a blue Dinner set; also that I
 purpose leaving this Country for a visit to the Land of my Nativity
 on the 6th of March next, and will, if same is satisfactory to you,
 take up my Abode temporarily in your household. Should same not be
 satisfactory, please cable at my charge. Messrs. Smithson & Smithson,
 my Customs Brokers, will attend to all charges on the goods, and will
 deliver them at your readiness. The health of this place is better
 than customary by reason of the cool weather, which Health I am as
 usual enjoying. Trusting that you both are at present in possession
 of the same Blessing, and will so continue, I remain, dear nephew and
 niece,

  “Your affectionate

  “UNCLE.”

       *       *       *       *       *

This was, I believe, by four dozen words—those which he used to inform
us of his intention of visiting America—the longest letter that Uncle
David had ever written to any member of his family. It also conveyed
more information about himself than he had ever given since the day he
ran away to sea. Of course we cabled the old gentleman that we should
be delighted to see him.

And, late that spring, at some date at which he could not possibly have
been expected to arrive, he turned up at our house.

Of course we had talked a great deal about him, and wondered what
manner of a man we should find him. Between us, my wife and I had got
an idea of his personal appearance which I despair of conveying in
words. Vaguely, I should say that we had pictured him as something
mid-way between an abnormally tall Chinese mandarin and a benevolent
Quaker. What we found when we got home and were told that our uncle
from India was awaiting us, was a shrunken and bent old gentleman,
dressed very cleanly and neatly in black broadcloth, with a limp,
many-pleated shirt-front of old-fashioned style, and a plain black
cravat. If he had worn an old-time stock we could have forgiven him
the rest of the disappointment he cost us; but we had to admit to
ourselves that he had the most absolutely commonplace appearance of
all our acquaintance. In fact, we soon discovered that, except for a
taciturnity the like of which we had never encountered, our aromatic
uncle had positively not one picturesque characteristic about him. Even
his aroma was a disappointment. He had it, but it was patchouly or some
other cheap perfume of the sort, wherewith he scented his handkerchief,
which was not even a bandanna, but a plain decent white one of the
unnecessarily large sort which clergymen and old gentlemen affect.

But, even if we could not get one single romantic association to
cluster about him, we very soon got to like the old gentleman. It is
true that at our first meeting, after saying “How d’ye do” to me and
receiving in impassive placidity the kiss which my wife gave him, he
relapsed into dead silence, and continued to smoke a clay pipe with a
long stem and a short bowl. This instrument he filled and re-filled
every few minutes, and it seemed to be his only employment. We plied
him with questions, of course, but to these he responded with a
wonderful brevity. In the course of an hour’s conversation we got from
him that he had had a pleasant voyage, that it was not a long voyage,
that it was not a short voyage, that it was about the usual voyage,
that he had not been seasick, that he was glad to be back, and that
he was not surprised to find the country very much changed. This last
piece of information was repeated in the form of a simple “No,” given
in reply to the direct question; and although it was given politely,
and evidently without the least unamiable intent, it made us both feel
very cheap. After all, it was absurd to ask a man if he were surprised
to find the country changed after fifty or sixty years of absence.
Unless he was an idiot, and unable to read at that, he must have
expected something of the sort.

But we grew to like him. He was thoroughly kind and inoffensive in
every way. He was entirely willing to be talked to, but he did not
care to talk. If it was absolutely necessary, he _could_ talk, and when
he did talk he always made me think of the “French-English Dictionary
for the Pocket,” compiled by the ingenious Mr. John Bellows; for nobody
except that extraordinary Englishman could condense a greater amount
of information into a smaller number of words. During the time of his
stay with us I think I learned more about China than any other man in
the United States knew, and I do not believe that the aggregate of his
utterances in the course of that six months could have amounted to one
hour’s continuous talk. Don’t ask me for the information. I had no
sort of use for it, and I forgot it as soon as I could. I like Chinese
bric-à-brac, but my interest in China ends there.

Yet it was not long before Uncle David slid into his own place in the
family circle. We soon found that he did not expect us to entertain
him. He wanted only to sit quiet and smoke his pipe, to take his two
daily walks by himself, and to read the daily paper one afternoon and
Macaulay’s “History of England” the next. He was never tired of sitting
and gazing amiably but silently at my wife; and, to head the list of
his good points, he would hold the baby by the hour, and for some
mysterious reason that baby, who required the exhibition of seventeen
toys in a minute to be reasonably quiet in the arms of anybody else,
would sit placidly in Uncle David’s lap, teething away steadily on the
old gentleman’s watch-chain, as quiet and as solemn and as aged in
appearance as any one of the assorted gods of porcelain and jade and
ivory which our aromatic uncle had sent us.

       *       *       *       *       *

The old house in Boston was a thing of the past. My wife’s parents
had been dead for some years, and no one remained of her immediate
family except a certain Aunt Lucretia, who had lived with them until
shortly before our marriage, when the breaking up of the family sent
her West to find a home with a distant relative in California. We asked
Uncle Davy if he had stopped to see Aunt Lucretia as he came through
California. He said he had not. We asked him if he wanted to have
Aunt Lucretia invited on to pass a visit during his stay with us. He
answered that he did not. This did not surprise us at all. You might
think that a brother might long to see a sister from whom he had been
separated nearly all of a long lifetime, but then you might never have
met Aunt Lucretia. My wife made the offer only from a sense of duty;
and only after a contest with me which lasted three days and nights.
Nothing but loss of sleep during an exceptionally busy time at my
office induced me to consent to her project of inviting Aunt Lucretia.
When Uncle David put his veto upon the proposition I felt that he might
have taken back all his rare and costly gifts, and I could still have
loved him.

But Aunt Lucretia came, all the same. My wife is afflicted with a New
England conscience, originally of a most uncomfortable character. It
has been much modified and ameliorated, until it is now considerably
less like a case of moral hives; but some wretched lingering remnant
of the original article induced her to write to Aunt Lucretia that
Uncle David was staying with us, and of course Aunt Lucretia came
without invitation and without warning, dropping in on us with ruthless
unexpectedness.

       *       *       *       *       *

You may not think, from what I have said, that Aunt Lucretia’s visit
was a pleasant event. But it was, in some respects; for it was not only
the shortest visit she ever paid us, but it was the last with which
she ever honored us.

She arrived one morning shortly after breakfast, just as we were
preparing to go out for a drive. She would not have been Aunt Lucretia
if she had not upset somebody’s calculations at every turn of her
existence. We welcomed her with as much hypocrisy as we could summon to
our aid on short notice, and she was not more than usually offensive,
although she certainly did herself full justice in telling us what she
thought of us for not inviting her as soon as we even heard of Uncle
David’s intention to return to his native land. She said she ought to
have been the first to embrace her beloved brother—to whom I don’t
believe she had given one thought in more years than I have yet seen.

Uncle David was dressing for his drive. His long residence in tropical
countries had rendered him sensitive to the cold, and although it was
a fine, clear September day, with the thermometer at about sixty, he
was industriously building himself up with a series of overcoats. On a
really snappy day I have known him to get into six of these garments;
and when he entered the room on this occasion I think he had on five,
at least.

My wife had heard his familiar foot on the stairs, and Aunt Lucretia
had risen up and braced herself for an outburst of emotional affection.
I could see that it was going to be such a greeting as is given only
once in two or three centuries, and then on the stage. I felt sure it
would end in a swoon, and I was looking around for a sofa-pillow for
the old lady to fall upon, for from what I knew of Aunt Lucretia I did
not believe she had ever swooned enough to be able to go through the
performance without danger to her aged person.

But I need not have troubled myself. Uncle David toddled into the
room, gazed at Aunt Lucretia without a sign of recognition in his
features, and toddled out into the hall, where he got his hat and
gloves, and went out to the front lawn, where he always paced up and
down for a few minutes before taking a drive, in order to stimulate his
circulation. This was a surprise, but Aunt Lucretia’s behavior was a
greater surprise. The moment she set eyes on Uncle David the theatrical
fervor went out of her entire system, literally in one instant; and an
absolutely natural, unaffected astonishment displayed itself in her
expressive and strongly marked features. For almost a minute, until the
sound of Uncle David’s footsteps had died away, she stood absolutely
rigid; while my wife and I gazed at her spellbound.

Then Aunt Lucretia pointed one long bony finger at me, and hissed out
with a true feminine disregard of grammar:

“That ain’t _him_!”

       *       *       *       *       *

“David,” said Aunt Lucretia, impressively, “had only one arm. He lost
the other in Madagascar.”

I was too dumbfounded to take in the situation. I remember thinking,
in a vague sort of way, that Madagascar was a curious sort of place to
go for the purpose of losing an arm; but I did not apprehend the full
significance of this disclosure until I heard my wife’s distressed
protestations that Aunt Lucretia must be mistaken; there must be some
horrible mistake somewhere.

But Aunt Lucretia was not mistaken, and there was no mistake anywhere.
The arm had been lost, and lost in Madagascar, and she could give the
date of the occurrence, and the circumstances attendant. Moreover,
she produced her evidence on the spot. It was an old daguerreotype,
taken in Calcutta a year or two after the Madagascar episode. She had
it in her hand-bag, and she opened it with fingers trembling with
rage and excitement. It showed two men standing side by side near
one of those three-foot Ionic pillars that were an indispensable
adjunct of photography in its early stages. One of the men was large,
broad-shouldered, and handsome—unmistakably a handsome edition of
Aunt Lucretia. His empty left sleeve was pinned across his breast. The
other man was, making allowance for the difference in years, no less
unmistakably the Uncle David who was at that moment walking to and fro
under our windows. For one instant my wife’s face lighted up.

“Why, Aunt Lucretia,” she cried, “there he is! That’s Uncle David, dear
Uncle David.”

“There he is _not_,” replied Aunt Lucretia. “That’s his business
partner—some common person that he picked up on the ship he first
sailed in—and, upon my word, I do believe it’s that wretched creature
outside. And I’ll Uncle David _him_.”

She marched out like a grenadier going to battle, and we followed her
meekly. There was, unfortunately, no room for doubt in the case. It
only needed a glance to see that the man with one arm was a member of
my wife’s family, and that the man by his side, _our_ Uncle David, bore
no resemblance to him in stature or features.

Out on the lawn Aunt Lucretia sailed into the dear old gentleman in the
five overcoats with a volley of vituperation. He did not interrupt her,
but stood patiently to the end, listening, with his hands behind his
back; and when, with her last gasp of available breath, Aunt Lucretia
demanded:

“Who—who—who _are_ you, you wretch?” he responded, calmly and
respectfully:

“I’m Tommy Biggs, Miss Lucretia.”

But just here my wife threw herself on his neck and hugged him, and
cried:

“You’re my own dear Uncle David, _anyway_!”

It was a fortunate, a gloriously fortunate, inspiration. Aunt Lucretia
drew herself up in speechless scorn, stretched forth her bony finger,
tried to say something and failed, and then she and her hand-bag went
out of my gates, never to come in again.

       *       *       *       *       *

When she had gone, our aromatic uncle—for we shall always continue to
think of him in that light, or rather in that odor—looked thoughtfully
after her till she disappeared, and then made one of the few remarks I
ever knew him to volunteer.

“Ain’t changed a mite in forty-seven years.”

Up to this time I had been in a dazed condition of mind. As I have
said, my wife’s family was extinct save for herself and Aunt Lucretia,
and she remembered so little of her parents, and she looked herself
so little like Aunt Lucretia, that it was small wonder that neither
of us remarked Uncle David’s unlikeness to the family type. We knew
that he did not resemble the ideal we had formed of him; and that had
been the only consideration we had given to his looks. Now, it took
only a moment of reflection to recall the fact that all the members of
the family had been tall and shapely, and that even between the ugly
ones, like Aunt Lucretia, and the pretty ones, like my wife, there was
a certain resemblance. Perhaps it was only the nose—the nose is the
brand in most families, I believe—but whatever it was, I had only to
see my wife and Aunt Lucretia together to realize that the man who had
passed himself off as our Uncle David had not one feature in common
with either of them—nor with the one-armed man in the daguerreotype. I
was thinking of this, and looking at my wife’s troubled face, when our
aromatic uncle touched me on the arm.

“I’ll explain,” he said, “to you. _You_ tell _her_.”

We dismissed the carriage, went into the house, and sat down. The old
gentleman was perfectly cool and collected, but he lit his clay pipe,
and reflected for a good five minutes before he opened his mouth. Then
he began:

“Finest man in the world, sir. Finest _boy_ in the world. Never
anything like him. But, peculiarities. Had ’em. Peculiarities.
Wouldn’t write home. Wouldn’t”—here he hesitated—“send things home.
I had to do it. Did it for him. Didn’t want his folks to know. Other
peculiarities. Never had any money. Other peculiarities. Drank. Other
peculiarities. Ladies. Finest man in the world, all the same. Nobody
like him. Kept him right with his folks for thirty-one years. Then
died. Fever. Canton. Never been myself since. Kept right on writing,
all the same. Also”—here he hesitated again—“sending things. Why?
Don’t know. Been a fool all my life. Never could do anything but make
money. No family, no friends. Only _him_. Ran away to sea to look after
him. Did look after him. Thought maybe your wife would be some like
him. Barring peculiarities, she is. Getting old. Came here for company.
Meant no harm. Didn’t calculate on Miss Lucretia.”

Here he paused and smoked reflectively for a minute or two.

“Hot in the collar—Miss Lucretia. Haughty. Like him, some. Just like
she was forty-seven years ago. Slapped my face one day when I was
delivering meat, because my jumper wasn’t clean. Ain’t changed a mite.”

This was the first condensed statement of the case of our aromatic
uncle. It was only in reply to patient, and, I hope, loving, gentle,
and considerate, questioning that the whole story came out—at once
pitiful and noble—of the poor little butcher-boy who ran away to sea
to be body-guard, servant, and friend to the splendid, showy, selfish
youth whom he worshipped; whose heartlessness he cloaked for many a
long year, who lived upon his bounty, and who died in his arms, nursed
with a tenderness surpassing that of a brother. And as far as I could
find out, ingratitude and contempt had been his only reward.

       *       *       *       *       *

I need not tell you that when I repeated all this to my wife she ran
to the old gentleman’s room and told him all the things that I should
not have known how to say—that we cared for him; that we wanted him to
stay with us; that he was far, far more our uncle than the brilliant,
unprincipled scapegrace who had died years before, dead for almost a
lifetime to the family who idolized him; and that we wanted him to stay
with us as long as kind heaven would let him. But it was of no use. A
change had come over our aromatic uncle which we could both of us see,
but could not understand. The duplicity of which he had been guilty
weighed on his spirit. The next day he went out for his usual walk, and
he never came back. We used every means of search and inquiry, but we
never heard from him until we got this letter from Foo-choo-li:

       *       *       *       *       *

 “DEAR NEPHEW AND NIECE: The present is to inform you that I am
 enjoying the Health that might be expected at my Age, and in my
 condition of Body, which is to say bad. I ship you by to-day’s
 steamer, Pacific Monarch, four dozen jars of ginger, and two dozen
 ditto preserved oranges, to which I would have added some other
 Comfits, which I purposed offering for your acceptance, if it wore
 not that my Physician has forbidden me to leave my Bed. In case of
 Fatal Results from this trying Condition, my Will, duly attested, and
 made in your favor, will be placed in your hands by Messrs. Smithson
 & Smithson, my Customs Brokers, who will also pay all charges on
 goods sent. The Health of this place being unfavorably affected by the
 Weather, you are unlikely to hear more from,

  “Dear Nephew and Niece,

  “Your affectionate

  “UNCLE.”

And we never did hear more—except for his will—from Our Aromatic
Uncle; but our whole house still smells of his love.




QUALITY

BY

JOHN GALSWORTHY

Here the emphasis is upon character. The plot is negligible—hardly
exists. The setting is carefully worked out because it is essential
to the characterization. By means of the shoemaker the author reveals
at least a part of his philosophy of life—that there is a subtle
relation between a man and his work. Each reacts on the other. If a man
recognizes the Soul of Things and strives to give it proper expression,
he becomes an Artist and influences for good all who come into contact
with him.




QUALITY[22]


I knew him from the days of my extreme youth, because he made my
father’s boots; inhabiting with his elder brother two little shops let
into one, in a small by-street—now no more, but then most fashionably
placed in the West End.

That tenement had a certain quiet distinction; there was no sign
upon its face that he made for any of the Royal Family—merely his
own German name of Gessler Brothers; and in the window a few pairs
of boots. I remember that it always troubled me to account for those
unvarying boots in the window, for he made only what was ordered,
reaching nothing down, and it seemed so inconceivable that what he
made could ever have failed to fit. Had he bought them to put there?
That, too, seemed inconceivable. He would never have tolerated in his
house leather on which he had not worked himself. Besides, they were
too beautiful—the pair of pumps, so inexpressibly slim, the patent
leathers with cloth tops, making water come into one’s mouth, the tall
brown riding boots with marvellous sooty glow, as if, though new, they
had been worn a hundred years. Those pairs could only have been made by
one who saw before him the Soul of Boot—so truly were they prototypes
incarnating the very spirit of all foot-gear. These thoughts, of
course, came to me later, though even when I was promoted to him, at
the age of perhaps fourteen, some inkling haunted me of the dignity of
himself and brother. For to make boots—such boots as he made—seemed
to me then, and still seems to me, mysterious and wonderful.

I remember well my shy remark, one day, while stretching out to him my
youthful foot:

“Isn’t it awfully hard to do, Mr. Gessler?”

And his answer, given with a sudden smile from out of the sardonic
redness of his beard: “Id is an Ardt!”

Himself, he was a little as if made from leather, with his yellow
crinkly face, and crinkly reddish hair and beard, and neat folds
slanting down his checks to the corners of his mouth, and his guttural
and one-toned voice; for leather is a sardonic substance, and stiff
and slow of purpose. And that was the character of his face, save that
his eyes, which were gray-blue, had in them the simple gravity of one
secretly possessed by the Ideal. His elder brother was so very like
him—though watery, paler in every way, with a great industry—that
sometimes in early days I was not quite sure of him until the interview
was over. Then I knew that it was he, if the words, “I will ask my
brudder,” had not been spoken; and that, if they had, it was his elder
brother.

When one grew old and wild and ran up bills, one somehow never ran
them up with Gessler Brothers. It would not have seemed becoming to
go in there and stretch out one’s foot to that blue iron-spectacled
glance, owing him for more than—say—two pairs, just the comfortable
reassurance that one was still his client.

For it was not possible to go to him very often—his boots lasted
terribly, having something beyond the temporary—some, as it were,
essence of boot stitched into them.

One went in, not as into most shops, in the mood of: “Please serve me,
and let me go!” but restfully, as one enters a church; and, sitting on
the single wooden chair, waited—for there was never anybody there.
Soon, over the top edge of that sort of well—rather dark, and smelling
soothingly of leather—which formed the shop, there would be seen his
face, or that of his elder brother, peering down. A guttural sound, and
the tip-tap of bast slippers beating the narrow wooden stairs, and he
would stand before one without coat, a little bent, in leather apron,
with sleeves turned back, blinking—as if awakened from some dream
of boots, or like an owl surprised in daylight and annoyed at this
interruption.

And I would say: “How do you do, Mr. Gessler? Could you make me a pair
of Russia leather boots?”

Without a word he would leave me, retiring whence he came, or into the
other portion of the shop, and I would continue to rest in the wooden
chair, inhaling the incense of his trade. Soon he would come back,
holding in his thin, veined hand a piece of gold-brown leather. With
eyes fixed on it, he would remark: “What a beaudiful biece!” When I,
too, had admired it, he would speak again. “When do you wand dem?” And
I would answer: “Oh! As soon as you conveniently can.” And he would
say: “To-morrow fordnighd?” Or if he were his elder brother: “I will
ask my brudder!”

Then I would murmur: “Thank you! Good-morning, Mr. Gessler.”
“Goot-morning!” he would reply, still looking at the leather in his
hand. And as I moved to the door, I would hear the tip-tap of his bast
slippers restoring him, up the stairs, to his dream of boots. But if
it were some new kind of foot-gear that he had not yet made me, then
indeed he would observe ceremony—divesting me of my boot and holding
it long in his hand, looking at it with eyes at once critical and
loving, as if recalling the glow with which he had created it, and
rebuking the way in which one had disorganized this masterpiece. Then,
placing my foot on a piece of paper, he would two or three times tickle
the outer edges with a pencil and pass his nervous fingers over my
toes, feeling himself into the heart of my requirements.

I cannot forget that day on which I had occasion to say to him: “Mr.
Gessler, that last pair of town walking-boots creaked, you know.”

He looked at me for a time without replying, as if expecting me to
withdraw or qualify the statement, then said:

“Id shouldn’d ’a’ve greaked.”

“It did, I’m afraid.”

“You goddem wed before dey found demselves?”

“I don’t think so.”

At that he lowered his eyes, as if hunting for memory of those boots,
and I felt sorry I had mentioned this grave thing.

“Zend dem back!” he said; “I will look at dem.”

A feeling of compassion for my creaking boots surged up in me, so well
could I imagine the sorrowful long curiosity of regard which he would
bend on them.

“Zome boods,” he said slowly, “are bad from birdt. If I can do noding
wid dem, I dake dem off your bill.”

Once (once only) I went absent-mindedly into his shop in a pair of
boots bought in an emergency at some large firm’s. He took my order
without showing me any leather, and I could feel his eyes penetrating
the inferior integument of my foot. At last he said:

“Dose are nod my boods.”

The tone was not one of anger, nor of sorrow, not even of contempt, but
there was in it something quiet that froze the blood. He put his hand
down and pressed a finger on the place where the left boot, endeavoring
to be fashionable, was not quite comfortable.

“Id ’urds you dere,” he said. “Dose big virms ’a’ve no self-respect.
Drash!” And then, as if something had given way within him, he spoke
long and bitterly. It was the only time I ever heard him discuss the
conditions and hardships of his trade.

“Dey get id all,” he said, “dey get id by adverdisement, nod by
work. Dey dake it away from us, who lofe our boods. Id gomes to
this—bresently I haf no work. Every year id gets less—you will see.”
And looking at his lined face I saw things I had never noticed before,
bitter things and bitter struggle—and what a lot of gray hairs there
seemed suddenly in his red beard!

As best I could, I explained the circumstances of the purchase of those
ill-omened boots. But his face and voice made so deep impression that
during the next few minutes I ordered many pairs. Nemesis fell! They
lasted more terribly than ever. And I was not able conscientiously to
go to him for nearly two years.

When at last I went I was surprised to find that outside one of the
two little windows of his shop another name was painted, also that of
a bootmaker—making, of course, for the Royal Family. The old familiar
boots, no longer in dignified isolation, were huddled in the single
window. Inside, the now contracted well of the one little shop was more
scented and darker than ever. And it was longer than usual, too, before
a face peered down, and the tip-tap of the bast slippers began. At last
he stood before me, and, gazing through those rusty iron spectacles,
said:

“Mr.——, isn’d it?”

“Ah! Mr. Gessler,” I stammered, “but your boots are really _too_ good,
you know! See, these are quite decent still!” And I stretched out to
him my foot. He looked at it.

“Yes,” he said, “beople do nod wand good boods, id seems.”

To get away from his reproachful eyes and voice I hastily remarked:
“What have you done to your shop?”

He answered quietly: “Id was too exbensif. Do you wand some boods?”

I ordered three pairs, though I had only wanted two, and quickly left.
I had, I do not know quite what feeling of being part, in his mind, of
a conspiracy against him; or not perhaps so much against him as against
his idea of boot. One does not, I suppose, care to feel like that; for
it was again many months before my next visit to his shop, paid, I
remember, with the feeling: “Oh! well, I can’t leave the old boy—so
here goes! Perhaps it’ll be his elder brother!”

For his elder brother, I knew, had not character enough to reproach me,
even dumbly.

And, to my relief, in the shop there did appear to be his elder
brother, handling a piece of leather.

“Well, Mr. Gessler,” I said, “how are you?”

He came close, and peered at me.

“I am breddy well,” he said slowly; “but my elder brudder is dead.”

And I saw that it was indeed himself—but how aged and wan! And never
before had I heard him mention his brother. Much shocked, I murmured:
“Oh! I am sorry!”

“Yes,” he answered, “he was a good man, he made a good bood; but he is
dead.” And he touched the top of his head, where the hair had suddenly
gone as thin as it had been on that of his poor brother, to indicate,
I suppose, the cause of death. “He could nod ged over losing de oder
shop. Do you wand any boods?” And he held up the leather in his hand:
“Id’s a beaudiful biece.”

I ordered several pairs. It was very long before they came—but they
were better than ever. One simply could not wear them out. And soon
after that I went abroad.

It was over a year before I was again in London. And the first shop I
went to was my old friend’s. I had left a man of sixty, I came back to
one of seventy-five, pinched and worn and tremulous, who genuinely,
this time, did not at first know me.

“Oh! Mr. Gessler,” I said, sick at heart; “how splendid your boots are!
See, I’ve been wearing this pair nearly all the time I’ve been abroad;
and they’re not half worn out, are they?”

He looked long at my boots—a pair of Russia leather, and his face
seemed to regain steadiness. Putting his hand on my instep, he said:

“Do dey vid you here? I ’a’d drouble wid dat bair, I remember.”

I assured him that they had fitted beautifully.

“Do you wand any boods?” he said. “I can make dem quickly; id is a
slack dime.”

I answered: “Please, please! I want boots all round—every kind!”

“I will make a vresh model. Your food must be bigger.” And with utter
slowness, he traced round my foot, and felt my toes, only once looking
up to say:

“Did I dell you my brudder was dead?”

To watch him was painful, so feeble had he grown; I was glad to get
away.

I had given those boots up, when one evening they came. Opening the
parcel, I set the four pairs out in a row. Then one by one I tried
them on. There was no doubt about it. In shape and fit, in finish and
quality of leather, they were the best he had ever made me. And in the
mouth of one of the town walking-boots I found his bill. The amount was
the same as usual, but it gave me quite a shock. He had never before
sent it in till quarter day. I flew downstairs, and wrote a check, and
posted it at once with my own hand.

A week later, passing the little street, I thought I would go in and
tell him how splendidly the new boots fitted. But when I came to where
his shop had been, his name was gone. Still there, in the window, were
the slim pumps, the patent leathers with cloth tops, the sooty riding
boots.

I went in, very much disturbed. In the two little shops—again made
into one—was a young man with an English face.

“Mr. Gessler in?” I said.

He gave me a strange, ingratiating look.

“No, sir,” he said, “no. But we can attend to anything with pleasure.
We’ve taken the shop over. You’ve seen our name, no doubt, next door.
We make for some very good people.”

“Yes, yes,” I said; “but Mr. Gessler?”

“Oh!” he answered; “dead.”

Dead! But I only received these boots from him last Wednesday week.”

“Ah!” he said; “a shockin’ go. Poor old man starved ‘imself.”

“Good God!”

“Slow starvation, the doctor called it! You see he went to work in such
a way! Would keep the shop on; wouldn’t have a soul touch his boots
except himself. When he got an order, it took him such a time. People
won’t wait. He lost everybody. And there he’d sit, goin’ on and on—I
will say that for him—not a man in London made a better boot! But look
at the competition! He never advertised! Would ’a’ve the best leather,
too, and do it all ‘imself. Well, there it is. What could you expect
with his ideas?”

“But starvation——!”

“That may be a bit flowery, as the sayin’ is—but I know myself he was
sittin’ over his boots day and night, to the very last. You see I used
to watch him. Never gave ‘imself time to eat; never had a penny in the
house. All went in rent and leather. How he lived so long I don’t know.
He regular let his fire go out. He was a character. But he made good
boots.”

“Yes,” I said, “he made good boots.”

And I turned and went out quickly, for I did not want that youth to
know that I could hardly see.




THE TRIUMPH OF NIGHT

BY

EDITH WHARTON

This is a mystery plot in which the supernatural furnishes the
interest. In dealing with the supernatural Mrs. Wharton does not
allow it to become horrible or grotesque. She secures plausibility
by having for its leading characters practical business men—not a
woman, hysterical or otherwise, really appears—and by placing them in
a perfectly conventional setting. The apparition is not accompanied
by blood stains, shroud, or uncanny noises. Sometimes the writer of
the supernatural feels that he must explain his mystery by material
agencies. The effect is to disappoint the reader who has yielded
himself to the conditions imposed by the author, and is willing, for
the time at least, to believe in ghosts. Mrs. Wharton makes no such
mistake. She does not spoil the effect by commonplace explanation.

In characterization Mrs. Wharton reveals the power not only to analyze
subtly temperaments and motives, but also to describe vividly with a
few words. This phrasal power is illustrated when she says of Faxon
that he “had a healthy face, but dying hands,” and of Lavington that
“his pinched smile was screwed to his blank face like a gas-light to a
white-washed wall.”




THE TRIUMPH OF NIGHT[23]


I

It was clear that the sleigh from Weymore had not come; and the
shivering young traveller from Boston, who had so confidently counted
on jumping into it when he left the train at Northridge Junction,
found himself standing alone on the open platform, exposed to the full
assault of night-fall and winter.

The blast that swept him came off New Hampshire snow-fields and
ice-hung forests. It seemed to have traversed interminable leagues of
frozen silence, filling them with the same cold roar and sharpening
its edge against the same bitter black-and-white landscape. Dark,
searching, and sword-like, it alternately muffled and harried its
victim, like a bull-fighter now whirling his cloak and now planting
his darts. This analogy brought home to the young man the fact that he
himself had no cloak, and that the overcoat in which he had faced the
relatively temperate airs of Boston seemed no thicker than a sheet of
paper on the bleak heights of Northridge. George Faxon said to himself
that the place was uncommonly well-named. It clung to an exposed ledge
over the valley from which the train had lifted him, and the wind
combed it with teeth of steel that he seemed actually to hear scraping
against the wooden sides of the station. Other building there was none:
the village lay far down the road, and thither—since the Weymore
sleigh had not come—Faxon saw himself under the immediate necessity
of plodding through several feet of snow.

He understood well enough what had happened at Weymore: his hostess had
forgotten that he was coming. Young as Faxon was, this sad lucidity of
soul had been acquired as the result of long experience, and he knew
that the visitors who can least afford to hire a carriage are almost
always those whom their hosts forget to send for. Yet to say Mrs. Culme
had forgotten him was perhaps too crude a way of putting it. Similar
incidents led him to think that she had probably told her maid to tell
the butler to telephone the coachman to tell one of the grooms (if
no one else needed him) to drive over to Northridge to fetch the new
secretary; but on a night like this what groom who respected his rights
would fail to forget the order?

Faxon’s obvious course was to struggle through the drifts to the
village, and there rout out a sleigh to convey him to Weymore; but
what if, on his arrival at Mrs. Culme’s, no one remembered to ask
him what this devotion to duty had cost? That, again, was one of the
contingencies he had expensively learned to look out for, and the
perspicacity so acquired told him it would be cheaper to spend the
night at the Northridge inn, and advise Mrs. Culme of his presence
there by telephone. He had reached this decision, and was about to
entrust his luggage to a vague man with a lantern who seemed to have
some loose connection with the railway company, when his hopes were
raised by the sound of sleigh-bells.

Two vehicles were just dashing up to the station, and from the foremost
there sprang a young man swathed in furs.

“Weymore?—No, these are not the Weymore sleighs.”

The voice was that of the youth who had jumped to the platform—a
voice so agreeable that, in spite of the words, it fell reassuringly
on Faxon’s ears. At the same moment the wandering station-lantern,
casting a transient light on the speaker, showed his features to be
in the pleasantest harmony with his voice. He was very fair and very
young—hardly in the twenties, Faxon thought—but his face, though full
of a morning freshness, was a trifle too thin and fine-drawn, as though
a vivid spirit contended in him with a strain of physical weakness.
Faxon was perhaps the quicker to notice such delicacies of balance
because his own temperament hung on lightly vibrating nerves, which
yet, as he believed, would never quite swing him beyond the arc of a
normal sensibility.

“You expected a sleigh from Weymore?” the youth continued, standing
beside Faxon like a slender column of fur.

Mrs. Culme’s secretary explained his difficulty, and the new-comer
brushed it aside with a contemptuous “Oh, _Mrs. Culme_!” that carried
both speakers a long way toward reciprocal understanding.

“But then you must be——” The youth broke off with a smile of
interrogation.

“The new secretary? Yes. But apparently there are no notes to be
answered this evening.” Faxon’s laugh deepened the sense of solidarity
which had so promptly established itself between the two.

The new-comer laughed also. “Mrs. Culme,” he explained, “was lunching
at my uncle’s to-day, and she said you were due this evening. But seven
hours is a long time for Mrs. Culme to remember anything.”

“Well,” said Faxon philosophically, “I suppose that’s one of the
reasons why she needs a secretary. And I’ve always the inn at
Northridge,” he concluded.

The youth laughed again. He was at the age when predicaments are food
for gaiety.

“Oh, but you haven’t, though! It burned down last week.”

“The deuce it did!” said Faxon; but the humor of the situation struck
him also before its inconvenience. His life, for years past, had been
mainly a succession of resigned adaptations, and he had learned, before
dealing practically with his embarrassments, to extract from most of
them a small tribute of amusement.

“Oh, well, there’s sure to be somebody in the place who can put me up.”

“No one _you_ could put up with. Besides, Northridge is three miles
off, and our place—in the opposite direction—is a little nearer.”
Through the darkness, Faxon saw his friend sketch a gesture of
self-introduction. “My name’s Frank Rainer, and I’m staying with my
uncle at Overdale. I’ve driven over to meet two friends of his, who are
due in a few minutes from New York. If you don’t mind waiting till they
arrive I’m sure Overdale can do you better than Northridge. We’re only
down from town for a few days, but the house is always ready for a lot
of people.”

“But your uncle——?” Faxon could only object, with the odd sense,
through his embarrassment, that it would be magically dispelled by his
invisible friend’s next words.

“Oh, my uncle—you’ll see! I answer for _him_! I dare say you’ve heard
of him—John Lavington?”

John Lavington! There was a certain irony in asking if one had heard
of John Lavington! Even from a post of observation as obscure as that
of Mrs. Culme’s secretary, the rumor of John Lavington’s money, of
his pictures, his politics, his charities and his hospitality, was as
difficult to escape as the roar of a cataract in a mountain solitude.
It might almost have been said that the one place in which one would
not have expected to come upon him was in just such a solitude as
now surrounded the speakers—at least in this deepest hour of its
desertedness. But it was just like Lavington’s brilliant ubiquity to
put one in the wrong even there.

“Oh, yes, I’ve heard of your uncle.”

“Then you _will_ come, won’t you? We’ve only five minutes to wait,”
young Rainer urged, in the tone that dispels scruples by ignoring them;
and Faxon found himself accepting the invitation as simply as it was
offered.

A delay in the arrival of the New York train lengthened their five
minutes to fifteen; and as they paced the icy platform Faxon began to
see why it had seemed the most natural thing in the world to accede
to his new acquaintance’s suggestion. It was because Frank Rainer was
one of the privileged beings who simplify human intercourse by the
atmosphere of confidence and good humor they diffuse. He produced this
effect, Faxon noted, by the exercise of no gift save his youth, of no
art save his sincerity; but these qualities were revealed in a smile of
such appealing sweetness that Faxon felt, as never before, what Nature
can achieve when she deigns to match the face with the mind.

He learned that the young man was the ward, and only nephew, of John
Lavington, with whom he had made his home since the death of his
mother, the great man’s sister. Mr. Lavington, Rainer said, had been
“a regular brick” to him—“But then he is to every one. you know”—and
the young fellow’s situation seemed, in fact to be perfectly in keeping
with his person. Apparently the only shade that had ever rested on him
was cast by the physical weakness which Faxon had already detected.
Young Rainer had been threatened with a disease of the lungs which,
according to the highest authorities, made banishment to Arizona or New
Mexico inevitable. “But luckily my uncle didn’t pack me off, as most
people would have done, without getting another opinion. Whose? Oh, an
awfully clever chap, a young doctor with a lot of new ideas, who simply
laughed at my being sent away, and said I’d do perfectly well in New
York if I didn’t dine out too much, and if I dashed off occasionally to
Northridge for a little fresh air. So it’s really my uncle’s doing that
I’m not in exile—and I feel no end better since the new chap told me I
needn’t bother.” Young Rainer went on to confess that he was extremely
fond of dining out, dancing, and other urban distractions; and Faxon,
listening to him, concluded that the physician who had refused to
cut him off altogether from these pleasures was probably a better
psychologist than his seniors.

“All the same you ought to be careful, you know.” The sense of
elder-brotherly concern that forced the words from Faxon made him, as
he spoke, slip his arm impulsively through Frank Rainer’s.

The latter met the movement with a responsive pressure. “Oh, I _am_:
awfully, awfully. And then my uncle has such an eye on me!”

“But if your uncle has such an eye on you, what does he say to your
swallowing knives out here in this Siberian wild?”

Rainer raised his fur collar with a careless gesture. “It’s not that
that does it—the cold’s good for me.”

“And it’s not the dinners and dances? What is it, then?” Faxon
good-humoredly insisted; to which his companion answered with a laugh:
“Well, my uncle says it’s being bored; and I rather think he’s right!”

His laugh ended in a spasm of coughing and a struggle for breath that
made Faxon, still holding his arm, guide him hastily into the shelter
of the fireless waiting-room.

Young Rainer had dropped down on the bench against the wall and pulled
off one of his fur gloves to grope for a handkerchief. He tossed aside
his cap and drew the handkerchief across his forehead, which was
intensely white, and beaded with moisture, though his face retained a
healthy glow. But Faxon’s gaze remained fastened to the hand he had
uncovered: it was so long, so colorless, so wasted, so much older than
the brow he passed it over.

“It’s queer—a healthy face but dying hands,” the secretary mused; he
somehow wished young Rainer had kept on his glove.

The whistle of the express drew the young men to their feet, and the
next moment two heavily-furred gentlemen had descended to the platform
and were breasting the rigor of the night. Frank Rainer introduced
them as Mr. Grisben and Mr. Balch, and Faxon, while their luggage was
being lifted into the second sleigh, discerned them, by the roving
lantern-gleam, to be an elderly gray-headed pair, apparently of the
average prosperous business cut.

They saluted their host’s nephew with friendly familiarity, and Mr.
Grisben, who seemed the spokesman of the two, ended his greeting with
a genial—“and many many more of them, dear boy!” which suggested to
Faxon that their arrival coincided with an anniversary. But he could
not press the inquiry, for the seat allotted him was at the coachman’s
side, while Frank Rainer joined his uncle’s guests inside the sleigh.

A swift flight (behind such horses as one could be sure of John
Lavington’s having) brought them to tall gate-posts, an illuminated
lodge, and an avenue on which the snow had been levelled to the
smoothness of marble. At the end of the avenue the long house
loomed through trees, its principal bulk dark but one wing sending
out a ray of welcome; and the next moment Faxon was receiving a
violent impression of warmth and light, of hot-house plants, hurrying
servants, a vast spectacular oak hall like a stage-setting, and,
in its unreal middle distance, a small concise figure, correctly
dressed, conventionally featured, and utterly unlike his rather florid
conception of the great John Lavington.

The shock of the contrast remained with him through his hurried
dressing in the large impersonally luxurious bedroom to which he had
been shown. “I don’t see where he comes in,” was the only way he could
put it, so difficult was it to fit the exuberance of Lavington’s
public personality into his host’s contracted frame and manner. Mr.
Lavington, to whom Faxon’s case had been rapidly explained by young
Rainer, had welcomed him with a sort of dry and stilted cordiality
that exactly matched his narrow face, his stiff hand, the whiff of
scent on his evening handkerchief. “Make yourself at home—at home!”
he had repeated, in a tone that suggested, on his own part, a complete
inability to perform the feat he urged on his visitor. “Any friend of
Frank’s ... delighted ... make yourself thoroughly at home!”


II

In spite of the balmy temperature and complicated conveniences of
Faxon’s bedroom, the injunction was not easy to obey. It was wonderful
luck to have found a night’s shelter under the opulent roof of
Overdale, and he tasted the physical satisfaction to the full. But
the place, for all its ingenuities of comfort, was oddly cold and
unwelcoming. He couldn’t have said why, and could only suppose that
Mr. Lavington’s intense personality—intensely negative, but intense
all the same—must, in some occult way, have penetrated every corner
of his dwelling. Perhaps, though, it was merely that Faxon himself was
tired and hungry, more deeply chilled than he had known till he came in
from the cold, and unutterably sick of all strange houses, and of the
prospect of perpetually treading other people’s stairs.

“I hope you’re not famished?” Rainer’s slim figure was in the doorway.
“My uncle has a little business to attend to with Mr. Grisben, and we
don’t dine for half an hour. Shall I fetch you, or can you find your
way down? Come straight to the dining-room—the second door on the left
of the long gallery.”

He disappeared, leaving a ray of warmth behind him, and Faxon,
relieved, lit a cigarette and sat down by the fire.

Looking about with less haste, he was struck by a detail that had
escaped him. The room was full of flowers—a mere “bachelor’s room,”
in the wing of a house opened only for a few days, in the dead middle
of a New Hampshire winter! Flowers were everywhere, not in senseless
profusion, but placed with the same conscious art he had remarked in
the grouping of the blossoming shrubs that filled the hall. A vase of
arums stood on the writing-table, a cluster of strange-hued carnations
on the stand at his elbow, and from wide bowls of glass and porcelain
clumps of freesia-bulbs diffused their melting fragrance. The fact
implied acres of glass—but that was the least interesting part of
it. The flowers themselves, their quality, selection and arrangement,
attested on some one’s part—and on whose but John Lavington’s?—a
solicitous and sensitive passion for that particular embodiment of
beauty. Well, it simply made the man, as he had appeared to Faxon, all
the harder to understand!

The half-hour elapsed, and Faxon, rejoicing at the near prospect of
food, set out to make his way to the dining-room. He had not noticed
the direction he had followed in going to his room, and was puzzled,
when he left it, to find that two staircases, of apparently equal
importance, invited him. He chose the one to his right, and reached,
at its foot, a long gallery such as Rainer had described. The gallery
was empty, the doors down its length were closed; but Rainer had said:
“The second to the left,” and Faxon, after pausing for some chance
enlightenment which did not come, laid his hand on the second knob to
the left.

The room he entered was square, with dusky picture-hung walls. In its
centre, about a table lit by veiled lamps, he fancied Mr. Lavington
and his guests to be already seated at dinner; then he perceived that
the table was covered not with viands but with papers, and that he had
blundered into what seemed to be his host’s study. As he paused in the
irresolution of embarrassment Frank Rainer looked up.

“Oh, here’s Mr. Faxon. Why not ask him——?”

Mr. Lavington, from the end of the table, reflected his nephew’s smile
in a glance of impartial benevolence.

“Certainly. Come in, Mr. Faxon. If you won’t think it a liberty——”

Mr. Grisben, who sat opposite his host, turned his solid head toward
the door. “Of course Mr. Faxon’s an American citizen?”

Frank Rainer laughed. “That’s all right!... Oh, no, not one of your
pin-pointed pens, Uncle Jack! Haven’t you got a quill somewhere?”

Mr. Balch, who spoke slowly and as if reluctantly, in a muffled voice
of which there seemed to be very little left, raised his hand to say:
“One moment: you acknowledge this to be——?”

“My last will and testament?” Rainer’s laugh redoubled. “Well, I won’t
answer for the ’last.’ It’s the first one, anyway.”

“It’s a mere formula,” Mr. Balch explained.

“Well, here goes.” Rainer dipped his quill in the inkstand his uncle
had pushed in his direction, and dashed a gallant signature across the
document.

Faxon, understanding what was expected of him, and conjecturing that
the young man was signing his will on the attainment of his majority,
had placed himself behind Mr. Grisben, and stood awaiting his turn to
affix his name to the instrument. Rainer, having signed, was about to
push the paper across the table to Mr. Balch; but the latter, again
raising his hand, said in his sad imprisoned voice: “The seal——?”

“Oh, does there have to be a seal?”

Faxon, looking over Mr. Grisben at John Lavington, saw a faint frown
between his impassive eyes. “Really, Frank!” He seemed, Faxon thought,
slightly irritated by his nephew’s frivolity.

“Who’s got a seal?” Frank Rainer continued, glancing about the table.
“There doesn’t seem to be one here.”

Mr. Grisben interposed. “A wafer will do. Lavington, you have a wafer?”

Mr. Lavington had recovered his serenity. “There must be some in one
of the drawers. But I’m ashamed to say I don’t know where my secretary
keeps these things. He ought, of course, to have seen to it that a
wafer was sent with the document.”

“Oh, hang it——” Frank Rainer pushed the paper aside: “It’s the hand
of God—and I’m hungry as a wolf. Let’s dine first, Uncle Jack.”

“I think I’ve a seal upstairs,” said Faxon suddenly.

Mr. Lavington sent him a barely perceptible smile. “So sorry to give
you the trouble——”

“Oh, I say, don’t send him after it now. Let’s wait till after dinner!”

Mr. Lavington continued to smile on his guest, and the latter, as if
under the faint coercion of the smile, turned from the room and ran
upstairs. Having taken the seal from his writing-case he came down
again, and once more opened the door of the study. No one was speaking
when he entered—they were evidently awaiting his return with the
mute impatience of hunger, and he put the seal in Rainer’s reach, and
stood watching while Mr. Grisben struck a match and held it to one of
the candles flanking the inkstand. As the wax descended on the paper
Faxon remarked again the singular emaciation, the premature physical
weariness, of the hand that, held it: he wondered if Mr. Lavington had
ever noticed his nephew’s hand, and if it were not poignantly visible
to him now.

With this thought in his mind, Faxon raised his eyes to look at
Mr. Lavington. The great man’s gaze rested on Frank Rainer with an
expression of untroubled benevolence; and at the same instant Faxon’s
attention was attracted by the presence in the room of another person,
who must have joined the group while he was upstairs searching for the
seal. The new-comer was a man of about Mr. Lavington’s age and figure,
who stood directly behind his chair, and who, at the moment when Faxon
first saw him, was gazing at young Rainer with an equal intensity of
attention. The likeness between the two men—perhaps increased by the
fact that the hooded lamps on the table left the figure behind the
chair in shadow—struck Faxon the more because of the strange contrast
in their expression. John Lavington, during his nephew’s blundering
attempt to drop the wax and apply the seal, continued to fasten on him
a look of half-amused affection; while the man behind the chair, so
oddly reduplicating the lines of his features and figure, turned on the
boy a face of pale hostility.

The impression was so startling Faxon forgot what was going on about
him. He was just dimly aware of young Rainer’s exclaiming: “Your turn,
Mr. Grisben!” of Mr. Grisben’s ceremoniously protesting: “No—no; Mr.
Faxon first,” and of the pen’s being thereupon transferred to his own
hand. He received it with a deadly sense of being unable to move, or
even to understand what was expected of him, till he became conscious
of Mr. Grisben’s paternally pointing out the precise spot on which he
was to leave his autograph. The effort to fix his attention and steady
his hand prolonged the process of signing, and when he stood up—a
strange weight of fatigue on all his limbs—the figure behind Mr.
Lavington’s chair was gone.

Faxon felt an immediate sense of relief. It was puzzling that the man’s
exit should have been so rapid and noiseless, but the door behind Mr.
Lavington was screened by a tapestry hanging, and Faxon concluded
that the unknown looker-on had merely had to raise it to pass out. At
any rate, he was gone, and with his withdrawal the strange weight was
lifted. Young Rainer was lighting a cigarette, Mr. Balch meticulously
inscribing his name at the foot of the document, Mr. Lavington—his
eyes no longer on his nephew—examining a strange white-winged orchid
in the vase at his elbow. Everything suddenly seemed to have grown
natural and simple again, and Faxon found himself responding with a
smile to the affable gesture with which his host declared: “And now,
Mr. Faxon, we’ll dine.”


III

“I wonder how I blundered into the wrong room just now; I thought you
told me to take the second door to the left,” Faxon said to Frank
Rainer as they followed the older men down the gallery.

“So I did; but I probably forgot to tell you which staircase to take.
Coming from your bedroom, I ought to have said the fourth door to the
right. It’s a puzzling house, because my uncle keeps adding to it from
year to year. He built this room last summer for his modern pictures.”

Young Rainer, pausing to open another door, touched an electric button
which sent a circle of light about the walls of a long room hung with
canvases of the French impressionist school.

Faxon advanced, attracted by a shimmering Monet, but Rainer laid a hand
on his arm.

“He bought that last week for a thundering price. But come along—I’ll
show you all this after dinner. Or _he_ will rather—he loves it.”

“Does he really love things?”

Rainer stared, clearly perplexed at the question. “Rather! Flowers and
pictures especially! Haven’t you noticed the flowers? I suppose you
think his manner’s cold; it seems so at first; but he’s really awfully
keen about things.”

Faxon looked quickly at the speaker. “Has your uncle a brother?”

“Brother? No—never had. He and my mother were the only ones.”

“Or any relation who—who looks like him? Who might be mistaken for
him?”

“Not that I ever heard of. Does he remind you of some one?”

“Yes.”

“That’s queer. We’ll ask him if he’s got a double. Come on!”

But another picture had arrested Faxon, and some minutes elapsed before
he and his young host reached the dining-room. It was a large room,
with the same conventionally handsome furniture and delicately grouped
flowers; and Faxon’s first glance showed him that only three men
were seated about the dining-table. The man who had stood behind Mr.
Lavington’s chair was not present, and no seat awaited him.

When the young men entered, Mr. Grisben was speaking, and his host,
who faced the door, sat looking down at his untouched soup-plate and
turning the spoon about in his small dry hand.

“It’s pretty late to call them rumors—they were devilish close to
facts when we left town this morning,” Mr. Grisben was saying, with an
unexpected incisiveness of tone.

Mr. Lavington laid down his spoon and smiled interrogatively. “Oh,
facts—what _are_ facts? Just the way a thing happens to look at a
given minute.”

“You haven’t heard anything from town?” Mr. Grisben persisted.

“Not a syllable. So you see ... Balch, a little more of that _petite
marmite_. Mr. Faxon ... between Frank and Mr. Grisben, please.”

The dinner progressed through a series of complicated courses,
ceremoniously dispensed by a stout butler attended by three tall
footmen, and it was evident that Mr. Lavington took a somewhat puerile
satisfaction in the pageant. That, Faxon reflected, was probably
the joint in his armor—that and the flowers. He had changed the
subject—not abruptly but firmly—when the young men entered, but Faxon
perceived that it still possessed the thoughts of the two elderly
visitors, and Mr. Balch presently observed, in a voice that seemed to
come from the last survivor down a mine-shaft: “If it _does_ come, it
will be the biggest crash since ’93.”

Mr. Lavington looked bored but polite. “Wall Street can stand crashes
better than it could then. It’s got a robuster constitution.”

“Yes; but——”

“Speaking of constitutions,” Mr. Grisben intervened: “Frank, are you
taking care of yourself?”

A flush rose to young Rainer’s cheeks.

“Why, of course! Isn’t that what I’m here for?”

“You’re here about three days in the month, aren’t you? And the rest of
the time it’s crowded restaurants and hot ballrooms in town. I thought
you were to be shipped off to New Mexico?”

“Oh, I’ve got a new man who says that’s rot.”

“Well, you don’t look as if your new man were right,” said Mr. Grisben
bluntly.

Faxon saw the lad’s color fade, and the rings of shadow deepen under
his gay eyes. At the same moment his uncle turned to him with a renewed
intensity of attention. There was such solicitude in Mr. Lavington’s
gaze that it seemed almost to fling a tangible shield between his
nephew and Mr. Grisben’s tactless scrutiny.

“We think Frank’s a good deal better,” he began; “this new doctor——”

The butler, coming up, bent discreetly to whisper a word in his ear,
and the communication caused a sudden change in Mr. Lavington’s
expression. His face was naturally so colorless that it seemed not so
much to pale as to fade, to dwindle and recede into something blurred
and blotted-out. He half rose, sat down again and sent a rigid smile
about the table.

“Will you excuse me? The telephone. Peters, go on with the dinner.”
With small precise steps he walked out of the door which one of the
footmen had hastened to throw open.

A momentary silence fell on the group; then Mr. Grisben once more
addressed himself to Rainer. “You ought to have gone, my boy; you ought
to have gone.”

The anxious look returned to the youth’s eyes. “My uncle doesn’t think
so, really.”

“You’re not a baby, to be always governed on your uncle’s opinion. You
came of age to-day, didn’t you? Your uncle spoils you ... that’s what’s
the matter....”

The thrust evidently went home, for Rainer laughed and looked down with
a slight accession of color.

“But the doctor——”

“Use your common sense, Frank! You had to try twenty doctors to find
one to tell you what you wanted to be told.”

A look of apprehension overshadowed Rainer’s gaiety. “Oh, come—I
say!... What would _you_ do?” he stammered.

“Pack up and jump on the first train.” Mr. Grisben leaned forward and
laid a firm hand on the young man’s arm. “Look here: my nephew Jim
Grisben is out there ranching on a big scale. He’ll take you in and be
glad to have you. You say your new doctor thinks it won’t do you any
good; but he doesn’t pretend to say it will do you harm, does he? Well,
then—give it a trial. It’ll take you out of hot theatres and night
restaurants, anyhow.... And all the rest of it.... Eh, Balch?”

“Go!” said Mr. Balch hollowly. “Go _at once_,” he added, as if a closer
look at the youth’s face had impressed on him the need of backing up
his friend.

Young Rainer had turned ashy-pale. He tried to stiffen his mouth into
a smile. “Do I look as bad as all that?”

Mr. Grisben was helping himself to terrapin. “You look like the day
after an earthquake,” he said concisely.

The terrapin had encircled the table, and been deliberately enjoyed by
Mr. Lavington’s three visitors (Rainer, Faxon noticed, left his plate
untouched) before the door was thrown open to re-admit their host.

Mr. Lavington advanced with an air of recovered composure. He seated
himself, picked up his napkin, and consulted the gold-monogrammed menu.
“No, don’t bring back the filet.... Some terrapin; yes....” He looked
affably about the table. “Sorry to have deserted you, but the storm has
played the deuce with the wires, and I had to wait a long time before I
could get a good connection. It must be blowing up for a blizzard.”

“Uncle Jack,” young Rainer broke out, “Mr. Grisben’s been lecturing me.”

Mr. Lavington was helping himself to terrapin. “Ah—what about?”

“He thinks I ought to have given New Mexico a show.”

“I want him to go straight out to my nephew at Santa Paz and stay there
till his next birthday.” Mr. Lavington signed to the butler to hand the
terrapin to Mr. Grisben, who, as he took a second helping, addressed
himself again to Rainer. “Jim’s in New York now, and going back the day
after to-morrow in Olyphant’s private car. I’ll ask Olyphant to squeeze
you in if you’ll go. And when you’ve been out there a week or two, in
the saddle all day and sleeping nine hours a night, I suspect you won’t
think much of the doctor who prescribed New York.”

Faxon spoke up, he knew not why. “I was out there once: it’s a splendid
life. I saw a fellow—oh, a really _bad_ case—who’d been simply made
over by it.”

“It _does_ sound jolly,” Rainer laughed, a sudden eagerness of
anticipation in his tone.

His uncle looked at him gently. “Perhaps Grisben’s right. It’s an
opportunity——”

Faxon looked up with a start: the figure dimly perceived in the study
was now more visibly and tangibly planted behind Mr. Lavington’s chair.

“That’s right, Frank: you see your uncle approves. And the trip out
there with Olyphant isn’t a thing to be missed. So drop a few dozen
dinners and be at the Grand Central the day after to-morrow at five.”

Mr. Grisben’s pleasant gray eye sought corroboration of his host, and
Faxon, in a cold anguish of suspense, continued to watch him as he
turned his glance on Mr. Lavington. One could not look at Lavington
without seeing the presence at his back, and it was clear that, the
next minute, some change in Mr. Grisben’s expression must give his
watcher a clue.

But Mr. Grisben’s expression did not change: the gaze he fixed on his
host remained unperturbed, and the clue he gave was the startling one
of not seeming to see the other figure.

Faxon’s first impulse was to look away, to look anywhere else, to
resort again to the champagne glass the watchful butler had already
brimmed; but some fatal attraction, at war in him with an overwhelming
physical resistance, held his eyes upon the spot they feared.

The figure was still standing, more distinctly, and therefore more
resemblingly, at Mr. Lavington’s back; and while the latter continued
to gaze affectionately at his nephew, his counterpart, as before, fixed
young Rainer with eyes of deadly menace.

Faxon, with what felt like an actual wrench of the muscles, dragged
his own eyes from the sight to scan the other countenances about the
table; but not one revealed the least consciousness of what he saw, and
a sense of mortal isolation sank upon him.

“It’s worth considering, certainly——” he heard Mr. Lavington
continue; and as Rainer’s face lit up, the face behind his uncle’s
chair seemed to gather into its look all the fierce weariness of old
unsatisfied hates. That was the thing that, as the minutes labored by,
Faxon was becoming most conscious of. The watcher behind the chair was
no longer merely malevolent: he had grown suddenly, unutterably tired.
His hatred seemed to well up out of the very depths of balked effort
and thwarted hopes, and the fact made him more pitiable, and yet more
dire.

Faxon’s look reverted to Mr. Lavington, as if to surprise in him a
corresponding change. At first none was visible: his pinched smile was
screwed to his blank face like a gas-light to a white-washed wall. Then
the fixity of the smile became ominous: Faxon saw that its wearer was
afraid to let it go. It was evident that Mr. Lavington was unutterably
tired too, and the discovery sent a colder current through Faxon’s
veins. Looking down at his untouched plate, he caught the soliciting
twinkle of the champagne glass; but the sight of the wine turned him
sick.

“Well, we’ll go into the details presently,” he heard Mr. Lavington
say, still on the question of his nephew’s future. “Let’s have a cigar
first. No—not here, Peters.” He turned his smile on Faxon. “When we’ve
had coffee I want to show you my pictures.”

“Oh, by the way, Uncle Jack—Mr. Faxon wants to know if you’ve got a
double?”

“A double?” Mr. Lavington, still smiling, continued to address himself
to his guest. “Not that I know of. Have you seen one, Mr. Faxon?”

Faxon thought: “My God, if I look up now they’ll _both_ be looking at
me!” To avoid raising his eyes he made as though to lift the glass to
his lips; but his hand sank inert, and he looked up. Mr. Lavington’s
glance was politely bent on him, but with a loosening of the strain
about his heart he saw that the figure behind the chair still kept its
gaze on Rainer.

“Do you think you’ve seen my double, Mr. Faxon?”

Would the other face turn if he said yes? Faxon felt a dryness in his
throat. “No,” he answered.

“Ah? It’s possible I’ve a dozen. I believe I’m extremely
usual-looking,” Mr. Lavington went on conversationally; and still the
other face watched Rainer.

“It was ... a mistake ... a confusion of memory ...” Faxon heard
himself stammer. Mr. Lavington pushed back his chair, and as he did so
Mr. Grisben suddenly leaned forward.

“Lavington! What have we been thinking of? We haven’t drunk Frank’s
health!”

Mr. Lavington reseated himself. “My dear boy!... Peters, another
bottle....” He turned to his nephew. “After such a sin of omission I
don’t presume to propose the toast myself ... but Frank knows.... Go
ahead, Grisben!”

The boy shone on his uncle. “No, no, Uncle Jack! Mr. Grisben won’t
mind. Nobody but _you_—to-day!”

The butler was replenishing the glasses. He filled Mr. Lavington’s
last, and Mr. Lavington put out his small hand to raise it.... As he
did so, Faxon looked away.

“Well, then—All the good I’ve wished you in all the past years.... I
put it into the prayer that the coming ones may be healthy and happy
and many ... and _many_, dear boy!”

Faxon saw the hands about him reach out for their glasses.
Automatically, he made the same gesture. His eyes were still on the
table, and he repeated to himself with a trembling vehemence: “I won’t
look up! I won’t.... I won’t....”

His fingers clasped the stem of the glass, and raised it to the level
of his lips. He saw the other hands making the same motion. He heard
Mr. Grisben’s genial “Hear! Hear!” and Mr. Balch’s hollow echo. He said
to himself, as the rim of the glass touched his lips:

“I won’t look up! I swear I won’t!——” and he looked.

The glass was so full that it required an extraordinary effort to hold
it there, brimming and suspended, during the awful interval before he
could trust his hand to lower it again, untouched, to the table. It was
this merciful preoccupation which saved him, kept him from crying out,
from losing his hold, from slipping down into the bottomless blackness
that gaped for him. As long as the problem of the glass engaged him he
felt able to keep his seat, manage his muscles, fit unnoticeably into
the group; but as the glass touched the table his last link with safety
snapped. He stood up and dashed out of the room.


IV

In the gallery, the instinct of self-preservation helped him to turn
back and sign to young Rainer not to follow. He stammered out something
about a touch of dizziness, and joining them presently; and the boy
waved an unsuspecting hand and drew back.

At the foot of the stairs Faxon ran against a servant. “I should like
to telephone to Weymore,” he said with dry lips.

“Sorry, sir; wires all down. We’ve been trying the last hour to get New
York again for Mr. Lavington.”

Faxon shot on to his room, burst into it, and bolted the door. The
mild lamplight lay on furniture, flowers, books, in the ashes a log
still glimmered. He dropped down on the sofa and hid his face. The
room was utterly silent, the whole house was still: nothing about him
gave a hint of what was going on, darkly and dumbly, in the horrible
room he had flown from, and with the covering of his eyes oblivion and
reassurance seemed to fall on him. But they fell for a moment only;
then his lids opened again to the monstrous vision. There it was,
stamped on his pupils, a part of him forever, an indelible horror burnt
into his body and brain. But why into his—just his? Why had he alone
been chosen to see what he had seen? What business was it of _his_,
in God’s name? Any one of the others, thus enlightened, might have
exposed the horror and defeated it; but _he_, the one weaponless and
defenceless spectator, the one whom none of the others would believe or
understand if he attempted to reveal what he knew—_he_ alone had been
singled out as the victim of this atrocious initiation!

Suddenly he sat up, listening: he had heard a step on the stairs. Some
one, no doubt, was coming to see how he was—to urge him, if he felt
better, to go down and join the smokers. Cautiously he opened his
door; yes, it was young Rainer’s step. Faxon looked down the passage,
remembered the other stairway, and darted to it. All he wanted was
to get out of the house. Not another instant would he breathe its
abominable air! What business was it of _his_, in God’s name?

He reached the opposite end of the lower gallery, and beyond it saw
the hall by which he had entered. It was empty, and on a long table he
recognized his coat and cap among the furs of the other travellers. He
got into his coat, unbolted the door, and plunged into the purifying
night.

       *       *       *       *       *

The darkness was deep, and the cold so intense that for an instant it
stopped his breathing. Then he perceived that only a thin snow was
falling, and resolutely set his face for flight. The trees along the
avenue dimly marked his way as he hastened with long strides over
the beaten snow. Gradually, while he walked, the tumult in his brain
subsided. The impulse to fly still drove him forward, but he began to
feel that he was flying from a terror of his own creating, and that
the most urgent reason for escape was the need of hiding his state, of
shunning other eyes’ scrutiny till he should regain his balance.

He had spent the long hours in the train in fruitless broodings on a
discouraging situation, and he remembered how his bitterness had turned
to exasperation when he found that the Weymore sleigh was not awaiting
him. It was absurd, of course; but, though he had joked with Rainer
over Mrs. Culme’s forgetfulness, to confess it had cost a pang. That
was what his rootless life had brought him to: for lack of a personal
stake in things his sensibility was at the mercy of such trivial
accidents.... Yes; that, and the cold and fatigue, the absence of hope
and the haunting sense of starved aptitudes, all these had brought him
to the perilous verge over which, once or twice before, his terrified
brain had hung.

Why else, in the name of any imaginable logic, human or devilish,
should he, a stranger, be singled out for this experience? What could
it mean to him, how was he related to it, what bearing had it on his
case?... Unless, indeed, it was just because he was a stranger—a
stranger everywhere—because he had no personal life, no warm strong
screen of private egotisms to shield him from exposure, that he had
developed this abnormal sensitiveness to the vicissitudes of others.
The thought pulled him up with a shudder. No! Such a fate was too
abominable; all that was strong and sound in him rejected it. A
thousand times better regard himself as ill, disorganized, deluded,
than as the predestined victim of such warnings!

He reached the gates and paused before the darkened lodge. The wind had
risen and was sweeping the snow into his face in lacerating streamers.
The cold had him in its grasp again, and he stood uncertain. Should he
put his sanity to the test and go back? He turned and looked down the
dark drive to the house. A single ray shone through the trees, evoking
a picture of the lights, the flowers, the faces grouped about that
fatal room. He turned and plunged out into the road.

He remembered that, about a mile from Overdale, the coachman had
pointed out the road to Northridge; and he began to walk in that
direction. Once in the road, he had the gale in his face, and the wet
snow on his moustache and eye-lashes instantly hardened to metal. The
same metal seemed to be driving a million blades into his throat and
lungs, but he pushed on, desperately determined, the vision of the warm
room pursuing him.

The snow in the road was deep and uneven. He stumbled across ruts and
sank into drifts, and the wind rose before him like a granite cliff.
Now and then he stopped, gasping, as if an invisible hand had tightened
an iron band about his body; then he started again, stiffening himself
against the stealthy penetration of the cold. The snow continued to
descend out of a pall of inscrutable darkness, and once or twice he
paused, fearing he had missed the road to Northridge; but, seeing no
sign of a turn, he ploughed on doggedly.

At last, feeling sure that he had walked for more than a mile, he
halted and looked back. The act of turning brought immediate relief,
first because it put his back to the wind, and then because, far down
the road, it showed him the advancing gleam of a lantern. A sleigh was
coming—a sleigh that might perhaps give him a lift to the village!
Fortified by the hope, he began to walk back toward the light. It
seemed to come forward very slowly, with unaccountable zigzags and
waverings; and even when he was within a few yards of it he could catch
no sound of sleigh-bells. Then the light paused and became stationary
by the roadside, as though carried by a pedestrian who had stopped,
exhausted by the cold. The thought made Faxon hasten on, and a moment
later he was stooping over a motionless figure huddled against the
snow-bank. The lantern had dropped from its bearer’s hand, and Faxon,
fearfully raising it, threw its light into the face of Frank Rainer.

“Rainer! What on earth are you doing here?”

The boy smiled back through his pallor. “What are _you_, I’d like
to know?” he retorted; and, scrambling to his feet with a clutch on
Faxon’s arm, he added gaily: “Well, I’ve run you down, anyhow!”

Faxon stood confounded, his heart sinking. The lad’s face was gray.

“What madness——” he began.

“Yes, it _is_. What on earth did you do it for?”

“I? Do what?... Why, I ... I was just taking a walk.... I often walk at
night....”

Frank Rainer burst into a laugh. “On such nights? Then you hadn’t
bolted?”

“Bolted?”

“Because I’d done something to offend you? My uncle thought you had.”

Faxon grasped his arm. “Did your uncle send you after me?”

“Well, he gave me an awful rowing for not going up to your room with
you when you said you were ill. And when we found you’d gone we were
frightened—and he was awfully upset—so I said I’d catch you....
You’re _not_ ill, are you?”

“Ill? No. Never better.” Faxon picked up the lantern. “Come; let’s go
back. It was awfully hot in that dining-room,” he added.

“Yes; I hoped it was only that.”

They trudged on in silence for a few minutes; then Faxon questioned:
“You’re not too done up?”

“Oh, no. It’s a lot easier with the wind behind us.”

“All right. Don’t talk any more.”

They pushed ahead, walking, in spite of the light that guided them,
more slowly than Faxon had walked alone into the gale. The fact of his
companion’s stumbling against a drift gave him a pretext for saying:
“Take hold of my arm,” and Rainer, obeying, gasped out: “I’m blown!”

“So am I. Who wouldn’t be?”

“What a dance you led me! If it hadn’t been for one of the servants’
happening to see you——”

“Yes: all right. And now, won’t you kindly shut up?”

Rainer laughed and hung on him. “Oh, the cold doesn’t hurt me....”

For the first few minutes after Rainer had overtaken him, anxiety for
the lad had been Faxon’s only thought. But as each laboring step
carried them nearer to the spot he had been fleeing, the reasons for
his flight grew more ominous and more insistent. No, he was not ill;
he was not distraught and deluded—he was the instrument singled out
to warn and save; and here he was, irresistibly driven, dragging the
victim back to his doom!

The intensity of the conviction had almost checked his steps. But what
could he do or say? At all costs he must get Rainer out of the cold,
into the house and into his bed. After that he would act.

The snow-fall was thickening, and as they reached a stretch of the road
between open fields the wind took them at an angle, lashing their faces
with barbed thongs. Rainer stopped to take breath, and Faxon felt the
heavier pressure of his arm.

“When we get to the lodge, can’t we telephone to the stable for a
sleigh?”

“If they’re not all asleep at the lodge.”

“Oh, I’ll manage. Don’t talk!” Faxon ordered; and they plodded on....

At length the lantern ray showed ruts that curved away from the road
under tree-darkness.

Faxon’s spirits rose. “There’s the gate! We’ll be there in five
minutes.”

As he spoke he caught, above the boundary hedge, the gleam of a light
at the farther end of the dark avenue. It was the same light that had
shone on the scene of which every detail was burnt into his brain; and
he felt again its overpowering reality. No—he couldn’t let the boy go
back!

They were at the lodge at last, and Faxon was hammering on the door. He
said to himself: “I’ll get him inside first, and make them give him a
hot drink. Then I’ll see—I’ll find an argument....”

There was no answer to his knocking, and after an interval Rainer said:
“Look here—we’d better go on.”

“No!”

“I can, perfectly——”

“You sha’n’t go to the house, I say!” Faxon furiously redoubled his
blows, and at length steps sounded on the stairs. Rainer was leaning
against the lintel, and as the door opened the light from the hall
flashed on his pale face and fixed eyes. Faxon caught him by the arm
and drew him in.

“It _was_ cold out there,” he sighed; and then, abruptly, as if
invisible shears at a single stroke had cut every muscle in his body,
he swerved, drooped on Faxon’s arm, and seemed to sink into nothing at
his feet.

The lodge-keeper and Faxon bent over him, and somehow, between them,
lifted him into the kitchen and laid him on a sofa by the stove.

The lodge-keeper, stammering: “I’ll ring up the house,” dashed out
of the room. But Faxon heard the words without heeding them: omens
mattered nothing now, beside this woe fulfilled. He knelt down to undo
the fur collar about Rainer’s throat, and as he did so he felt a warm
moisture on his hands. He held them up, and they were red....


V

The palms threaded their endless line along the yellow river. The
little steamer lay at the wharf, and George Faxon, sitting in the
veranda of the wooden hotel, idly watched the coolies carrying the
freight across the gang-plank.

He had been looking at such scenes for two months. Nearly five had
elapsed since he had descended from the train at Northridge and
strained his eyes for the sleigh that was to take him to Weymore:
Weymore, which he was never to behold!... Part of the interval—the
first part—was still a great gray blur. Even now he could not be quite
sure how he had got back to Boston, reached the house of a cousin, and
been thence transferred to a quiet room looking out on snow under bare
trees. He looked out a long time at the same scene, and finally one day
a man he had known at Harvard came to see him and invited him to go out
on a business trip to the Malay Peninsula.

“You’ve had a bad shake-up, and it’ll do you no end of good to get away
from things.”

When the doctor came the next day it turned out that he knew of the
plan and approved it. “You ought to be quiet for a year. Just loaf and
look at the landscape,” he advised.

Faxon felt the first faint stirrings of curiosity.

“What’s been the matter with me, anyhow?”

“Well, over-work, I suppose. You must have been bottling up for a bad
breakdown before you started for New Hampshire last December. And the
shock of that poor boy’s death did the rest.”

Ah, yes—Rainer had died. He remembered....

He started for the East, and gradually, by imperceptible degrees,
life crept back into his weary bones and leaden brain. His friend was
very considerate and forbearing, and they travelled slowly and talked
little. At first Faxon had felt a great shrinking from whatever touched
on familiar things. He seldom looked at a newspaper, he never opened
a letter without a moment’s contraction of the heart. It was not that
he had any special cause for apprehension, but merely that a great
trail of darkness lay on everything. He had looked too deep down into
the abyss.... But little by little health and energy returned to him,
and with them the common promptings of curiosity. He was beginning to
wonder how the world was going, and when, presently, the hotel-keeper
told him there were no letters for him in the steamer’s mail-bag, he
felt a distinct sense of disappointment. His friend had gone into
the jungle on a long excursion, and he was lonely, unoccupied, and
wholesomely bored. He got up and strolled into the stuffy reading-room.

There he found a game of dominoes, a mutilated picture-puzzle, some
copies of _Zion’s Herald_, and a pile of New York and London newspapers.

He began to glance through the papers, and was disappointed to find
that they were less recent than he had hoped. Evidently the last
numbers had been carried off by luckier travellers. He continued to
turn them over, picking out the American ones first. These, as it
happened, were the oldest: they dated back to December and January. To
Faxon, however, they had all the flavor of novelty, since they covered
the precise period during which he had virtually ceased to exist. It
had never before occurred to him to wonder what had happened in the
world during that interval of obliteration; but now he felt a sudden
desire to know.

To prolong the pleasure, he began by sorting the papers
chronologically, and as he found and spread out the earliest number,
the date at the top of the page entered into his consciousness like a
key slipping into a lock. It was the seventeenth of December: the date
of the day after his arrival at Northridge. He glanced at the first
page and read in blazing characters: “Reported Failure of Opal Cement
Company. Lavington’s Name Involved. Gigantic Exposure of Corruption
Shakes Wall Street to Its Foundations.”

He read on, and when he had finished the first paper he turned
to the next. There was a gap of three days, but the Opal Cement
“Investigation” still held the centre of the stage. From its complex
revelations of greed and ruin his eye wandered to the death notices,
and he read: “Rainer. Suddenly, at Northridge, New Hampshire, Francis
John, only son of the late....”

His eyes clouded, and he dropped the newspaper and sat for a long time
with his face in his hands. When he looked up again he noticed that
his gesture had pushed the other papers from the table and scattered
them on the floor at his feet. The uppermost lay spread out before him,
and heavily his eyes began their search again. “John Lavington comes
forward with plan for reconstructing Company. Offers to put in ten
millions of his own—The proposal under consideration by the District
Attorney.”

Ten millions ... ten millions of his own. But if John Lavington was
ruined?... Faxon stood up with a cry. That was it, then—that was what
the warning meant! And if he had not fled from it, dashed wildly away
from it into the night, he might have broken the spell of iniquity, the
powers of darkness might not have prevailed! He caught up the pile of
newspapers and began to glance through each in turn for the headline:
“Wills Admitted to Probate.” In the last of all he found the paragraph
he sought, and it stared up at him as if with Rainer’s dying eyes.

That—_that_ was what he had done! The powers of pity had singled him
out to warn and save, and he had closed his ears to their call, had
washed his hands of it, and fled. Washed his hands of it! That was the
word. It caught him back to the dreadful moment in the lodge when,
raising himself up from Rainer’s side, he had looked at his hands and
seen that they were red....




  A MESSENGER

  BY

  MARY RAYMOND SHIPMAN ANDREWS




The Berserker of the North, because he believed in the directing
power of the gods, knew no fear. Death or life—it was meted out by a
destiny that could not err. In song and story he has been one of the
most attractive figures of the past; far more attractive in his savage
virtues than the more sensuous heroes of Greece and Rome. In this story
he lives again in the American boy who has his ancestor’s inexplicable
uplift of spirit in the presence of danger and his implicit faith in
“the God of battles and the beauty of holiness.” The ideal of Miles
Morgan is such a man as Chinese Gordon, who, not only in youth but all
through life, had eyes for “the vision splendid.”

The ethical value of “A Messenger” may be summed up in the words of the
General: “There is nothing in Americanism to prevent either inspiration
or heroism.”




A MESSENGER[24]

  How oft do they their silver bowers leave,
  To come to succour us that succour want!
  How oft do they with golden pineons cleave
  The flitting skyes, like flying Pursuivant,
  Against fowle feendes to ayd us militant!
  They for us fight, they watch and dewly ward,
  And their bright Squadrons round about us plant;
  And all for love, and nothing for reward.
  O! Why should heavenly God to men have such regard?

  —_Spenser’s “Faerie Queene.”_


That the other world of our hope rests on no distant, shining star,
but lies about us as an atmosphere, unseen yet near, is the belief of
many. The veil of material life shades earthly eyes, they say, from
the glories in which we ever are. But sometimes when the veil wears
thin in mortal stress, or is caught away by a rushing, mighty wind of
inspiration, the trembling human soul, so bared, so purified, may look
down unimagined heavenly vistas, and messengers may steal across the
shifting boundary, breathing hope and the air of a brighter world. And
of him who speaks his vision, men say “He is mad,” or “He has dreamed.”

       *       *       *       *       *

The group of officers in the tent was silent for a long half minute
after Colonel Wilson’s voice had stopped. Then the General spoke.

“There is but one thing to do,” he said. “We must get word to Captain
Thornton at once.”

The Colonel thought deeply a moment, and glanced at the orderly outside
the tent. “Flannigan!” The man, wheeling swiftly, saluted. “Present
my compliments to Lieutenant Morgan and say that I should like to see
him here at once,” and the soldier went off, with the quick military
precision in which there is no haste and no delay.

“You have some fine, powerful young officers, Colonel,” said the
General casually. “I suppose we shall see in Lieutenant Morgan one of
the best. It will take strength and brains both, perhaps, for this
message.”

A shadow of a smile touched the Colonel’s lips. “I think I have chosen
a capable man, General,” was all he said.

Against the doorway of the tent the breeze blew the flap lazily back
and forth. A light rain fell with muffled gentle insistence on the
canvas over their heads, and out through the opening the landscape
was blurred—the wide stretch of monotonous, billowy prairie, the
sluggish, shining river, bending in the distance about the base of
Black Wind Mountain—Black Wind Mountain, whose high top lifted, though
it was almost June, a white point of snow above dark pine ridges of
the hills below. The five officers talked a little as they waited,
but spasmodically, absent-mindedly. A shadow blocked the light of the
entrance, and in the doorway stood a young man, undersized, slight,
blond. He looked inquiringly at the Colonel.

“You sent for me, sir?” and the General and his aide, and the grizzled
old Captain, and the big, fresh-faced young one, all watched him.

In direct, quiet words—words whose bareness made them dramatic for the
weight of possibility they carried—the Colonel explained. Black Wolf
and his band were out on the war-path. A soldier coming in wounded,
escaped from the massacre of the post at Devil’s Hoof Gap, had reported
it. With the large command known to be here camped on Sweetstream Fork,
they would not come this way; they would swerve up the Gunpowder River
twenty miles away, destroying the settlement and Little Fort Slade,
and would sweep on, probably for a general massacre, up the Great Horn
as far as Fort Doncaster. He himself, with the regiment, would try to
save Fort Slade, but in the meantime Captain Thornton’s troop, coming
to join him, ignorant that Black Wolf had taken the war-path, would be
directly in their track. Some one must be sent to warn them, and of
course the fewer the quicker. Lieutenant Morgan would take a sergeant,
the Colonel ordered quietly, and start at once.

In the misty light inside the tent, the young officer looked hardly
more than seventeen years old as he stood listening. His small figure
was light, fragile; his hair was blond to an extreme, a thick thatch of
pale gold; and there was about him, among these tanned, stalwart men in
uniform, a presence, an effect of something unusual, a simplicity out
of place yet harmonious, which might have come with a little child into
a scene like this. His large blue eyes were fixed on the Colonel as he
talked, and in them was just such a look of innocent, pleased wonder,
as might be in a child’s eyes, who had been told to leave studying and
go pick violets. But as the Colonel ended he spoke, and the few words
he said, the few questions he asked, were full of poise, of crisp
directness. As the General volunteered a word or two, he turned to him
and answered with a very charming deference, a respect that was yet
full of gracious ease, the unconscious air of a man to whom generals
are first as men, and then as generals. The slight figure in its dark
uniform was already beyond the tent doorway when the Colonel spoke
again, with a shade of hesitation in his manner.

“Mr. Morgan!” and the young officer turned quickly. “I think it may be
right to warn you that there is likely to be more than usual danger in
your ride.”

“Yes, sir.” The fresh, young voice had a note of inquiry.

“You will—you will”—what was it the Colonel wanted to say? He
finished abruptly. “Choose the man carefully who goes with you.”

“Thank you, Colonel,” Morgan responded heartily, but with a hint of
bewilderment. “I shall take Sergeant O’Hara,” and he was gone.

There was a touch of color in the Colonel’s face, and he sighed as if
glad to have it over. The General watched him, and slowly, after a
pause, he demanded:

“May I ask, Colonel, why you chose that blond baby to send on a mission
of uncommon danger and importance?”

The Colonel answered quietly: “There were several reasons,
General—good ones. The blond baby”—that ghost of a smile touched the
Colonel’s lips again—“the blond baby has some remarkable qualities. He
never loses his head; he has uncommon invention and facility of getting
out of bad holes; he rides light and so can make a horse last longer
than most, and”—the Colonel considered a moment—“I may say he has no
fear of death. Even among my officers he is known for the quality of
his courage. There is one more reason: he is the most popular man I
have, both with officers and men; if anything happened to Morgan the
whole command would race into hell after the devils that did it, before
they would miss their revenge.”

The General reflected, pulling at his moustache. “It seems a bit like
taking advantage of his popularity,” he said.

“It is,” the Colonel threw back quickly. “It’s just that. But that’s
what one must do—a commanding officer—isn’t it so, General? In this
war music we play on human instruments, and if a big chord comes out
stronger for the silence of a note, the note must be silenced—that’s
all. It’s cruel, but it’s fighting; it’s the game.”

The General, as if impressed with the tense words, did not respond, and
the other officers stared at the Colonel’s face, as carved, as stern
as if done in marble—a face from which the warm, strong heart seldom
shone, held back always by the stronger will.

The big, fresh- young Captain broke the silence. “Has the
General ever heard of the trick Morgan played on Sun Boy, sir?” he
asked.

“Tell the General, Captain Booth,” the Colonel said briefly, and the
Captain turned toward the higher officer.

“It was apropos of what the Colonel said of his inventive faculties,
General,” he began. “A year ago the youngster with a squad of ten men
walked into Sun Boy’s camp of seventy-five warriors. Morgan had made
quite a pet of a young Sioux, who was our prisoner for five months,
and the boy had taught him a lot of the language, and assured him that
he would have the friendship of the band in return for his kindness to
Blue Arrow—that was the chap’s name. So he thought he was safe; but it
turned out that Blue Arrow’s father, a chief, had got into a row with
Sun Boy, and the latter would not think of ratifying the boy’s promise.
So there was Morgan with his dozen men, in a nasty enough fix. He knew
plenty of Indian talk to understand that they were discussing what
they would do with him, and it wasn’t pleasant.

“All of a sudden he had an inspiration. He tells the story himself,
sir, and I assure you he’d make you laugh—Morgan is a wonderful
mimic. Well, he remembered suddenly, as I said, that he was a mighty
good ventriloquist, and he saw his chance. He gave a great jump like
a startled fawn, and threw up his arms and stared like one demented
into the tree over their heads. There was a mangy-looking crow
sitting up there on a branch, and Morgan pointed at him as if at
something marvellous, supernatural, and all those fool Indians stopped
pow-wowing and stared up after him, as curious as monkeys. Then to all
appearances, the crow began to talk. Morgan said they must have thought
that spirits didn’t speak very choice Sioux, but he did his best. The
bird cawed out: “‘Oh, Sun Boy, great chief, beware what you do!’

“And then the real bird flapped its wings and Morgan thought it was
going to fly, and he was lost. But it settled back again on the branch,
and Morgan proceeded to caw on:

“‘Hurt not the white man, or the curses of the gods will come upon Sun
Boy and his people.’

“And he proceeded to give a list of what would happen if the Indians
touched a hair of their heads. By this time the red devils were all
down on their stomachs, moaning softly whenever Morgan stopped cawing.
He said he quite got into the spirit of it, and would have liked to go
on some time, but he was beginning to get hoarse, and besides he was in
deadly terror for fear the crow would fly before he got to the point.
So he had the spirit order them to give the white men their horses and
turn them loose instanter; and just as he got all through, off went the
thing with a big flap and a parting caw on its own account. I wish I
could tell it as Morgan does—you’d think he was a bird and an Indian
rolled together. He’s a great actor spoiled, that lad.”

“You leave out a fine point, to my mind, Captain Booth,” the Colonel
said quickly. “About his going back.”

“Oh! certainly that ought to be told,” said the Captain, and the
General’s eyes turned to him again. “Morgan forgot to see young Blue
Arrow, his friend, before he got away, and nothing would do but that he
should go back and speak to him. He said the boy would be disappointed.
The men were visibly uneasy at his going, but that didn’t affect him.
He ordered them to wait, and back he went, pell-mell, all alone into
that horde of fiends. They hadn’t got over their funk, luckily, and he
saw Blue Arrow and made his party call and got out again all right. He
didn’t tell that himself, but Sergeant O’Hara made the camp ring with
it. He adores Morgan, and claims that he doesn’t know what fear is. I
believe it’s about so. I’ve seen him in a fight three times now. His
cap always goes off—he loses a cap every blessed scrimmage—and with
that yellow mop of hair, and a sort of rapt expression he gets, he
looks like a child saying its prayers all the time he is slashing and
shooting like a berserker.” Captain Booth faced abruptly toward the
Colonel. “I beg your pardon for talking so long, sir,” he said. “You
know we’re all rather keen about little Miles Morgan.”

The General lifted his head suddenly. “Miles Morgan?” he demanded. “Is
his name Miles Morgan?”

The Colonel nodded. “Yes. The grandson of the old Bishop—named for
him.”

“Lord!” ejaculated the General. “Miles Morgan was my earliest friend,
my friend until he died! This must be Jim’s son—Miles’s only child.
And Jim is dead these ten years,” he went on rapidly. “I’ve lost track
of him since the Bishop died, but I knew Jim left children. Why, he
married”—he searched rapidly in his memory—“he married a daughter of
General Fitzbrian’s. This boy’s got the church and the army both in
him. I knew his mother,” he went on, talking to the Colonel, garrulous
with interest. “Irish and fascinating she was—believed in fairies and
ghosts and all that, as her father did before her. A clever woman, but
with the superstitious, wild Irish blood strong in her. Good Lord! I
wish I’d known that was Miles Morgan’s grandson.”

The Colonel’s voice sounded quiet and rather cold after the General’s
impulsive enthusiasm. “You have summed him up by his antecedents,
General,” he said. “The church and the army—both strains are strong.
He is deeply religious.”

The General looked thoughtful. “Religious, eh? And popular? They don’t
always go together.”

Captain Booth spoke quickly. “It’s not that kind, General,” he said.
“There’s no cant in the boy. He’s more popular for it—that’s often so
with the genuine thing, isn’t it? I sometimes think”—the young Captain
hesitated and smiled a trifle deprecatingly—“that Morgan is much of
the same stuff as Gordon—Chinese Gordon; the martyr stuff, you know.
But it seems a bit rash to compare an every-day American youngster to
an inspired hero.”

“There’s nothing in Americanism to prevent either inspiration or
heroism that I know of,” the General affirmed stoutly, his fine old
head up, his eyes gleaming with pride of his profession.

Out through the open doorway, beyond the slapping tent-flap, the keen,
gray eyes of the Colonel were fixed musingly on two black points which
crawled along the edge of the dulled silver of the distant river—Miles
Morgan and Sergeant O’Hara had started.

       *       *       *       *       *

“Sergeant!” They were eight miles out now, and the camp had disappeared
behind the elbow of Black Wind Mountain. “There’s something wrong with
your horse. Listen! He’s not loping evenly.” The soft cadence of eight
hoofs on earth had somewhere a lighter and then a heavier note; the ear
of a good horseman tells in a minute, as a musician’s ear at a false
note, when an animal saves one foot ever so slightly, to come down
harder on another.

“Yessirr. The Lieutenant’ll remimber ’tis the horrse that had a bit of
a spavin. Sure I thot ’twas cured, and ’tis the kindest baste in the
rigiment f’r a pleasure ride, sorr—that willin’ ’tis. So I tuk it. I
think ’tis only the stiffness at furrst aff. ’Twill wurruk aff later.
Plaze God, I’ll wallop him.” And the Sergeant walloped with a will.

But the kindest beast in the regiment failed to respond except with a
plunge and increased lameness. Soon there was no more question of his
incapacity.

Lieutenant Morgan halted his mount, and, looking at the woe-begone
O’Hara, laughed. “A nice trick this is, Sergeant,” he said, “to start
out on a trip to dodge Indians with a spavined horse. Why didn’t you
get a broomstick? Now go back to camp as fast as you can go; and that
horse ought to be blistered when you get there. See if you can’t really
cure him. He’s too good to be shot.” He patted the gray’s nervous head,
and the beast rubbed it gently against his sleeve, quiet under his hand.

“Yessirr. The Lieutenant’ll ride slow, sorr, f’r me to catch up on ye,
sorr?”

Miles Morgan smiled and shook his head. “Sorry, Sergeant, but there’ll
be no slow riding in this. I’ll have to press right on without you;
I must be at Massacre Mountain to-night to catch Captain Thornton
to-morrow.”

Sergeant O’Hara’s chin dropped. “Sure the Lieutenant’ll niver be
thinkin’ to g’wan alone—widout _me_?” and with all the Sergeant’s
respect for his superiors, it took the Lieutenant ten valuable
minutes to get the man started back, shaking his head and muttering
forebodings, to the camp.

It was quiet riding on alone. There were a few miles to go before
there was any chance of Indians, and no particular lookout to be kept,
so he put the horse ahead rapidly while he might, and suddenly he
found himself singing softly as he galloped. How the words had come
to him he did not know, for no conscious train of thought had brought
them; but they surely fitted to the situation, and a pleasant sense
of companionship, of safety, warmed him as the swing of an old hymn
carried his voice along with it.

  “God shall charge His angel legions
    Watch and ward o’er thee to keep;
  Though thou walk through hostile regions,
    Though in desert wilds thou sleep.”

Surely a man riding toward—perhaps through—skulking Indian hordes,
as he must, could have no better message reach him than that. The bent
of his mind was toward mysticism, and while he did not think the train
of reasoning out, could not have said that he believed it so, yet the
familiar lines flashing suddenly, clearly, on the curtain of his mind,
seemed to him, very simply, to be sent from a larger thought than his
own. As a child might take a strong hand held out as it walked over
rough country, so he accepted this quite readily and happily, as from
that Power who was never far from him, and in whose service, beyond
most people, he lived and moved. Low but clear and deep his voice went
on, following one stanza with its mate:

  “Since with pure and firm affection
    Thou on God hast set thy love,
  With the wings of His protection
    He will shield thee from above.”

The simplicity of his being sheltered itself in the broad promise of
the words.

Light-heartedly he rode on and on, though now more carefully; lying
flat and peering over the crests of hills a long time before he crossed
their tops; going miles perhaps through ravines; taking advantage of
every bit of cover where a man and a horse might be hidden; travelling
as he had learned to travel in three years of experience in this
dangerous Indian country, where a shrub taken for granted might mean a
warrior, and that warrior a hundred others within signal. It was his
plan to ride until about twelve—to reach Massacre Mountain, and there
rest his horse and himself till gray daylight. There was grass there
and a spring—two good and innocent things that had been the cause of
the bad, dark thing which had given the place its name. A troop under
Captain James camping at this point, because of the water and grass,
had been surprised and wiped out by five hundred Indian braves of the
wicked and famous Red Crow. There were ghastly signs about the place
yet; Morgan had seen them, but soldiers may not have nerves, and it was
good camping ground.

On through the valleys and half-way up the <DW72>s, which rolled here
far away into a still wilder world, the young man rode. Behind the
distant hills in the east a glow like fire flushed the horizon. A
rim of pale gold lifted sharply over the ridge; a huge round ball of
light pushed faster, higher, and lay, a bright world on the edge of the
world, great against the sky—the moon had risen. The twilight trembled
as the yellow rays struck into its depths, and deepened, dying into
purple shadows. Across the plain zigzagged the pools of a level stream,
as if a giant had spilled handfuls of quicksilver here and there.

Miles Morgan, riding, drank in all the mysterious, wild, beauty, as a
man at ease; as open to each fair impression as if he were not riding
each moment into deeper danger, as if his every sense were not on
guard. On through the shining moonlight and in the shadow of the hills
he rode, and, where he might, through the trees, and stopped to listen
often, to stare at the hill-tops, to question a heap of stones or a
bush.

At last, when his leg-weary horse was beginning to stumble a bit, he
saw, as he came around a turn, Massacre Mountain’s dark head rising
in front of him, only half a mile away. The spring trickled its low
song, as musical, as limpidly pure as if it had never run scarlet. The
picketed horse fell to browsing and Miles sighed restfully as he laid
his head on his saddle and fell instantly to sleep with the light of
the moon on his damp, fair hair. But he did not sleep long. Suddenly
with a start he awoke, and sat up sharply, and listened. He heard the
horse still munching grass near him, and made out the shadow of its
bulk against the sky; he heard the stream, softly falling and calling
to the waters where it was going. That was all. Strain his hearing as
he might he could hear nothing else in the still night. Yet there was
something. It might not be sound or sight, but there was a presence, a
something—he could not explain. He was alert in every nerve. Suddenly
the words of the hymn he had been singing in the afternoon flashed
again into his mind, and, with his cocked revolver in his hand, alone,
on guard, in the midnight of the savage wilderness, the words came that
were not even a whisper:

  “God shall charge His angel legions
    Watch and ward o’er thee to keep;
  Though thou walk through hostile regions,
    Though in desert wilds thou sleep.”

He gave a contented sigh and lay down. What was there to worry
about? It was just his case for which the hymn was written. “Desert
wilds”—that surely meant Massacre Mountain, and why should he not
sleep here quietly, and let the angels keep their watch and ward? He
closed his eyes with a smile. But sleep did not come, and soon his eyes
were open again, staring into blackness, thinking, thinking.

It was Sunday when he started out on this mission, and he fell to
remembering the Sunday nights at home—long, long ago they seemed now.
The family sang hymns after supper always; his mother played, and the
children stood around her—five of them, Miles and his brothers and
sisters. There was a little sister with brown hair about her shoulders,
who always stood by Miles, leaned against him, held his hand, looked up
at him with adoring eyes—he could see those uplifted eyes now, shining
through the darkness of this lonely place. He remembered the big,
home-like room; the crackling fire; the peaceful atmosphere of books
and pictures; the dumb things about its walls that were yet eloquent
to him of home and family; the sword that his great-grandfather had
worn under Washington; the old ivories that another great-grandfather,
the Admiral, had brought from China; the portraits of Morgans of half
a dozen generations which hung there; the magazine table, the books
and books and books. A pang of desperate homesickness suddenly shook
him. He wanted them—his own. Why should he, their best-beloved, throw
away his life—a life filled to the brim with hope and energy and high
ideals—on this futile quest? He knew quite as well as the General or
the Colonel that his ride was but a forlorn hope. As he lay there,
longing so, in the dangerous dark, he went about the library at home
in his thought and placed each familiar belonging where he had known
it all his life. And as he finished, his mother’s head shone darkly
golden by the piano; her fingers swept over the keys; he heard all
their voices, the dear never-forgotten voices. Hark! They were singing
his hymn—little Alice’s reedy note lifted above the others—“God shall
charge His angel legions——”

Now! He was on his feet with a spring, and his revolver pointed
steadily. This time there was no mistaking—something had rustled in
the bushes. There was but one thing for it to be—Indians. Without
realizing what he did, he spoke sharply.

“Who goes there?” he demanded, and out of the darkness a voice answered
quietly:

“A friend.”

“A friend?” With a shock of relief the pistol dropped by his side, and
he stood tense, waiting. How might a friend be here, at midnight in
this desert? As the thought framed itself swiftly the leaves parted,
and his straining eyes saw the figure of a young man standing before
him.

“How came you here?” demanded Miles sternly. “Who are you?”

Even in the dimness he could see the radiant smile that answered him.
The calm voice spoke again: “You will understand that later. I am here
to help you.”

As if a door had suddenly opened into that lighted room of which he
dreamed, Miles felt a sense of tranquillity, of happiness stirring
through him. Never in his life had he known such a sudden utter
confidence in any one, such a glow of eager friendliness as this
half-seen, mysterious stranger inspired. “It is because I was lonelier
than I knew,” he said mentally. “It is because human companionship
gives courage to the most self-reliant of us;” and somewhere in the
words he was aware of a false note, but he did not stop to place it.

The low, even voice of the stranger spoke again. “There are Indians on
your trail,” he said. “A small band of Black Wolf’s scouts. But don’t
be troubled. They will not hurt you.”

“You escaped from them?” demanded Miles eagerly, and again the light of
a swift smile shone into the night. “You came to save me—how was it?
Tell me, so that we can plan. It is very dark yet, but hadn’t we better
ride? Where is your horse?”

He threw the earnest questions rapidly across the black night, and the
unhurried voice answered him. “No,” it said, and the verdict was not to
be disputed. “You must stay here.”

Who this man might be or how he came Miles could not tell, but this
much he knew, without reason for knowing it; it was some one stronger
than he, in whom he could trust. As the new-comer had said, it would
be time enough later to understand the rest. Wondering a little at his
own swift acceptance of an unknown authority, wondering more at the
peace which wrapped him as an atmosphere at the sound of the stranger’s
voice, Miles made a place for him by his side, and the two talked
softly to the plashing undertone of the stream.

Easily, naturally, Miles found himself telling how he had been
homesick, longing for his people. He told him of the big familiar room,
and of the old things that were in it, that he loved; of his mother;
of little Alice, and her baby adoration for the big brother; of how
they had always sung hymns together Sunday night; he never for a moment
doubted the stranger’s interest and sympathy—he knew that he cared to
hear.

“There is a hymn,” Miles said, “that we used to sing a lot—it was
my favorite; ’Miles’s hymn,’ the family called it. Before you came
to-night, while I lay there getting lonelier every minute, I almost
thought I heard them singing it. You may not have heard it, but it has
a grand swing. I always think”—he hesitated—“it always seems to me as
if the God of battles and the beauty of holiness must both have filled
the man’s mind who wrote it.” He stopped, surprised at his own lack of
reserve, at the freedom with which, to this friend of an hour, he spoke
his inmost heart.

“I know,” the stranger said gently. There was silence for a moment, and
then the wonderful low tones, beautiful, clear, beyond any voice Miles
had ever heard, began again, and it was as if the great sweet notes of
an organ whispered the words:

  “God shall charge His angel legions
    Watch and ward o’er thee to keep;
  Though thou walk through hostile regions,
    Though in desert wilds thou sleep.”

“Great Heavens!” gasped Miles. “How could you know I meant that? Why,
this is marvellous—why, this”—he stared, speechless, at the dim
outlines of the face which he had never seen before to-night, but
which seemed to him already familiar and dear beyond all reason. As
he gazed the tall figure rose, lightly towering above him. “Look!” he
said, and Miles was on his feet. In the east, beyond the long sweep of
the prairie, was a faint blush against the blackness; already threads
of broken light, of pale darkness, stirred through the pall of the air;
the dawn was at hand.

“We must saddle,” Miles said, “and be off. Where is your horse
picketed?” he demanded again.

But the strange young man stood still; and now his arm was stretched
pointing. “Look,” he said again, and Miles followed the direction with
his eyes.

From the way he had come, in that fast-growing glow at the edge of the
sky, sharp against the mist of the little river, crept slowly half
a dozen pin points, and Miles, watching their tiny movement, knew
that they were ponies bearing Indian braves. He turned hotly to his
companion.

“It’s your fault,” he said. “If I’d had my way we’d have ridden from
here an hour ago. Now here we are caught like rats in a trap; and who’s
to do my work and save Thornton’s troop—who’s to save them—God!” The
name was a prayer, not an oath.

“Yes,” said the quiet voice at his side, “God,”—and for a second there
was a silence that was like an Amen.

Quickly, without a word, Miles turned and began to saddle. Then
suddenly, as he pulled at the girth, he stopped. “It’s no use,” he
said. “We can’t get away except over the rise, and they’ll see us
there;” he nodded at the hill which rose beyond the camping ground
three hundred yards away, and stretched in a long, level sweep into
other hills and the west. “Our chance is that they’re not on my trail
after all—it’s quite possible.” There was a tranquil unconcern about
the figure near him; his own bright courage caught the meaning of its
relaxed lines with a bound of pleasure. “As you say, it’s best to stay
here,” he said, and as if thinking aloud—“I believe you must always be
right.” Then he added, as if his very soul would speak itself to this
wonderful new friend: “We can’t be killed, unless the Lord wills it,
and if he does it’s right. Death is only the step into life; I suppose
when we know that life, we will wonder how we could have cared for this
one.”

Through the gray light the stranger turned his face swiftly, bent
toward Miles, and smiled once again, and the boy thought suddenly of
the martyrdom of St. Stephen, and how those who were looking “saw his
face as it had been the face of an angel.”

Across the plain, out of the mist-wreaths, came rushing, scurrying,
the handful of Indian braves. Pale light streamed now from the east,
filtering over a hushed world. Miles faced across the plain, stood
close to the tall stranger whose shape, as the dawn touched it, seemed
to rise beyond the boy’s slight figure wonderfully large and high.
There was a sense of unending power, of alertness of great, easy
movement about him; one might have looked at him, and looking away
again, have said that wings were folded about him. But Miles did not
see him. His eyes were on the fast-nearing, galloping ponies, each
with its load of filthy, cruel savagery. This was his death coming;
there was disgust, but not dread in the thought for the boy. In a few
minutes he should be fighting hopelessly, fiercely against this froth
of a lower world; in a few minutes after that he should be lying here
still—for he meant to be killed; he had that planned. They should not
take him—a wave of sick repulsion at that thought shook him. Nearer,
nearer, right on his track came the riders pell-mell. He could hear
their weird, horrible cries; now he could see gleaming through the
dimness the huge head-dress of the foremost, the white coronet of
feathers, almost the stripes of paint on the fierce face.

Suddenly a feeling that he knew well caught him, and he laughed. It was
the possession that had held in him in every action which he had so
far been in. It lifted his high-strung spirit into an atmosphere where
there was no dread and no disgust, only a keen rapture in throwing
every atom of soul and body into physical intensity; it was as if he
himself were a bright blade, dashing, cutting, killing, a living sword
rejoicing to destroy. With the coolness that may go with such a frenzy
he felt that his pistols were loose; saw with satisfaction that he
and his new ally were placed on the <DW72> to the best advantage, then
turned swiftly, eager now for the fight to come, toward the Indian
band. As he looked, suddenly in mid-career, pulling in their plunging
ponies with a jerk that threw them, snorting, on their haunches, the
warriors halted. Miles watched in amazement. The bunch of Indians,
not more than a hundred yards away, were staring, arrested, startled,
back of him to his right, where the lower ridge of Massacre Mountain
stretched far and level over the valley that wound westward beneath it
on the road to Fort Rain-and-Thunder. As he gazed, the ponies had swept
about and were galloping back as they had come, across the plain.

Before he knew if it might be true, if he were not dreaming this
curious thing, the clear voice of his companion spoke in one word
again, like the single note of a deep bell. “Look!” he said, and Miles
swung about toward the ridge behind, following the pointing finger.

In the gray dawn the hill-top was clad with the still strength of an
army. Regiment after regiment, silent, motionless, it stretched back
into silver mist, and the mist rolled beyond, above, about it; and
through it he saw, as through rifts in broken gauze, lines interminable
of soldiers, glitter of steel. Miles, looking, knew.

He never remembered how long he stood gazing, earth and time and self
forgotten, at a sight not meant for mortal eyes; but suddenly, with a
stab it came to him, that if the hosts of heaven fought his battle it
was that he might do his duty, might save Captain Thornton and his men;
he turned to speak to the young man who had been with him. There was no
one there. Over the bushes the mountain breeze blew damp and cold; they
rustled softly under its touch; his horse stared at him mildly; away
off at the foot-hills he could see the diminishing dots of the fleeing
Indian ponies; as he wheeled again and looked, the hills that had been
covered with the glory of heavenly armies, lay hushed and empty. And
his friend was gone.

Clatter of steel, jingle of harness, an order ringing out far but
clear—Miles threw up his head sharply and listened. In a second he
was pulling at his horse’s girth, slipping the bit swiftly into its
mouth—in a moment more he was off and away to meet them, as a body of
cavalry swung out of the valley where the ridge had hidden them.

“Captain Thornton’s troop?” the officer repeated carelessly. “Why, yes;
they are here with us. We picked them up yesterday, headed straight for
Black Wolf’s war-path. Mighty lucky we found them. How about you—seen
any Indians, have you?”

Miles answered slowly: “A party of eight were on my trail; they were
riding for Massacre Mountain, where I camped, about an hour—about
half an hour—awhile ago.” He spoke vaguely, rather oddly, the officer
thought. “Something—stopped them about a hundred yards from the
mountain. They turned, and rode away.”

“Ah,” said the officer. “They saw us down the valley.”

“I couldn’t see you,” said Miles.

The officer smiled. “You’re not an Indian, Lieutenant. Besides, they
were out on the plain and had a farther view behind the ridge.” And
Miles answered not a word.

General Miles Morgan, full of years and of honors, has never but twice
told the story of that night of forty years ago. But he believes that
when his time comes, and he goes to join the majority, he will know
again the presence which guarded him through the blackness of it, and
among the angel legions he looks to find an angel, a messenger, who was
his friend.




  MARKHEIM

  BY

  ROBERT LOUIS STEVENSON




In one of the old Greek tragedies, after the actors on the stage have
played their parts and the chorus in the orchestra below has hinted
mysteriously of crime and retribution, the doors of the palace in the
background suddenly fly apart. There stands the criminal queen. She
confesses her crime and explains the reason for it. So sometimes a
story opens the doors of a character’s heart and mind, and invites us
to look within. Such a story is called psychological. Sometimes there
is action, not for action’s sake, but for its revelation of character.
Sometimes nothing happens. “This,” says Bliss Perry, “may be precisely
what most interests us, because we are made to understand what it is
that inhibits action.” In the story of this type we see the moods of
the character; we watch motives appear, encounter other motives, and
retreat or advance. In short, we are allowed to observe the man’s
mental processes until we understand him.

The emotional value of this story may be stated in the words of C. T.
Winchester:

“We may lay it down as a rule that those emotions which are intimately
related to the conduct of life are of higher rank than those which
are not; and that, consequently, the emotions highest of all are
those related to the deciding forces of life the affections, and the
conscience.”




MARKHEIM[25]


“Yes,” said the dealer, “our windfalls are of various kinds. Some
customers are ignorant, and then I touch a dividend on my superior
knowledge. Some are dishonest,” and here he held up the candle, so
that the light fell strongly on his visitor, “and in that case,” he
continued, “I profit by my virtue.”

Markheim had but just entered from the daylight streets, and his eyes
had not yet grown familiar with the mingled shine and darkness in the
shop. At these pointed words, and before the near presence of the
flame, he blinked painfully and looked aside.

The dealer chuckled. “You come to me on Christmas Day,” he resumed,
“when you know that I am alone in my house, put up my shutters, and
make a point of refusing business. Well, you will have to pay for that;
you will have to pay for my loss of time, when I should be balancing
my books; you will have to pay, besides, for a kind of manner that I
remark in you to-day very strongly. I am the essence of discretion,
and ask no awkward questions; but when a customer cannot look me in
the eye, he has to pay for it.” The dealer once more chuckled; and
then, changing to his usual business voice, though still with a note
of irony, “You can give, as usual, a clear account of how you came
into the possession of the object?” he continued. “Still your uncle’s
cabinet? A remarkable collector, sir!”

And the little pale, round-shouldered dealer stood almost on tip-toe,
looking over the top of his gold spectacles, and nodding his head
with every mark of disbelief. Markheim returned his gaze with one of
infinite pity, and a touch of horror.

“This time,” said he, “you are in error. I have not come to sell, but
to buy. I have no curios to dispose of; my uncle’s cabinet is bare to
the wainscot; even were it still intact, I have done well on the Stock
Exchange, and should more likely add to it than otherwise, and my
errand to-day is simplicity itself. I seek a Christmas present for a
lady,” he continued, waxing more fluent as he struck into the speech he
had prepared; “and certainly I owe you every excuse for thus disturbing
you upon so small a matter. But the thing was neglected yesterday; I
must produce my little compliment at dinner; and, as you very well
know, a rich marriage is not a thing to be neglected.”

There followed a pause, during which the dealer seemed to weigh this
statement incredulously. The ticking of many clocks among the curious
lumber of the shop, and the faint rushing of the cabs in a near
thoroughfare, filled up the interval of silence.

“Well, sir,” said the dealer, “be it so. You are an old customer after
all; and if, as you say, you have the chance of a good marriage, far
be it from me to be an obstacle. Here is a nice thing for a lady now,”
he went on, “this hand glass—fifteenth century, warranted; comes from
a good collection, too; but I reserve the name, in the interests of my
customer, who was just like yourself, my dear sir, the nephew and sole
heir of a remarkable collector.”

The dealer, while he thus ran on in his dry and biting voice, had
stooped to take the object from its place; and, as he had done so, a
shock had passed through Markheim, a start both of hand and foot,
a sudden leap of many tumultuous passions to the face. It passed as
swiftly as it came, and left no trace beyond a certain trembling of the
hand that now received the glass.

“A glass,” he said hoarsely, and then paused, and repeated it more
clearly. “A glass? For Christmas? Surely not?”

“And why not?” cried the dealer. “Why not a glass?”

Markheim was looking upon him with an indefinable expression. “You ask
me why not?” he said. “Why, look here—look in it—look at yourself! Do
you like to see it? No! nor I—nor any man.”

The little man had jumped back when Markheim had so suddenly confronted
him with the mirror; but now, perceiving there was nothing worse
on hand, he chuckled. “Your future lady, sir, must be pretty hard
favored,” said he.

“I ask you,” said Markheim, “for a Christmas present, and you give
me this—this damned reminder of years, and sins, and follies—this
hand-conscience! Did you mean it? Had you a thought in your mind? Tell
me. It will be better for you if you do. Come, tell me about yourself.
I hazard a guess now, that you are in secret a very charitable man?”

The dealer looked closely at his companion. It was very odd, Markheim
did not appear to be laughing; there was something in his face like an
eager sparkle of hope, but nothing of mirth.

“What are you driving at?” the dealer asked.

“Not charitable?” returned the other, gloomily. “Not charitable; not
pious; not scrupulous; unloving, unbeloved; a hand to get money, a safe
to keep it. Is that all? Dear God, man, is that all?”

“I will tell you what it is,” began the dealer, with some sharpness,
and then broke off again into a chuckle. “But I see this is a love
match of yours, and you have been drinking the lady’s health.”

“Ah!” cried Markheim, with a strange curiosity. “Ah, have you been in
love? Tell me about that.”

“I,” cried the dealer. “I in love! I never had the time, nor have I the
time to-day for all this nonsense. Will you take the glass?”

“Where is the hurry?” returned Markheim. “It is very pleasant to stand
here talking; and life is so short and insecure that I would not hurry
away from any pleasure—no, not even from so mild a one as this. We
should rather cling, cling to what little we can get, like a man at a
cliff’s edge. Every second is a cliff, if you think upon it—a cliff
a mile high—high enough, if we fall, to dash us out of every feature
of humanity. Hence it is best to talk pleasantly. Let us talk of each
other; why should we wear this mask? Let us be confidential. Who knows,
we might become friends?”

“I have just one word to say to you,” said the dealer. “Either make
your purchase, or walk out of my shop.”

“True, true,” said Markheim. “Enough fooling. To business. Show me
something else.”

The dealer stooped once more, this time to replace the glass upon
the shelf, his thin blond hair falling over his eyes as he did so.
Markheim moved a little nearer, with one hand in the pocket of his
great-coat; he drew himself up and filled his lungs; at the same time
many different emotions were depicted together on his face—terror,
horror, and resolve, fascination and a physical repulsion; and through
a haggard lift of his upper lip, his teeth looked out.

“This, perhaps, may suit,” observed the dealer; and then, as he began
to re-arise, Markheim bounded from behind upon his victim. The long,
skewerlike dagger flashed and fell. The dealer struggled like a hen,
striking his temple on the shelf, and then tumbled on the floor in a
heap.

Time had some score of small voices in that shop, some stately and slow
as was becoming to their great age; others garrulous and hurried. All
these told out the seconds in an intricate chorus of tickings. Then
the passage of a lad’s feet, heavily running on the pavement, broke in
upon these smaller voices and startled Markheim into the consciousness
of his surroundings. He looked about him awfully. The candle stood
on the counter, its flame solemnly wagging in a draught; and by that
inconsiderable movement, the whole room was filled with noiseless
bustle and kept heaving like a sea: the tall shadows nodding, the gross
blots of darkness swelling and dwindling as with respiration, the faces
of the portraits and the china gods changing and wavering like images
in water. The inner door stood ajar, and peered into that leaguer of
shadows with a long slit of daylight like a pointing finger.

From these fear-stricken rovings, Markheim’s eyes returned to the body
of his victim, where it lay both humped and sprawling, incredibly small
and strangely meaner than in life. In these poor, miserly clothes, in
that ungainly attitude, the dealer lay like so much sawdust. Markheim
had feared to see it, and, lo! it was nothing. And yet, as he gazed,
this bundle of old clothes and pool of blood began to find eloquent
voices. There it must lie; there was none to work the cunning hinges or
direct the miracle of locomotion—there it must lie till it was found.
Found! ay, and then? Then would this dead flesh lift up a cry that
would ring over England, and fill the world with the echoes of pursuit.
Ay, dead or not, this was still the enemy. “Time was that when the
brains were out,” he thought; and the first word struck into his mind.
Time, now that the deed was accomplished—time, which had closed for
the victim, had become instant and momentous for the slayer.

The thought was yet in his mind, when, first one and then another, with
every variety of pace and voice—one deep as the bell from a cathedral
turret, another ringing on its treble notes the prelude of a waltz—the
clocks began to strike the hour of three in the afternoon.

The sudden outbreak of so many tongues in that dumb chamber staggered
him. He began to bestir himself, going to and fro with the candle,
beleaguered by moving shadows, and startled to the soul by chance
reflections. In many rich mirrors, some of home designs, some from
Venice or Amsterdam, he saw his face repeated and repeated, as it were
an army of spies; his own eyes met and detected him; and the sound of
his own steps, lightly as they fell, vexed the surrounding quiet. And
still as he continued to fill his pockets, his mind accused him, with
a sickening iteration, of the thousand faults of his design. He should
have chosen a more quiet hour; he should have prepared an alibi; he
should not have used a knife; he should have been more cautious, and
only bound and gagged the dealer, and not killed him; he should have
been more bold, and killed the servant also; he should have done all
things otherwise; poignant regrets, weary, incessant toiling of the
mind to change what was unchangeable, to plan what was now useless, to
be the architect of the irrevocable past. Meanwhile, and behind all
this activity, brute terrors, like the scurrying of rats in a deserted
attic, filled the more remote chambers of his brain with riot; the hand
of the constable would fall heavy on his shoulder, and his nerves would
jerk like a hooked fish; or he beheld, in galloping defile, the dock,
the prison, the gallows, and the black coffin.

Terror of the people in the street sat down before his mind like a
besieging army. It was impossible, he thought, but that some rumor
of the struggle must have reached their ears and set on edge their
curiosity; and now, in all the neighboring houses, he divined them
sitting motionless and with uplifted ear—solitary people, condemned
to spend Christmas dwelling alone on memories of the past, and now
startlingly recalled from that tender exercise; happy family parties,
struck into silence round the table, the mother still with raised
finger: every degree and age and humor, but all, by their own hearts,
prying and hearkening and weaving the rope that was to hang him.
Sometimes it seemed to him he could not move too softly; the clink of
the tall Bohemian goblets rang out loudly like a bell; and alarmed by
the bigness of the ticking, he was tempted to stop the clocks. And
then, again, with a swift transition of his terrors, the very silence
of the place appeared a source of peril, and a thing to strike and
freeze the passer-by; and he would step more boldly, and bustle aloud
among the contents of the shop, and imitate, with elaborate bravado,
the movements of a busy man at ease in his own house.

But he was now so pulled about by different alarms that, while one
portion of his mind was still alert and cunning, another trembled on
the brink of lunacy. One hallucination in particular took a strong
hold on his credulity. The neighbor hearkening with white face beside
his window, the passer-by arrested by a horrible surmise on the
pavement—these could at worst suspect, they could not know; through
the brick walls and shuttered windows only sounds could penetrate. But
here, within the house, was he alone? He knew he was; he had watched
the servant set forth sweethearting, in her poor best, “out for the
day” written in every ribbon and smile. Yes, he was alone, of course;
and yet, in the bulk of empty house above him, he could surely hear
a stir of delicate footing—he was surely conscious, inexplicably
conscious of some presence. Ay, surely; to every room and corner of the
house his imagination followed it; and now it was a faceless thing, and
yet had eyes to see with; and again it was a shadow of himself; and yet
again behold the image of the dead dealer, reinspired with cunning and
hatred.

At times, with a strong effort, he would glance at the open door which
still seemed to repel his eyes. The house was tall, the skylight small
and dirty, the day blind with fog; and the light that filtered down
to the ground story was exceedingly faint, and showed dimly on the
threshold of the shop. And yet, in that strip of doubtful brightness,
did there not hang wavering a shadow?

Suddenly, from the street outside, a very jovial gentleman began to
beat with a staff on the shop-door, accompanying his blows with shouts
and railleries in which the dealer was continually called upon by name.
Markheim, smitten into ice, glanced at the dead man. But no! he lay
quite still; he was fled away far beyond earshot of these blows and
shoutings; he was sunk beneath seas of silence; and his name, which
would once have caught his notice above the howling of a storm, had
become come an empty sound. And presently the jovial gentleman desisted
from his knocking and departed.

Here was a broad hint to hurry what remained to be done, to get forth
from this accusing neighborhood, to plunge into a bath of London
multitudes, and to reach, on the other side of day, that haven of
safety and apparent innocence—his bed. One visitor had come: at any
moment another might follow and be more obstinate. To have done the
deed, and yet not to reap the profit, would be too abhorrent a failure.
The money, that was now Markheim’s concern; and as a means to that, the
keys.

He glanced over his shoulder at the open door, where the shadow was
still lingering and shivering; and with no conscious repugnance of
the mind, yet with a tremor of the belly, he drew near the body of
his victim. The human character had quite departed. Like a suit
half-stuffed with bran, the limbs lay scattered, the trunk doubled,
on the floor; and yet the thing repelled him. Although so dingy and
inconsiderable to the eye, he feared it might have more significance
to the touch. He took the body by the shoulders, and turned it on its
back. It was strangely light and supple, and the limbs, as if they had
been broken, fell into the oddest postures. The face was robbed of all
expression; but it was as pale as wax, and shockingly smeared with
blood about one temple. That was, for Markheim, the one displeasing
circumstance. It carried him back, upon the instant, to a certain day
in a fishers’ village: a gray day, a piping wind, a crowd upon the
street, the blare of brasses, the booming of drums, the nasal voice of
a ballad singer; and a boy going to and fro, buried over head in the
crowd and divided between interest and fear, until, coming out upon
the chief place of concourse, he beheld a booth and a great screen
with pictures, dismally designed, garishly : Brownrigg with
her apprentice; the Mannings with their murdered guest; Weare in the
death-grip of Thurtell; and a score besides of famous crimes. The thing
was as clear as an illusion; he was once again that little boy; he
was looking once again, and with the same sense of physical revolt,
at these vile pictures; he was still stunned by the thumping of the
drums. A bar of that day’s music returned upon his memory; and at that,
for the first time, a qualm came over him, a breath of nausea, a sudden
weakness of the joints, which he must instantly resist and conquer.

He judged it more prudent to confront than to flee from these
considerations; looking the more hardily in the dead face, bending
his mind to realize the nature and greatness of his crime. So little
a while ago that face had moved with every change of sentiment, that
pale mouth had spoken, that body had been all on fire with governable
energies; and now, and by his act, that piece of life had been
arrested, as the horologist, with interjected finger, arrests the
beating of the clock. So he reasoned in vain; he could rise to no more
remorseful consciousness; the same heart which had shuddered before
the painted effigies of crime, looked on its reality unmoved. At best,
he felt a gleam of pity for one who had been endowed in vain with all
those faculties that can make the world a garden of enchantment, one
who had never lived and who was now dead. But of penitence, no, not a
tremor.

With that, shaking himself clear of these considerations, he found the
keys and advanced towards the open door of the shop. Outside, it had
begun to rain smartly; and the sound of the shower upon the roof had
banished silence. Like some dripping cavern, the chambers of the house
were haunted by an incessant echoing, which filled the ear and mingled
with the ticking of the clocks. And, as Markheim approached the door,
he seemed to hear, in answer to his own cautious tread, the steps of
another foot withdrawing up the stair. The shadow still palpitated
loosely on the threshold. He threw a ton’s weight of resolve upon his
muscles, and drew back the door.

The faint, foggy daylight glimmered dimly on the bare floor and stairs;
on the bright suit of armor posted, halbert in hand, upon the landing;
and on the dark wood-carvings, and framed pictures that hung against
the yellow panels of the wainscot. So loud was the beating of the
rain through all the house that, in Markheim’s ears, it began to be
distinguished into many different sounds. Footsteps and sighs, the
tread of regiments marching in the distance, the chink of money in the
counting, and the creaking of doors held stealthily ajar, appeared to
mingle with the patter of the drops upon the cupola and the gushing of
the water in the pipes. The sense that he was not alone grew upon him
to the verge of madness. On every side he was haunted and begirt by
presences. He heard them moving in the upper chambers; from the shop,
he heard the dead man getting to his legs; and as he began with a great
effort to mount the stairs, feet fled quietly before him and followed
stealthily behind. If he were but deaf, he thought, how tranquilly he
would possess his soul! And then again, and hearkening with ever fresh
attention, he blessed himself for that unresting sense which held the
outposts and stood a trusty sentinel upon his life. His head turned
continually on his neck; his eyes, which seemed starting from their
orbits, scouted on every side, and on every side were half-rewarded
as with the tail of something nameless vanishing. The four-and-twenty
steps to the first floor were four-and-twenty agonies.

On that first story, the doors stood ajar, three of them like three
ambushes, shaking his nerves like the throats of cannon. He could
never again, he felt, be sufficiently immured and fortified from men’s
observing eyes; he longed to be home, girt in by walls, buried among
bedclothes, and invisible to all but God. And at that thought he
wondered a little, recollecting tales of other murderers and the fear
they were said to entertain of heavenly avengers. It was not so, at
least, with him. He feared the laws of nature, lest, in their callous
and immutable procedure, they should preserve some damning evidence
of his crime. He feared tenfold more, with a slavish, superstitious
terror, some scission in the continuity of man’s experience, some
wilful illegality of nature. He played a game of skill, depending on
the rules, calculating consequence from cause; and what if nature, as
the defeated tyrant overthrew the chess-board, should break the mould
of their succession? The like had befallen Napoleon (so writers said)
when the winter changed the time of its appearance. The like might
befall Markheim: the solid walls might become transparent and reveal
his doings like those of bees in a glass hive; the stout planks might
yield under his foot like quicksands and detain him in their clutch;
ay, and there were soberer accidents that might destroy him: if, for
instance, the house should fall and imprison him beside the body of
his victim; or the house next door should fly on fire, and the firemen
invade him from all sides. These things he feared; and, in a sense,
these things might be called the hands of God reached forth against
sin. But about God himself he was at ease; his act was doubtless
exceptional, but so were his excuses, which God knew; it was there, and
not among men, that he felt sure of justice.

When he had got safe into the drawing-room, and shut the door behind
him, he was aware of a respite from alarms. The room was quite
dismantled, uncarpeted besides, and strewn with packing-cases and
incongruous furniture; several great pier-glasses, in which he beheld
himself at various angles, like an actor on a stage; many pictures,
framed and unframed, standing, with their faces to the wall; a fine
Sheraton sideboard, a cabinet of marquetry, and a great old bed, with
tapestry hangings. The windows opened to the floor; but by great good
fortune the lower part of the shutters had been closed, and this
concealed him from the neighbors. Here, then, Markheim drew in a
packing-case before the cabinet, and began to search among the keys. It
was a long business, for there were many; and it was irksome, besides;
for, after all, there might be nothing in the cabinet, and time was on
the wing. But the closeness of the occupation sobered him. With the
tail of his eye he saw the door—even glanced at it from time to time
directly, like a besieged commander pleased to verify the good estate
of his defences. But in truth he was at peace. The rain falling in the
street sounded natural and pleasant. Presently, on the other side, the
notes of a piano were wakened to the music of a hymn, and the voices of
many children took up the air and words. How stately, how comfortable
was the melody! How fresh the youthful voices! Markheim gave ear to it
smilingly, as he sorted out the keys; and his mind was thronged with
answerable ideas and images; church-going children and the pealing of
the high organ; children afield, bathers by the brookside, ramblers on
the brambly common, kite-fliers in the windy and cloud-navigated sky;
and then, at another cadence of the hymn, back again to church, and the
somnolence of summer Sundays, and the high genteel voice of the parson
(which he smiled a little to recall) and the painted Jacobean tombs,
and the dim lettering of the Ten Commandments in the chancel.

And as he sat thus, at once busy and absent, he was startled to his
feet. A flash of ice, a flash of fire, a bursting gush of blood, went
over him, and then he stood transfixed and thrilling. A step mounted
the stair slowly and steadily, and presently a hand was laid upon the
knob, and the lock clicked, and the door opened.

Fear held Markheim in a vice. What to expect he knew not, whether the
dead man walking, or the official ministers of human justice, or some
chance witness blindly stumbling in to consign him to the gallows.
But when a face was thrust into the aperture, glanced round the room,
looked at him, nodded and smiled as if in friendly recognition, and
then withdrew again, and the door closed behind it, his fear broke
loose from his control in a hoarse cry. At the sound of this the
visitant returned.

“Did you call me?” he asked, pleasantly, and with that he entered the
room and closed the door behind him.

Markheim stood and gazed at him with all his eyes. Perhaps there was a
film upon his sight, but the outlines of the new-comer seemed to change
and waver like those of the idols in the wavering candle-light of the
shop; and at times he thought he knew him; and at times he thought he
bore a likeness to himself; and always, like a lump of living terror,
there lay in his bosom the conviction that this thing was not of the
earth and not of God.

And yet the creature had a strange air of the commonplace, as he stood
looking on Markheim with a smile; and when he added: “You are looking
for the money, I believe?” it was in the tones of every-day politeness.

Markheim made no answer.

“I should warn you,” resumed the other, “that the maid has left her
sweetheart earlier than usual and will soon be here. If Mr. Markheim be
found in this house, I need not describe to him the consequences.”

“You know me?” cried the murderer.

The visitor smiled. “You have long been a favorite of mine,” he said;
“and I have long observed and often sought to help you.”

“What are you?” cried Markheim: “the devil?”

“What I may be,” returned the other, “cannot affect the service I
propose to render you.”

“It can,” cried Markheim; “it does! Be helped by you? No, never; not by
you! You do not know me yet; thank God, you do not know me!”

“I know you,” replied the visitant, with a sort of kind severity or
rather firmness. “I know you to the soul.”

“Know me!” cried Markheim. “Who can do so? My life is but a travesty
and slander on myself. I have lived to belie my nature. All men do; all
men are better than this disguise that grows about and stifles them.
You see each dragged away by life, like one whom bravos have seized and
muffled in a cloak. If they had their own control—if you could see
their faces, they would be altogether different, they would shine out
for heroes and saints! I am worse than most; my self is more overlaid;
my excuse is known to me and God. But, had I the time, I could disclose
myself.”

“To me?” inquired the visitant.

“To you before all,” returned the murderer. “I supposed you were
intelligent. I thought—since you exist—you would prove a reader of
the heart. And yet you would propose to judge me by my acts! Think of
it; my acts! I was born and I have lived in a land of giants; giants
have dragged me by the wrists since I was born out of my mother—the
giants of circumstance. And you would judge me by my acts! But can
you not look within? Can you not understand that evil is hateful to
me? Can you not see within me the clear writing of conscience, never
blurred by any wilful sophistry, although too often disregarded? Can
you not read me for a thing that surely must be common as humanity—the
unwilling sinner?”

“All this is very feelingly expressed,” was the reply, “but it regards
me not. These points of consistency are beyond my province, and I care
not in the least by what compulsion you may have been dragged away,
so as you are but carried in the right direction. But time flies; the
servant delays, looking in the faces of the crowd and at the pictures
on the hoardings, but still she keeps moving nearer; and remember,
it is as if the gallows itself was striding towards you through the
Christmas streets! Shall I help you; I, who know all? Shall I tell you
where to find the money?”

“For what price?” asked Markheim.

“I offer you the service for a Christmas gift,” returned the other.

Markheim could not refrain from smiling with a kind of bitter triumph.
“No,” said he, “I will take nothing at your hands; if I were dying of
thirst, and it was your hand that put the pitcher to my lips, I should
find the courage to refuse. It may be credulous, but I will do nothing
to commit myself to evil.”

“I have no objection to a death-bed repentance,” observed the visitant.

“Because you disbelieve their efficacy!” Markheim cried.

“I do not say so,” returned the other; “but I look on these things from
a different side, and when the life is done my interest falls. The man
has lived to serve me, to spread black looks under color of religion,
or to sow tares in the wheat-field, as you do, in a course of weak
compliance with desire. Now that he draws so near to his deliverance,
he can add but one act of service—to repent, to die smiling, and thus
to build up in confidence and hope the more timorous of my surviving
followers. I am not so hard a master. Try me. Accept my help. Please
yourself in life as you have done hitherto; please yourself more amply,
spread your elbows at the board; and when the night begins to fall
and the curtains to be drawn, I tell you, for your greater comfort,
that you will find it even easy to compound your quarrel with your
conscience, and to make a truckling peace with God. I came but now from
such a death-bed, and the room was full of sincere mourners, listening
to the man’s last words: and when I looked into that face, which had
been set as a flint against mercy, I found it smiling with hope.”

“And do you, then, suppose me such a creature?” asked Markheim. “Do you
think I have no more generous aspirations than to sin, and sin, and
sin, and, at last, sneak into heaven? My heart rises at the thought.
Is this, then, your experience of mankind? or is it because you find
me with red hands that you presume such baseness? and is this crime of
murder indeed so impious as to dry up the very springs of good?”

“Murder is to me no special category,” replied the other. “All sins
are murder, even as all life is war. I behold your race, like starving
mariners on a raft, plucking crusts out of the hands of famine and
feeding on each other’s lives. I follow sins beyond the moment of their
acting; I find in all that the last consequence is death; and to my
eyes, the pretty maid who thwarts her mother with such taking graces on
a question of a ball, drips no less visibly with human gore than such
a murderer as yourself. Do I say that I follow sins? I follow virtues
also; they differ not by the thickness of a nail, they are both scythes
for the reaping angel of Death. Evil, for which I live, consists not
in action but in character. The bad man is dear to me; not the bad act,
whose fruits, if we could follow them far enough down the hurtling
cataract of the ages, might yet be found more blessed than those of the
rarest virtues. And it is not because you have killed a dealer, but
because you are Markheim, that I offered to forward your escape.”

“I will lay my heart open to you,” answered Markheim. “This crime on
which you find me is my last. On my way to it I have learned many
lessons; itself is a lesson, a momentous lesson. Hitherto I have been
driven with revolt to what I would not; I was a bond-slave to poverty,
driven and scourged. There are robust virtues that can stand in these
temptations; mine was not so: I had a thirst of pleasure. But to-day,
and out of this deed, I pluck both warning and riches—both the power
and a fresh resolve to be myself. I become in all things a free actor
in the world; I begin to see myself all changed, these hands the agents
of good, this heart at peace. Something comes over me out of the past;
something of what I have dreamed on Sabbath evenings to the sound of
the church organ, of what I forecast when I shed tears over noble
books, or talked, an innocent child, with my mother. There lies my
life; I have wandered a few years, but now I see once more my city of
destination.”

“You are to use this money on the Stock Exchange, I think?” remarked
the visitor; “and there, if I mistake not, you have already lost some
thousands?”

“Ah,” said Markheim, “but this time I have a sure thing.”

“This time, again, you will lose,” replied the visitor quietly.

“Ah, but I keep back the half!” cried Markheim.

“That also you will lose,” said the other.

The sweat started upon Markheim’s brow. “Well, then, what matter?” he
exclaimed. “Say it be lost, say I am plunged again in poverty, shall
one part of me, and that the worst, continue until the end to override
the better? Evil and good run strong in me, haling me both ways. I
do not love the one thing, I love all. I can conceive great deeds,
renunciations, martyrdoms; and though I be fallen to such a crime as
murder, pity is no stranger to my thoughts. I pity the poor; who knows
their trials better than myself? I pity and help them; I prize love, I
love honest laughter; there is no good thing nor true thing on earth
but I love it from my heart. And are my vices only to direct my life,
and my virtues to lie without effect, like some passive lumber of the
mind? Not so; good, also, is a spring of acts.”

But the visitant raised his finger. “For six-and-thirty years that you
have been in this world,” said he, “through many changes of fortune and
varieties of humor, I have watched you steadily fall. Fifteen years
ago you would have started at a theft. Three years back you would
have blenched at the name of murder. Is there any crime, is there any
cruelty or meanness, from which you still recoil?—five years from now
I shall detect you in the fact! Downward, downward, lies your way; nor
can anything but death avail to stop you.”

“It is true,” Markheim said huskily, “I have in some degree complied
with evil. But it is so with all: the very saints, in the mere
exercise of living, grow less dainty, and take on the tone of their
surroundings.”

“I will propound to you one simple question,” said the other; “and as
you answer, I shall read to you your moral horoscope. You have grown
in many things more lax; possibly you do right to be so; and at any
account, it is the same with all men. But granting that, are you in
any one particular, however trifling, more difficult to please with
your own conduct, or do you go in all things with a looser rein?”

“In any one?” repeated Markheim, with an anguish of consideration.
“No,” he added, with despair, “in none! I have gone down in all.”

“Then,” said the visitor, “content yourself with what you are, for
you will never change; and the words of your part on this stage are
irrevocably written down.”

Markheim stood for a long while silent, and indeed it was the visitor
who first broke the silence. “That being so,” he said, “shall I show
you the money?”

“And grace?” cried Markheim.

“Have you not tried it?” returned the other. “Two or three years ago,
did I not see you on the platform of revival meetings, and was not your
voice the loudest in the hymn?”

“It is true,” said Markheim; “and I see clearly what remains for me by
way of duty. I thank you for these lessons from my soul; my eyes are
opened, and I behold myself at last for what I am.”

At this moment, the sharp note of the door-bell rang through the house;
and the visitant, as though this were some concerted signal for which
he had been waiting, changed at once in his demeanor.

“The maid!” he cried. “She has returned, as I forewarned you, and there
is now before you one more difficult passage. Her master, you must
say, is ill; you must let her in, with an assured but rather serious
countenance—no smiles, no overacting, and I promise you success! Once
the girl within, and the door closed, the same dexterity that has
already rid you of the dealer will relieve you of this last danger in
your path. Thenceforward you have the whole evening—the whole night,
if needful—to ransack the treasures of the house and to make good your
safety. This is help that comes to you with the mask of danger. Up!” he
cried: “up, friend; your life hangs trembling in the scales: up, and
act!”

Markheim steadily regarded his counsellor. “If I be condemned to evil
acts,” he said, “there is still one door of freedom open—I can cease
from action. If my life be an ill thing, I can lay it down. Though I
be, as you say truly, at the beck of every small temptation, I can yet,
by one decisive gesture, place myself beyond the reach of all. My love
of good is damned to barrenness; it may, and let it be! But I have
still my hatred of evil; and from that, to your galling disappointment,
you shall see that I can draw both energy and courage.”

The features of the visitor began to undergo a wonderful and lovely
change: they brightened and softened with a tender triumph; and, even
as they brightened, faded and dislimned. But Markheim did not pause to
watch or understand the transformation. He opened the door and went
downstairs very slowly, thinking to himself. His past went soberly
before him; he beheld it as it was, ugly and strenuous like a dream,
random as chance-medley—a scene of defeat. Life, as he thus reviewed
it, tempted him no longer; but on the further side he perceived a quiet
haven for his bark. He paused in the passage, and looked into the
shop, where the candle still burned by the dead body. It was strangely
silent. Thoughts of the dealer swarmed into his mind, as he stood
gazing. And then the bell once more broke out into impatient clamor.

He confronted the maid upon the threshold with something like a smile.

“You had better go for the police,” said he: “I have killed your
master.”




                              FOOTNOTES:

[1] G. Stanley Hall, _Adolescence_, vol. II.

[2] _Ibid._

[3] From “The First Christmas Tree,” by Henry Van <DW18>. Copyright,
1897, by Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[4] From “Evening Tales,” by Joel Chandler Harris. Copyright, 1893, by
Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[5] From “Sonny, a Christmas Guest,” by Ruth McEnery Stuart. Copyright,
1896, by The Century Co. Reprinted by special permission.

[6] De Quincey, “Letters to a Young Man.”

[7] From “Christmas Eve on Lonesome,” by John Fox, Jr. Copyright, 1904,
by Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[8] From Volume VI of the Biographical Edition of the Complete Works of
James Whitcomb Riley, copyright, 1913. Used by special permission of
the publishers, the Bobbs-Merrill Company.

[9] From “Under the Deodars,” by Rudyard Kipling. Copyright, 1899, by
Rudyard Kipling. Reprinted by special permission of Doubleday, Page and
Company.

[10] From “The Works of Edgar Allan Poe,” published by Charles
Scribner’s Sons.

[11] From “Whirligigs,” by O. Henry. Copyright, 1910, by Doubleday,
Page & Company. Reprinted by special permission of Doubleday, Page &
Company.

[12] From “College Years,” by Ralph D. Paine. Copyright, 1909, by
Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[13] From “Gallegher and Other Stories,” by Richard Harding Davis.
Copyright, 1891, by Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[14] Pronounced Cal-e-_va_-ras.

[15] From “The Jumping Frog and Other Sketches,” by Mark Twain.
Copyright, 1903, by Harper & Bros.

[16] From “The Lady or the Tiger?” by Frank R. Stockton. Copyright,
1886, by Charles Scribner’s Sons. Copyright, 1914, by Marie Louise and
Frances A. Stockton.

[17] From “The Luck of Roaring Camp,” by Francis Bret Harte. Copyright,
1906, by Houghton Mifflin Company. Reprinted by special arrangement
with Houghton Mifflin Company, the authorized publishers of Bret
Harte’s works.

[18] From “A New England Nun and Other Stories,” by Mary E. Wilkins
Freeman. Copyright, 1891, by Harper & Bros. Reprinted by special
permission.

[19] From “In Ole Virginia,” by Thomas Nelson Page. Copyright, 1887, by
Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[20] From “Old Creole Days,” by George W. Cable. Copyright, 1890, by
Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[21] From “Love in Old Cloathes and Other Stories,” by H. C. Bunner.
Copyright, 1896, by Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[22] From “The Inn of Tranquillity,” by John Galsworthy. Copyright,
1912, by Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[23] From _Scribner’s Magazine_. August, 1914.

[24] From “The Militants,” by Mary R. S. Andrews. Copyright, 1907, by
Charles Scribner’s Sons.

[25] From “The Merry Men and Other Tales and Fables,” by Robert Louis
Stevenson, published by Charles Scribner’s Sons.




                          TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE:

—Obvious print and punctuation errors were corrected.





End of Project Gutenberg's Short Stories for High Schools, by Various

*** 